Home

MegaRAID SAS Software User's Guide

1. Number Type Event Text 0x0074 Warning Redundant path to s broken 0x0075 Information Redundant path to s restored 0x0076 Information Dedicated Hot Spare Drive s no longer useful due to deleted drive group 0x0077 Critical SAS topology error Loop detected 0x0078 Critical SAS topology error Unaddressable device 0x0079 Critical SAS topology error Multiple ports to the same SAS address 0x007a Critical SAS topology error Expander error 0x007b Critical SAS topology error SMP timeout 0x007c Critical SAS topology error Out of route entries 0x007d Critical SAS topology error Index not found 0x007e Critical SAS topology error SMP function failed 0x007f Critical SAS topology error SMP CRC error 0x0080 Critical SAS topology error Multiple subtractive 0x0081 Critical SAS topology error Table to table 0x0082 Critical SAS topology error Multiple paths 0x0083 Fatal Unable to access device s 0x0084 Information Dedicated Hot Spare created on s s 0x0085 Information Dedicated Hot Spare s disabled 0x0086 Critical Dedicated Hot Spare s no longer useful for all drive groups 0x0087 Information Global Hot Spare created on s s 0x0088 Information Global Hot Spare s disabled 0x0089 Critical Global Hot Spare does not cover all drive groups 0x008a Information Created s 0x008b Information Deleted s 0x008c Information Marking LD s inconsistent due to active wri
2. Description Sets BIOS options The following are the settings you can select on a single controller multiple controllers or all controllers Enbl Dsb1 Enables or disables the BIOS status on selected controller s SOE Stops on BIOS errors during POST for selected controller s When set to SOE the BIOS stops in case of a problem with the configuration This gives you the option to enter the configuration utility to resolve the problem This is available only when you enable the BIOS status BE Bypasses BIOS errors during POST This is available only when you enable the BIOS status EnblAutoSelectBootLd DsblAutoSelectBootLd Enable or disable automatic selection of the boot virtual drive Dsply Displays the BIOS status on selected controller s 5 11 Battery Backup You can use the commands in this section to select the settings for BBU related Unit Related Properties options 5 11 1 Display BBU Information Use the command in the following table to display complete information about the BBU for the selected controller s Table 53 Display BBU Information Convention MegaCli AdpBbuCmd aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Displays complete information about the BBU such as status capacity information design information and properties Page 188 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 5 11 2 Display BBU Status Information Ch
3. Save Backup Load Backup OK Cancel Help Figure 185 Mail Server Options 2 Enter a new sender e mail address in the Sender e mail address field or edit the existing sender e mail address 3 Click OK 9 2 6 Authenticating a Server You can use the Alerts Notification Configuration screen to authenticate the SMTP server providing an extra level of security The authentication check box enables the User name and Password fields when selected by default Clearing the check box disables these fields Perform the following steps to enter or edit the address 1 On the Alerts Notification Configuration screen click the Mail Server tab The Mail Server options appears as shown in Figure 185 The authentication check box is selected by default Enter a user name in the User name field Enter the password in the Password field Click OK 9 2 7 Saving Backup Configurations You can save an xml backup file of the entire alert configuration This includes all the settings on the three tabs 1 On the Alerts Notification Configuration screen click the Alert Setting tab Mail Server tab or E mail tab 2 Click Save Backup The drive directory appears LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 301 Chapter 9 Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices Configuring Alert Notifications MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 3 Enter a filename with an xml extension for the backup configuration in
4. LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Appendix B MegaCLI Error Messages Error Messages and Descriptions Table 136 Error Messages and Descriptions Continued Number Event Text Ox3e CC scheduling is disabled Ox3f PD CopyBack operation is in progress 0x40 Selected more than one PD per array 0x41 Microcode update operation failed 0x42 Unable to process command as drive security feature is not enabled 0x43 Controller already has a lock key 0x44 Lock key cannot be backed up 0x45 Lock key backup cannot be verified 0x46 Lock key from backup failed verification 0x47 Rekey operation not allowed unless controller already has a lock key 0x48 Lock key is not valid cannot authenticate 0x49 Lock key from escrow cannot be used Ox4a Lock key backup pass phrase is required Ox4b Secure LD exist Ox4c LD secure operation is not allowed Ox4d Reprovisioning is not allowed Ox4e Drive security type FDE or non FDE is not appropriate for requested operation Ox4f LD encryption type is not supported 0x50 Cannot mix FDE and non FDE drives in same array 0x51 Cannot mix secure and unsecured LD in same array 0x52 Secret key not allowed 0x53 Physical device errors were detected 0x54 Controller has LD cache pinned 0x55 Requested operation is
5. Figure 225 Advanced Settings You can edit the settings by selecting Automatically delete the oldest snapshot option if you want to delete the oldest snapshot Stop taking snapshots option if you want to stop taking snapshots Take a snapshot on every reboot recommended for boot virtual drive option if you want a snapshot on every reboot 2 Click OK The settings are edited 11 2 21 Create View You can create views using the Create View button present in the Manage Snapshots area under the View Details field The view provides the snapshot details of the VD available at that particular time Follow these steps to create views of the snapshots 1 Click Create View button in the Manage Snapshots wizard in as shown in Figure 223 The Create View screen appears as shown in Figure 226 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 343 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software Recovery Advanced Software MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 11 2 22 Viewing Snapshot Details Page 344 Create View fis LSI Specify the capacity to allocate For writes to the view The capacity for writes comes from available capacity on the snapshot repository Snapshot Repository 1 View name os aa view Write capacity 230 661 GB 230 661 GB available Figure 226 Create View 2 3 4 In the View name field enter the view name For example view In the Write capacity fiel
6. 0 0c cece cece cee e ene e eee eee e ene eneenennes 133 Page 4 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Table of Contents 4 9 Expanding a Virtual Drive cece nnn nn ne EEE nnn EEE EE Dede neon EEE dete een en Een eee EEE EE 136 4 10 Using MegaRAID RECOVERY iicciei asian scaee tirar anenaaes saa ehGlinn ces ea EE abe deaKebad eae Wanllaeeca oes elem AG sea eee 137 410 1 RECOVERY Scenario Serran incense clase pet emane s ee ie da Meanie end TE E AEE Raledaes Maas Mame ace ateh 138 4 10 2 Enabling the Recovery Advanced Software 0 cece eee e eee nen ene n ene e eden ene ete n ene eneenennes 138 4 10 3 Creating Snapshots and Views 0 cece ccc cece ne ene ene eee nen e eee need eee e eden eee e eee e ene eneenennes 141 4 10 4 Creating Concurrent Snapshots 06 ccc cece cence rene ene en eee ene eee eee seen ene teense eneeneenes 145 4 10 5 Selecting the Snapshot Settings cc cece cece nee eee eee nE ETERNE EEES ede eben eee ee eee TE ai 146 4 10 6 Viewing Snapshot Properties 0 cece ccc cece nee e ee nen eee eee needed eee n tebe e ents been eenes 148 4 10 7 Restoring a Virtual Drive by Rolling Back to a Snapshot 0 cc cece cece eee eee tence eee e ee eneeneeneenee 150 4 10 8 Cleaning up a Snapshot Repository 0 cece cece cece nee nee n een een need eee n ete e eee e ene eneeneenes 152 4 11 Viewing System Event Informatio
7. This solution provides data protection in the event of theft or loss of physical drives With self encrypting disks if you remove a drive from its storage system or the server it is housed in the data on that drive is encrypted and useless to anyone who attempts to access without the appropriate security authorization Any encryption solution requires management of the encryption keys This feature provides a way to manage these keys You can change the encryption key for all ServeRAID controllers that are connected to SED drives All SED drives whether locked or unlocked always have an encryption key This key is set by the drive and is always active When the drive is unlocked the data to host from the drive on reads and from the host to the drive cache on writes is always provided However when resting on the drive platters the data is always encrypted by the drive In the following options E0 S0 E1 S1 specifies the enclosure ID and slot ID for the drive See Chapter 3 SafeStore Disk Encryption for more information about the SED feature Use the command in the following table to perform an Instant Secure Erase of dataona physical drive The Instant Secure Erase feature lets you erase data on SED drives Table 28 Use Instant Secure Erase on a Physical Drive Convention MegaCli PDInstantSecureErase PhysDrv E0 S0 E1 S1 Force aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Erases the data on a specified driv
8. In the hosts file of the machine on which MSM is installed add an entry to map its own IP address not the loop back address with the Hostname This is to ensure that the Asynchronous Event Notifications AENs are delivered correctly m It takes a while to discover the CIMOM servers If you start the MSM client immediately after you install MSM or restart Framework service you will not be able to discover any hosts in the network This is supported only on a full installation of MSM standalone client only and server only modes do not support VMWare ESX3i management Supported on the following operating systems Windows RHEL and SLES 10 The following descriptions summarize the status of components related to VMWare ESX3i MSM client GUI is supported There is no support for Monitor Configurator you cannot configure the severity of the AENs There is no pop up service support There is no e mail and system log support Monitor service support is not available This section describes the installation and configuration of the LSI MegaRAID Common Information Model CIM provider The Common Information Model offers common definitions of management information for networks applications and services and allows you to exchange management information across systems throughout a network On a VMWare ESX3i system management is possible only through a CIM provider and it is performed through MSM installed
9. LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 5 8 4 Flush Controller Cache 5 8 5 Set Controller Properties LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Controller Property Related Options Use the command in the following table to flush the controller cache on the selected controller s This option sends the contents of cache memory to the virtual drive s If the MegaRAID system must be powered down rapidly you must flush the contents of the cache memory to preserve data integrity Table 40 Cache Flush on Selected Controller Convention MegaCli AdpCacheFlush aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Flushes the controller cache on the selected controller s This command sets the properties on the selected controller s For example for RebuildRate val you can enter a percentage between 0 percent and 100 percent as the value for the rebuild rate The rebuild rate is the percentage of the compute cycles dedicated to rebuilding failed drives At 0 percent the rebuild is done only if the system is not doing anything else At 100 percent the rebuild has a higher priority than any other system activity NOTE LSI recommends the default rebuild rate of 30 percent and the default patrol read rate of 30 percent Use the command in Table 41 to display the list of properties you can set for the controller s Page 183 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Comman
10. Yes Select Yes if you do not want to allow background initializations for configurations on this controller Select Size Specify the size of the virtual drive s in megabytes Normally this would be the full size for RAID 1 shown in the Configuration panel on the right You can specify a smaller size if you want to create other virtual drives on the same drive group 8 Click Accept to accept the changes to the virtual drive definition If you need to undo the changes click Reclaim 10 Click Next after you finish defining the virtual drives The Configuration Preview screen appears as shown in Figure 37 Page 75 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Creating a Storage Configuration MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 4 5 3 3 Using Manual Configuration RAID 5 Page 76 negaRAID BIOS Config Utility Physical Configuration Slot 2 SAS HDD 67 843 GB Unconfigured Good i Slot 3 SAS HDD 136 218 GB Unconfigured Good 3 Slot 4 SAS HDD 136 218 GB Unconfigured Good ea Slot 5 SAS HDD 136 216 GB Unconfigured Good i Slot 7 SAS HDD 418 656 GB Unconfigured Good i Slot 8 SAS HDD 416 656 GB Unconfigured Good g slot 9 SAS HDD 67 543 GB Uncontigured Good Figure 37 RAID 1 Configuration Preview 11 Check the information in the configuration preview 12 If the virtual drive configuration is acceptable click Accept to save the configuration Otherwise click Back to return to the previous scr
11. a Discover the files are missing or deleted b Review the Snapshot views of the file content also known as mounting af snapshot from each PiT until you find the missing file A Snapshot view contains the content from the Point in Time at which the snapshot was made c Drag and drop the missing file from Snapshot view back into the online storage volume that was the source of the Snapshot 2 If there are corrupt operating system files in a volume roll back the volume to a previous state a Reboot the system and run WebBlOS b Select the most recent snapshot that does not contain the corrupted or malicious file to roll back to Select the most recent PiT snapshot to roll back to c Reboot the system The system automatically rolls back to its previous state based on the selected PiT snapshot 3 Reduce the risk of extended downtime during application updates upgrades in the IT center a When the application is offline take a snapshot of the application volume b Install each patch individually and test for any new defects that might have been introduced c Take a snapshot after you test each patch and determine that it is clean d Ifa defect is introduced roll back to the previous installation and bypass the installation of the defective patch NOTE If the volume is still damaged continue to select from the next most current PiT snapshot to the oldest You can enable the Recovery advanced software in WebBlOS After
12. f PortCount Drive Security Method Hostinterface PCIE NURAMSize Firmware Version eLOUUS 1 Memory Size FW Package Version 14140 0019 Min Strip Size Firmware Time 14 59 Max Strip Size WebBIOS Version OU co Rel Virtual Drive Count Drive Count 11 MegaRAID Recovery Hot Spare Spin Down nablec Unconfig Good Spin Down Drive Standby Time 30 minute Power Save Mode for Config Drives Figure 85 Virtual Drive Screen The Properties panel of this screen displays the virtual drive s RAID level state capacity strip size The Policies panel lists the virtual drive policies that were defined when the storage configuration was created For information about these policies see Section 4 5 3 Using Manual Configuration To change any of these policies make a selection from the drop down menu and click Change The Operations panel lists operations that can be performed on the virtual drive To perform an operation select it and click Go Choose from the following options Select Delete to delete this virtual drive For more information see Section 4 12 2 Deleting a Virtual Drive m Select Locate to make the LEDs flash on the drives used by this virtual drive This works only if the drives are installed in a drive enclosure that supports SAFTE SCSI Accessed Fault Tolerant Enclosure Select Fast Init or Slow Init to initialize this virtual drive A fast initialization quickly writes zeroes to the first and last 10 MB regions of th
13. 4 4 2 Reusing the Activation Key 06 c cece cnc ee ne enn nen n ened ened ene ened eee dete eens eee n eben e es 59 4 4 3 Managing Advanced Software SUMMALY 6 cee e cence ene ene ened ene eee ede b eden ete e teen ene teed 60 44 4 Activating an Unlimited Key Over a Trial Key 0 cece cece cece nent ene e tne n eee teen tense eeneneeneed 61 4 4 5 Activating a Trial Software 2 0 0 ccc cc e KEER eE EEREN EERIE EELER KA EOE EET N EEG 61 4 4 6 Activating an Unlimited Key sciccs cous ekaaccadacays seesacec tages SERRER TERENE ASE EEEREN ASEE O PEDERE ESRUS 62 4 4 7 Securing MegaRAID Advanced Software ssssssssssrsesserserrsereerrrrrererrrrrssrrrrsserrrrerrrrrerrrrr t 62 44 8 C nfirm Rehosting Proces Seeerei ennn EARE ENRAIAR NEEE NENEA 62 4 4 9 Rehosting Process Complete cece cece cece aE EEEE E A EE R E TEA 63 4 5 Creating a Storage Configuration siii cerccresr tarii rten nS naa have ENEE N neds aa NE ETE nad EE E E ETE E aA 64 4 5 1 Selecting the Configuration with the Configuration Wizard 0 cece cece c eee e nen ene cnet e cence een eneeeeed 64 45 2 Using Automatic Configuration i253 cccase coed ceed eae aceeena ede ad Seen ec ETETA EEA Or EEEN EENE ANA 67 4 5 3 Using Manual Configuration semeri sriid enee vad seats hated ibaa eeg Meee Gua cna meee ages nea EE AETA 68 4 6 Creating a CacheCade Configuration 5 scieesss adds ee bens i Setarea NEEE EEEE E ding ainda ESNEA ENEE Dae pad
14. Advanced Choose additional settings and customize virtual drive creation This option provides greater flexibility when creating virtual drives for your specific requirements Figure 147 Virtual Drive Advanced Configuration Mode 2 Click Advanced and then click Next The Create Drive Group Settings screen appears as shown in Figure 148 Ez Create Drive Group Drive Group Settings LS Create the drive group by specifying the RAID level and Drive security method RAID level Rao x Suitable for high performance with zero data redundancy Choose this option only for non critical data Select Drive security will make the virtual drive secure by applying encryption logic to underlying data in the drive power save mode z This option ensures that the system wil save maximum power by caching data and avoid spinning up online drives when possible Drive 9 LSI MegaRAID SAS 9280DE Se Bus 2 Dev 0 prive coud os o Backplane 252 Slot 7 SAS 136 73 Aad gt 2 Backplane 252 Slot 6 SATA 931 51 cel ek ue te Figure 148 Create Drive Group Settings Screen 3 Select the following items on the Create Drive Group Settings screen a Select the RAID level desired for the drive group from the drop down menu To make a spanned drive select RAID 10 RAID 50 or RAID 60 in the RAID level field Page 269 Chapter 8 Configuration Creating a New Storage Configuration MegaRAID SAS
15. Click Next or Prev to page forward or backward through the sequence of events If you want select different event criteria in the left panel and click Go again to view a different sequence of events Each event entry includes a timestamp and a description to help you determine when the event occurred and what it was LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 155 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Managing Configurations MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 4 12 Managing Configurations 4 12 1 Running a Consistency Check 4 12 2 Deleting a Virtual Drive 4 12 3 Importing or Clearing a Foreign Configuration Page 156 This section includes information about maintaining and managing storage configurations You should periodically run a consistency check on fault tolerant virtual drives A consistency check verifies that the redundancy data is correct and available for RAID 1 RAID 5 RAID 6 RAID 10 RAID 50 and RAID 60 drive groups To do this follow these steps 1 On the main WebBlOS CU screen select a virtual drive 2 Click Virtual Drives 3 When the Virtual Drive screen appears select CC in the lower left panel and click Go The consistency check begins If the WebBIOS CU finds a difference between the data and the parity value on the redundant drive group it assumes that the data is accurate and automatically corrects the parity value Be sure to back up the data before running a consist
16. Click Virtual Drive gt Set Virtual Drive Properties on the menu bar as shown in Figure 237 Page 353 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software LSI SafeStore Encryption Services 11 5 LSI SafeStore Encryption Services Page 354 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide MegaRAID Storage Manager 6 90 0100 Manage Go To Log Tools Help e Controller z Drive Group gt Physical Drive gt Rename Virtual Drive Virtual Drive gt BBU gt Delete Virtual Drive Set Virtual D Enable MegaRAID Recovery Dashboard Physical Logica Ug WIN 36455IFT3x5 LSI MegaRAID SAS 92 Start Locating Virtual Drive Stop Locating Virtual Drive Start Initialization Drive Group 0 R Generat E Virtual Drive s Bvirtual Drive 1 RB_Source 136 469 RAID Level 0 fg Drives Enclosure Bobcat 16 Slot 0 SAS 1 Name RB_Source Drive Group 1 RAID 0 Virtual Drive s Size 136 469 GB Virtual Drive 3 Rep_VD 136 469 GB 3 8 Drives Stripe Size 64 KB Enclosure Bobcat 16 Slot 4 SAS 1 Figure 237 Set Virtual Drive Properties Menu The Set Virtual Drive Properties screen appears It shows the default settings for the FastPath advanced software The default settings are Write Policy Write Thru 10 Policy Direct IO Read Policy No Read Ahead Dish Cache Policy Enabled 4 Click OK A confirmation scr
17. Full Initialization A complete initialization is done on the new configuration You cannot write data to the new virtual drive until the initialization is complete This can take a long time if the drives are large LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 261 Chapter 8 Configuration Creating a New Storage Configuration MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide NOTE BGI is supported only for RAID 5 and RAID 6 and not for any other RAID levels New RAID 5 virtual drives require at least five drives for a background initialization to start New RAID 6 virtual drives require at least seven drives for a background initialization to start If there are fewer drives the background initialization does not start Stripe size Stripe sizes of 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 and 1024 KB are supported The default is 64 KB For more information see the striping entry in the Glossary m Read policy Specify the read policy for this virtual drive Always read ahead Read ahead capability allows the controller to read sequentially ahead of requested data and to store the additional data in cache memory anticipating that the data will be needed soon This speeds up reads for sequential data but there is little improvement when accessing random data Noread ahead the default Disables the read ahead capability Write policy Specify the write policy for this virtual drive Write Through In this mode the controller sends a data tra
18. If you have multiple security keys the identifier will help you determine which security key to enter Security Key The security key will be used to lock each self encrypted drive attached to the controller Suggest Security Key Security key For maximum security use thirty two varied characters you may optionally choose for the system to suggest a strong security key Confirm Note The security key is case sensitive and must be between eight and thirty two characters and contain at least one number one lowercase letter one uppercase letter and one non alphanumeric character e g gt Password JV Pause for password at boot time Optionally you may enter a pass word to provide additional security IF you choose Pause For password at boot time you must enter it whenever you boot your server J Enforce strong password security Password Note The password is case sensitive and must be between eight and thirty two characters Confirm If enforce strong password security is selected then password field should contain at least one number one lower case letter one uppercase letter and one non alphanumeric character e g gt Be sure to record this information You may be prompted to enter the security key if you perform certain operations IF you forgot the security key you could lose access to your data Are you sure you want to enable the drive security Figure 252 Enable Drive Security Security Key Iden
19. MegaRAID CacheCade SSD Caching improves application performance by expanding the MegaRAID read caching capacity The CacheCade SSD Caching feature uses high performing CacheCade SSD Caching software as a secondary tier of cache to provide faster reads and to maximize transactional I O performance Using CacheCade SSD Caching software as controller cache allows for very large data sets to be present in cache delivering performance up to 50 times greater than regular cache in read intensive applications such as online transaction processing OLTP and file and Web server workloads The solution is designed to accelerate the IO performance of HDD based drive groups while only requiring a small investment in CacheCade SSD Caching software technology To support full throughput for multiple direct attached CacheCade SSD Caching software this feature reduces lO processing overhead in the SAS 6Gb s MegaRAID controllers CacheCade SSD Caching offers performance equivalent to flash based controllers and better performance for RAID 5 and RAID 6 when compared to Fusion 1 0 Page 177 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool 5 5 1 Cache Drive to Use as Secondary Cache Create a Solid State Drive Software License Key 5 5 2 Delete a Solid State Drive Cache Drive 5 6 Software License Key Page 178 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Use the command in the following table to create a cache drive using CacheCade software You can
20. September 2010 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Drive Related Options Use the command in the following table to locate the drive s for the selected controller s and activate the drive activity LED Table 93 Locate Drive and Activate LED Convention MegaCli PDLocate PhysDrv E0 S0 E1 S1 aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Locates the drive s for the selected controller s and activates the drive activity LED Physdrv E0 S0 Specifies the physical drive enclosure and the slots for the drives Use the command in the following table to mark the configured drive as missing for the selected controller s Table 94 Mark Configured Drive as Missing Convention MegaCli PDMarkMissing PhysDrv E0 S0 E1 S1 aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Marks the offline drive as missing for the selected controller s Physdrv E0 S0 Specifies the physical drive enclosure and the slots for the drives NOTE PdMarkMissing works only on offline drives If you want to make a configured drive as missing first mark it as offline then mark it as missing When PdReplaceMissing is run the drive becomes offline and Rebuild does not start automatocally One has to start it explicitly Follow these steps to replace the PD or retrieve the PD 1 pdgetmissing This command reports the array and the row number needed for the next command pdreplacemissing Input the array and row number here p
21. The Virtual drive settings window appears as shown in Figure 151 The drive group and the default virtual drive settings appear The options to update the virtual drive or remove the virtual drive are grayed out until you create the virtual drive NOTE The parameters in the Virtual drive settings window display in disabled mode grayed out for SAS Integrated RAID IR controllers because these parameters do not apply to SAS IR controllers LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 271 Chapter 8 Configuration Creating a New Storage Configuration MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Create irtual Drive irtual drive settings Specify parameters for the new virtual drive Drive groups Virtual drive name VvD_O Capacity 544 875 Units E z Initialization state No Initialization gt Stripe size eske gt Read policy Always Read Ahead gt Write policy Write Back with BBU gt IJO policy Directo gt Access policy Read Write v Disk cache policy Disabled X Remoye Virtual Drive Cancel Back Next Help Update Virtual Drive Figure 151 Virtual Drive Settings Window NOTE If you select Write Back with BBU as the Write policy and there is no battery or the battery is low or failed or the battery is running through a re learn cycle the Write policy switches to Write Through This eliminates the risk of data loss in case of power failure A message screen notifies you o
22. l LSISSK MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 80 00156 01 Rev J September 2010 Revision History Version and Date Description of Changes 80 00156 01 Rev J September Added Managing Software Licensing on page 56 in the WebBlOS section 2010 Added EKM and LKM on page 111 in the WebBIOS section Added Import Foreign Drives in EKM EKM Secured Locked Drives on page 160 Added Enabling the Snapshot Scheduler on page 217 in the WebBIOS section Added WebBIOS Dimmer Switch on page 164 in the WebBlOS section Added SafeStore Security Options on page 179 details in MegaCLI section Added section Enabling the Snapshot Scheduler on page 217 in the MSM section Added MegaRAID Software Licensing on page 321 in the MSM section Added Enabling Drive Security using EKM on page 355 in the MSM section Added Enhanced Dimmer Switch Power Settings on page 279 in the MSM section Added Software Licensing EKM and LKM Dimmer Switch Software Licensing and other sections in the Chapter 5 80 00156 01 Rev June 2010 Updated the document with changes to the software utilities Added Chapter 11 for the MegaRAID Advanced Software features 80 00156 01 Rev H July 2009 Documented the Full Disk Encryption FDE feature 80 00156 01 Rev G June 2009 Updated the MegaRAID Storage Manager chapters 80 00156 01 Rev F March 2009 Updated the WebBlOS Configuration Utility MegaRAID Storage Manager and MegaCLI chapters 80 0
23. 0x0135 Information Drive security key backed up 0x0136 Information Drive security key from escrow verified 0x0137 Information Drive security key changed 0x0138 Warning Drive security key re key operation failed 0x0139 Warning Drive security key is invalid 0x013a Information Drive security key destroyed 0x013b Warning Drive security key from escrow is invalid 0x013c Information VD s is now secured 0x013d Warning VD s is partially secured 0x013e Information PD s security activated 0x013f Information PD s security disabled 0x0140 Information PD s is reprovisioned 0x0141 Information PD s security key changed 0x0142 Fatal Security subsystem problems detected for PD s LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Appendix A Events and Messages Event Messages Table 135 Event Messages Continued Number Type Event Text 0x0143 Fatal Controller cache pinned for missing or offline VD s 0x0144 Fatal Controller cache pinned for missing or offline VDs s 0x0145 Information Controller cache discarded by user for VDs s 0x0146 Information Controller cache destaged for VD s 0x0147 Warning Consistency Check started on an inconsistent VD s 0x0148 Warning Drive security key failure cannot access secured configuration 0x0149 Warning
24. Description Sets Patrol Read options on a single controller multiple controllers or all controllers Dsb1 Disables Patrol Read for the selected controller s Enb1Auto Enables Patrol Read automatically for the selected controller s This means Patrol Read will start automatically after the controller initialization is complete Enb1Man Enables Patrol Read manually for the selected controller s This means that Patrol Read does not start automatically it has to be started manually by selecting the Start command Start Starts Patrol Read for the selected controller s St op Stops Patrol Read for the selected controller s In fo Displays the following Patrol Read information for the selected controller s e Patrol Read operation mode Patrol Read execution delay value e Patrol Read status SetStartTime yyyymmdd hh Set the start time for the patrol read in year month day format maxConcurrentPD Sets the maximum number of concurrent drives that patrol read runs on 5 9 2 Set Patrol Read Delay Interval Use the command in the following table on the selected controller s to set the time between Patrol Read iterations Table 50 Set Patrol Read Delay Interval Convention MegaCli AdpPRSetDelay Val aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Sets the time between Patrol Read iterations on a single controller multiple controllers or all controllers Val Sets delay time between Patrol Read iterations The value
25. Enclosure Update Controller Firmware E E Super Sized Cach Drive Group 55c0 5 SSCD_5 29 281 GB Optimal amp Drives gt Enclosure Bobcat 16 Slot 8 SSD Device Port Count E m Host Interface F Figure 155 Set Adjustable Task Rates Menu The Set Adjustable Task Rates screen appears as shown in Figure 156 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 8 5 Changing Power Settings LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 8 Configuration Changing Power Settings Set Adjustable Task Rates x LSI K ey Description User configurable task rate priorities For controller Rebuild Rate 30 Patrol Rate 30 BGI Rate 30 J dul d Check Consistency Rate 30 Reconstruction Rate 30 Ok Cancel Figure 156 Set Adjustable Task Rates Menu 3 Enter changes as needed to the following task rates Rebuild Rate Patrol Read Background Initialization BGI for fast initialization Check Consistency for consistency checks Reconstruction Each task rate can be set from 0 to 100 percent The higher the number the faster the activity runs in the background possibly impacting other system tasks Click OK to accept the new task rates 5 When the warning message appears click OK to confirm that you want to change the task rates The RAID controller includes Dimmer Switch technology that conserves e
26. MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 2 5 6 RAID 6 Segment 1 Segment 7 Segment 13 Segment 19 Segment 25 Parity 26 30 Chapter 2 Introduction to RAID RAID Levels Segment 2 Segment 3 Segment 4 Segment 5 Parity 1 5 Segment 8 Segment 9 Segment 10 Parity 6 10 Segment 6 Segment 14 Segment 15 Parity 11 15 Segment 11 Segment 12 Segment 20 Parity 16 20 Segment 16 Segment 17 Segment 18 Parity 21 25 Segment 21 Segment 22 Segment 23 Segment 24 Segment 26 Segment 27 Segment 28 Segment 29 Segment 30 Note Parity is distributed across all drives in the drive group LSI Corporation Confidential Figure 9 RAID 5 Drive Group with Six Drives RAID 6 is similar to RAID 5 disk striping and parity except that instead of one parity block per stripe there are two With two independent parity blocks RAID 6 can survive the loss of two drives in a virtual drive without losing data Provides a high level of data protection through the use of a second parity block in each stripe Use RAID 6 for data that requires a very high level of protection from loss In the case of a failure of one drive or two drives in a virtual drive the RAID controller uses the parity blocks to recreate all of the missing information If two drives in a RAID 6 virtual drive fail two drive rebuilds are required one for each drive These rebuilds do not occur at the same time The controller rebuilds one failed drive and then the other failed drive Table 1
27. MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 6 MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation MegaRAID Storage Man ager Support and Installation on VMWare Which one of the two possibilities to choose depends on your application It is recommended to choose between both possibilities at a early stage because the creation of a new Vswitch with VMkernel requires a reboot to make sure a proper communication between the CIM provider and the new interface For those who want to reach the target as quickly as possible no change is recommended Configuration of the IP address Configure the IP address The address must be accessible by the VM that will be installed next 2 VM Installation Install the operating system as usual including the VMWare guest tools The virtual network card should be linked to a Vswitch that has a VMKernel port attached Fora quick installation no change is recommended 3 VM Network Configuration Case 1 Your network contains a DNS server Configure a host entry that belongs to your internal zone and make sure that the FQDN of the ESXi server can be resolved Example local lsi com and 192 19 221 186 Case 2 Your network does not have a DNS server Edit your file C windows system32 drivers etc hosts and add another entry IP of the ESXi Host FQDN of the ESXi Host 192 19 221 186 local lsi com 4 Final Steps Reboot the VM and start MSM from a remote Windows Linux machine that has MSM
28. Right click the controller node in the device tree in the left frame of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window and select Create Virtual Drive b Select the controller node and select Go To gt Controller gt Create Virtual Drive in the menu bar as shown in Figure 141 Page 263 Chapter 8 Configuration Creating a New Storage Configuration MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide MegaRAID Storage Manager 6 90 0100 Manage Go To Log Tools Help ie Controller Drive Group gt Create Virtual Drive Disable Alarm Physical Drive Silence Alarm Virtual Drive gt Start Patrol Read BBU gt Set Patrol Read Properties Enable 55D Guard Dashboard Physical Logice Scan Foreign Configuration w WIN J6ASSIFT3N5 Load Configuration egaRAID S85 9 Save Configuration II Backplane 252 Clear Configuration 5j ap Bobcat 16 Conr Set Consistency Check Properties pH Slot 0 SAS Schedule Consistency Check uct Name AP Slot 1 SAS P Slot 2 sas Set Adjustable Task Rates Slot 3 SAS Preserved Cache Slot 4 SAS s Power Settings 2G Slot 8 55D Slot 9 SAS Enable Drive Security endor ID 9 SAS i Slot 10 545 Update Controller Firmware iD i Slot 11 SAS 3 Onine Ice i Slot 12 SAS 136 733 GB Online Geils PACON Hg Slot 13 SAS 136 985 GB Online Figure 141 Virtual Drive Creation Menu The dialog box for the configuration mode sim
29. Select the Storelib Inbox Storelib or Storelib from MSM package Page 235 Chapter 6 MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation MegaRAID Storage Man MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide ager Support and Installation on VMWare 6 5 2 Uninstalling MegaRAID Storage Manager for VMWare 6 5 3 MegaRAID Storage Manager Support on the VMWare ESXi Operating System Page 236 To uninstall the Server Component of MSM on VMWare use the Uninstall command in the Program menu or run the script usr local MegaRAID Storage Manager uninstaller sh Note the following points AMSM upgrade is supported in this release This release can be upgraded by future releases To shut down the MSM Framework service run the following command etc init d vivaldiframeworkd stop It is recommended that you stop the Monitor service before you stop the MSM Framework service To stop the Monitor service run the following command etc init d mrmonitor stop This section outlines the product requirements needed to support the VMWare ESX operating system Classic VMWare includes a Service Console that is derived from the Linux 2 4 kernel but with reduced functionality The MSM server part cannot be installed directly in VMWare ESX 3i Management is possible only through Common Information Model CIM providers These CIM providers integrated into the ESX 3i system build an interface between the hardware driver of the LSI MegaRAID controller a
30. Stop Consistency Check on Error Continue Consistency Check and Fix Errors Ok Cancel Figure 196 Set Consistency Check Properties Dialog Box 3 Choose one of the two options Page 315 Chapter 10 Maintaining and Managing Storage Configurations Running a Consistency Check MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Stop Consistency Check on Error The RAID controller stops the consistency check operation if the utility finds an error Continue Consistency Check and Fix Errors The RAID controller continues the consistency check if the utility finds and error and then fixes the errors 4 Click Ok 10 2 2 Scheduling a Consistency Follow these steps to set the properties for a consistency check Check 1 Click the Physical tab or Logical tab and select the controller 2 Click Go To gt Controller gt Schedule Consistency Check The Schedule Consistency dialog box appears as shown in Figure 196 Schedule Consistency Check x LSI ey Description Establish schedule For consistency check operation Run consistency check weekly Y Advanced I Run consistency check continuously Start on March v 20 v z010 v Start time 03 00 AM v Figure 197 Schedule Consistency Check Dialog Box 3 Perform the following steps to schedule the consistency check a Select how often to run the consistency check from the drop down menu You can click Advanced for more d
31. enter the new password To keep the existing password enter the current password If you choose this option you must enter the password whenever you boot your server This procedure updates the existing configuration on the controller to use the new security settings You can create a secure virtual drive and set their parameters as desired To create a secure virtual drive select a configuration method You can select either simple configuration or advanced configuration Page 49 Chapter 3 SafeStore Disk Encryption Instant Secure Erase 3 4 3 1 Simple Configuration 3 4 3 2 Advanced Configuration 3 4 4 Import a Foreign Configuration 3 5 Page 50 Instant Secure Erase MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide If you select simple configuration select the redundancy type and drive security method to use for the drive group See Section 8 1 4 Creating a Virtual Drive Using Simple Configuration for the procedures used to select the redundancy type and drive security method for a configuration If you select advanced configuration select the drive security method and add the drives to the drive group See Section 8 1 5 Creating a Virtual Drive Using Advanced Configuration for the procedures used to import a foreign configuration After the drive group is secured you cannot remove the security without deleting the virtual drives After you create a security key you can run a scan for a foreign configuration and
32. gt Write Policy Write Through gt IO Policy Direct 10 v Access Policy Read write Disk Cache Policy Unchanged X Figure 167 Set Virtual Drive Properties Screen 3 Change the virtual drive properties as needed Page 284 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 8 7 Changing a Virtual Drive Configuration 8 7 1 Accessing the Modify Drive Group Wizard LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 8 Configuration Changing a Virtual Drive Configuration For information about these properties see Section 8 1 1 Selecting Virtual Drive Settings 4 Click Ok to accept the changes The virtual drive settings are updated You can use the Modify Drive Group Wizard in MSM to change the configuration of a virtual drive by adding drives to the virtual drive removing drives from it or changing its RAID level CAUTION Be sure to back up the data on the virtual drive before you change its configuration NOTE You cannot change the configuration of a RAID 10 or RAID 50 or RAID 60 virtual drive You cannot change a RAID 0 RAID 1 RAID 5 or RAID 6 configuration if two or more virtual drives are defined on a single drive group The Logical view tab shows which drive groups and drives are used by each virtual drive NOTE The Modify Drive Group Wizard was previously known as the Reconstruction Wizard Perform the following steps to access the Modify Dr
33. s is now PARTIALLY DEGRADED 0x00fb Critical VD s is now DEGRADED Ox00fc Fatal VD s is now OFFLINE Ox00fd Warning Battery requires reconditioning please initiate a LEARN cycle Ox00fe Warning VD s disabled because RAID 5 is not supported by this RAID key OxOOff Warning VD s disabled because RAID 6 is not supported by this controller LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Appendix A Events and Messages Event Messages Table 135 Event Messages Continued Number Type Event Text 0x0100 Warning VD s disabled because SAS drives are not supported by this RAID key 0x0101 Warning PD missing s 0x0102 Warning Puncturing of LBAs enabled 0x0103 Warning Puncturing of LBAs disabled 0x0104 Critical Enclosure s EMM d not installed 0x0105 Information Package version s 0x0106 Warning Global affinity Hot Spare s commissioned in a different enclosure 0x0107 Warning Foreign configuration table overflow 0x0108 Warning Partial foreign configuration imported PDs not imported s 0x0109 Information Connector s is active 0x010a Information Board Revision s 0x010b Warning Command timeout on PD s CDB s 0x010c Warning PD s reset Type 02x 0x010d Warning VD bad block table on s is 80 full 0x010e Fatal VD bad block table on s is fu
34. see Section 4 7 Selecting SafeStore Encryption Services Security Options Scan Devices Alt s Select this option to have the WebBIOS CU re scan the physical and virtual drives for any changes in the drive status or the physical configuration The WebBIOS CU displays the results of the scan in the physical and virtual drive descriptions Page 55 Chapter 4 WebBIOS Configuration Utility Managing Software Licensing MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 4 4 Managing Software Licensing 4 4 1 Managing MegaRAID Advanced Software Options Page 56 Virtual Drives Alt v Select this option to view the Virtual Drives screen where you can change and view virtual drive properties delete virtual drives initialize drives and perform other tasks For more information see Section 4 8 2 Viewing Virtual Drive Properties Policies and Operations Drives Alt d Select this option to view the Drives screen where you can view drive properties create hot spares and perform other tasks For more information see Section 4 8 3 Viewing Drive Properties Configuration Wizard Alt o Select this option to start the Configuration Wizard and create a new storage configuration clear a configuration or add a configuration For more information see Section 4 5 Creating a Storage Configuration Logical View Physical View Alt l for Logical View Alt h for Physical View Select this option to toggle between the Physical View screen and the Lo
35. x Controller lt name gt 1 Drive security is enabled on this controller using External Key Management EKM mode Figure 243 Confirmation message when EKM is enabled Based on the application s response at that particular time you come across two scenarios Scenario 1 if EKMS is selected and EKMS is not present Scenario 2 if you enter a wrong security key in the Authentication Drive Security Key dialog box in Figure 242 m Scenario 1 EKM is selected and EKMS is not present When EKM is selected and EKMS is not present restart the system and during re boot the boot agent generates the security keys When you restart the system the system restart message appears as shown in the following figure System Restart Required Please restart the system for the changes to take effect Make sure to stop all the I Os and other operations before you restart your system Figure 244 System Restart m Scenario 2 Entering a wrong security key If you enter a wrong security key in the Authentication Drive Security Key dialog box in Figure 242 an error message is displayed as shown in the following figure LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 359 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software LSI SafeStore Encryption Services MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide lt Error Status gt x lt Error message gt Figure 245 Error Message when user enters wrong security key 11 5 4 Chang
36. 0x0048 Information Initialization complete on s 0x0049 Information LD Properties updated to s from s 0x004a Information Reconstruction complete on s 0x004b Fatal Reconstruction of s stopped due to unrecoverable errors 0x004c Fatal Reconstruct detected uncorrectable double medium errors s at lx on s at lx 0x004d Progress Reconstruction progress on s is s 0x004e Information Reconstruction resumed on s Page 375 Appendix A Events and Messages Page 376 Event Messages MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Table 135 Event Messages Continued Number Type Event Text 0x004f Fatal Reconstruction resume of s failed due to configuration mismatch 0x0050 Information Reconstruction started on s 0x0051 Information State change on s from s to s 0x0052 Information Drive Clear aborted on s 0x0053 Critical Drive Clear failed on s Error 02x 0x0054 Progress Drive Clear progress on s is s 0x0055 Information Drive Clear started on s 0x0056 Information Drive Clear completed on s 0x0057 Warning Error on s Error 02x 0x0058 Information Format complete on s 0x0059 Information Format started on s 0x005a Critical Hot Spare SMART polling failed on s Error 02x 0x005b Information Drive inserted s 0x005c Warning Drive s is not supported 0x005d Warning Patrol Read corrected medium error on s at lx
37. 10 tar gz file toa temporary folder 2 Untar the MegaRaidStorageManager SOLSPARC 8 10 tar gz file using the following command tar zxvf MegaRaidStorageManager SOLSPARC 8 10 tar gz This step creates a new disk directory Go to the new disk directory and find and read the readme txt file 3 Enter the Bash shell Execute the command install sh_ present in the disk directory 5 When prompted by the installation scripts select Y to complete the installation Follow these steps if you need to install MegaRAID Storage Manager software on a system running Red Hat Linux or SUSE Linux Copy the MegaRaidStorageManager SOLX86 tar gz file to a temporary folder 2 Untar the MegaRaidStorageManager SOLX86 tar gz file using the following command tar zxvf MegaRaidStorageManager SOLX86 tar gz A new disk directory is created 3 Go to the new disk directory In the disk directory find and read the readme txt file 5 To start the installation enter the following command csh install sh a If you select Client installation for a PC used to monitor servers and if there are no available servers with a registered framework on the local subnet that is servers with a complete installation of MegaRAID Storage Manager software the server screen appears The server screen does not list any servers You can use this screen to manage systems remotely To install the software using int
38. 349 11 3 1 Using the CacheCade Advanced Software 0c ccc eee cece eee e teen eee eee net e eee e etn en een eneeneeneenes 349 114 FastPath Advanced Software ican tcssmck cendsnsiaanatin EE SE ia eek E A dubnea sane candi eeaaguames R de eR nes 353 11 4 1 Setting FastPath Options cece cece ene nnn ne ne net Ene dete ede need e nen ete enone es 353 11 5 LSI SafeStore Encryption Services sassari ert cieses anen ae te ea be ches bea PER MOG Leena a ba Aone ek eee ence Seed wade eee Res 354 11 5 1 Enabling Drive Security Using EKM 00 eee ee cece eee nee een n nen eee eben eben tebe te en eeneenes 355 11 5 2 Supporting EKM mode ieee oo i 56 s 5 0 bie 5 0 0 dioid averesaie wise eras wiele eras Si arb e a eieie ein elo b esieleieceledie wae es leeialeraie aN Savers 355 11 5 3 Change Security Settings LKM eecaessieeiicee ietin n nn EEKE EEEE REAR A A eRe 357 11 5 4 Change Security Settings EKM 0 cece cece cence een nen ene eect eee e eee en tence eens ete eeneneenees 360 11 5 5 Importing Foreign Drives c5 cic cose steve ededudiewmeniaad sapbae dey Chea dai EE EEEN dune duea eae deuledag ears 361 11 5 6 Importing Foreign Drives to LKM ccc ccc cece cece ee ee eee een eee ee eee eee nett eens teen teens E 362 11 5 7 Importing Foreign Drives to EKMsia sisiewine ceaeaddwale sien cede side selina eee sad eee EEEE EE E EESE a wegO 362 11 5 8 Importing Foreign Drives to EKM 1 0 cece cece ee een nee
39. 4 19 Enclosure Management 2 5 RAID Levels LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 2 Introduction to RAID RAID Levels The virtual drive states are described in Table 5 Table 5 Virtual Drive States State Description Optimal The virtual drive operating condition is good All configured drives are online Degraded The virtual drive operating condition is not optimal One of the configured drives has failed or is offline Partial Degraded The operating condition in a RAID 6 virtual drive is not optimal One of the configured drives has failed or is offline RAID 6 can tolerate up to two drive failures Failed The virtual drive has failed Offline The virtual drive is not available to the RAID controller An alarm sounds on the MegaRAID controller when a virtual drive changes from an optimal state to another state when a hot spare rebuilds and for test purposes Table6 Beep Codes Events and Virtual Drive States Event Virtual Drive State Beep Code RAID 0 virtual drive loses 1 or more Offline 3 seconds on and 1 second off virtual drives RAID 1 loses a mirror drive Degraded 1 second on and 1 second off RAID 1 loses both drives Offline 3 seconds on and 1 second off RAID 5 loses 1 drive Degraded 1 second on and 1 second off RAID 5 loses 2 or more drives Offline 3 seconds on and 1 second off RAID 6 loses 1 drive Partially 1 second on and 1 second off Degraded RAID 6 l
40. BBU gt Dashboard Physical Logice w WIN J6ASSJFT3X5 Ei ALSI MegaRAID SAS 92 I Backplane 252 ay Bobcat 16 Conr Create Virtual Drive Disable Alarm Silence Alarm Start Patrol Read Set Patrol Read Properties Enable SSD Guard Scan Foreign Configuration Load Configuration Save Configuration Clear Configuration Slot Slot Slot Slot GS Slot lt Slot Slot gt Slot Slot gt Slot amp Slot D SAS 1 SAS 2 SAS 3 SAS 4 SAS 8 SSD 9 SAS 10 SAS 11 SAS 12 SAS 136 733 GB Online 13 SAS 136 985 GB Online Set Consistency Check Properties Schedule Consistency Check Set Adjustable Task Rates Preserved Cache Power Settings Enable Drive Security Update Controller Firmware Mine 3 Device Port Count Figure 146 Virtual Drive Creation Menu The dialog box shown in Figure 147 appears LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 8 Configuration Creating a New Storage Configuration Create irtual Drive Choose mode xi LSI ey This wizard will help you quickly create virtual drives Choose how to create the virtual drive y a limited number of settings and have the system pick drives for you This is the easiest way to create a virtual drive
41. Configuration screen 7 Click OK to save all of the changes made to the events 9 2 4 Multiple Events Displayed in a You can view multiple events in a single pop up window as shown in the following Single Pop up Window figure MegaRAID Storage Manageryv8 05 02 Alerts oO Information 2010 07 16 16 22 55 Controller ID 0 Battery relearn started Alerts Severity Date Time Description GD Informat Controller ID 0 Battery relearn g lt Controller ID 0 Battery relearn Controller ID 0 Battery propertie Critical Controller ID 0 VD is now DEGR 2010 07 6 22 ontrolie DA a LAON Dismiss All Dismiss Figure 184 Pop up for Multiple Events 9 2 5 Entering or Editing the Sender You can use the Alerts Notification Configuration screen to enter or edit the sender E mail Address and SMTP Server e mail address and the SMTP server 1 On the Alerts Notification Configuration screen click the Mail Server tab Page 300 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 9 Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices Configuring Alert Notifications The Mail Server options appear as shown in Figure 185 LSI K gt Alert Settings Mail Server Email Sender email address monitor server com SMTP Server 127 0 0 1 IV This server requires authentication User name Password _
42. Dashboard View This section describes the MegaRAID Storage Manager main menu which is shown in Figure 134 4 MegaRAID Storage Manager 8 15 0000 Mra GoTo Log Tos Hep 320800 B Urcorfigred Good Fowersave 36 B Urcorfig red Good Powersave 386 amp Uncorfignred Good Powersave NS Unconfigured Good Powerseve QF St 7 BS HENLE Uncrtigued Good Fowersave 4 E P Figure 134 Main MegaRAID Storage Manager Window The following topics describe the panels and menu options that appear on this screen The left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window displays the Dashboard view the Physical view or the Logical view of the system and the attached devices depending on which tab is selected The Dashboard view shows an overview of the system and covers the following features Properties of the virtual drives and the physical drives Total capacity configured capacity and unconfigured capacity Background operations in progress MSM features and their status enabled or disabled Actions you can perform such as creating a virtual drive and updating the firmware Links to Online Help Figure 135 shows the Dashboard view LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 7 2 1 2 Physical View LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 7 MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus MegaRA
43. Data is transferred to cache and the host concurrently If the same data block is read again it comes from cache memory The IO Policy applies to reads ona specific virtual drive It does not affect the read ahead cache A battery calibration operation performed by a RAID controller periodically to determine the condition of the battery A method of spreading work between two or more computers network links CPUs drives or other resources Load balancing is used to maximize resource use throughput or response time Local Key Management A drive property indicating the number of errors that have been detected on the drive media The process of moving virtual drives and hot spare drives from one controller to another by disconnecting the drives from one controller and attaching them to another one The firmware on the new controller will detect and retain the virtual drive information on the drives The process of providing complete data redundancy with two drives by maintaining an exact copy of one drive s data on the second drive If one drive fails the contents of the other drive can be used to maintain the integrity of the system and to rebuild the failed drive The firmware provides support for detecting and using multiple paths from the RAID controllers to the SAS devices that are in enclosures Devices connected to enclosures have multiple paths to them With redundant paths to the same port of a device if one path fails ano
44. Figure 118 select the Unconfigured drives check box to let the controller enable the Unconfigured drives to enter the Power Save mode 8 Select the Hot spare drives check box to let the controller enable the Hot spare drives to enter the Power Save mode Page 169 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility WebBIOS Dimmer Switch MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 9 Select the Configured drives check box to let the controller enable the Configured drives to enter the Power Save mode 10 Click Next The following confirmation message page appears PsiegaRAID BIOS Config Utili firn Page Mist Do you want to save the changes you have made to power save settings i ES Figure 121 Power Save Settings Confirmation Message If you do not specify the Power Save settings in the Power Save settings screen as shown in Figure 118 the following message appears PeqaRAID BIOS Config Utility Confirm Page g ist The systen will not have powersavings for any of the drives Are you sure you want to proceed Re a ee Figure 122 Power Save Settings Not Saved Message 4 13 1 Power Save mode You can select the drive standby time and the Power Save mode by selecting the Auto Max Max without cache option 1 Select the drive standby time using the drop down selector 2 Select the power save mode by using the radio button 3 Click Finish Page 170 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software
45. If you select Only for current user the MegaRAID Storage Manager shortcuts and associated icons will be available only to the user with this user name LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 229 Chapter 6 MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation Storage Manager Page 230 Installing MegaRAID MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Click Next to continue On the next screen accept the default Destination Folder or click Change to select a different destination folder Click Next to continue The Setup Type screen appears as shown in Figure 127 ie MegaRAID Storage Manager 2 13 00 InstallShield Wizard Setup Type Choose the setup type that best suits your needs Please select a setup type Complete B This option will install all program features Custom Installation te This option will allow you to select or omit individual program components Cea oe Figure 127 Setup Type Screen 8 Select one of the Setup options The options are fully explained in the screen text Normally you would select Complete if you are installing MegaRAID Storage Manager software on a server Select Custom Installation if you want to select individual program components Click Next to continue If you selected Custom Installation as your setup option the second Setup Type screen appears as shown in Figure 128 If you select Complete as your setup option the Installation Wizard is read
46. J6AS5JFT3x5 A Properties Graphical View E LSI MegaRAID SAS 9260 8i Bus 2 Dev 0 Temperature Sensors 1 Temperature Sensor Status 985 GB Online 1 Jok Slot 1 SAS 136 985 GB Online Slot 2 SAS 136 985 GB Online Slot 3 SAS 136 985 GB Online Slot 4 SAS 136 985 GB Online Slot 8 S5D SATA 29 802 GB Online Slot 9 SAS 136 985 GB Online Slot 10 SAS 136 985 GB Online Slot 11 SAS 136 733 GB Online Slot 12 SAS 136 733 GB Online Slot 13 SAS 136 985 GB Online Slot 14 SAS 136 985 GB Online Slot 15 SAS 136 985 GB Online Slot 16 55D SATA 29 802 GB Online Slot 17 S5D SATA 29 802 GB Foreign U Slot 18 55D SATA 29 802 GB Online Slot 19 55D SATA 29 802 GB Online Slot 20 55D SATA 29 802 GB Online Slot 21 55D SATA 29 802 GB Online BB Fens Fan Status Speed RPM Speed Code OK 760 Intermediate Speed Jok 5760 lIntermediate Speed OK 5520 Second Lowest Speed OTN Power Supplies 0 Power Supply Status Voltage Sensors 2 Voltage Sensor Status Yoltage Displaying log from server 2ystart 3 m a Administrator MegaRAID St Pe Iometer GH CAPROGRA I _ 2 Windows Ex 20100316 MSM amp y 6 01 PM Figure 140 Properties Tab and Graphical View Tab The lower part of the MegaRAID Storage Ma
47. Key Vault button appears Click Deactivate All Trial Software The Deactivate All Trial Advanced Software Options dialog box appears as shown in the following figure Figure 17 Deactivate All Trial Advanced Software Options If you want to deactivate the software that is being used with a trial key then click Yes otherwise click No When the activation key is improper in the Activation field in the Advanced Software Options wizard Figure 16 the following messages appear based on the scenarios LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 4 4 2 Reusing the Activation Key LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Managing Software Licensing a Scenario 1 If you enter an invalid activation key the following message appears The Activation Key entered is invalid Pleg enter a valid Activation Key to proceed EA Figure 18 Invalid Activation Key b Scenario 2 If you leave the activation key field blank or enter space characters the following message appears RiegaRAID BIOS Config Utility Cannot Activate Advanced Softuare Options The Activation Key field is left blank or contains space characters In order to activate Advanced Software Option you must enter the correct Activation Key mE Figure 19 Activation key Blank or Space c Scenario 3 If you enter an incorrect activation key and if there is
48. Learning Cycle 5 11 7 Place Battery in Low Power Storage Mode LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Battery Backup Unit Related Properties Use the command in the following table to display the current BBU properties for the selected controller s Table 57 Display Current BBU Properties Convention MegaCli AdpBbuCmd GetBbuProperties aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Displays current properties of the BBU The information displays in the following formats BBU Properties for Adapter x Auto Learn Period xxx Sec Next Learn Time xxxx Sec Learn Delay Interval lt value gt Value in hours not greater than 168 hours 7 days Auto Learn Mode lt value gt Value can be 0 1 or 2 NOTE If the battery type is IBBU08 then the BBU mode is displayed as a part of Get BbuProperties Use the command in the following table to start the BBU learning cycle on the selected controller s A learning cycle is a battery calibration operation performed by the controller periodically approximately every three months to determine the condition of the battery Table 58 Start BBU Learning Cycle Convention MegaCli AdpBbuCmd BbuLearn aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Starts the learning cycle on the BBU No parameter is needed for this option Use the command in the following table to place the battery into Low Power Storage mode on the selected controller s This saves
49. MegaftAlO Storage Manager 15 0000 eo GoTo Lop Tos Heb s0800 LSI Vatine adores Fd cat w Most of the information on this screen is self explanatory Note the following m The Rebuild Rate Patrol Read Rate Reconstruction Rate Consistency Check Rate and BGI Rate background initialization are all user selectable For more information see Section 8 4 Changing Adjustable Task Rates The BBU Present field indicates whether a battery backup unit is installed m The Alarm Present field and the Alarm Enabled field indicate whether the controller has an alarm to alert the user with an audible tone when there is an error or problem on the controller The controller properties are defined in Appendix C Page 304 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 9 4 Monitoring Drives LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 9 Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices Monitoring Drives When MegaRAID Storage Manager software is running you can see the status of all drives in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window If the drive is operating normally its icon looks like this G If the drive has failed a small red circle appears to the right of the icon like this ga See Section 7 2 1 Dashboard PhysicalView Logical View for a complete list of device icons To display complete drive information clic
50. Number Type Event Text 0x0123 Information Redundant enclosure EMM s removed for EMM s 0x0124 Warning Patrol Read can t be started as PDs are either not ONLINE or are ina VD with an active process or are in an excluded VD 0x0125 Information Copyback aborted by user on PD s and src is PD s 0x0126 Critical Copyback aborted on hot spare s from s as hot spare needed for rebuild 0x0127 Warning Copyback aborted on PD s from PD s as rebuild required in the array 0x0128 Fatal Controller cache discarded for missing or offline VD s When a VD with cached data goes offline or missing during runtime the cache for the VD is discarded Because the VD is offline the cache cannot be saved 0x0129 Information Copyback cannot be started as PD s is too small for src PD s 0x012a Information Copyback cannot be started on PD s from PD s as SAS SATA is not supported in an array 0x012b Information Microcode update started on PD s 0x012c Information Microcode update completed on PD s 0x012d Warning Microcode update timeout on PD s 0x012e Warning Microcode update failed on PD s 0x012f Information Controller properties changed 0x0130 Information Patrol Read properties changed 0x0131 Information CC Schedule properties changed 0x0132 Information Battery properties changed 0x0133 Warning Periodic Battery Relearn is pending Please initiate manual learn cycle as Automatic learn is not enabled 0x0134 Information Drive security key created
51. On Slot 4 SAS HDD 136 218 GB On J Slot 5 SAS HDD 136 218 GB On Figure 52 WebBIOS Drive Group Definition Screen 10 After you finish selecting drives for the drive groups select each drive group and click Accept DG for each 11 Click Next The Span Definition screen appears as shown in Figure 53 This screen displays the drive group holes you can select to add to a span Page 96 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Creating a Storage Configuration Figure 53 WebBIOS Span Definition Screen 12 Under the heading Array With Free Space hold lt Ctrl gt while you select a drive group of three or more drives and click Add to SPAN The drive group you select displays in the right frame under the heading Span 13 Hold lt Ctrl gt while you select a second drive group of three or more drives and click Add to SPAN Both drive groups display in the right frame under Span 14 Click Next The Virtual Drive Definition screen appears as shown in Figure 54 You use this screen to select the RAID level strip size read policy and other attributes for the new virtual drive s 15 Hold lt Ctrl gt while you select two drive groups with three or more drives each in the Configuration panel on the right LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 97 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Creating a Storage
52. P Page 257 Chapter 7 MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus MegaRAID Storage Manager MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Main Menu 72 2 Properties Graphical View Tabs 7 2 3 Event Log Panel Page 258 A yellow circle to the right of an icon indicates that a device is running in a partially degraded state For example this icon indicates that a virtual drive is running in a degraded state because a drive has failed J The right panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window has one tab or two tabs depending on which kind of device you select in the left panel Figure 140 shows the MSM main menu m The Properties tab displays information about the selected device For example if you select a controller icon in the left panel the Properties tab lists information about the controller such as the controller name NVRAM size and device port count For more information see Section 9 3 Monitoring Controllers Section 9 4 Monitoring Drives and Section 9 6 Monitoring Virtual Drives The Graphical View tab displays information about the temperature fans power supplies and voltage sensors To display a graphical view of a drive click an enclosure icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window and click the Graphical View tab MegaRAID Storage Manager 6 90 0100 BEE Manage GoTo Log Tools Help O O 8 f Lsis Welcome Administrator Logoff _ Dashboard Physical Logical i WIN
53. Recoverable Free Space on the Drives in a Virtual Drive 5 20 11 Display the Information for a Specific View 5 20 12 Enabling the Snapshot Scheduler LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Recovery Snapshot Related Options Use the command in the following table to display information about the snapshot and the view Table 119 Display Snapshot and View Information Convention MegaCli Snapshot Info SnapshotTime yyyymmdd hh mm ss ViewTime yyyymmdd hh mm ss Lx aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Displays snapshot and view information for the source virtual drive If the virtual drive is a repository virtual drive it displays the LD info the number of source virtual drives mapped and their target ID andthe number of holes SnapshotTime yyyymmdd hh mm ss Optional If specified this displays the snapshot information for the snapshot with the time stamp yyyymmdd hh mm ss ViewTime yyyymmdd hh mm ss Optional If specified this displays the view information for the view with the time stamp yyyymmdd hh mm ss and the associated snapshot information Lx x specifies the source LD number for the command Use the command in the following table to clean the recoverable free space on the drives in a snapshot repository virtual drive The free space is unused space on the drives in a virtual drive Table 120 Clean the Recoverable Free Space on the Drives in a
54. Server window appears as shown in Figure 132 The remote servers display along with their IP address operating system and health status LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 249 Chapter 7 MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus Starting MegaRAID Storage MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Manager Software MegaRAID Storage Manager 2 76 Host View Server Details This page displays all the servers that were discovered Choose a server and click on Login to start managing that server You will be prompted for entering host credentials while logging in Use Configure Host to configure the hosts that you want to view IP Address 135 24 228 192 7 C Configure Host Remote servers Host IP Address Operating System Health harry 135 24 228 178 windows 2003 Optimal clisys 135 24 228 182 Windows 2003 Optimal en 135 24 228 153 Linux Optimal BANBM 2 135 24 228 22 Windows 2003 Optimal dhcp 135 24 228 188 135 24 228 188 SunOS Optimal imsmtestpc 135 24 228 191 Windows 2003 Optimal dhcp 135 24 228 131 lsi com 135 24 228 131 Linux Failed lsi 77e242f1e84 135 24 228 135 Windows 2003 Optimal dhep 135 24 228 192 24 228 192 SunOS Optimal WIN AQIMAMSZUS fis5 24 228 138 Windows Server 2008 To ont 10 Server s Found Discovery stopped Figure 132 Select Server Window If the circle in the server icon is orange instead of green it means that th
55. Settings wizard appears as shown in the following figure Page 122 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 4 WebBIOS Configuration Utility Selecting SafeStore Encryption Services Security Options PiiegaRAID BIOS Config Utility Change Security Setting Figure 79 Change Security Settings 3 Select the Change current security settings option the Change Security Settings Security Key ID wizard is displayed Figure 74 This procedure continues till Figure 78 4 Select the Switch to External Key Management EKM mode and click OK the Authenticate Drive Security Settings screen is displayed Figure 72 4 7 6 Disabling the Drive Security Perform the following steps to disable the drive security settings Settings NOTE If you disable the drive security settings you cannot create any new secure virtual drives Disabling these settings does not affect the security or data of foreign drives If you removed any drives that were previously secured you will still need to enter the security key when you import them 1 Click Drive Security on the main WebBIOS screen The Drive Security screen appears as shown in Figure 80 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 123 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Selecting SafeStore Encryption Services Security MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Options Figure 80 Drive Security 2 To disable the drive security sett
56. Software User Guide Drive Group 0 and Span 0 appear in the Drive groups field when you select RAID 10 50 or 60 The RAID controller supports RAID levels 1 5 6 10 50 and 60 In addition it supports independent drives configured as RAID 0 and RAID 00 The screen text gives a brief description of the RAID level you select RAID levels you can choose depend on the number of drives available To learn more about RAID levels see Chapter 2 Introduction to RAID b Scroll down the menu for the Drive security method field if you want to set a drive security method The drive security feature provides the ability to encrypt data and use disk based key management for your data security solution This solution provides protection to the data in the event of theft or loss of drives See Section 11 5 LS SafeStore Encryption Services for more information about drive security and encryption c Select unconfigured drives from the list of drives and click Add gt to add them to the drive group The selected drives appear under Span 0 below Drive Group 0 as shown in Figure 149 H Create Drive Group Drive Group Settings E z xj Sasa E RS DOLG D7 eve Yin ie AN ATADNI SANRI Suttable for high performance with zero data redundancy Choose this option only for non critical data em a Drive security will make the virtual drive secure by applying encryption logic to underlying data in the drive This option ensures that the system will sa
57. State change PD 6 informato Controler 10 0 Unexpected sense PD Ta R uredGood Current Online non CDB 0x03 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x40 Ox00 Sense j Tandiinn a AAD L MAS ANA AAA AAA Awan AA Canna C PROGRA Iometer org IOMETE 1 27 dynamo p 1066 fystart h m Megara storag Bl tometer I C PROGRA 1 lome 2010010709 sscD ssD_screen_shots_2 lt My 11 09 am Figure 236 CacheCade Drive Icon in MegaRAID Storage Manager MegaRAID FastPath is a high performance IO accelerator for CacheCade software drive groups connected to a MegaRAID controller card CacheCade software has a read performance advantage over HDDs and use less power This feature dramatically boosts storage subsystem bandwidth and overall transactional application performance when used with a 6Gb s MegaRAID SATA SAS controller The FastPath feature supports full optimization of CacheCade software and hard disk drive HDD virtual disk groups to deliver an improvement in read and write IOPS that is three times greater than MegaRAID controllers not utilizing FastPath technology Also the FastPath advanced software is faster and more cost effective than current flash based adapter card solutions Perform the following steps to use the FastPath advanced software 1 Select the Logical tab on the main menu screen for the Logical view Click a virtual drive icon in the left frame
58. The default is 2 drives Spinup Delay Use this option to control the interval in seconds between spinup of drives connected to this controller The delay prevents a drain on the system s power supply that would occur if all drives spun up at the same time The default is 12 seconds StopOnError Enable this option if you want the boot process to stop when the controller BIOS encounters an error during boot up The default is Disabled Spin Down Delay Time Use this option to control the interval in seconds between spindown of drives connected to this controller The delay prevents a drain on the system s power supply that would occur if all drives spun down at the same time The default is 30 minutes Stop CC on Error Enable this option if you want to stop a consistency check when the controller BIOS encounters an error The default is No Maintain PD Fail History Enable this option to maintain the history of all drive failures The default is Enabled Schedule CC Snapshot Indicates whether the option to schedule the date and time for a consistency check is supported Use this option to create a snapshot of a volume MegaRAID Recovery also known as Snapshot offers a simplified way to recover data and provides automatic protection for the boot volume You can use the Recovery feature to take a snapshot of a volume and to restore a volume or file Snapshot functionality allows you to capture da
59. Unlimited When you activate the unlimited key or a trial key a message Review the summary and Key go back if you need to make corrections appears as shown in the following figure Activate MegaRAID Advanced Software Summary The existing trial key will be deactivated and all the advanced software associated with it will be Figure 209 Activating an Unlimited Key LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 327 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software Recovery Advanced Software MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 11 2 6 3 Reusing the Activation Key 11 2 6 4 Securing Advanced MegaRAID Software Page 328 If you are using an existing activated key the features get transferred to the keyvault and the message shown in the following figure appears Advanced Software Already Activated All of the advanced software fom this key have already been activated The Activation Keys are secured in the key vault x Figure 210 Reusing the Activation Key When you want to transfer the advanced software from the controller to keyvault use the Securing Advanced MegaRAID Software Confirmation wizard This is a conditional wizard and appears only when the keyvault and the unsecured keys exist 1 Select any one of the following options to view the Securing Advanced MegaRAID Software Confirmation wizard 2 Select the Physical View tab in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager main menu and
60. User Guide Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility WebBIOS Dimmer Switch HegaRAID BIOS Config Utility Power Save Setting Ensure that if the dri are idle for the specified time then the Will go to pow If Select power save node Auto at th d gt he best power ax without cach n at th i save maximum power Figure 123 Power Save Mode 4 13 2 Power Save Settings Advanced You can schedule the drive active time by selecting the Start time and End time in the Power Save Settings screen Perform the following steps to schedule the drive active time 1 Click the Advanced button in the Power Save mode screen as shown in Figure 119 The Power Save Settings Advanced screen appears as shown in the following figure a A te within cified period if Scheduled drive active tine f Start tine End tine Ej Do not edule driv Figure 124 Power Save Settings Advanced LSI Corporation Confidential l September 2010 Page 171 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility WebBIOS Dimmer Switch MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 2 Select the start time and end time from the Scheduled drive active time field using the Start time and End time drop down selectors 3 Click OK The drive active time is scheduled NOTE Select the Do not schedule drive active time check box if you do not want to schedule the drive active time 4 13 3 Power Save While Creating You can select the power saving policy while creatin
61. Virtual Drives Page 202 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Use the command in the following table to perform a reconstruction of the virtual drive s on the selected controller s Table 79 Virtual Drive Reconstruction Convention MegaCli LDRecon Start Rx Add Rmv PhysDrv E0 S0 E1 S1 ShowProg ProgDsply Lx aN Description Controls and manages virtual drive reconstruction The following are the virtual drive reconstruction settings you can select on a single controller Start Starts a reconstruction of the selected virtual drive to a new RAID level Rx Changes the RAID level of the virtual drive when you start reconstruction You might need to add or remove a drive to make this possible Start Add PhysDrv E0 S0 E1 S1 Adds listed drives to the virtual drive and starts reconstruction on the selected virtual drive Start Rmv PhysDrv E0 S0 E1 S1 Removes one drive from the existing virtual drives and starts a reconstruction ShowP rog Displays a snapshot of the ongoing reconstruction process ProgDsply Allows you to view the ongoing reconstruction The routine continues to display progress until at least one reconstruction is completed or a key is pressed Use the command in the following table to display information about the virtual drives and drives for the selected controller s such as the number of virtual drives RAID level and drive capaci
62. Virtual Drive Convention MegaCli Snapshot Clean Lx aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Cleans the recoverable free space on the drives in a snapshot repository virtual drive Lx x specifies the LD number for the command The LD has to be a repository virtual drive Use the command in the following table to display the information for a specific view if you specify the view target ID Table 121 Display the Information for a Specific View Convention MegaCli Snapshot GetViewInfo ViewTargetId N aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Displays the view information about a particular view if you specify the View target ID Otherwise it displays the information about all of the views ViewTargetId N Optional If specified this displays the information about the view with the specified target ID The snapshot scheduler in MSM helps you automate the creation of Point in Time PiT on one or more VDs You can schedule the snapshot as monthly weekly daily or hourly The scheduler does not support biweekly alternate days etc Page 217 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool 5 20 13 Displays the Read and Write Configuration File 5 21 Page 218 FastPath related Options FastPath related Options MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide NOTE MSM or OEM applications must be running to flush file system buffers and take snapshot when snapshot schedule expires The system does not support snapshot creation through B
63. Wizard The Modify Drive Group Wizard appears Modify Drive Group Select the possible RAID level xi LSI ey This wizard allows you to modify the drive group configuration by adding drives to the virtual drive or removing drives From it or changing its RAID level Current drive group configuration Drive group name Drive Group 4 RAID level RAID 0 Virtual drive state Optimal P Capacty saus Online Select the RAID level you want to migrate 2E fh Suitable for multi user environments database or file system with small I O size and high proportion of read activity Figure 171 Modify Drive Group Wizard 4 Select the RAID level that you want to change migrate the drive group to and click Next The following screen appears It lists the drives you can add and it states whether you have to add a minimum number of drives to change the RAID level from the current level to the new RAID level Page 287 Chapter 8 Configuration Changing a Virtual Drive Configuration MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Modify Drive Group Add drive to the current configuration LSIss You have selected RAID 5 To migrate from RAID 0 to RAID 5 you need to add at least 1 drive s to the configuration Use the below table to add the drive s and click next to proceed Select the unconfigured drive to add aa Available Drives Capacity iv i Enclosure Bobc 545
64. a SAS CacheCade SSD Caching software cannot be added 7 A mix of SAS and SATA HDD with a mix of SAS and SATA CacheCade SSD Caching software 8 A CacheCade SSD Caching software cannot be added to a HDD but a SAS SATA mix is allowed NOTE Only one of the valid configurations listed in Table 1 is allowed based on your controller card manufacturing settings NOTE The valid drive mix also applies to hot spares For hot spare information see Section 2 4 12 Hot Spares on page 28 1 8 Technical Support For assistance with installing configuring or running your MegaRAID 6Gb s SAS RAID Ss controller contact an LSI Technical Support representative Click the following link to access the LSI Technical Support page for storage and board support http www si com support storage tech_support index html Page 18 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 1 Overview Technical Support From this page you can send an e mail or call a Technical Support representative or submit a new service request and view its status E mail http www si com support support_form html Phone Support http www si com support storage phone_tech_support index html 1 800 633 4545 North America 00 800 5745 6442 International Page 19 Chapter 1 Overview Technical Support MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
65. a mismatch between the activation key and the controller the following message appears Mega RAID BIO nfig Utility Activation Key Mismatch The Activation Key entered does not match with the controller Please re enter the correct Activation Key to proceed TEST Figure 20 Activation Key Mismatch If you are using an existing activated key the features get transferred to the key vault and the message appears as shown in the following figure Page 59 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Managing Software Licensing MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide MegaRAID BIOS Config Utility Advanced Software Options Already Activated Ise TREE All of the Advanced Software Options from this key have already been activated The Activation Keys are secured in the key vault Figure 21 Reusing the Activation Key 4 4 3 Managing Advanced Software When you click Activate in Manage MegaRAID Advanced Software Options wizard Summary Figure 16 the Advanced Software Options Summary wizard appears as shown in the following figure egaRAID BIOS Config Utility Manage Advanced Sof tuare Options Summary Figure 22 Advanced Software Options Summary Wizard The Summary field displays the list of the advanced Software options along with their former status and new status in the controller The Advanced Software Options column displays the currently available software in the controller The Former Status column displa
66. a patrol read 9 5 1 Patrol Read Task Rates You have the option to change the patrol read task rate The task rate determines the amount of system resources that are dedicated to a patrol read when it is running LSI recommends however that you leave the patrol read task rate at its default setting If you raise the task rate above the default foreground tasks will run more slowly and it might seem that the system is not responding If you lower the task rate below the default rebuilds and other background tasks might run very slowly and might not complete within a reasonable time For more information about the patrol read task rate see Section 8 4 Changing Adjustable Task Rates 9 6 Monitoring Virtual Drives When MegaRAID Storage Manager is running you can see the status of all virtual lt A drives If a virtual drive is operating normally the icon looks like this If the virtual drive is running in Degraded mode for example if a drive has failed a small yellow circle appears to the right of the icon gj A red circle indicates that the virtual drive has failed and data has been lost When the Logical tab is selected the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window shows which drives are used by each virtual drive The same drive can be used by multiple virtual drives To display complete virtual drive information click the Logical tab in the left panel and click a virtual drive icon in the left panel The properties
67. a serial point to point storage interface Simplifies cabling between devices Eliminates the master slave construction used in parallel ATA Allows addressing of multiple SATA II targets through an expander Allows multiple initiators to address a single target in a fail over configuration through an expander The MegaRAID firmware supports CacheCade SSD Caching software drives attached to MegaRAID SAS controllers These drives are expected to behave like SATA HDDs or SAS HDDs The major advantages of CacheCade SSD Caching software drives include High random read speed because there is no read write head to move High performance to power ratio as these drives have very low power consumption compared to HDDs Low latency High mechanical reliability Lower weight and size for low capacity CacheCade SSD Caching software drives The features and operations on CacheCade SSD Caching software drives are the same as for hard disk drives HDD NOTE MegaRAID implements support for only those SATA CacheCade SSD Caching software drives which support ATA 8 ACS compliance You can choose whether to allow a virtual drive to consist of both CacheCade SSD Caching software devices and HDDs For a virtual drive that consists of CacheCade SSD Caching software only you can choose whether to allow SAS CacheCade SSD Caching software drives and SATA CacheCade SSD Caching software drives in that virtual drive For virtual drives that ha
68. actions Enter or edit the sender e mail address Enter the SMTP server Require authentification of the e mail server Save an xml backup file of the entire alert configuration Load all of the values from a previously saved backup into the dialog to edit or send to the monitor NOTE When you load a saved backup file all unsaved changes made in the current session will be lost You can select the E mail tab to perform the following actions Add new e mail addresses for recipients of alert notifications Page 297 Chapter 9 Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices Configuring Alert Notifications MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Send test messages to the recipient e mail addresses Remove e mail addresses of recipients of alert notifications Save an xml backup file of the entire alert configuration Load all of the values from a previously saved backup into the dialog to edit or send to the monitor NOTE When you load a saved backup file all unsaved changes made in the current session will be lost 9 2 1 Setting Alert Delivery Methods You can select the methods used to send alert deliveries including by popup e mail system log or MSM log You can select the alert delivery methods for each event severity level Information Warning Critical and Fatal Perform the following steps to select the alert delivery methods On the Alerts Notification Configuration screen click the Alerts Setting tab Under th
69. already in progress 0x56 Another power state set operation is in progress 0x57 Power state of device is not correct 0x58 No PD is available for patrol read 0x59 Controller reset is required Ox5a No EKM boot agent detected Ox5b No space on the snapshot repository VD Ox5c For consistency SET PiTs some PiT creations might fail and some succeed OxFF Invalid status used for polling command completion Page 389 Appendix B MegaCLlI Error Messages Error Messages and Descriptions MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Page 390 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Appendix C Appendix C Glossary Glossary This appendix provides a glossary for terms used in this document access policy alarm enabled alarm present array BBU present BGI rate BIOS cache cache flush interval caching capacity coerced capacity coercion mode LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 A virtual drive property indicating what kind of access is allowed for a particular virtual drive The possible values are Read Write Read Only or Blocked A controller property that indicates whether the controller s onboard alarm is enabled A controller property that indicates whether the controller has an onboard alarm If present and enabled the alarm is sounded for certain error conditions See drive group A controller property that indicates whether the controller has an onb
70. and 1GB way The default is None The number you choose depends on how much the drives from various vendors vary in their actual size LSI recommends that you use the 1GB coercion mode option S M A R T Polling Use this option to determine how frequently the controller polls for drives reporting a Predictive Drive Failure S M A R T Self Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology error The default is 300 seconds 5 minutes Alarm Control Select this option to enable disable or silence the onboard alarm tone generator on the controller The default is Disabled LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Viewing and Changing Device Properties Table 21 Controller Properties Menu Options Continued Option Description Patrol Read Rate Use this option to select the rate for patrol reads for drives connected to the selected controller The default is 30 percent The patrol read rate is the percentage of system resources dedicated to running a patrol read See Section 5 9 Patrol Read Related Controller Properties for additional information about patrol read Cache Flush Interval Use this option to control the interval in seconds at which the contents of the onboard data cache are flushed The default is 4 seconds Spinup Drive Count Use this option to control the number of drives that spin up simultaneously
71. and enterprise systems MegaRAID 6Gb s SAS RAID controllers offer a cost effective way to implement RAID in a server SAS technology brings a wealth of options and flexibility with the use of SAS devices Serial ATA SATA II devices and CacheCade SSD Caching software devices within the same storage infrastructure These devices bring individual characteristics that make each of these more suitable choice depending on your storage needs MegaRAID gives you the flexibility to combine these two similar technologies on the same controller within the same enclosure and in the same virtual drive NOTE LSI recommends that you carefully assess any decision to combine SAS drives and SATA drives within the same virtual drives Although you can mix drives LSI strongly discourages this practice this applies to both HDDs and CacheCade SSD Caching software Page 13 Chapter 1 Overview Serial attached SCSI Device Interface 1 2 Serial attached SCSI Device Interface 1 3 Page 14 Serial ATA Il Features MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide MegaRAID 6Gb s SAS RAID controllers are based on the LSI first to market SAS IC technology and proven MegaRAID technology As second generation PCI Express RAID controllers the MegaRAID SAS RAID controllers address the growing demand for increased data throughput and scalability requirements across midrange and enterprise class server platforms LSI offers a family of MegaRAID SAS RAID controllers ad
72. available capacity while creating the RAID 10 drive group In version 1 03 of the utility the maximum size of the RAID 10 drive group is the sum total of the two RAID 1 drive groups In version 1 1 the maximum size is the size of the smaller drive group multiplied by two 18 Change the virtual drive options from the defaults listed on the screen as needed Here are brief explanations of the virtual drive options RAID Level The drop down menu lists the possible RAID levels for the virtual drive Select RAID 10 Strip Size The strip size is the portion of a stripe that resides on a single drive in the drive group The stripe consists of the data segments that the RAID controller writes across multiple drives not including parity drives For example consider a stripe that contains 64 KB of drive space and has 16 KB of data residing on each drive in the stripe In this case the stripe size is 64 KB and the strip size is 16 KB You can set the strip size to 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 and 1024 KB A larger strip size produces higher read performance If your computer regularly performs random read requests choose a smaller strip size The default is 64 KB Access Policy Select the type of data access that is allowed for this virtual drive RW Allow read write access Read Only Allow read only access This is the default Blocked Do not allow access LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 93 Chapter 4 WebBl
73. bandwidth and overall transactional application performance when used with a 6 Gb s MegaRAID SATA SAS controller The FastPath feature supports full optimization of CacheCade SSD Caching software and hard disk drive HDD virtual drive groups to deliver a three fold improvement in read and write IOPS compared to MegaRAID controllers not utilizing FastPath technology Also FastPath software is faster and more cost effective than current flash based adapter card solutions LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 5 22 Dimmer Switch Related Options 5 22 1 Display Selected Adapter Properties LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Dimmer Switch Related Options The following tables display command information about the Dimmer switch option Use the command in the following table to display the selected Adapter Properties Table 123 Displays the Selected Adapter Properties Convention MegaCLI AdpGetProp CacheFlushInterval RebuildRate PatrolReadRate BgiRate CCRate ReconRate SpinupDriveCount SpinupDelay CoercionMode ClusterEnable PredFailPollinterval BatWarnDsbl EccBucketSize EccBucketLeakRate EccBucketCount AbortCCOnError AlarmDsply SMARTCpyBkEnb1 SSDSMARTCpyBkEnb1l NCQDsply aintainPdFailHistoryEnbl RstrHotSpareOnInsert DisableOCR EnableJBOD DsblCacheBypass BootWithPinne dCache AutoEnhancedImportDsply AutoDetectBackPl
74. can apply RAID level migration at any time LSI recommends that you do so when there are no reboots Many operating systems issues I O operations serially one at a time during boot With a RAID level migration running a boot can often take more than 15 minutes Migrations are allowed for the following RAID levels RAID 0 to RAID 1 RAID 0 to RAID 5 RAID 0 to RAID 6 RAID 1 to RAID 0 RAID 1 to RAID 5 RAID 1 to RAID 6 RAID 5 to RAID 0 RAID 5 to RAID 6 RAID 6 to RAID 0 RAID 6 to RAID 5 Table 22 lists the number of additional drives required when you change the RAID level of a virtual drive Table 22 Additional Drives Required for RAID Level Migration Original Number of Drives in Drive Additional Drives From RAID Level to RAID Level Group Required RAID 0 to RAID 1 RAID 0 1 drive 1 RAID 0 to RAID 5 RAID 0 1 drive 2 RAID 0 to RAID 6 RAID 0 1 drive 3 RAID 1 to RAID 5 RAID 1 2 drives 1 RAID 1 to RAID 6 RAID 1 2 drives 1 Follow these steps to migrate the RAID level CAUTION Back up any data that you want to keep before you change the RAID level of the virtual drive 1 On the main WebBIOS CU screen select a virtual drive 2 Click Virtual Drives The Virtual Drive screen appears LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 4 12 9 New Drives Attached toa MegaRAID Controller LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Con
75. cancel this action Scenario 1 If you enter an invalid activation key the following message appears LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software Recovery Advanced Software Invalid Activation Key The activation key entered is invalid Please enter a valid activation key to proceed Figure 203 Invalid Activation Key m Scenario 2 If you enter an incorrect activation key file the following message appears Incorrect Activation key File The Activation Key file you have provided is incorrect In order to activate the Advanced Software Options you must upload the proper Activation Key file Figure 204 Incorrect Activation Key m Scenario 3 If you enter an incorrect activation key and if there is a mismatch between the activation key and the controller the following message appears Activation Key Mismatch The Activation Key entered does not match with the controller Please re enter the correct Activation Key to proceed Figure 205 Activation Key Mismatch NOTE Entering a space in the Activation Key field disables the Next button in Figure 201 If you click Cancel in the Activate MegaRAID Advanced Software Choose Method as shown in Figure 201 the following confirmation dialog box appears Page 325 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software Recovery Advan
76. cond hdicya ca ada EEIN E NREL sen eemeaion gee 391 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 11 Table of Contents MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Page 12 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 1 Chapter 1 Overview SAS Technology 1 1 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Overview This chapter provides an overview of this guide which documents the utilities used to configure monitor and maintain MegaRAID Serial attached SCSI SAS RAID controllers with RAID control capabilities and the storage related devices connected to them SAS Technology This guide describes how to use the MegaRAID Storage Manager software WebBlOS configuration utility and MegaRAID command line interface CLI This chapter documents the SAS technology Serial ATA SATA technology CacheCade SSD Caching software Dimmer Switch EUFI 2 0 configuration scenarios and drive types NOTE This guide does not include the latest CacheCade software and Enterprise Key Management System EKMS feature images The MegaRAID 6Gb s SAS RAID controllers are high performance intelligent PCI Express to SCSI Serial ATA II controllers with RAID control capabilities MegaRAID 6Gb s SAS RAID controllers provide reliability high performance and fault tolerant disk subsystem management They are an ideal RAID solution for the internal storage of workgroup departmental
77. detected 0x00e4 Warning Enclosure s temperature sensor d differential detected 0x00e5 Information Drive test cannot start No qualifying drives found 0x00e6 Information Time duration provided by host is not sufficient for self check 0x00e7 Information Marked Missing for s on drive group d row d 0x00e8 Information Replaced Missing as s on drive group d row d 0x00e9 Information Enclosure s Temperature d returned to normal 0x00ea Information Enclosure s Firmware download in progress 0x00eb Warning Enclosure s Firmware download failed 0x00ec Warning s is not a certified drive 0x00ed Information Dirty cache data discarded by user Ox00ee Information Drives missing from configuration at boot Ox00ef Information Virtual drives VDs missing drives and will go offline at boot s Ox00f0 Information VDs missing at boot s Ox00f1 Information Previous configuration completely missing at boot Ox00f2 Information Battery charge complete Ox00f3 Information Enclosure s fan d speed changed Ox00f4 Information Dedicated spare s imported as global due to missing arrays Ox00f5 Information s rebuild not possible as SAS SATA is not supported in an array Ox00f6 Information SEP s has been rebooted as a part of enclosure firmware download SEP will be unavailable until this process completes Ox00f7 Information Inserted PD s Info s Ox00f8 Information Removed PD s Info s Ox00f9 Information VD s is now OPTIMAL Ox00fa Warning VD
78. drive status changes to Offline 2 Click Go To gt Physical Drive gt M ark Drive as Missing The drive status changes to Unconfigured Good CAUTION After you perform this step the data on this drive is no longer valid 3 If necessary create a hot spare drive for the virtual drive from which you have removed the drive See Section 8 3 Adding Hot Spare Drives When a hot spare is available the data on the virtual drive will be rebuilt You can now use the removed drive for another configuration CAUTION If MegaRAID Storage Manager software detects that a drive in a virtual drive has failed it makes the drive offline If this happens you must remove the drive and replace it You cannot make the drive usable for another configuration by using the Mark physical disk as missing and Rescan commands MegaRAID Storage Manager software enables you to easily upgrade the controller firmware To avoid data loss because of dirty cache on the controller the utility forces the virtual disks into Write through mode after a firmware upgrade It is in this mode until the server reboots In Write through mode the controller sends a data transfer completion signal to the host when the disk subsystem has received all the data in a transaction This way in case of a power outage the controller does not discard the dirty cache Follow these steps to upgrade the firmware 1 In the MegaRAID Storage Manager main menu click Go To gt Controller gt Up
79. drives that are in Power Save mode it could take several minutes to spin up the drives A progress bar appears as the drives spin up If any of the selected unconfigured drives fail to spin up a box appears that identifies the drive or drives Page 267 Chapter 8 Configuration 8 1 5 Creating a Virtual Drive Using Advanced Configuration Page 268 Creating a New Storage Configuration MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide The advanced configuration procedure provides an easy way to create a new storage configuration Advanced configuration gives you greater flexibility than simple configuration because you can select the drives and the virtual drive parameters when you create a virtual drive In addition you can use the advanced configuration procedure to create spanned drive groups Follow these steps to create a new storage configuration in the advanced configuration mode This example shows the configuration of a spanned drive group 1 Perform either of the following steps to bring up the Configuration Wizard a Right click on the controller node in the device tree in the left frame of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window and select Create Virtual Drive b Select the controller node and select Go To gt Controller gt Create Virtual Drive in the menu bar as shown in Figure 146 MegaRAID Storage Manager 6 90 0100 Manage GoTo Log Tools Help Controller Drive Group P Physical Drive gt Virtual Drive
80. e ene DEA 182 5 8 2 Display Number of Controllers Supported 0 cece cece cence een n ene e ee een nent eee n eee nea es 182 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 5 Table of Contents MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 5 8 3 Enable or Disable Automatic Rebuild 0 cece cece cee cee eee nee e teen eee teen een een teen een eens 182 5 8 4 Flush Controller Cache iaissa cer ede i eee EATE eee see Ned eaten vay dade EER 183 5 8 5 Set Controller Properties dsc sce sete vena eareed arty snare tare Enri EER E Suit op Hew Fun TEETE EE E E 183 5 8 6 Display Specified Controller Properties 0 cece cece cence nee e nnn nen e tenet e etn eb ete teen een enee 185 5 8 7 SCE FACtOny Defaults oes ese sirnana a a NE Matson lng aierde Nasa thas en wedaeled EE arene owe EA 185 58 8 Set SAS AdOIess 3 ciicias aine ner tanvauinesiat diene oad tan ET EE seavenwneade as seed O O 185 5 8 9 Set Timeand Dateon Controller rcrereriisiisr ois viendo shane Ena ed AERE EEEE ENEE EARE 185 5 8 10 Display Time and Date on Controller 0 ccc cece cence nee een ened eee tee eee enn bet eee eee e en enee 186 58 11 Get Connector MOE i s ssiecieee sae iiris osinn eased NEEE aguas salelelled va dped doe ee ees a eRe tale aPeaaE a i ai 186 5 8 12 Set Connector MOE i ccdncaiccdvvauie sa Weed ee adhe p a me EREE sa damnnee EE Seba E ee agian RAMEE S bam alebeea 186 5 9 Patrol Read Related Controller Properties 0 cece c
81. eight spans You must use an even number of drives in each RAID virtual drive in the span The RAID 1 virtual drives must have the same stripe size 50 Configure RAID 50 by spanning two contiguous RAID 5 virtual drives The RAID 5 virtual drives must have the same stripe size 60 Configure RAID 60 by spanning two contiguous RAID 6 virtual drives The RAID 6 virtual drives must have the same stripe size Page 27 Chapter 2 Introduction to RAID Components and Features 2 4 12 Hot Spares 2 4 12 1 Global Hot Spare 2 4 12 2 Dedicated Hot Spare Page 28 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide NOTE In a spanned VD R10 R50 R60 the span numbering starts from Span 0 Span 1 Span 2 and so on A hot spare is an extra unused drive that is part of the disk subsystem It is usually in standby mode ready for service if a drive fails Hot spares permit you to replace failed drives without system shutdown or user intervention MegaRAID SAS RAID controllers can implement automatic and transparent rebuilds of failed drives using hot spare drives providing a high degree of fault tolerance and zero downtime NOTE When running RAID 0 and RAID 5 virtual drives on the same set of drives a sliced configuration a rebuild to a hot spare will not occur after a drive failure until the RAID 0 virtual drive is deleted The RAID management software allows you to specify drives as hot spares When a hot spare is needed the RAID c
82. fields consist of Advanced Software License and Mode columns m The Advanced Software column displays the list of advanced softwares present in the controller m The License column displays the license details for the list of advanced softwares present in the Advanced Software column The license details validates if the software is under trial period or if it can be used without any trial period Unlimited m The Mode column displays the current status of the advanced software The current status can be Secured Not secured or Factory installed Page 322 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software Recovery Advanced Software NOTE The Mode column appears only if the keyvault is present 3 Click the LSI Advanced Software License Management Portal link to obtain the license authorization code and activation key If you click the Benefits of each MegaRAID Advanced Software link you can access http www si com channel products advanced_software If you click the Tips on activating MegaRAID Advanced Software link you can access www lsi com channel licensing Both the Safe ID field and the Serial Number field consists of a pre defined value generated by the controller Alternatively you can copy the value and paste it in the text box for the applicable field 4 Click Activate The Activate MegaRAID Advanced Software Choose Method wizard ap
83. generates the security keys for the controller NOTE If the MSM application does not support EKM the EKM option is greyed out When you select the Change Security Settings in the Change Security wizard as shown in Figure 241 two options are provided for you If you select the first option Change current security settings you can change the drive security settings on the controller If you select the second option Switch to External Key Management EKM mode you can switch from LKM mode to EKM mode Perform the following steps to configure the Change Security Settings wizard 1 Select the Physical View tab in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window and click a controller icon 2 Choose any one of the following options to enable the Change Security Settings wizard Select Go To gt Controller gt Change Security Settings in the main navigation bar present in the top portion of the MSM screen Right click the controller icon and click Change Security Settings The Change Security Settings wizard appears as shown in the following figure Page 357 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software 11 5 3 1 Authentication Drive Security Key Page 358 LSI SafeStore Encryption Services MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Change Security Settings LSI Controller lt name gt Drive security is currently enabled Change the drive security settings on this controller or switch between key management Cur
84. in Figure 68 Page 112 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 4 WebBIOS Configuration Utility Selecting SafeStore Encryption Services Security Options Figure 68 Enable Drive Security Enter Security Key 9 Enter a new drive security key or click Suggest to fill the new security key Enter the new drive security key again to confirm The security key is case sensitive It must be between eight and thirty two characters and contain at least one number one lowercase letter one uppercase letter and one non alphanumeric character e g lt gt The space character is not permitted 10 Click Next The Enable Drive Security Enter Pass Phrase screen appears as shown in Figure 69 You have the option to provide a pass phrase for additional security LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 113 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Selecting SafeStore Encryption Services Security MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Options Figure 69 Enable Drive Security Enter Pass Phrase 11 If you want to use a pass phrase click the checkbox Use a pass phrase in addition to the security key 12 Enter a new pass phrase and then enter the new pass phrase again to confirm The pass phrase is case sensitive It must be between eight and thirty two characters and contain at least one number one lowercase letter one uppercase letter and one non alphanumeric char
85. is time of delay in hours A value of zero means no delay and an immediate restart 5 10 BIOS Related Properties You can use the commands in this section to select the settings for BIOS related gt lt Options 5 10 1 Set or Display Bootable Virtual Use the command in the following table to set or display the ID of the bootable virtual Drive ID drive LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 187 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Battery Backup Unit Related Properties MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide NOTE This option does not write a boot sector to the virtual drive The operating system will not load if the boot sector is incorrect Table 51 Bootable Virtual Drive ID Convention MegaCli AdpBootDrive Set Lx physdrv E0 S0 Get aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Sets or displays the bootable virtual drive ID Set Lx physdrv E0 S0 Sets the virtual drive as bootable so that during the next reboot the BIOS looks for a boot sector in the specified virtual drive Identifies the physical drive in the virtual drive by enclosure and slot to use to boot from Get Displays the bootable virtual drive ID 5 10 2 Select BIOS Status Options Use the command in the following table to set the options for the BIOS status Table 52 Options for BIOS Status Convention egaCli AdpBIOS Enbl Dsbl SOE BE EnblAutoSelectBootLd DsblAutoSelectBootLd Dsply aN a0 1 2 aALL
86. l i Segment 8 Segment 7 8 Segment 7 Segment 9 10 Segment 9 Segment 10 i Segment 11 12 Segment11 Segment 12 Figure 13 RAID 50 Level Virtual Drive 2 5 10 RAID 60 RAID 60 provides the features of both RAID 0 and RAID 6 and includes both parity and disk striping across multiple drive groups RAID 6 supports two independent parity blocks per stripe A RAID 60 virtual drive can survive the loss of two drives in each of the RAID 6 sets without losing data RAID 60 is best implemented on two RAID 6 drive groups with data striped across both drive groups RAID 60 breaks up data into smaller blocks and then stripes the blocks of data to each RAID 6 disk set RAID 6 breaks up data into smaller blocks calculates parity by performing an exclusive or on the blocks and then writes the blocks of data and parity to each drive in the drive group The size of each block is determined by the stripe size parameter which is set during the creation of the RAID set LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 39 Chapter 2 Introduction to RAID RAID Configuration Strategies MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 2 6 RAID Configuration Strategies Page 40 RAID 60 can support up to 8 spans and tolerate up to 16 drive failures though less than total drive capacity is available Two drive failures can be tolerated in each RAID 6 level drive group Table 14 RAID 60 Overview Uses Provides a high level of data protection throu
87. left panel of the window Select Go To gt Drive Group gt Modify Drive Group on the menu bar or right click the virtual drive icon to access the Modify Drive Group Wizard The Modify Drive Group Wizard appears Page 290 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 8 Configuration Changing a Virtual Drive Configuration Modify Drive Group Select the possible RAID level xi LSI 3S ey This wizard allows you to modify the drive group configuration by adding drives to the virtual drive or removing drives from it or changing its RAID level Current drive group configuration Drive group name Drive Group 4 RAID level RAID 0 Virtual drive state Optimal Select the RAID level you want to migrate fe Suitable for multi user environments database or file system with small at I O size and high proportion of read activity Figure 175 Modify Drive Group Wizard 4 On the Modify Drive Group Wizard screen select the RAID level that you want to change migrate the drive group to and click Next The following screen appears The screen states the number of drives that you have to add to change the RAID level from the current level to a new RAID level that require more drives Modify Drive Group Add drive to the current configuration LSI You have selected RAID 5 To migrate from RAI
88. level drive group RAID 60 is appropriate when used with data that requires high reliability high request rates high data transfer and medium to large capacity When you select Manual Configuration and click Next the Drive Group Definition screen appears You use this screen to select drives to create drive groups 1 Hold lt Ctrl gt while selecting at least three ready drives in the Drives panel on the left 2 Click Add To Array to move the drives to a proposed drive group configuration in the Drive Groups panel on the right LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Creating a Storage Configuration If you need to undo the changes click Reclaim 4 Click Accept DG to create a RAID 6 drive group i An icon for a second drive group displays in the right panel Click on the icon for the second drive group to select it Hold lt Ctrl gt while selecting at least three more ready drives in the Drives panel to create a second drive group Click Add To Array to move the drives to a proposed drive group configuration in the Drive Groups panel on the right as shown in Figure 56 If you need to undo the changes click Reclaim Choose whether to use drive encryption iegaRAID BIOS Config Utility Config Hizard Drive Group Definition Bp Slot 1 SAS GB On g Slot 2 SAS HDD 67 843 GB On BP Slot 3 SAS HDD 136 218
89. maintain data integrity 60 Provides data redundancy using distributed parity across spanned RAID 6 drive groups RAID 60 can sustain two drive failures per RAID 6 drive group and still maintain data integrity It provides the highest level of protection against drive failures of all of the RAID levels RAID 60 includes both parity and disk striping across multiple drives If a drive fails the RAID controller uses the parity data to recreate all missing information 2 6 2 Maximizing Performance A RAID disk subsystem improves I O performance The RAID drive group appears to the host computer as a single storage unit or as multiple virtual units I O is faster because drives can be accessed simultaneously Table 16 describes the performance for each RAID level Table 16 RAID Levels and Performance Performance 0 RAID 0 striping offers excellent performance RAID 0 breaks up data into smaller blocks and then writes a block to each drive in the drive group Disk striping writes data across multiple drives instead of just one drive It involves partitioning each drive storage space into stripes that can vary in size from 8KB to 1024 KB These stripes are interleaved in a repeated sequential manner Disk striping enhances performance because multiple drives are accessed simultaneously 1 With RAID 1 mirroring each drive in the system must be duplicated which requires more time and resources than striping Performance is impai
90. n eee n een n nent een e teen ete e een eneees 363 Page 10 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Table of Contents 11 5 9 Enabling Drive Security Using LKM 0 cece cee cece cee rene eee ene n nen ete ede deed ene eb eee eneeeteees 364 11 5 10 Changing the Drive Security Settings cece ccc ene eee nee nee ene been ene e eee e ee ee ene eneneeenes 367 115 11 Disabling Drive Security s saicice es icna ce wie Giide va nie E lene ta biaiealyieulele waaue debi EAT EEE E TAAT ERAT 368 11 5 12 Importing or Clearing a Foreign Configuration cece cece eee n ene nen een ene n ene e ne eneeneneenees 369 Appendix A Events and Messages 2 cece cence ne nnn nn nnn EEE EEE enn Ene d Ene te Ene eb een en eee e en Ebene eS 373 AN Error LevelSiicyccowncadasalewanies deca gdiietvlnaandagadnaeewieekeae EE cab agesauslelelelan debag aad hater aaa daa aa etna ce maa Agee wee alan 373 A2 Event MESSAGES morerei assrstaie EE EVANTA neta rev onarad EE i luo ogni atte nas out thon E E E TA EEE E 373 Appendix B MegaCLl Error Messages 5 0c0 s ncaciaadeyn ee cate dae N68 male dig Riscnye bie blaeiereg vines Fae delay Midd Wh ene eeneeiey Eenae neue ton 387 B 1 Error Messages and Descriptions 6 cece cece cee ne nee nen n tence n ened ene En ee eee ene eden e eben en ben eneeee 387 Appendix G Glossary isi eniris tntu eee ea adin dese s EEEE baka kaatbowad died
91. no additional cost in dollars or time to erase data using the Instant Secure Erase feature You can change the encryption key for all MegaRAID RAID controllers that are connected to encrypted drives All encrypted drives whether locked or unlocked always have an encryption key This key is set by the drive and is always active When the drive is unlocked the data to host from the drive on reads and from the host to the drive cache on writes is always provided However when resting on the drive platters the data is always encrypted by the drive You might not want to lock your drives because you have to manage a password if they are locked Even if you do not lock the drives there is still a benefit to using encrypted disks If you are concerned about data theft or other security issues you might already invest in drive disposal costs and there are benefits to using SafeStore encryption over other technologies that exists today both in terms of the security provided and time saved LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 3 SafeStore Disk Encryption Instant Secure Erase If the encryption key on the drive changes the drive cannot decrypt the data on the platters effectively erasing the data on the disks The National Institute of Standards and Technology http www nist gov values this type of data erasure above secure erase and
92. of another factor For example RAID 1 mirroring provides excellent fault tolerance but requires a redundant drive The following subsections describe how to use the RAID levels to maximize virtual drive availability fault tolerance virtual drive performance and virtual drive capacity 2 6 1 Maximizing Fault Tolerance Fault tolerance is achieved through the ability to perform automatic and transparent rebuilds using hot spare drives and hot swaps A hot spare drive is an unused online available drive that the RAID controller instantly plugs into the system when an active drive fails After the hot spare is automatically moved into the RAID drive group the failed drive is automatically rebuilt on the spare drive The RAID drive group continues to handle requests while the rebuild occurs A hot swap is the manual substitution of a replacement unit in a disk subsystem for a defective one where the substitution can be performed while the subsystem is running hot swap drives Auto Rebuild in the WebBIOS Configuration Utility allows a failed drive to be replaced and automatically rebuilt by hot swapping the drive in the same drive bay The RAID drive group continues to handle requests while the rebuild occurs providing a high degree of fault tolerance and zero downtime Table 15 RAID Levels and Fault Tolerance RAID Fault Tolerance Level 0 Does not provide fault tolerance All data is lost if any drive fails Disk striping wri
93. of more than one drive group or a combination of any two of these conditions Fault tolerance is the capability of the subsystem to undergo a drive failure or failures without compromising data integrity and processing capability The RAID controller provides this support through redundant drive groups in RAID levels 1 5 6 10 50 and 60 The system can still work properly even with drive failure in a drive group though performance can be degraded to some extent In a span of RAID 1 drive groups each RAID 1 drive group has two drives and can tolerate one drive failure The span of RAID 1 drive groups can contain up to 32 drives and tolerate up to 16 drive failures one in each drive group A RAID 5 drive group can tolerate one drive failure in each RAID 5 drive group A RAID 6 drive group can tolerate up to two drive failures Each spanned RAID 10 virtual drive can tolerate multiple drive failures as long as each failure is in a separate drive group A RAID 50 virtual drive can tolerate two drive failures as long as each failure is in a separate drive group RAID 60 drive groups can tolerate up to two drive failures in each drive group NOTE RAID level 0 is not fault tolerant If a drive in a RAID 0 drive group fails the whole virtual drive all drives associated with the virtual drive fails Fault tolerance is often associated with system availability because it allows the system to be available during the failures However this m
94. of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window Select Go To gt Controller gt Power Settings from the menu bar The Power Settings dialog box displays as shown in the following figure fax Lsis Description Modify the power management settings The controller includes Dimmer SwitchTM technology that conserves energy by placing certain unused drives into powersave mode The controller will automatically spin up drives from powersave mode whenever necessary Specify the spin down time delay below For the drives to spin down automatically after the specified time Spin down time delay 24 Minutes Ok Cancel Figure 157 Power Save Mode Check box 3 Click the check box Allow unconfigured drives to enter Power Save mode and then click OK The second Power Settings screen appears as shown in the following figure LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 8 Configuration Changing Power Settings flax Lsis Description Modify the power management settings The controller includes Dimmer SwitchTM technology that conserves energy by placing certain unused drives into powersave mode The controller will automatically spin up drives From powersave mode whenever necessary Specify the spin down time delay below for the drives to spin down automatically after the specified time Spin down time delay 30 Minutes Ok Cancel Figure 158 Spin Down Time Delay S
95. on virtual drives appear in the left panel of the Group Show Progress window and operations on drives appear in the right panel The following operations appear in this window Background or foreground initialization of a virtual drive see Section 10 1 Initializing a Virtual Drive m Rebuild see Section 10 4 Rebuilding a Drive Modify Drive Group see Section 8 7 Changing a Virtual Drive Configuration Page 311 Chapter 9 Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices Monitoring Rebuilds and Other MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Processes m Check Consistency see Section 10 2 Running a Consistency Check 2 Optional Click Abort All to abort all ongoing processes 3 Click Close to close the window Page 312 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 10 Maintaining and Managing Storage Configurations Initializing a Virtual Drive Chapter 10 Maintaining and Managing Storage Configurations This chapter explains how to use MegaRAID Storage Manager software to maintain and manage storage configurations 10 1 Initializing a Virtual Drive To initialize a virtual drive after completing the configuration process follow these A Steps 1 Select the Logical tab in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager main menu and click the icon of the virtual drive that you want to initialize 2 Select Go To gt Virtual Drive gt Start Initialization The initialize dialog
96. operating systems are supported for the NetWare SCO and Solaris operating systems as well For the SCO OpenServer and SCO UnixWare operating systems LSI provides an executable file that you can execute from any folder and an image of the same executable file on a floppy drive The image filename is MegaCLI image The floppy disk is provided so that you can distribute MegaCLI and install the executable file later as needed LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 5 3 Command Line Abbreviations and Conventions 5 3 1 Abbreviations Used in the Command Line 5 3 2 Conventions LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Command Line Abbreviations and Conventions For the Solaris operating system LSI releases MegaCLl as a package that can be installed like any other package installation in Solaris For the Novell NetWare operating system LSI provides an executable file MegaCLI n1m that you can execute from any folder No installation is required The output of all of the commands appears in the console window This section explains the abbreviations and conventions used with MegaCLl Configuration Utility commands The following table lists the abbreviations for the virtual drive parameters used in the following sections Table 23 Command Line Abbreviations Abbreviation Description WB WriteBack write policy WT WriteThrou
97. option and mode 1 Click Configuration Wizard on the WebBIOS main screen The first Configuration Wizard screen appears as shown in Figure 29 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Creating a Storage Configuration Figure 29 WebBIOS Configuration Wizard Screen 2 Select a configuration option CAUTION If you choose the first or second option all existing data in the configuration will be deleted Make a backup of any data that you want to keep before you choose an option Clear Configuration Clears the existing configuration New Configuration Clears the existing configuration and lets you create a new configuration Add Configuration Retains the existing storage configuration and adds new drives to it this does not cause any data loss 3 Click Next 4 The Convert JBOD Drives to Unconfigured Drives screen appears as shown in Figure 30 NOTE The JBOD Drives to Unconfigured Drives screen does not appear for MR cards LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 65 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Creating a Storage Configuration MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Enclosure Slot 5 SAS HDD 136 732 GB JBOD Figure 30 JBOD Drives to Unconfigured Good Screen 5 Click Next A dialog box warns that you will lose data if you select Clear Configuration or New Configuration The WebBIOS Con
98. other storage components Display ongoing progress for operations on drives and virtual drives Change properties for the virtual drives and drives for the controller and other storage components Set retrieve and verify controller default settings Change the firmware on the controllers Monitor the RAID storage systems Support RAID levels 0 1 5 6 10 50 and 60 depending on the RAID controller Create and use scripts with the scriptable CLI tool Configure drive into groups and virtual drives on the controller Display configuration information for the controller drives and virtual drives Change virtual drive properties on the controller Change drive properties on the controller Display controller properties Load configuration to the controller from a file Save the controller configuration to a file Start or stop a rebuild consistency check CC or initialization operation Enable or disable a background initialization BGI Page 173 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Novell NetWare SCO Solaris FreeBSD and DOS MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Operating System Support 5 2 Novell NetWare SCO Solaris FreeBSD and DOS Operating System Support Page 174 Stop or display an ongoing background initialization Start or display a reconstruction Start or stop patrol read Set and retrieve patrol read related settings Flash new firmware on the SAS RAID controller Read and program NVRAM and flash memory directly int
99. physical devices enclosures and other items per SNMP request The SNMP application monitors these devices for issues that might require administrative attention This section describes the installation and configuration of the LSI MegaRAID SNMP agent on Linux Solaris and Windows operating systems The LSI SNMP agent application depends upon the standard SNMP Utils package Please make sure that the SNMP Util package is present in the system before you install LSI SNMP agent RPM The SNMP Util package includes the RPM s net snmp libs net snmp utils and additional dependent rpm s Make sure that these RPM s are installed from the operating system media before you install the LSI SNMP agent RPM This section explains how to install and configure SAS SNMP Agent for the SUSE Linux and Red Hat Linux operating systems To do this perform the following steps NOTE This procedure requires that you have Net SNMP agent installed on the Linux machine NOTE The RPM has not been created to support U version The RPM U will probably fail with this RPM 1 Install LSI SAS SNMP Agent using the rpm ivh lt sas rpm gt command NOTE After installation find the SAS MIB file LST AdapterSAS mib under the etc 1si_mrdsnmp sas directory LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 6 MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation Insta
100. process in the LSI Advanced Software License Management Portal Figure 214 Confirm Rehosting 6 Select acknowledge that I have completed the re hosting process in the LSI Advanced Software License Management Portal check box if you want to complete the rehosting process This makes sure that the advanced software features are transferred to the controller 7 Click Cancel if you do not want the re hosting process When you want to deactivate a trial software use the Deactivate All Trial Software wizard Perform the following steps to enable the deactivate trial software button 1 Click the Deactivate All Trial Software button in the Manage MegaRAID Advanced Software Options wizard as shown in Figure 200 The Deactivate All Trial Software Confirmation dialog box appears as shown in the following figure Page 331 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software Recovery Advanced Software MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Deactivate All Trial Software Confirmation The following trial software products will be deactivated Advanced Software MegaRAID Recovery Power Save Drive Security Are you sure you want to deactivate CI Confirm Figure 215 Deactivate All Trial Software 2 Select the Confirm check box if you want to deactivate the software which are used with a trial key 3 Click Yes The trial software is deactivated 11 2 10 MegaRAID Recovery MegaRAID Recovery also known as Snapshot o
101. provides automatic protection for the boot volume You can use the Recovery feature to take a snapshot of a volume and to restore a volume or file See Section 4 10 Using MegaRAID Recovery for the MegaRAID Recovery procedure Select Expand to increase the size of a virtual drive to occupy the remaining capacity in the drive group In addition you can add drives to the virtual drive in order to increase capacity See Section 4 9 Expanding a Virtual Drive for the procedure you can use to expand a virtual drive CAUTION Before you change a virtual drive configuration back up any data on the virtual drive that you want to save The Physical Drive screen displays the properties of a selected drive and enables you to perform operations on the drive There are two ways to access the Physical Drive screen On the main menu screen click on a drive in the right panel under the heading Physical Drives On the main menu screen click on Physical Drives in the left panel to display the Physical Drive screen Then click on a drive in the right panel Click on the Properties button and click Go The properties for the selected drive displays Figure 86 shows the Physical Drive screen Page 131 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Viewing and Changing Device Properties MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide RiegaRAID BIOS Config Utility Controller Properties eug k Propertie Battery Backup Non Coercion Mode None wj Set Fa
102. recorded the security settings for future reference and then click Yes to confirm that you want to enable drive security on this controller and have recorded the security settings for future reference MSM enables drive security and returns you to the main menu Perform the following steps to change the encryption settings for the security key identifier security key and password 1 Select the Physical View tab in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager main menu and click a controller icon 2 Select Go To gt Controller gt Change Drive Security The Change Security Settings Introduction screen appears This screen lists the actions you can perform which include editing the security key identifier security key and the password 3 Click Next The Change Security Settings Security Key ID screen appears 4 Keep the existing security key identifier or enter a new security key identifier NOTE If you change the security key LSI highly recommends that you change the security key identifier Otherwise you cannot differentiate between the security keys 5 Click Next Page 367 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software LSI SafeStore Encryption Services MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide The Change Security Settings Security Key screen appears 6 Click Use the existing drive security key to use the existing drive security key or enter a new security key and then enter the new security key again to confirm
103. represents a major cost for data centers The new MegaRAID Dimmer Switch reduces the power consumption of the devices connected to a MegaRAID controller This helps to share resources more efficiently and lower costs With Dimmer Switch any unconfigured drive connected to a MegaRAID controller is spun down after 30 minutes of inactivity reducing its power usage Spun down drives are spun up automatically when you create a configuration using those drives Significant challenges face operating system and platform developers to innovate using the legacy PC AT BIOS boot environment These include memory constraints maintenance challenges and increased complexities due to a lack of industry wide standards To handle these challenges the Unified Extensible Firmware Interface UEFI was developed to do the following Define a clean interface between operating systems and the hardware platform at boot time Support an architecture independent mechanism for initializing add in cards UEFI 2 0 provides MegaRAID customers with expanded platform support The MegaRAID UEFI 2 0 driver a boot service device driver handles block IO requests and SCSI pass through commands SPT and offers the ability to launch pre boot MegaRAID management applications through a driver configuration protocol DCP The UEFI driver also supports driver diagnostic protocol which allows administrators to access pre boot diagnostics There are three main scenarios
104. rio wte tad 5 Gaii Dina Cea wets Poy verte bad we e 5 Gine O brdesse SISA Set L S so nna Power Sate Properties Q besse ISNA St L S Pbcwere MONSO St 4S Spes a baar se ned ee weg Q idere SHOES 16 SSS siine it maoa sar setae s Yma Gretaimotry i mysa o Med Cahe Pakes ixango Sapha Ragertary TLS Cyin 2 Gen O idare seos ha Se 7 5 Ameer testte Setati Cher tend Q bosse SONINN Re A S gt O bdeave sonnas ga Se 9 5 Aek Lc Contr ome Bans MAE 1 pe sepeiey te tend Read cn bebott cp rcatgredtons a 4 Frape tars Dier oe te Cetin of det Spat babe J gt biore Lay Wcease SOWING Set 1 ete Paley CS dd sape w D base SPOS 16 t A S D bronze IOW 16 SE 11 P bss asst St 2 t Figure 222 Snapshot Base details You can create snapshots delete snapshots create views and also edit pause or delete schedules using the Manage Snapshots wizard 1 Select Go To gt Virtual Drive gt Manage Snapshot wizard on the menu bar as shown in Figure 223 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software Recovery Advanced Software Manage Snapshots LSist gt Virtual Drive 0 271 375 GB Optimal Next snapshot June 1 12 00AM Edit schedule Status Optimal Capacity used IEA View Details a View name view Ti
105. s at lx 0x0030 Information Background Initialization completed on s 0x0031 Fatal Background Initialization completed with uncorrectable errors on s 0x0032 Fatal Background Initialization detected uncorrectable double medium errors s at lx on s 0x0033 Critical Background Initialization failed on s 0x0034 Progress Background Initialization progress on s is s 0x0035 Information Background Initialization started on s 0x0036 Information Policy change on s from s to s 0x0038 Warning Consistency Check aborted on s 0x0039 Warning Consistency Check corrected medium error s at lx 0x003a Information Consistency Check done on s 0x003b Information Consistency Check done with corrections on s 0x003c Fatal Consistency Check detected uncorrectable double medium errors s at lx on s 0x003d Critical Consistency Check failed on s 0x003e Fatal Consistency Check completed with uncorrectable data on s 0x003f Warning Consistency Check found inconsistent parity on s at strip lx 0x0040 Warning Consistency Check inconsistency logging disabled on s too many inconsistencies 0x0041 Progress Consistency Check progress on s is s 0x0042 Information Consistency Check started on s 0x0043 Warning Initialization aborted on s 0x0044 Critical Initialization failed on s 0x0045 Progress Initialization progress on s is s 0x0046 Information Fast initialization started on s 0x0047 Information Full initialization started on s
106. saved in a text file on the event logger dialog The event descriptions might not be identical to a normal MSM Client because the descriptions come from the firmware through the provider There is no filtering of events unlike Monitor Service Refreshing of the MSM GUI after any updates on the firmware is slower for a client connected to VMWare ESXi hosts compared to one connected to Windows Linux Solaris hosts Remote discovery For networks that do not have DNS configured the hosts file in the machine on which MSM is installed must be edited as follows Add an entry to map the VMWare host s IP address with the hostname This is for the discovery to happen correctly In the absence of this entry the VMWare host would be discovered as 0 0 0 0 Page 239 Chapter 6 MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation Installing and Configur MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide ing a CIM Provider 6 6 Installing and Configuring a CIM Provider 6 6 1 Installing a CIM SAS Storage Provider on Linux Page 240 Add an entry to map its own IP address not the loop back address with the Hostname This is to ensure that the Alert Event Notifications AENs are delivered correctly For networks that has DNS configured the hosts file in the machine on which MSM is installed must be edited as follows When you do the initial configurations for the VMWare host provide the correct DNS server IP address
107. screen The Drive Security Settings screen appears as shown in the following figure Page 110 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 4 WebBIOS Configuration Utility Selecting SafeStore Encryption Services Security Options Figure65 Driver Security Settings Screen 2 To enable the drive security settings select Enable drive security and click Accept The Drive Security Choose mode wizard appears as shown in the following figure This wizard allows you to choose the security key management mode External Key Management EKM mode Local Key Management LKM mode Figure 66 Drive Security Choose mode Page 111 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Selecting SafeStore Encryption Services Security MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Options 3 Select EKM in the Drive Security Choose mode wizard 4 Click OK 5 Click OK the system asks you for a restart The restart message appears as shown in Figure 71 6 If you select LKM in Drive Security Choose mode wizard Figure 66 the screen used to create a security key identifier appears as shown in the following figure Figure 67 Enable Drive Security Enter Security Key ID Screen 7 Accept the default security key ID or enter a new security key ID 8 Click Next The Enable Drive Security Enter Security Key screen appears as shown
108. segment is determined by the stripe size RAID 0 offers high bandwidth NOTE RAID level 0 is not fault tolerant If a drive in a RAID 0 drive group fails the whole virtual drive all drives associated with the virtual drive will fail By breaking up a large file into smaller segments the RAID controller can use both SAS drives and SATA drives to read or write the file faster RAID 0 involves no parity calculations to complicate the write operation This makes RAID 0 ideal for applications that require high bandwidth but do not require fault tolerance Table 7 provides an overview of RAID 0 Figure 7 provides a graphic example of a RAID 0 drive group Table 7 RAID 0 Overview Uses Provides high data throughput especially for large files Any environment that does not require fault tolerance Strong Points Provides increased data throughput for large files No capacity loss penalty for parity Weak Points Does not provide fault tolerance or high bandwidth All data lost if any drive fails Drives 1 to 32 Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3 Segment 4 Segment 5 Segment 6 Segment 7 Segment 8 Figure 7 RAID 0 Drive Group Example with Two Drives 2 5 4 RAID 1 In RAID 1 the RAID controller duplicates all data from one drive to a second drive in the drive group RAID 1 supports an even number of drives from 2 through 32 in a single span RAID 1 provides complete data redundancy but at the cost of doubling the required
109. setting is recommended in Standard mode WThru In Writethrough mode the controller sends a data transfer completion signal to the host when the drive subsystem has received all of the data ina transaction This is the default Bad BBU Select this mode if you want the controller to use Writeback mode but the controller has no BBU or the BBU is bad If you do not choose this option the controller firmware automatically switches to Writethrough mode if it detects a bad or missing BBU CAUTION LSI allows Writeback mode to be used with or without a battery LSI recommends that you use either a battery to protect the controller cache or an UPS to protect the entire system If you do not use a battery or a UPS and there is a power failure you risk losing the data in the controller cache 10 Policy The IO Policy applies to reads on a specific virtual drive It does not affect the read ahead cache Direct In Direct I O mode reads are not buffered in cache memory Data is transferred to the cache and the host concurrently If the same data block is read again it comes from cache memory This is the default Cached In Cached I O mode all reads are buffered in cache memory Drive Policy Specify the drive cache policy Enable Enable the drive cache Disable Disable the drive cache NoChange Leave the current drive cache policy as is This drive policy is the default Disable BGI Specify the background initialization st
110. stand alone drive Drives in JBOD drive state are not part of the RAID configuration because they do not have valid DDF records The operating system can install and run anything on JBOD drives Automatic rebuilds always occur when the drive slot status changes for example when you insert a drive or remove a drive so that a hot spare can be used However a new drive in JBOD drive state without a valid DDF record will not perform an automatic rebuild To start an automatic rebuild on the new JBOD drive you must change the drive state from JBOD to Unconfigured Good Rebuilds start only on Unconfigured Good drives After you set the drive state to Unconfigured Good the drive state information always remains on the drive and you can use the drive for configuration See Section 4 12 3 3 Troubleshooting Information for more information about DDF and metadata This section helps you change the power save settings using the Dimmer Switch feature The power savings is done by reducing power consumption of drives that are not in use by spinning down the unconfigured drives hot spares and configured drives Perform the following steps to change the power savings feature 1 Select the Controller Properties option from the main WebBIOS screen as shown in Figure 15 The Controller Information screen appears as shown in the following figure LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide LSI Corpor
111. table entries for the virtual drive s on the selected adapter s Use the command in the following table to display the list of virtual drives that have preserved cache Preserved cache is cache that remains in the controller cache after a drive goes offline or missing and that has not been saved to a drive yet You can reboot and manage the preserved cache Table 83 Display the List of Virtual Drives with Preserved Cache Convention MegaCli GetPreservedCacheList aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Display the list of virtual drives that have preserved cache Use the command in the following table to discard the preserved cache of a virtual drive s Table 84 Discard the Preserved Cache of a Virtual Drive s Convention MegaCli DiscardPreservedCach Lx L0 1 2 Lall force aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Discard the preserved cache of the virtual drive s Use the command in the following table to expand a virtual drive Table 85 Discard the Preserved Cache of a Virtual Drive s Convention MegaCli LdExpansion pN dontExpandArray Lx L0O 1 2 Lall aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Expands the virtual drive within the existing array or beyond the size of the existing array if you replace the drives with larger drives pN Denotes the percentage of the array to use to expand the virtual drive N ranges from 0 to 100 percent For example p30 indicates expansion up to 30 percent of availabl
112. tale Ea 313 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 9 Table of Contents MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 10 2 Running a Consistency CHECK asa dae idence naana EEE A ala veered ebaw EE EEEE EE E AEA EREE AANE 314 10 2 1 Setting the Consistency Check Settings 00 ccc ee cece cece enn e denen ceed ence beeen ete eneeneenes 315 10 2 2 Scheduling Consistency Check fixes vscntaee sere entanda t ONE KEnn ers ea EN EEEE ENEE ees EEEE EE EEA evaw crue 316 10 2 3 Running a Group Consistency Check 2 00 c cece cece nee cence ene nent nee eben een e eens teen een eenes 317 10 3 Scanning for NEW Drives g 0cc05 o cecescnesed nis nang A se neh ebend aud Meee keumended deme kan chance EEEE EAA EEEN 318 TO Rebuilding a Drive essre rnense pects oak cain hess nae oak oa baldais aoe dk doduleDunilas sade ne pa diane eaind oe aaa plein ew ea dale EENE eae 318 10 5 Making a Drive Offline Or Missing 0 c treri ence ene nee AEE EEEE EEE TENE ERNA 319 10 6 Upgrading the Firmware 23 ccessasciadasign vavavacaddsedehen dadabeedaddcavwadbale Pe awaese deans os behav endow ceed nan a gaa obs 319 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software 0c c cece cece ee ne nnn nee enn ene teen eee e ene n eet ene e eee eeee 321 11 1 MegaRAID Advanced Software 4accccaemiga sd tienes enn nde eteh ls A edie eda nedawed eu eganinnbenenel akan ed nets 321 11 2 Recovery Advanced Software eccsscisiasicSav ceva reren EREE EE
113. talk to your Pv2c read only access k bits oid 172 428 157 149 FEAE E aT at AE AE AE Ea ETE HT F b Add a readwrite community name and client hostname ipaddress under SECTION Access Control Setup in etc sma snmp snmpd conf file as shown in the following excerpt EAEE EEEH FE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE FE FE AE AEAEE FE F SECTION Access Control This section defines who running snmp agent rocommunity a SNMPv1 SN community name arguments community default hostname rwcommunity snmpclient networ Setup is allowed to talk to your Pv2c read only access k bits oid 172 28 157 149 EAEE EEE FE AE AE AE AE AE AE FE AE AE AE AE AE AE FE AE AEAEE FE F 3 Start the SMA service by using the foll owing command svcadm enable svc application management sma default NOTE Refer to the command man snmpd conf for more information about configuring the snmpd conf file Page 245 Chapter 6 MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation Installing and Configur MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide ing an SNM
114. the Snapshot Repository field LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software Recovery Advanced Software Enable MegaRAID Recovery f LSis Virtual Drive 2 136 219 GB Optimal Select an existing virtual drive or create a new virtual drive to use as the snapshot repository which will hold the snapshot related information for this virtual drive The snapshot repository should only be used for snapshot data Snapshot Repository Name Status Available Capacity Total capacity VD_3 Optimal 136 210 GB 136 219 GB D_4 Optimal 136 210 GB 136 219 GB Repo_1 Optimal 1 000 MB 271 375 GB Specify the amount of capacity to allocate from the snapshot repository Be careful to allocate sufficient capacity because you cannot change it later without losing snapshot data Tips For allocating capacity When allocating capacity consider the expected percentage of data that will change between snapshots times the number of snapshots retained up to You may want to leave some available capacity on the snapshot repository For a future snapshot view The capacity for writes to a view must come From available capacity on the snapshot repository Select Capacity Approximately 0 of data may change for each of 8 snapshots Figure 217 Enable MegaRAID Recovery Wizard The Snapshot Re
115. the device I O buses Typically when a drive fails or is expected to fail the data is rebuilt on a hot spare The failed drive is replaced with a new disk Then the data is copied from the hot spare to the new drive and the hot spare reverts from a rebuild drive to its original hot spare status The copyback operation runs as a background activity and the virtual drive is still available online to the host Table 103 Perform the Copyback Operation on the Selected Drive Convention MegaCli PDCpyBk Start Stop ShowProg ProgDsply PhysDrv E0 S0O aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Performs the copyback operation on the selected physical drive Start Initializes the copyback operation on the selected drive Stop Stops the copyback operation on the selected drive ShowP rog Displays a snapshot of the ongoing copyback operation ProgDsp1y Allows you to view the ongoing copyback operation The routine continues to display progress until at least one copyback is completed or a key is pressed Physdrv E0 S0 Specifies the physical drive enclosure and the slots for the drives The commands in this section are used for enclosures Use the command in the following table to display enclosure information for selected controller s Table 104 Display Enclosure Information Convention MegaCli EncInfo aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Displays information about the enclosure for the selected controller s Pag
116. the following table to display the PHY connection information for physical PHY M on the selected controller s Each PHY can form one side of the physical link in a connection with a PHY on a different device The physical link contains four wires that form two differential signal pairs One differential pair transmits signals and the other differential pair receives signals Both differential pairs operate simultaneously and allow concurrent data transmission in both the receive and the transmit directions PHYs are contained within ports A port can contain a single PHY or can contain multiple PHYs A narrow port contains a single PHY and a wide port contains multiple PHYs Table 108 Display PHY Connection Information Convention MegaCli PHYInfo phyM aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Displays PHY connection information for physical PHY M on the controller s The commands in this section are used to run diagnostic tests Use the command in the following table to start the controller diagnostic for a set amount of time Table 109 Start Diagnostics Setting Convention MegaCli AdpDiag val aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Sets the amount of time for the controller diagnostic to run Val Indicates the time in seconds for the controller diagnostic to run Use the command in the following table to start the battery test This command requires a system reboot Table 110 Start Battery Test Convention MegaCli AdpBatT
117. the format filename xml 4 Click Save The drive directory disappears 5 Click OK The backup configuration is saved and the Alert Notification Configuration screen closes 9 2 8 Loading Backup You can load all of the values from a previously saved backup into the dialog all tabs Configurations to edit or send to the monitor NOTE If you choose to load a backup configuration and the Configure Alerts dialog currently contains changes that have not yet been sent to the monitor the changes will be lost You are prompted to confirm your choice 1 On the Alerts Notification Configuration screen click the Alert Setting tab Mail Server tab or E mail tab 2 Click Load Backup A message warns that when you load a saved backup file all unsaved changes made in the current session will be lost 3 Click Yes The drive directory appears from which you can select a backup configuration to load 4 Select the backup configuration file it should be in xml format 5 Click Open The drive directory disappears 6 Click OK The backup configuration is loaded and the Alerts Notification Configuration screen closes 9 2 9 Adding E mail Addresses of The E mail tab portion of the Alerts Notification Configuration screen shows the e mail Recipients of Alert Notifications addresses of recipients of the alert notifications MegaRAID Storage Manager sends alert notifications to those e mail addresses Use the screen to add or rem
118. val EccBucketSize val EccBucketLeakRate val AbortCCOnError val AlarmEnb1 AlarmDsb1 AlarmSilence SMAR SSDSMARTCpyBkEnb1 oa AutoEnhancedImport CopyBackDsbl val val LoadBalance MaintainPdFailHistoryEnbl val RstrHotSpareOnInsert val EnblSpinDownUnConfigDrvs val DisableOCR val BootWithPinnedCache val Enbl AutoEnhancedImportDsbl CpyBkEnbl val val NCQEnb1 NCQDsbl1 AutoDetectBackPlaneDsbl ode val UseFDEOnlyEncrypt val DsblSpinDownHsp val SpinDownTime val EnableJBOD val DsblCacheBypass val useDiskActivityForLocate val SpinUpEncDrvCnt val SpinUpEncDelay val aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Sets the properties on the The possible settings are selected adapter s SpinUpEncDrvCnt Max number of drives within an enclosure to spin up at one time Values 0 to 255 SpinUpEncDelay Number of seconds to delay among spinup groups within an enclosure Values 0 to 255 5 22 3 Displays the Power Saving Use the command in the following table to display the power saving level on the virtual Level on the Virtual Disk disk Table 125 Displays the Power Saving Level on the Virtual Disk Convention MegaSCU LDSetPowerPolicy Default Automatic None MaximumWithCaching MaximumWithoutCaching Lx L0 1 2 Lall aN a0 1 2 aALL Descri
119. 0 c cece eee cece eee nen e eee e eee e eens been tenn eenenee 197 5 13 8 Delete Specified Virtual Drive s 2 0 2 0 0 cece cece cence nee n eee e end e eben eee n tenet eee eee een enee 198 5 13 9 Display the Free Spaces civsciens sag iico TEs siege Ranbicwd a aullh IEA NE ETE AE TEATA see oe een eds 198 5 14 Virtual Drive Related Options 3 0 0 scaiesnmouke oo eles O EREE EE EAN LN eh da ea Rh ede TEA EEE ened 198 5 14 1 Display Virtual Drive Information 6 0 cece cece eee n enn ence eden ete teen een been tenn e enone 198 5 14 2 Change the Virtual Drive Cache and Access Parameters cece cece cence eee cece nent cnet nent eee n ee eenenes 199 5 14 3 Display the Virtual Drive Cache and Access Parameters cece eee e ence e cnet e eee ence eee ene ene eeeenenenes 199 5 14 4 Manage Virtual Drives Initialization 02 22 0 cece cece cece nen ene nnn e eben e eee n eens n eet ene eeenenee 200 5 14 5 Manage a Consistency Check 0c cece cece need enn enn eee d Ene een eee e tbe d ete t ene ene nee 200 5 14 6 Schedule a Consistenicy Check ii sivessscsnied savbsvaesgeuedeveneaeaesa sae se waa eeee ce eNG OEREN ERVAREN EERE i 201 5 14 7 Manage a Background Initialization 0 cece cece cece nee n eee need e nee beeen cnet been ee nen enes 201 5 14 8 Perform a Virtual Drive Reconstruction 10 00 cece cece eee eee ene ene e eee etn eee e ene e ete nee e ete en een teens 202 5 14 9 Display Information a
120. 0 cece cece cece cere ee ne enn eee denne eden eens deeb ee eens nent en eeeeenee 240 6 6 1 Installing a CIM SAS Storage Provider on LINUX cece cece cece nee nee e nee e eee e tent eee e ene enenneenes 240 6 6 2 Installing a CIM SAS Storage Provider on Windows 0 cece cece nee eee ee eee need ene e eens e ene eneenennes 241 6 7 Installing and Configuring an SNMP Agent 0 cece ccc ee ne ene nee ene n eee e nent ened eben tent eset eneneeenes 242 6 7 1 Prerequisite for LSI SNMP Agent RPM Installation 0 cece cece cee cnet e ene eee n een e teen eee eneeneeneenes 242 6 7 2 Installing and Configuring an SNMP Agent on Linux 0 0 ccc eee cen eee teen nee eens eee n ene eneeneenes 242 6 7 3 Installing and Configuring an SNMP Agent on Solaris 0 cece cece eect eect e een ene ene e eee eneeneeeeenes 244 6 7 4 Installing an SNMP Agent on Windows 0 cece ccc e ne een ene n ened ee enn eee eden eens ee en ene eneeneenes 246 6 8 MegaRAID Storage Manager Support and Installation on Solaris 10 2 1 2 0 cece cece eee eee n ence tense eneeneeeeenes 247 6 8 1 Installing MegaRAID Storage Manager Software for Solaris 10 0 cece cece e ence e nee e eee e teen ene eneeneanes 247 6 8 2 Uninstalling MegaRAID Storage Manager Software for Solaris 10 0 ccc cece cece ene e cence eee e teen eenennes 247 6 9 Prerequisites to Running MSM Remote Administration 0 cc
121. 0 provides an overview of a RAID 6 drive group Table 10 RAID 6 Overview Uses Use for office automation and online customer service that requires fault tolerance Use for any application that has high read request rates but low write request rates Strong Points Provides data redundancy high read rates and good performance in most environments Can survive the loss of two drives or the loss of a drive while another drive is being rebuilt Provides the highest level of protection against drive failures of all of the RAID levels Read performance is similar to that of RAID 5 Weak Points Not well suited to tasks requiring a lot of writes A RAID 6 virtual drive has to generate two sets of parity data for each write operation which results in a significant decrease in performance during writes Drive performance is reduced during a drive rebuild Environments with few processes do not perform as well because the RAID overhead is not offset by the performance gains in handling simultaneous processes RAID 6 costs more because of the extra capacity required by using two parity blocks per stripe Drives 3 through 32 September 2010 Figure 2 5 7 shows a RAID 6 data layout The second set of parity drives are denoted by Q The P drives follow the RAID 5 parity scheme Page 35 Chapter 2 Introduction to RAID RAID Levels MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3 Segment 4 Parity P1 P4 Pari
122. 0156 01 Rev E December 2008 Added the overview chapter Updated the WebBlOS Configuration Utility MegaRAID Storage Manager and MegaCLI chapters 80 00156 01 Rev D April 2008 Updated the RAID overview section Updated the WebBIOS Configuration Utility and the MegaRAID Storage Manager Updated the MegaCLI commands 80 00156 01 Rev C July 2007 Updated operating system support for MegaCLl Version 2 80 00156 01 Rev B June 2007 Updated the WebBlOS Configuration Utility and the MegaRAID Storage Manager Updated the MegaCLI commands Added the RAID Version 2 0 introduction chapter 80 00156 01 Rev A August 2006 Corrected the procedure for creating RAID 10 and RAID 50 drive groups in the WebBlOS Configuration Utility Version 1 1 DB15 000339 00 December 2005 __ Initial release of this document Version 1 0 LSI the LSI logo MegaRAID CacheCade SafeStore Novell NetWare OpenServer Microsoft Windows Red Hat Linux and Dimmer Switch are trademarks or registered trademarks of LSI Corporation or its subsidiaries All other brand and product names may be trademarks of their respective companies This preliminary document describes a preproduction product and contains information that may change substantially for any final commercial release of the product LSI Corporation makes no express or implied representation or warranty as to the accuracy quality or completeness of information contained in this document and
123. 0x005e Progress Patrol Read progress on s is s Ox005f Fatal Patrol Read found an uncorrectable medium error on s at lx 0x0060 Critical Predictive failure CDB s 0x0061 Fatal Patrol Read puncturing bad block on s at lx 0x0062 Information Rebuild aborted by user on s 0x0063 Information Rebuild complete on s 0x0064 Information Rebuild complete on s 0x0065 Critical Rebuild failed on s due to source drive error 0x0066 Critical Rebuild failed on s due to target drive error 0x0067 Progress Rebuild progress on s is s 0x0068 Information Rebuild resumed on s 0x0069 Information Rebuild started on s 0x006a Information Rebuild automatically started on s 0x006b Critical Rebuild stopped on s due to loss of cluster ownership 0x006c Fatal Reassign write operation failed on s at lx 0x006d Fatal Unrecoverable medium error during rebuild on s at lx 0x006e Information Corrected medium error during recovery on s at lx 0x006f Fatal Unrecoverable medium error during recovery on s at lx 0x0070 Information Drive removed s 0x0071 Warning Unexpected sense s CDB s Sense s 0x0072 Information State change on s from s to s 0x0073 Information State change by user on s from s to s LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Appendix A Events and Messages Event Messages Table 135 Event Messages Continued
124. 0x07 Application already in use try later 0x08 Application not initialized 0x09 Given array index is invalid Ox0a Unable to add missing drive to array as row has no empty slots 0x0b Some of the CFG resources conflict with each other or the current config 0x0c Invalid device ID select timeout 0x0d Drive is too small for requested operation Ox0e Flash memory allocation failed OxOf Flash download already in progress 0x10 Flash operation failed 0x11 Flash image was bad 0x12 Downloaded flash image is incomplete 0x13 Flash OPEN was not done 0x14 Flash sequence is not active 0x15 Flush command failed 0x16 Specified application doesn t have host resident code LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 387 Appendix B MegaCLI Error Messages Page 388 Error Messages and Descriptions Table 136 Error Messages and Descriptions Continued MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Number Event Text 0x17 LD operation not possible CC is in progress 0x18 LD initialization in progress 0x19 LBA is out of range Oxla Maximum LDs are already configured 0x1b LD is not OPTIMAL Ox1c LD Rebuild is in progress Oxid LD is undergoing reconstruction Oxle LD RAID level is wrong for requested operation Ox1f Too many spares assigned 0x20 Scratc
125. 136 985 GB Unconfigured Good Figure 172 Add Drive s to the Current Configuration Screen 5 Click the check box next to any unconfigured drives that you want to add and then click Next NOTE The drive s you add must have the same capacity as or greater capacity than the drives already in the drive group or you cannot change the RAID level The Summary screen appears This screen shows the current settings and what the settings will be after the drives are added E Modify Drive Group Summary xi LSI 3K gt Review the summary and go back if you need to make corrections The Changes will be made when you click Finish Summary Current settings Post modification settings Drive group name Drive Group 4 RAID 0 Drive group name Drive Group 4 RAID 5 RAID level RAID 0 RAID level RAID 5 Virtual drive name Virtual drive name Total capacity 408 656 GB Total capacity 408 656 GB Number of drives 3 Number of drives 4 Cancel Back _Frish Help Figure 173 Modify Drive Group Summary Screen Page 288 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 8 Configuration Changing a Virtual Drive Configuration 6 Review the configuration information You can click Back if you need to change any selections 7 Click Finish to accept the changes A confirmation message appears The message states that this operation cannot be aborted and asks whether you want to con
126. 350 mah Full Charge Capacity remaining 98 Design Voltage 3700 mY Design Charge Capacity remaining 85 Device Nane 3150300 expected margin of error 25 Device Chenistry LION LSI101000G 2 26 2008 800 Properties Auto Learn Period days 30 Next Learn Time Not Available Learn Delay Intervalthrs 0 Auto Learn Hode mto W Capacity Info FullCharge Capacity 1176 m h Remaining Capacity 1150 mAh Figure 89 Battery Module Screen Most of the Battery Module properties are view only and are self explanatory In the lower right corner of the screen are the auto learn options A learning cycle is a battery calibration operation performed by the controller periodically to determine the condition of the battery You can change the learn delay interval the length of time between automatic learning cycles and the auto learn mode NOTE LSI recommends leaving the the learn delay interval and the auto learn mode at their default settings The learn delay interval is the length of time between automatic learning cycles Perform the following steps to change the interval a Open the drop down menu in the Auto Learn Mode field b Select the learn mode as Auto the default This is so the controller performs the learning cycle automatically c Change the number of hours in the Learn Delay Interval field You can delay the start of the learn cycles for up to 168 hours 7 days d Click Go to set the inte
127. 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Creating a Storage Configuration Figure 58 WebBIOS Virtual Drive Definition Screen 16 Change the virtual drive options from the defaults listed on the screen as needed Here are brief explanations of the virtual drive options RAID Level The drop down menu lists the possible RAID levels for the virtual drive Select RAID 60 Stripe Size The strip size is the portion of a stripe that resides on a single drive in the drive group The stripe consists of the data segments that the RAID controller writes across multiple drives not including parity drives For example consider a stripe that contains 64 KB of drive space and has 16 KB of data residing on each drive in the stripe In this case the stripe size is 64 KB and the strip size is 16 KB You can set the strip size to 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 and 1024 KB A larger strip size produces higher read performance If your computer regularly performs random read requests choose a smaller strip size The default is 64 KB Access Policy Select the type of data access that is allowed for this virtual drive RW Allow read write access Read Only Allow read only access This is the default Blocked Do not allow access Read Policy Specify the read policy for this virtual drive Normal This disables the read ahead capability This is the default LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 103 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration
128. 47 145 189 158 LSI MegaRAID SAS 92 va Properties Enable MegaRAID R Y Start Locating Virtual Drive E Drive Group 0 R General fr Virtual Drives Stop Locating Virtual Drive 8B Start Initialization ey eg Drives Enclosure Bobcat 38 Slot 1 SAS 136 985 GB Online Size S J Drive Group 1 RAID 0 Stripe Size i virtual Drives F Virtual Drive 0 136 469 GB Optimal I A Drives i Enclosure Bobcat 38 Slot 0 SAS 136 985 GB Online amp Drive Group 2 RAID 0 Virtual Drives i Virtual Drive 2 YD_2 136 000 GB Optimal Drives ee Polen Debat sa clk a Ar tae near en Anke Figure 216 Enable MegaRAID Recovery Menu Option Virtual Disk State 10 and Cache Policies Access Policy Disk Cache Policy The Enable MegaRAID Recovery Wizard appears as shown in Figure 217 This wizard allows you to select the virtual drive VD to use as the snapshot repository You can select an existing VD or create a new VD for the snapshot repository Select any one of the options to select or create a new VD Select the VD to use as the Snapshot Repository in the Snapshot Repository field from the Enable MegaRAID Recovery Wizard wizard as shown in Figure 217 Click the Create New button to create a new VD to use as the Snapshot Repository When you create a new VD the newly created VD gets appended to the existing rows in
129. 5 RAID 5 uses parity to provide redundancy for one drive failure without duplicating the contents of entire drives RAID 6 uses distributed parity and disk striping also but adds a second set of parity data so that it can survive up to two drive failures Segment 2 Segment 3 Segment 4 Segment 5 Parity 1 5 Segment 8 Segment 9 Segment 10 Parity 6 10 Segment 6 Segment 14 Segment 15 Parity 11 15 Segment 11 Segment 12 Segment 20 Parity 16 20 Segment 16 Segment 17 Segment 18 Parity 21 25 Segment 21 Segment 22 Segment 23 Segment 24 Segment 26 Segment 27 Segment 28 Segment 29 Segment 30 Note Parity is distributed across all drives in the drive group Figure 5 Example of Distributed Parity RAID 5 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 2 4 11 Disk Spanning 2 4 11 1 Spanning for RAID 00 RAID 10 RAID 50 and RAID 60 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 2 Introduction to RAID Components and Features Disk spanning allows multiple drives to function like one big drive Spanning overcomes lack of disk space and simplifies storage management by combining existing resources or adding relatively inexpensive resources For example four 20 GB drives can be combined to appear to the operating system as a single 80 GB drive Spanning alone does not provide reliability or performance enhancements Spanned virtual drives must have the same stripe size and must be contiguou
130. 75 GB Secured No Policies os Read ahead gj MisiCache ochange oa ee Default Write Write Through Current Write Write Through caanoe Operations Delete Locate oc AdyvOpers Disable MegaRAID Recovery Manage Snapshots Figure 100 Virtual Drive Screen 2 Click Manage Snapshots The Snapshot Settings screen appears as shown in Figure 101 Page 147 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Using MegaRAID Recovery MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide MegaRAID BIOS Config Utility Snapshot Snapshot Settings Automatically del he oldest snapshot Stop tracking snag Figure 101 Snapshot Settings Screen 3 Select the check box next to Take Snapshot on every Reboot option or select the Automatically delete the oldest snapshot option or select the Stop tracking snapshots using the radio button 4 Click Finish 4 10 6 Viewing Snapshot Properties You can view the properties of a snapshot such as the total capacity capacity used and capacity available Follow these steps to view snapshot properties 1 Click a virtual drive icon in the right panel on the WebBIOS CU main screen The Virtual Drive screen appears as shown in Figure 102 Page 148 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Using MegaRAID Recovery Strip Size 64 Capacity 67 843 GB Snapshot Properties Policies Acc
131. AID overhead is not offset by the performance gains in handling simultaneous processes 00 RAID 00 striping in a spanned drive group offers excellent performance RAID 00 breaks up data into smaller blocks and then writes a block to each drive in the drive groups Disk striping writes data across multiple drives instead of just one drive Striping involves partitioning each drive storage space into stripes that can vary in size from 8KB to 1024 KB These stripes are interleaved in a repeated sequential manner Disk striping enhances performance because multiple drives are accessed simultaneously Page 42 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 2 Introduction to RAID RAID Configuration Strategies Table 16 RAID Levels and Performance Continued RAID Level Performance 10 RAID 10 works best for data storage that need the enhanced I O performance of RAID 0 striped drive groups which provides high data transfer rates Spanning increases the capacity of the virtual drive and improves performance by doubling the number of spindles The system performance improves as the number of spans increases The maximum number of spans is eight As the storage space in the spans is filled the system stripes data over fewer and fewer spans and RAID performance degrades to that of a RAID 1 or RAID 5 drive group 50 RAID 50 works best when used with data that requires high reliability h
132. AS ee eee eee ee 191 5 11 7 Place Battery in Low Power Storage Mode eee cee cece nee cent e ned e beeen eee tebe t eee ee ee een eaee 191 5 11 8 Set BBU Properties seis wid bas a eTA RE we nea E casaken we deta eeNea ine Beaten dele ees 192 5 12 Options for Displaying Logs Kept at the Firmware Level 00 cece ccc cece eee ene ene en ete nee een ete eee eee e ee enee 192 5121 Event Log Management siioni sate soa ea EE EDE AE eas Saws A NEEE EEEE 192 5 12 2 Set BBU Terminal Logging sssssssssnesssererrssrrrsserrreseerreseererseerrrrrererreerrrrrererrrerrerrert 193 5 13 Configuration Related Options ieren er cece cee ne AEE EE E ETE EA Ea E EAER 193 5 13 1 Create a RAID Drive Group from All Unconfigured Good Drives 0 cece cence eee eee ene n eee eee e encase 193 5 13 2 Add RAID 0 1 5 or 6 Configuration a renererien cece cece een n ene tenn ene tenet EE EE REE ERE 195 5 13 3 Add RAID 10 50 or 60 Configuration 0 cece cence cence nent n needed ete n teen eben ene e een enee 196 5 13 4 Clear the Existing Configuration 0 ccc cece cece nee n ene nnn deen eee nen een ede t been nent nee 196 5 13 5 Save the Configuration on the Controller 0 ccc ee cece nce n eee tenet n eee n eee t bebe e eee e een enee 196 5 13 6 Restore the Configuration Data from File 0 cece ccc cece renee nen e eect eee e een n eben eee ee een enee 197 5 13 7 Manage Foreign Configuration Information
133. Application Scenarios and Messages After you click Next the Activate MegaRAID Advanced Software Summary wizard appears as shown in Figure 202 ELSE Depending on the relevant scenarios the application responds by displaying corresponding messages as shown in Application Scenarios and Messages After you enter the activation key and click Next as shown in Figure 201 the Activate MegaRAID Advanced Software Summary wizard displays the list of the advanced softwares along with their former status and new status in the controller 4 Page 324 The Advanced Software column displays the currently available software in the controller The Former Status column displays the status of the available advanced software prior to entering the activation key The New Status column displays the status of the available advanced software after entering the activation key Review the summary and go back if you need to make corrections Summary 3 g Advanced Software Option Former Status New Status MegaRAID FastPath Enabled Enabled MegaRAID Recovery Enabled Enabled MegaRAID CacheCade Enabled Enabled MegaRAID SafeStore Enabled Enabled MegaRAID RAIDS Enabled Enabled MegaRAID RAIDS Enabled Enabled Figure 202 Activate MegaRAID Advanced Software Summary Click Finish The status of the advanced software is enabled and the advanced features are secured in the Key Vault Click Cancel to
134. CAUTION If you forget the security key you will lose access to your data Be sure to record your security key information You might need to enter the security key to perform certain operations The security key is case sensitive It must be between 8 and 32 characters and contain at least one number one lowercase letter one uppercase letter and one non alphanumeric character e g lt gt The space character is not permitted NOTE Non US keyboard users must be careful not to enter DBCS characters in the security key field Firmware works with the ASCII character set only 7 Click Next The Authenticate Drive Security Settings Screen appears Authentification is required for the changes that you requested to the drive security settings 8 Enter the current security key to authenticate the changes The Change Security Settings Password screen appears 9 If you choose to click the option to use a password in addition to the security key 10 If you chose to use a password either enter the existing password or enter a new password and enter the password again to confirm The text box for the passphrase can hold up to 32 characters The key must be at least eight characters The next screen that appears describes the changes you made and asks you whether you want to confirm these changes 11 Click the check box to confirm that you have recorded the security settings for future reference and then click Yes to confirm
135. Configuration MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Figure 54 WebBIOS Virtual Drive Definition Screen 16 Change the virtual drive options from the defaults listed on the screen as needed Here are brief explanations of the virtual drive options RAID Level The drop down menu lists the possible RAID levels for the virtual drive Select RAID 50 Strip Size The strip size is the portion of a stripe that resides on a single drive in the drive group The stripe consists of the data segments that the RAID controller writes across multiple drives not including parity drives For example consider a stripe that contains 64 KB of drive space and has 16 KB of data residing on each drive in the stripe In this case the stripe size is 64 KB and the strip size is 16 KB You can set the strip size to 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 and 1024 KB A larger strip size produces higher read performance If your computer regularly performs random read requests choose a smaller strip size The default is 64 KB Access Policy Select the type of data access that is allowed for this virtual drive RW Allow read write access Read Only Allow read only access This is the default Blocked Do not allow access Read Policy Specify the read policy for this virtual drive Normal This disables the read ahead capability This is the default Ahead This enables read ahead capability which allows the controller to read sequentially ahead of requested d
136. D the import will fail because the last 448 MB of your data will be overwritten and the data lost Page 159 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Managing Configurations MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 4 12 4 Importing Foreign Configurations 4 12 5 Import Foreign Drives in EKM EKM Secured Locked Drives Page 160 If your IR virtual drive has only 64 MB for metadata at the end of the drive you cannot import the virtual drive into MegaRAID You need to use another upgrade method such as backup restore to the upgraded virtual drive type In order to import an IR virtual drive into a MegaRAID system use the Foreign Configuration Preview screen to import or clear the foreign configuration The import procedure and the clear procedure are described in Section 4 12 3 Importing or Clearing a Foreign Configuration After you create a security key you can run a scan for a foreign configuration and import a locked configuration You can import unsecured or unlocked configurations when security is disabled A foreign configuration is a RAID configuration that already exists on a replacement set of drives that you install in a computer system You can use the WebBIOS utility to import the existing configuration to the RAID controller or clear the configuration so you can create a new one See Section 4 12 3 Importing or Clearing a Foreign Configuration for the procedures used to import or clear a foreign configuration To imp
137. D 0 to RAID 5 you need to add at least 1 drive s to the configuration Use the below table to add the drive s and click next to proceed Select the unconfigured drive to add rn Available Drives a Capacty status Enclosure Bobe 136 985 GB Unconfigured Good Figure 176 Add Drive s to the Current Configuration Screen 5 Select the unconfigured drive or drives to add and then click Next Page 291 Chapter 8 Configuration Changing a Virtual Drive Configuration MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 8 7 6 New Drives Attached to a MegaRAID Controller Page 292 NOTE The drive s you add must have the same capacity as or greater capacity than the drives already in the drive group or you cannot change the RAID level The Summary screen appears This screen shows the current settings and what the settings will be after the drives are added LSI gt Review the summary and go back if you need to make corrections The Changes will be made when you click Finish Summary Current settings Post modification settings Drive group name Drive Group 4 RAID 0 Drive group name Drive Group 4 RAID 5 RAID level RAID 0 RAID level RAID 5 Virtual drive name Virtual drive name Total capacity 408 656 GB Total capacity 408 656 GB Number of drives 3 Number of drives 4 Cancel Back _Frish Help Figure 177 Modify Drive Group Summary Screen 6 Review the configuration information You can click Back if you need
138. D Storage Manager software detects any new drives it displays a list of them on the screen If not it notifies you that no foreign configuration is found 3 Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the drive detection If a single drive in a RAID 1 RAID 5 RAID 10 or RAID 50 virtual drive fails the system is protected from data loss A RAID 6 virtual drive can survive two failed drives If hot spare disks are available a failed drive is rebuilt automatically without any user intervention A failed drive must be replaced and the data on the drive must be rebuilt on a new drive to restore the system to fault tolerance You can choose to rebuild the data on the failed drive if the drive is still operational If hot spare drives are available the failed drive is rebuilt automatically without any user intervention If a drive has failed a red circle appears to the right of the drive icon qj A small yellow circle appears to the right of the icon of the virtual drive that uses this drive B This indicates that the virtual drive is in a degraded state the data is still safe but data could be lost if another drive fails Follow these steps if you need to rebuild a drive Right click the icon of the failed drive and select Rebuild 2 Click Yes when the warning message appears If the drive is still good a rebuild will start You can monitor the progress of the rebuild in the Group Show Progress window by selecting Mana
139. DG 6 Click Next The Virtual Drive Definition screen appears as shown in Figure 36 You use this screen to select the RAID level strip size read policy and other attributes for the new virtual drives LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 73 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Creating a Storage Configuration MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide PiegaRAID BIOS Config Utility Conf ig Vizard Drive Group Definition Drives Drive Groups 7 4 d S H 6 74 B Slot 1 SAS HDD 67 843 GB On Enclosure MD100025 Slot 1 SAS i Slot 2 SAS HDD 67 643 GB On 4 Enclosure MD100Q 25 Slot 2 SAS Figure 36 WebBIOS Virtual Drive Definition Screen 7 Change the virtual drive options from the defaults listed on the screen as needed Here are brief explanations of the virtual drive options RAID Level The drop down menu lists the possible RAID levels for the virtual drive Select RAID 1 Strip Size The strip size is the portion of a stripe that resides on a single drive in the drive group The stripe consists of the data segments that the RAID controller writes across multiple drives not including parity drives For example consider a stripe that contains 64 KB of drive space and has 16 KB of data residing on each drive in the stripe In this case the stripe size is 64 KB and the strip size is 16 KB You can set the strip size to 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 and 1024 KB A larger strip size
140. Display BBU Capacity 5 11 4 Display BBU Design Parameters Page 190 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Use the command in the following table to display the BBU capacity for the selected controller s Table 55 Display BBU Capacity Information Convention Description MegaCli AdpBbuCmd GetBbuCapacityInfo aN a0 1 2 aALL Displays BBU capacity information The information displays in the following format BBU Capacity Info for Adapter x Relative State of Charge xx Absolute State of Charge xx Remaining Capacity xx mAh Full Charge Capacity xx mAh Run Time to Empty xxx Min Average Time to Empty xxx Min Average Time to Full xxx Min Cycle Count xx Max Error xx Use the command in the following table to display BBU design parameters for the selected controller s Table 56 Display BBU Design Parameters Convention MegaCli AdpBbuCmd GetBbuDesignInfo aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Displays information about the BBU design parameters The information displays in the following formats BBU Design Info for Adapter x Date of Manufacture mm dd yyyy Design Capacity xxx mAh Design Voltage mV Serial Number Oxhhhh Pack Stat Configuration Oxhhhh Manufacture Name XXXXXX String Device Name XXXXXX String Device Chemistry XXXXXX String LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 5 11 5 Display Current BBU Properties 5 11 6 Start BBU
141. DownUnConfigDrvs Enable spindown of unconfigured drives AutoEnhancedImportEnb1 Enable the automatic enhanced import of foreign drives AutoEnhancedImportDsb1 Disable the automatic enhanced import of foreign drives UseFDEOnlyEncrypt Use encryption on FDE drives only PrCorrectUncfgdAreas Page 184 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Controller Property Related Options 5 8 6 Display Specified Controller Use the command in the following table to display specified properties on the selected Properties controller s Table 42 Display Specified Controller Properties Convention MegaCli AdpGetProp CacheFlushInterval RebuildRate PatrolReadRate BgiRate CCRate ReconRate SpinupDriveCount SpinupDelay CoercionMode PredFailPolliInterval ClusterEnable BatWarnDsbl EccBucketSize EccBucketLeakRate EccBucketCount AlarmDsply AbortCCOnError AutoDetectBackPlaneDsbl CopyBackDsbl LoadBalanceMode SMARTCpyBkEnbl SSDSMARTCpyBkEnbl aintainPdFailHistoryEnbl EnblSpinDownUnConfigDrvs EnblSSDPatrolRead NCQDsply UseFDEOnlyEncrypt WBSupport AutoEnhancedImportDsbl PrCorrectUncfgdAreas DsblSpinDownUnConfigDrvs aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Displays the properties on the selected controller s EccBucketCount Count of single b
142. Drive security password from user is invalid 0x014a Warning Detected error with the remote battery connector cable 0x014b Information Power state change on PD s from s to s 0x014c Information Enclosure s element SES code 0x x status changed 0x014d Information PD s rebuild not possible as HDD CacheCade software mix is not supported in a drive group 0x014e Information Copyback cannot be started on PD s from s as HDD CacheCade software mix is not supported in a drive group 0x014f Information VD bad block table on s is cleared 0x0150 Caution SAS topology error Ox lx 0x0151 Information VD cluster of medium errors corrected for s at lx on s at lx 0x0152 Information Controller requests a host bus rescan 0x0153 Information Controller repurposed and factory defaults restored 0x0154 Information Drive security key binding updated 0x0155 Information Drive security is in EKM mode 0x0156 Warning Drive security failed to communicate with EKMS 0x0157 Information s needs key to be s s 0x0158 Warning s secure failed 0x0159 Critical Controller encountered a fatal error and was reset Ox015a Information Snapshots enabled on s Repository s 0x015b Information Snapshots disabled on s Repository s by the user 0x015c Critical Snapshots disabled on s Repository s due to a fatal error 0x015d Information Snapshot created on s at s 0x015e Information Snapshot deleted on s at s 0x015f Information View created at s to a
143. E A A N ETNE ote 30 24 17 Virtual Drive States s asesorio seniti Terai EEE E ceeded EEEE EE SEE E edie EEE A mala em 31 24 18 BED Codes ormie rei Te EA ANTEA oe ia TENRA A ELES EEV EEAS ENEE TEATE E 31 2 4 19 Enclosure ManageMent cece cece cence ne E E A EE A RR E EARE 31 25 IRAID LEVEIS A E E E E sleds ageene eemawlan ee 31 2 5 1 Summary of RAID Levels 4 4 cscteed sa bie bh del sa ten nbet bh labia deneitaddiddeee ets aweldedeawsdads leaeek ote 32 2 5 2 Selecting a RAIDILevVel 2 s iadesccrntaades nd iendstaodeaeeesdaesdaewas dds aaiedsaeesineen cage eae PENERE EEANN bee 32 25 RAID O ace wack abst shaw hen i ashen EEE gue odo abn walla ant om tino ey EE E er a sinh Dean ONE raha dle onetime abso Eat a ayo 33 D225 A RAID Wc sec EEE E EEEE rau dla anes Gules emu Rea Rua EE OL Ran Seat e a ER A Mme aeaa name ate nate 33 2 5 5 RAID 5 scan saganntacc ee ca nren Ciao Es VETRE Raed aeew alto Veale MMe earned Meee earn nes Webel ea nema awake 34 2 5 O RAID 6 eiaa cups sehe ewes edn ts noaas maculae anes E bd sao ametc chased Minin ou Canon bose eeren aa une aaeada 35 2 5 7 RAID OO seapea toc na pE EE EE singeieae souks AE EEEE PERTE ERA EEE ETEA EEA 36 2 5 0 RAIDMO arrene Er E E bam vend E aes E AINE EE EE E TENE LE 37 25 9 RAID 50 seieren enin eden sae sae E TERE EDETI EEE E PREE E AAEE ONERA EEA EREINEN 38 22910 RAID GO irse Eneee naea TO lading Sa Wau ead bah Seid a DAA gh BES A EEA E A EG 39 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010
144. F B81 SAS HE Ureotigaed Good Poesie HEL SAS HOE Orne PHI SAS GHEE Orire PB 4 HS BEE Ceive PRES HS BREE Cree OF B86 SAS ABE Ureettigaed Good Persae DY BT HS BLS Wrcotigaed Goad Foweeseve DY Si SAS BREE Ucortigaed Good Preset DY 58 3 SAS BRB Wreatgaed Good Ponerse DY Set 10 KS RHEE Uneeigaed Good Powersa DY St 11 HS 136733 Uneafigued Ged Powersave O Sih 12 SAS 88 386 Uncarhigned Good Ponerse Jexiplse B apebpaiying Sot 5 SAS 8 28668 Orire OY Sic SATA MSN earfierd Good Powersive i a acc a e AS Taara an aa aa a ma m a aar o Figure 136 MSM Physical View AA ia nasa manean ponni 7 2 1 3 Logical View The Logical view shows the hierarchy of controllers virtual drives and the drives and drive groups that make up the virtual drives The properties for these components appear in the right panel Figure 137 shows the Logical view Page 254 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 7 MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus MegaRAID Storage Manager Main Menu Q irdonge PANAS 1E Set 4 RS BES Cre O Erdosne SOKNA IEL Sat SAS 48 W R rire Erdosge SOOROLSAS 34 Sot 1 SAS 34 IEI B Urearigaed Good Pomersave Exconat PAOGUSRS ON Sot 6 SAS M INI E Uncatigand ood Ponerse Er naye SISAS 6 Sot 7 SAS SAIE GB Urcarhigaed Good Powrsave Except SOOHIOSAS 26 Set 6 SAS 68 986 B reartiq
145. FUNCIONS sss ds peg a ccsiaiecictg ai nTen a ENEON EN EEN EES EIEEE SHINE VETERE ENERE REENE EEE O vibWAS AED EATE elt 21 24 Components and Features ceriierisripreei tC ETE VEEE NEEE E EER E EE E ET EEA E REEE AE EA 21 2A NDrive Gro UDr ie oh ee AEE ES VTE EEEE E TEA EEE ERAAN TEAR E EARS 22 2A DN ital DVS ssor e E ETE A E E E A E N tema aeiteaic 22 24 3 Fault Tolerate scosese rentei t EPEN aE EEEE EE TENERE EEE E OE TESE 22 2 4 4 Consistency Check ooien en iA bacon goth E A A EE r E T E AA EE AAR 23 2 45 COpYDACK rire tiaro ii ienn EATA ERRA ES ATEAREN EN R ES EE TAREA Ea EAEE TRAA 23 2 4 6 Backgrotind Initialization sy i icsee sca tonns ee eE neon eae REAA AEE EE SNARARE EE edie ys 24 24 7 Patrol REAG s sseiwsnsnaswitgiilaoase vad pda V EAn an aA ESTESE ER EE EERE TT EES ERE A 25 24 8 DISK St PIM Oieee ieena r Pade a hl oe e a a a A A aa AA 25 24 9 Disk MINONO srscerereir rera tinera A E REEN E EE EEE AE Re ate A E AEE ANENE EE erg neste 25 DA MO PA ity ors E EE AEE A EE A E A ares bhnathoerialocndialetale 26 2441 Disk Spanning eenean aa E E ches ned EET E ao doe EE as O ead abe E EG 27 2412 Hot Spares eieaa nE EA EE ETE OEE N ETEA E ETE E ERE E ER ESAE 28 2413 Disk Rebuilds zerre indian otin e e aE E E OSEE Reda EET aN ENEE E EE aaa Ree 29 2414 Rebuild Rate s reerinis et poiran EE OEK ARRE ERIEN GERAR EREET EE REE EEE NEKEEN 30 ZA AS HOCS WAP airean a E T a a A ra E T E N S ees 30 2416 Drive States ust 5 scatuas ane nera EE E cane EAA EA bad NE TE
146. GB On Lp Slot 4 SAS HDD 136 218 GB On BP Slot 5 SAS HDD 136 218 GB On eee Figure 56 WebBIOS Drive Group Definition Screen 10 After you finish selecting drives for the drive groups select each drive group and click Accept DG for each 11 Click Next LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 The Span Definition screen appears as shown in Figure 57 This screen displays the drive group holes you can select to add to a span Page 101 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Creating a Storage Configuration MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Figure 57 WebBIOS Span Definition Screen 12 Under the heading Array With Free Space hold lt Ctrl gt while you select a drive group of three or more drives and click Add to SPAN The drive group you select displays in the right frame under the heading Span 13 Hold lt Ctrl gt while you select a second drive group of three or more drives and click Add to SPAN Both drive groups display in the right frame under Span 14 Click Next The Virtual Drive Definition screen appears as shown in Figure 58 You use this screen to select the RAID level strip size read policy and other attributes for the new virtual drive s 15 Hold lt Ctrl gt while you select two drive groups with at least three drives each in the Configuration window on the right Page 102 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter
147. I Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Configuration Related Options 5 13 2 Add RAID O 1 5 or 6 Use the command in the following table to add a RAID level 0 1 5 or 6 configuration to Configuration the existing configuration on the selected controller For RAID levels 10 50 or 60 see Section 5 13 3 Add RAID 10 50 or 60 Configuration Table 64 Add RAID 0 1 5 or 6 Configuration Convention MegaCli CfgLDAdd R0 R1 R5 R6 E0 S0 E1 S1 WIT WB NORA RA ADRA Direct Cached CachedBadBBU NoCachedBadBBU SZXXXXXXXX szYYYYYYYY strpszM Hsp E5 S5 afterLdx Force aN Description Adds a RAID level 0 1 5 or 6 configuration to a specified controller Even if no configuration is present you have the LSI Corporation Confidential option to write the configuration to the controller Note that RAID 1 supports up to 32 drives in a single span of 16 drive groups RAID 1 requires an even number of drives as data from one drive is mirrored to the other drive in each RAID 1 drive group Rx E0 S0 Specifies the RAID level and the drive enclosure slot numbers to construct a drive group WT Write through WB Write back Selects write policy NORA No read ahead RA Read ahead ADRA Adaptive read ahead Selects read policy Cached Di rect Selects cache policy CachedBa
148. I MegaRAID SAS 9260 8i Serial Number SV 938004 FRU SubVendorID x100 Drive Security Capable SubDevicelD KJ i urity Enabled PortCount Security Method Hostinterface PCIE Firmuare Version FW Package Version 141 13 Min Strip Size Firnuare Tine ep 21 2010 17 14 59 Max Strip Size WebBIOS Version OU co REL Virtual Drive Count Drive Count 1 MegaRAID Recovery Hot Spare Spin Doun Enabled Unconfig Good Spin Doun Drive Standby Time nute Power Save Mode for Config Drives Figure 90 Virtual Drive Screen 2 Click the Expand radio button and then click Go The Expand Virtual Drive screen appears as shown in Figure 91 Page 136 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Using MegaRAID Recovery MegaRAID BIOS Config Utility Expand Virtual ry Figure91 Expand Virtual Drive Screen 3 Enter the percentage of the available capacity that you want the virtual drive to use For example if there are 100 GB of capacity available and you want to increase the size of the virtual drive by 30 GB select 30 percent 4 Click Calculate to determine the capacity of the virtual drive after expansion 5 Click Ok The virtual drive expands by the selected percentage of the available capacity 4 10 Using MegaRAID MegaRAID Recovery also known as Snapshot offers a simplified way to recover data Recovery and provides automatic prot
149. ID Storage Manager Main Menu F Mega AD Storage Manager 3 1 5 0000 Menage Gol Loy Took Rep i s0 8 20 LSI p eka sianta Pd ces wagi attor piyes togel Contr LSI MegaRAID SAS 8 Os A C Bigard Operations Aone O coms Virtual dove cperatons e progress 0 ap Scoares r y Total apaty J F Lan pii Caty ies Gr Ceive cperanons in progress A i Urootgued Capacty ina gass i y Uian U9 Wed Ceive l a MegaRAD Advanced Softeare Options Actors He ea ne Hos tous GME rite Cobetae fests tus Ow MegaRADD SafeStove trated ux oto sen Ds Dit met fresan RADE Srabled eps ean bii iite frees eam nd Figure 135 MSM Dashboard View The Physical view shows the hierarchy of physical devices in the system At the top of the hierarchy is the system itself followed by the controller and the backplane One or more controllers are installed in the system The controller label identifies the MegaRAID controller such as the MegaRAID SAS 9260 8i controller so that you can easily differentiate between multiple controllers Each controller has one or more ports Drives and other devices are attached to the ports The properties for each item appear in the right panel of the screen Figure 136 shows the Physical view Page 253 Chapter 7 MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus MegaRAID Storage Manager MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Main Menu 5 Sep AD SS ROEA Das te O
150. MC sideband and snapshot on volumes which are used for VM creation under virtualized environment To flush the file system buffers you should interface with hypervisor Use the command in the following table to display the read and write configuration file Table 122 Displays the Read and Write Configuration File Convention MegaSCU AdpCfgPage read write lt isPersistent gt pagetype lt val gt lt pagenumber gt lt pageaddress gt f lt filename gt aN Description AdpCfgPage Reads writes the configuration file parses it and updates the SAS firmware s Manufacturing Configuration Page Parameters read gets the configuration page from firmware and fills the page details into a file write sends the user specified file to firmware to modify the configuration page lt isPersistent gt Can have a value of zero or one lt 0 gt for NVRAM lt 1 gt for current lt val gt string for page type For manufacturing page the value is MAN Convention aN N specifies the adapter number for the command Exit Code 0x00 The command in this section is used to display information about the FastPath option MegaRAID FastPath is a high performance IO accelerator for CacheCade SSD Caching software drive groups connected to a MegaRAID controller card CacheCade SSD Caching software has a read performance advantage over HDDs and use less power This feature dramatically boosts storage subsystem
151. Mode Drive capacity Coercion mode Values 0 None 1 128 MB 2 1 GB ClusterEnable Cluster is enabled or disabled Values 0 Disabled 1 Enabled PredFailPollInterval Number of seconds between predicted fail polls Values 0 to 65535 BatWarnDsbl Disable warnings for missing battery or missing hardware Values 0 Enabled 1 Disabled EccBucket Size Size of ECC single bit error bucket Values 0 to 255 EccBucket LeakRate Leak rate in minutes of ECC single bit error bucket Values 0 to 65535 AbortCCOnError AlarmEnb1 Set alarm to Enabled AlarmDsbl1 Set alarm to Disabled AlarmSilence Silence an active alarm SMARTCpyBkEnb1 Enable copyback operation on Self Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology SMART errors Copyback is initiated when the first SMART error occurs on a drive that is part of a virtual drive AutoDetectBackPlaneDsb1 Detect automatically if the backplane has been disabled CopyBackDsbl1 Disable or enable the copyback operation LoadBalanceMode Disable or enable the load balancing mode CQEnb1 Enable the native command queueing CQDsb1 Disable the native command queueing SSDSMARTCpyBkEnb1 Enable copyback operation on Self Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology SMART errors on a CacheCade software Copyback is initiated when the first SMART error occurs on a SSD that is part of a virtual drive aintainPdFailHistoryEnbl Enable maintenance of the history of a failed drive Enb1Spin
152. Multiple drive groups are specified using the ArrayX E0 S0 option Note that X starts from 0 not 1 All of the drive groups must have the same number of drives At least two drive groups must be provided The order of options WT WB NORA RA ADRA Direct Cached is flexible The size option szXXXXXXXX can be accepted to allow slicing in the spanned drive groups if the controller supports this feature The afterLdx option is accepted if the size option is accepted CT exits and does not create a configuration if the size or the afterLd option is specified but the controller does not support slicing in the spanned drive groups NOTE Previously s zXXX expressed capacity in MB but now you can enter the capacity in your choice of units For example to create a virtual drive of 10 GB enter the size as sz10GB If you do not enter a unit by default it is considered as MB 5 13 4 Clear the Existing Configuration Use the command in the following table to clear the existing configuration on the selected controller s Table 66 Clear Existing Configuration Convention MegaCli CfgClr aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Clears the existing configuration 5 13 5 Save the Configuration on the Use the command in the following table to save the configuration for the selected Controller controller s to the given filename Table 67 Save Configuration on the Controller Convention MegaCli CfgSav f F
153. NE EEE EREA EERE EA EENE AEE E ee 321 11 2 1 MegaRAID Software Licensing oserei ii Erer nE E E R E a i 321 11 2 2 Managing MegaRAID Advanced Software 0 cece cee teen ence nen ene n tenet eee e ne en ene eneneenenneenes 321 TPZ Activation ROY eieo sie nist va scott gat ak Githaiavece Dames oy hanna E esa E anes EE N ay GRR T ate ORR NIN Nanas aA 323 11 2 4 Advanced MegaRAID Software Status SUMMAIY 6 cece cece nen eee eee e cnet dene eden eee ete en eeeeenee 324 11 2 5 Application Scenarios and Messages cece cece cece eee nen ene e een n betes e eee e nent ee eneeneeneenes 324 11 2 6 Activating an Unlimited Key Over a Trial Key ccc cece cece n ence een eee ene en eens ne en ene eneeeeenes 326 11 2 7 Configuring Keyvault Re hosting Process 0c ccc cece eee e ence eee eee e nen e ened eee e eden tenet en eeeeenes 329 11 28 Rehosting Completes sinees ere ruon e heen ehendeny ETE Se Ahad Mee maeee be sas MAGES eeuad hoe eae 330 1 1 2 9 Deactivate Trial SoftWare i000 cc conr se naedeectnnee vee ea cen hile eae edad eile Rheum eWay EEEE EEEE S 331 11 210 MegaRAID R cOVely iid ipaa Er E ETE veda wiadement sage eedede Teese enielese Meee eeNoo Meee tees 332 11 22 11 Recovery Scenarios dersi yenan e RI EAEE ITESO wonaa EEA EEEE E ne aelet evade etaled doo veeasaweN 332 11 2 12 Enabling the Recovery Advanced Software sssssssseussrssesserserrrrrerrerrerrrrrorrrrrrorrrrererrrsre 333 11 213 S
154. Name DskCache PSPolicy Lx L0 1 2 LALL aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Displays the cache and access policies of the virtual disk s The possible parameters are Cache Cached Direct Displays cache policy WT Write through WB Write back Selects write policy NORA No read ahead RA Read ahead ADRA Adaptive read ahead Selects read policy Access RW RO Blocked Displays access policy DskCache Displays physical disk cache policy PSPolicy Displays the default amp current power savings policy of the virtual disk 5 23 Miscellaneous Options The commands in this section are used to display various information 5 23 1 Display the MegaCLI Version Use the command in the following table to display the version number of the MegaCLl utility Table 130 Display MegaCLI Version Convention MegaCli v Description Displays the version number of the MegaCLlI utility 5 23 2 Display Help for MegaCLI Use the command in the following table to display help information for the MegaCLI utility Table 131 Display Help for MegaCLI Convention MegaCli h Help Description Displays help for the MegaCLl utility Page 224 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Miscellaneous Options 5 23 3 Summary Information Use the command in the following table to display help information for the MegaCLl utility
155. OS Configuration Utility Creating a Storage Configuration MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Page 94 Read Policy Specify the read policy for this virtual drive Normal This disables the read ahead capability This is the default Ahead This enables read ahead capability which allows the controller to read sequentially ahead of requested data and to store the additional data in cache memory anticipating that the data will be needed soon This speeds up reads for sequential data but there is little improvement when accessing random data Write Policy Specify the write policy for this virtual drive WBack In Writeback mode the controller sends a data transfer completion signal to the host when the controller cache has received all of the data in a transaction This setting is recommended in Standard mode WThru In Writethrough mode the controller sends a data transfer completion signal to the host when the drive subsystem has received all of the data ina transaction This is the default Bad BBU Select this mode if you want the controller to use Writeback mode but the controller has no BBU or the BBU is bad If you do not choose this option the controller firmware automatically switches to Writethrough mode if it detects a bad or missing BBU CAUTION LSI allows Writeback mode to be used with or without a battery LSI recommends that you use either a battery to protect the controller cache or a UPS to protect the entire sy
156. P Agent 6 7 3 6 Configuring SNMP Traps 6 7 3 7 Uninstalling the SNMP Package 6 7 4 Installing an SNMP Agent on Windows 6 7 4 1 Installing SNMP Agent 6 7 4 2 Installing SNMP Service for Windows Page 246 To receive SNMP traps perform the following steps 1 Stop the LSI SAS SNMP Agent by using the following command etc init d lsi_mrdsnmpd stop 2 Edit the etc lsi_mrdsnmp sas sas_TrapDestination conf file and add the ipaddress as shown in the following excerpt Ht HE aE aE a EH EH EH EERE RE RHE EE EE EE HE HEH EH HH HE HE HEH Agent Service needs the IP addresses to sent trap The trap destination may be specified in this file or using snmpd conf file Following indicators can be set on TrapDestInd to instruct the agent to pick the IPs as the destination 1 IPs only from snmpd conf 2 IPs from this file only 3 IPs from both the files Ht EE a aE EH EH EH EH EE HERRERA HEHE EEE HEH EH EH HH HE HEE EH TrapDestiInd 2 HHtHHHHeetHe eT rap Destination IPHHFHHHHFEHEEEEE SH HHH 127407021 public 172 28 157 149 public FEER EE aE a EH EH EE EE HE HEHEHE EEE EE HEH HH HH HE HE HEH 3 Start the LSI SAS SNMP Agent by entering the following command etc init d lsi_mrdsnmpd start The uninstall sh script is located under the etc lsi_mrdsnmp sas directory Use the following command to uninstall the package cd etc lsi_mrdsnmp sas uninstall sh This section explai
157. Page 20 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 2 Chapter 2 Introduction to RAID RAID Description Introduction to RAID This chapter describes Redundant Array of Independent Disks RAID RAID functions and benefits RAID components RAID levels and configuration strategies In addition it defines the RAID availability concept and offers tips for configuration planning 2 1 RAID Description 2 2 RAID Benefits 2 3 RAID Functions 2 4 Components and Features LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 RAID is an array or group of multiple independent physical drives that provide high performance and fault tolerance A RAID drive group improves I O input output performance and reliability The RAID drive group appears to the host computer as a single storage unit or as multiple virtual units I O is expedited because several drives can be accessed simultaneously RAID drive groups improve data storage reliability and fault tolerance compared to single drive storage systems Data loss resulting from a drive failure can be prevented by reconstructing missing data from the remaining drives RAID has gained popularity because it improves I O performance and increases storage subsystem reliability Virtual drives are drive groups or spanned drive groups that are available to the operating system The storage space in a virtual drive is spread across all of the drives i
158. Page 3 Table of Contents MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 2 6 RAID Configuration Strategies ica iiy deaicenearen Ga ieee PONE Naas adaaw ela daaaan Odea wea daa eed tN be sae ee nes bese wodeneees 40 2 6 4 Maximizing Fault Tolerance s c cce0eeeescciideee te ees A va dads dada va Rady Pee FOSS Mee dee E a de Ctied BRIE RS ae cold EEN 41 2 6 2 Maximizing Performance 4 cscsicssuees sins cesarean og ats errain od EANES Haws aa EEA ING wh EEE sands eRe EHH ees 42 26 3 Maximizing Storage Capacity seirer tiras Tese oera NEIER EEE te aaa d hats Ua N Geto wee Ra eeens chee eww 43 2 7 RAID AvailabllitY ccuusrvccsanctsiwhseaenaaies anda yaureae eae oicnes sana sue meeatees Meme a EAA EERE E ERAS 44 2 7 ARAID Availability Concept 433550 c4e esd ae sea e eee Hats eee wae Scars US aoe y RENATE EE seen au Nemes dada Bees 44 2 3 Configuration Planning 4icicckls esanen ieaceweanok hd hii ddoktandaeaan A A adi obadodidel sass euale Oe EE E E wenetebes 45 2 9 Numbet Of Drives 5c cap weie nas eaytd ecbieedblage dy slated E yoo ae ae ene E EE E Ea bag ey poy eels MREREGE EEEN EEEE Galina 45 2 9 1 Drive GhOUP PUIPOSE 442 sacnndondiae ohdteed aq enw ae aaa Stee s bean EEE EE de ear dare eeeghanonnenened 45 Chapter 3 SafeStore Disk Enctyption 23 c 05 c05accgae den veevaanantaceed seeekaaed eee dewlnaed sae hedand tie cde ONS Magan cEGaNS Seam MaINEE ENS 47 SL OVENVICW n saa ccda dates cei mitra bad at ea cee E ET wis oa piaaiid aaa A E TAE E are naa aici
159. Page 91 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Creating a Storage Configuration MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 12 Click Next The Span Definition screen appears as shown in Figure 49 This screen displays the drive group holes you can select to add to a span Pie ia RAID BIOS Config Utility Config Hizard Span Definition Figure 49 WebBIOS Span Definition Screen 13 Under the heading Array With Free Space hold lt Ctrl gt while you select a drive group with two drives and click Add to SPAN The drive group you select displays in the right frame under the heading Span 14 Hold lt Ctrl gt while you select a second drive group with two drives and click Add to SPAN Both drive groups display in the right frame under Span 15 If there are additional drive groups with two drives each you can add them to the virtual drive 16 Click Next The Virtual Drive Definition screen appears as shown in Figure 50 You use this screen to select the RAID level strip size read policy and other attributes for the new virtual drives 17 Hold lt Ctrl gt while you select two drive groups with two drives in the Configuration panel on the right Page 92 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Creating a Storage Configuration Figure 50 WebBIOS Virtual Drive Definition Screen NOTE The WebBIOS Configuration Utility shows the maximum
160. Preview i Slot 3 SATA HDD 232 375 GB k Slot 5 SAS HDD 67 843 GB On i Slot 6 SAS HDD 67 843 GB Un i Slot 7 SAS HDD 67 843 GB Un Figure 110 Foreign Configuration Preview Screen The right panel shows the virtual drive properties of the foreign configuration In this example there are two RAID 1 virtual drives with 67 843 GB each The left panel shows the drives in the foreign configuration 4 Click Import to import this foreign configuration s and use it on this controller If you click Cancel you return to Figure 109 If one or more drives are removed from a configuration by a cable pull or drive removal for example the configuration on those drives is considered a foreign configuration by the RAID controller Use the Foreign Configuration Preview screen to import or clear the foreign configuration in each case The import procedure and clear procedure are described in Section 4 12 3 Importing or Clearing a Foreign Configuration The following scenarios can occur with cable pulls or drive removals NOTE If you want to import the foreign configuration in any of the following scenarios you should have all of the drives in the enclosure before you perform the import operation Scenario 1 If all of the drives in a configuration are removed and re inserted the controller considers the drives to have foreign configurations Import or clear the foreign configuration If you select Import autom
161. RAID SAS Software User Guide 6 7 3 5 LSI Corporation Confidential Configuring snmpd conf September 2010 Chapter 6 MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation Installing and Configur ing an SNMP Agent The following commands are used to start stop restart and check the status of the SAS SNMP Agent daemon Start etc init d lsi_mrdsnmpd start Stop etc init d lsi_mrdsnmpd stop Restart etc init d lsi_mrdsnmpd restart Status etc init d lsi_mrdsnmpd status By default SNMP queries walk get can be executed from any remote machine without any changes to the snmpd conf file To quickly add a new community and client access perform the following steps 1 Stop the SMA service by executing the following command svcadm disable svc appl ication management sma default 2 Add read only and read write community names a Add a read only community name and client hostname ipaddress under SECTION Access Control Setup in the etc sma snmp snmpd conf file as shown in the following excerpt HERE HE HH SECTION Access Control This section defines who running SNMP Agent a SNMPv1 SN community name arguments community default hostname rocommunity snmpclient rocommunity networ HEH EH EH HH HE HE EE EH EE HE Setup is allowed to
162. S HDD 418 656 GB Unconfi j Encicsure TSH Figure 15 WebBIOS CU Main Screen In the right frame the screen shows the virtual drives configured on the controller and the drives that are connected to the controller In addition the screen identifies drives that are foreign or missing NOTE Inthe list of virtual drives the drive nodes are sorted based on the order in which you added the drives to the drive group rather than the physical slot order that displays in the physical trees NOTE The minimum screen resolution for WebBIOS is 640x480 To toggle between the physical view and logical view of the storage devices connected to the controller click Physical View or Logical View in the menu in the left frame When the physical view screen appears it shows the drive groups that are configured on this controller For drives in an enclosure the screen shows the following drive information Enclosure Slot Interface type such as SAS or SATA Drive type HDD or SSD Drive size LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 4 WebBIOS Configuration Utility WebBIOS CU Main Screen Options Drive status such as Online or Unconfigured Good The toolbar at the top of the WebBIOS CU has the following buttons as listed in Table 20 Table 20 WebBIOS CU Toolbar Icons Icon Description Click this icon to return to the main scr
163. S Configuration Utility Creating a Storage Configuration 19 Click Accept to accept the changes to the virtual drive definition 20 If you need to undo the changes click Reclaim 21 After you finish defining the virtual drives click Next The Configuration Preview screen appears as shown in Figure 51 f SEEC Oa ViiegaRAID BIOS Config Utility Config Hizard Preview J S H 343GB i 1 SAS HDD 67 843 GB i Slot 2 SAS HDD 67 643 GB On i Ri Slot 5 SAS HDD 136 218 GB Un T Figure 51 RAID 10 Configuration Preview 22 Check the information in the configuration preview 23 If the virtual drive configuration is acceptable click Accept to save the configuration Otherwise click Cancel to end the operation and return to the WebBIOS main menu or click Back to return to the previous screens and change the configuration 24 If you accept the configuration click Yes at the prompt to save the configuration The WebBIOS main menu appears 4 5 3 7 Using Manual RAID 50 provides the features of both RAID 0 and RAID 5 RAID 50 uses both distributed Configuration RAID 50 parity and drive striping across multiple drive groups It provides high data throughput data redundancy and very good performance It is best implemented on two RAID 5 drive groups with data striped across both drive groups Though multiple drive failures can be tolerated only one drive failure can be tolerated in each RAID 5 level driv
164. SAS Software User Guide NOTE This procedure does not create a RAID configuration It creates an CacheCade software virtual drive that functions as a secondary tier of cache Using CacheCade software as controller cache allows for very large data sets to be present in cache delivering performance up to 50 times greater than regular cache in read intensive applications such as online transaction processing OLTP and file and Web server workloads The solution accelerates the IO performance of HDD based drive groups while requiring only a small investment in CacheCade software technology To support full throughput for multiple direct attached CacheCade software this feature reduces I O processing overhead in the 2108 chip based MegaRAID controllers CacheCade offers performance equivalent to flash based controllers and better performance for RAID 5 and RAID 6 when compared to Fusion I O Follow these steps to create a CacheCade drive group 1 Click Configuration Wizard on the WebBIOS main screen The first Configuration Wizard screen appears as shown in Figure 60 Figure 60 WebBIOS Configuration Wizard Screen 2 Select CacheCade TM Configuration and click Next The Span Definition screen appears as shown in Figure 60 Page 106 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 4 WebBIOS Configuration Utility Creating a CacheCade Configuration Figure 61 CacheCade Array Selection S
165. SI Advanced Software License Management Portal 3 Click Next The Manage Advanced Software Options Summary as shown in Figure 23 appears 4 4 9 Rehosting Process Complete In a scenario where only keyvault feature needs to be transferred from controller1 to controller2 the Re hosting Process Complete screen appears as shown in the following figure LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 63 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Creating a Storage Configuration MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 4 5 Creating a Storage Configuration 4 5 1 Selecting the Configuration with the Configuration Wizard Page 64 Figure 28 Rehosting Process Complete 1 Select the check box next to the message I acknowledge that have completed the re hosting process in the LSI Advanced Software License Management Portal 2 Click Next The Manage MegaRAID Advanced Software Options Wizard as shown in Figure 16 appears The rehosting process is completed NOTE If you click Next in the Rehosting Process Complete screen if rehosting is not complete the features will not be copied into the keyvault and the features remain in the keyvault itself but the user can still use the advanced features This section explains how to use the WebBlOS CU Configuration Wizard to configure RAID drive groups and virtual drives to create storage configurations Follow these steps to start the Configuration Wizard and select a configuration
166. SI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 4 WebBIOS Configuration Utility Using MegaRAID Recovery gt gaRAID BIOS Config Utility Controller Information Serial Number SubVendorID i SubDevicelD PortCount i HostInterface Firmuare Version FU Package Version nuare Tine Drive Standby Tine LSI MegaRAID SAS 9269 8i FRU Drive Security Capable curity Enabled rity Method Max Strip S Virtual Drive Count MegaRAID Recovery Unconfig Good Spin Down Power Save Mode for Config Drives Figure 104 Virtual Drive Screen 3 Click the AdvOpers radio button and then click Go The Advanced Operations screen appears as shown in Figure 105 Page 151 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Using MegaRAID Recovery MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide MegaRAID BIOS Config Utility Advanced Operations Figure 105 Advanced Operations Screen 4 Select a snapshot from the drop down menu If the volume is still damaged continue to select from the next most current PiT snapshot to the oldest 5 Click Go The system rolls back to the selected PiT snapshot and returns you to a snapshot that does not have the malicious or corrupt files 4 10 8 Cleaning up a Snapshot The clean up option can be performed only on a Snapshot Repository virtual drive Repository Perform a cleanup if a Snapshot Base virtual drive goes offline and the Snapshot Repository virtual drive is still connected to the system After you p
167. TA SSD 29 281 GB Online Drive Group 0 RAID OjUnsecured L Virtual Drives L Virtual Drive 1 29 281 GB Optimal L Drives Lis Backplane Slot 2 SATA SSD 29 261 GB Online L Unconfigured Drives i Enclosure MD1000 25 Slot 0 SAS HDD 67 843 GB Unco i Enclosure MD1000 25 Slot 1 SAS HDD 67 843 GB Unco ki Enclosure ND1000 25 Slot 2 SAS HDD 67 843 GB Unco i Enclosure MD1000 25 Slot 3 SAS HDD 136 218 GB Unc i Enclosure ND1000 25 Slot 4 SAS HDD 136 216 GB Unc i Enclosure MD1000 25 Slot 5 SAS HDD 136 218 GB Unc ki Enclosure MD1000 25 Slot 6 SAS HDD 418 656 GB Unc 2 nclosure MD1000 25 Slot 7 SAS HDD 418 656 GB Unc i Enclosure MD1000 25 Slot6 SAS HDD 418 656 GB Unc Figure 64 WebBIOS Main Menu with a CacheCade Virtual Drive 4 7 Selecting SafeStore The SafeStore Encryption Services feature provides the ability to encrypt data and use Encryption Services Security disk based key management for the data security solution This solution protects your Options data in case of theft or loss of physical drives This section describes how to enable Change or disable the drive security settings and how to import a foreign configuration 4 7 1 Enabling the Security Key Perform the following steps to enable the encryption settings for the security key Identifier Security Key and Password identifier security key and password 1 Click Drive Security on the main WebBIOS
168. Table 132 Display Help for MegaCLI Convention MegaCli ShowSummary f filename aN Description Displays a summary of system information controller information drive information virtual drive information and enclosure information LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 225 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Miscellaneous Options MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Page 226 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 6 Chapter 6 MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation Overview MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation This chapter provides a brief overview of the MegaRAID Storage Manager MSM software and explains how to install it on the supported operating systems 6 1 Overview 6 1 1 Creating Storage Configurations 6 1 2 Monitoring Storage Devices 6 1 3 Maintaining Storage Configurations 6 2 Hardware and Software Requirements LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID Storage Manager software enables you to configure monitor and maintain storage configurations on LSI SAS controllers The MegaRAID Storage Manager graphical user interface GUI makes it easy for you to create and manage storage configurations MegaRAID Storage Manager software enables you to easily configure the controllers drives and virtual drives on your workstation or server The Configuration Wizard greatly simplif
169. Unconfigured Good drives by using any one of the following options Page 273 Chapter 8 Configuration Converting JBOD Drives to Unconfigured Good MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 8 2 1 Converting JBOD to Unconfigured Good from the MSM Window Right click the controller node in the device tree in the left frame of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window and select Create Virtual Drive m Select the controller node and select Go To gt Controller gt Create Virtual Drive The Create Virtual Drive JBOD to Unconfigured Good Conversion wizard appears as shown in the following figure Create Virtual Drive JBOD to Unconfigured Good Conversion LSI3 y One or more JBOD drives detected in the system IF you wish to convert those drives to Unconfigured good Please c the drives from the table below Maximum allowed unconfigured good drives on a controller is 16 Eligible JBOD drives for conversion 15 JBOD Drives Enclosure Slot 0 545 HDD 136 219 GB JBOD Enclosure Slot 1 545 HDD 33 656 GB JBOD C Do not convert JBOD drives to unconfigured good drives Page 274 ere Ge Ce Figure 153 JBOD Drives The JBOD drives field displays the available JBOD drives available in the system 10 Choose the drives which you want to be configured as Unconfigured Good and select the check box before Do not convert JBOD drives to unconfigured good drives NOTE If you do not like to make any JBOD as Unconfigured goo
170. User Guide Chapter 9 Chapter 9 Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices Monitoring System Events Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices This chapter explains how to use MegaRAID Storage Manager software to monitor the status of drives virtual drives and other storage devices 9 1 Monitoring System Events LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 The MegaRAID Storage Manager utility monitors the activity and performance of all controllers in the system and the storage devices connected to them When an event occurs such as the creation of a new virtual drive or the removal of a drive an event message appears in the log at the bottom of the MegaRAID Storage Manager main menu screen as shown in Figure 178 You can use MegaRAID Storage Manager to alert you about events There are settings are for the delivery of alerts the severity level of events exceptions and e mail settings LSI tone artes M ices wg Petre S 58 8 6 One 2 tices Set SAA NOA Lett Pome QF tascinn Set 7 25 AEE R enirat end Poena 2 fea SOOKE DA 1 5 net Gn Pe Of Bann 35 8 extra ot paget 44 D brdoare SMOKERS CIN Set 12 SAS SLM R ripe Santos S 2 eT m w T cs T Figure 178 Event Information Window Each message that appears in the event log has a severity level that indicates the importance of the event as shown in Table 133 a date and timestamp and a brief descrip
171. Utility Creating a Storage Configuration MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Page 104 Ahead This enables read ahead capability which allows the controller to read sequentially ahead of requested data and to store the additional data in cache memory anticipating that the data will be needed soon This speeds up reads for sequential data but there is little improvement when accessing random data Write Policy Specify the write policy for this virtual drive WBack In Writeback mode the controller sends a data transfer completion signal to the host when the controller cache has received all of the data ina transaction This setting is recommended in Standard mode WThru In Writethrough mode the controller sends a data transfer completion signal to the host when the drive subsystem has received all of the data ina transaction This is the default Bad BBU Select this mode if you want the controller to use Writeback mode but the controller has no BBU or the BBU is bad If you do not choose this option the controller firmware automatically switches to Writethrough mode if it detects a bad or missing BBU CAUTION LSI allows Writeback mode to be used with or without a battery LSI recommends that you use either a battery to protect the controller cache or an uninterruptible power supply UPS to protect the entire system If you do not use a battery or a UPS and there is a power failure you risk losing the data in the controller cach
172. XXXXXxX Specifies the size for the virtual disk where XXXX is a decimal number of MB However the actual size of the virtual drive might be smaller because the driver requires the number of blocks from the physical drives in each virtual drive to be aligned to the stripe size If multiple size options are specified CT will configure the virtual drives in the order of the options entered in the command line The configuration of a particular virtual drive will fail if the remaining size of the array is too small to configure the virtual drive with the specified size This option can also be used to create a configuration on the free space available in the array st rpszM Specifies the stripe size where the stripe size values are 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 or 1024 MB Hsp E5 S5 Creates hot spares when you create the configuration The new hot spares are dedicated to the virtual drive used to create the configuration This option does not allow you to create global hot spares To create global hot spares you must use the PdHsp command with the proper subcommands You can also use this option to create a configuration on the free space available in the virtual drive AfterLdx This command is optional By default the application uses the first free slot available in the virtual drive This option is valid only if the virtual disk is already used for configuration FDE CtrlBased lf controller support security feature this option
173. a transaction This setting is recommended in Standard mode WThru In Writethrough mode the controller sends a data transfer completion signal to the host when the drive subsystem has received all of the data in a transaction This is the default Bad BBU Select this mode if you want the controller to use Writeback mode but the controller has no BBU or the BBU is bad If you do not choose this option the controller firmware automatically switches to Writethrough mode if it detects a bad or missing BBU CAUTION LSI allows Writeback mode to be used with or without a battery LSI recommends that you use either a battery to protect the controller cache or an uninterruptible power supply UPS to protect the entire system If you do not use a battery or a UPS and there is a power failure you risk losing the data in the controller cache 10 Policy The IO Policy applies to reads on a specific virtual drive It does not affect the read ahead cache Direct In direct I O mode reads are not buffered in cache memory Data is transferred to the cache and the host concurrently If the same data block is read again it comes from cache memory This is the default Cached In cached I O mode all reads are buffered in cache memory Drive Cache Specify the drive cache policy Enable Enable the drive cache Disable Disable the drive cache NoChange Leave the current drive cache policy as is This is the default Disable BGI Spec
174. a 6 224 523 1 Display the MegaCl VersiOneciisexvaaanccee cece vie sa dda envied weed eae Sohne ted dae td AEE EERE 224 523 2 Display Help for Mega esise cco gucne sau cis yis en sean e ENNE Soe EE dita pene eae EATEN EEE 224 523 3 Summary INTOMMATON ws nies ne ia csV ada vabasesed stads neck Wcebhaasd cee wd Meinl TE E E E A ENET 225 Chapter 6 MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation 0 0 cece cece cece nee e eee e eect eee eee e eee enee 227 OA OVERVIEW sis ere eena RETER E ain oie EEA when E TE EEEE gue es MUNG EAE EE E EEES S EEES TAERE a eats 227 6 1 1 Creating Storage Configurations sssssssssressssrrrssererssererrerrrrrrererrrerrerreoreerorrrrreorrrrset 227 6 1 2 Monitoring Storage Devices cece cece cee ee rene rene nee EEEREN EEE EAE EE 227 6 1 3 Maintaining Storage Configurations 0 0 cece cece nee cee en ne denen ene b ete e eet n eee e nent teen ence 227 6 2 Hardware and Software Requirements 0 cece cece enn nen nen n eee nnn eden Een EEE ne tne eee e ene bene ee eE 227 6 3 Prerequisites to Running MSM Remote Administration 0 0 cece eee e ee eee ne ene een e eden ene ene n ete eneeneenes 228 6 4 Installing MegaRAID Storage Manager 0 ccc cece cence ene nee nnn n ene need nee ede e nent ene n ene e been eens 228 6 4 1 Prerequisite for MSM Installation 6 cece cece cece eee ee ne nen ene nee e eden etn e teen ete e netbeans 228 6 4 2 Installin
175. a that was stored on the drive before it failed The RAID controller recreates the data using the data stored on the other drives in the drive group Rebuilding can be done only in drive groups with data redundancy which includes RAID 1 5 6 10 50 and 60 drive groups The RAID controller uses hot spares to rebuild failed drives automatically and transparently at user defined rebuild rates If a hot spare is available the rebuild can start automatically when a drive fails If a hot spare is not available the failed drive must be replaced with a new drive so that the data on the failed drive can be rebuilt The failed drive is removed from the virtual drive and marked ready awaiting removal when the rebuild to a hot spare begins If the system goes down during a rebuild the RAID controller automatically restarts the rebuild after the system reboots NOTE When the rebuild to a hot spare begins the failed drive is often removed from the virtual drive before management applications detect the failed drive When this occurs the events logs show the drive rebuilding to the hot spare without showing the failed drive The formerly failed drive will be marked as ready after a rebuild begins to a hot spare NOTE Ifa source drive fails during a rebuild to a hot spare the rebuild fails and the failed source drive is marked as offline In addition the rebuilding hot spare drive is changed back to a hot spare After a rebuild fails because of a so
176. aCli LDInit Start Fast Full Abort ShowProg ProgDsply Lx L0O 1 2 Lall aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Allows you to select the following actions for virtual drive initialization Start Starts the initialization writing Os on the virtual drive s and displays the progress this is optional The fast initialization option initializes the first and last 8 Mbyte areas on the virtual drive The full option allows you to initialize the entire virtual drive Abort Aborts the ongoing initialization on the virtual drive s ShowP rog Displays the snapshot of the ongoing initialization if any ProgDsply Displays the progress of the ongoing initialization The routine continues to display the progress until at least one initialization is completed or a key is pressed 5 14 5 Manage a Consistency Check Use the command in the following table to manage a data consistency check CC on the virtual drives for the selected controller s Table 76 Manage Consistency Check Convention MegaCli LDCC Start Abort ShowProg ProgDsply Lx L0O 1 2 Lall aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Allows you to select the following actions for a data CC Start Starts a CC on the virtual drive s then displays the progress optional and time remaining Abort Aborts an ongoing CC on the virtual drive s ShowP rog Displays a snapshot of an ongoing CC ProgDsply Displays ongoing CC progress The progress displays until at least one CC is compl
177. able 35 Set the Security Key ID Convention MegaCli SetKeyID KeyID kkkkkkkkkkk aN Description SetKeyID Set the security key ID KeyID kkkkkkkkkkk Enters the security key ID The key ID displays when you have to enter a security key If you have multiple security keys the security key ID helps you determine which security key to enter Page 181 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Controller Property Related Options 5 7 9 Verify the Security Key 5 8 Controller Property Related Options 5 8 1 Display Controller Properties 5 8 2 Display Number of Controllers Supported 5 8 3 Enable or Disable Automatic Rebuild Page 182 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Use the command in the following table to verify the security key Table 36 Verify the Security Key ID Convention MegaCli VerifySecurityKey SecurityKey sssssssssss aN Description Verifies that the security key is the correct one for the self encrypted disk VerifySecurityKey Verifies the security key SecurityKey sssssssssss Enters the new security key The security key is case sensitive It must be between eight and thirty two characters and contain at least one number one lowercase letter one uppercase letter and one non alphanumeric character e g lt gt The space character is not permitted You can use the commands in this section to set or display properties related to the controller s such as
178. acter e g lt gt The space character is not permitted Non US keyboard users must be careful not to enter DBCS characters in the pass phrase field or security key field Firmware works only with the ASCII character set 13 Click Accept The Confirm Enable Drive Security screen appears as shown in Figure 70 Page 114 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 4 7 2 EKM Enabling Drive Security using LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 4 WebBIOS Configuration Utility Selecting SafeStore Encryption Services Security Options MegaRAID BIOS Confic tion You may be prompted to enter thes operations f you forget the security zour data you sure you want to Figure 70 Confirm Enable Drive Security Screen 14 Click Yes on the Confirm Enable Drive Security screen to confirm that you want to enable the drive security settings WebBIOS enables the security key ID security key and pass phrase if applicable that you entered and returns you to the main menu CAUTION If you forget the security key you will lose access to your data Be sure to record your security key information You might need to enter the security key to perform certain operations EKM is used for key management when a large number of systems are deployed You can automate and manage the life cycle of keys and also use to unlock configurations When you select EKM in Fi
179. ain in the Confirm field The security key is case sensitive It must be between eight and thirty two characters and contain at least one number one lowercase letter one uppercase letter and one non alphanumeric character e g lt gt The space character is not permitted 10 Click Next The Change Security Settings Pass Phrase screen appears as shown in Figure 76 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 119 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Selecting SafeStore Encryption Services Security MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Options Figure 76 Change Security Settings Pass Phrase Screen 11 If you want to use a pass phrase click the checkbox Use a pass phrase in addition to the security key 12 Enter a new pass phrase and then enter the new pass phrase again to confirm The pass phrase is case sensitive It must be between 8and 32 characters and contain at least one number one lowercase letter one uppercase letter and one non alphanumeric character e g lt gt The space character is not permitted Non US keyboard users must be careful not to enter DBCS characters in the pass phrase field or security key field Firmware works only with the ASCII character set 13 Click Accept If you entered a new pass phrase the Authenticate Drive Security Settings screen appears 14 On the Authenticate Drive Security Settings screen enter the security key and click Ok If you enter
180. al drives using a security key There are three procedures you can perform to create secure virtual drives using a security key m Create the security key identifier m Create the security key Create a password optional The security key identifier appears whenever you enter the security key If you have multiple security keys the identifier helps you determine which security key to enter The controller provides a default identifier for you You can use the default or enter your own identifier You need to enter the security key to perform certain operations You can choose a strong security key that the controller suggests LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 3 4 1 3 Create a Password 3 4 2 Change Security 3 4 2 1 Change the Security Key Identifier 3 4 2 2 Change the Security Key 3 4 2 3 Add or Change the Pass Word 3 4 3 Create Secure Virtual Drives LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 3 SafeStore Disk Encryption Workflow CAUTION If you forget the security key you will lose access to your data The password provides additional security The password should be different from the security key You can select a setting in the utilities so that you must enter the password whenever you boot your server CAUTION If you forget the password you will lose access to your data When you use the specified security key identifier security key
181. al from the selected controller s Table 97 Prepare Unconfigured Drive s for Removal Convention MegaCli PDPrpRmv Undo PhysDrv E0 S0 E1 S1 aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Prepares unconfigured drive s for removal The firmware spins down this drive The drive state is set to unaffiliated which marks it as offline even though it is not a part of a configuration Undo This option undoes this operation If you select undo the firmware marks this drive as unconfigured good Physdrv E0 S0 Specifies the physical drive enclosure and the slots for the drives Use the command in the following table to display the total number of drives attached to an controller Drives can be attached directly or through enclosures Table 98 Display Number of Drives Attached to an Controller Convention MegaCli PDGetNum aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Displays the total number of drives attached to an controller Drives can be attached directly or through enclosures The return value is the number of drives Use the command in the following table to display a list of the physical devices connected to the selected controller s Table 99 Display List of Physical Devices Attached to Controller s Convention MegaCli PDList aN a0 1 aAll Description Displays information about all drives and other devices connected to the selected controller s This includes information such as the drive ty
182. al tab to open the physical view 2 Select the BBU icon in the left panel 3 Click the Go To gt BBU gt Start Learn Cycle Another way to start the learn cycle is to right click the BBU icon and select Start Learn Cycle from the menu MegaRAID Storage Manager software allows you to monitor the progress of rebuilds and other lengthy operations in the Group Show Progress window Follow these steps to monitor the progress of these operations 1 Open this window shown in Figure 192 by selecting Manage gt Show Progress on the menu bar LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 9 Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices Monitoring Rebuilds and Other Processes MegaRAID Storage Manager 6 90 0100 Manage GoTo Log Tools Help Refresh FS Server Check Consistency Initialize Show Progress Exit LSI MegaRAID SAS 9260 8 Bus 2 Dev 0 Drive Group 0 RAID 0 iG Virtual Drive s i Virtual Drive 1 RB_Source 136 469 amp Drives Enclosure Bobcat 16 Slot 0 SAS 1 Figure 192 Group Show Progress Menu The Group Show Progress window appears as shown in Figure 193 Group Show Progress Lx L Lsis fr Ongoing Operations on Physical Drives Close Abort All Figure 193 Group Show Progress Window Operations
183. ally recognizes new enclosures added to a configuration along with their contents new drives In addition the firmware dynamically adds the enclosure and its contents to the management entity currently in use Multipathing provides the following features Support for failover in the event of path failure Auto discovery of new or restored paths while the system is online and reversion to system load balancing policy m Measurable bandwidth improvement to the multi path device Support for changing the load balancing path while the system is online The firmware determines whether enclosure modules ESMs are part of the same enclosure When a new enclosure module is added allowing multi path or removed going single path an Asynchronous Event Notification AEN is generated AENs about drives contain correct information about the enclosure when the drives are connected by multiple paths The enclosure module detects partner ESMs and issue events appropriately In a system with two ESMs you can replace one of the ESMs without affecting the virtual drive availability For example the controller can run heavy I Os and when you replace one of the ESM modules I Os should not stop The controller uses different paths to balance the load on the entire system In the MegaRAID Storage Manager utility when multiple paths are available to a drive the drive information will show only one enclosure The utility shows that a redundant p
184. anagement LKM mode the Change Security Settings Security Key ID screen appears as shown in Figure 74 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 117 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Selecting SafeStore Encryption Services Security MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Options Figure 74 Change Security Settings Security Key ID 5 Choose whether you want to use the existing security key ID or enter a new security key ID You have the following options Use the existing security key identifier Current security key identifier Enter a new security key identifier New security key identifier 6 Click Next The Change Security Settings Security Key screen appears as shown in Figure 75 You have the option to use the existing security key or enter a new one Page 118 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 4 WebBIOS Configuration Utility Selecting SafeStore Encryption Services Security Options Figure 75 Change Security Settings Security Key 7 Choose whether you want to use the existing security key or enter a new security key You have the following options Use the existing drive security key Enter a new drive security key 8 If you want to create a new drive security key either enter a new drive security key in the New security key field or click Suggest to fill the new security key 9 Enter the new drive security key ag
185. and also allocate the capacity for the VD from the snapshot repository Perform these steps to select the VD in the Snapshot Repository field 1 Select the VD to be used as the snapshot repository to hold the snap shot information The selected VD gets highlighted as shown in the following figure Enable MegaRAID Recovery n LSI K Virtual Drive 2 136 219 GB Optimal Select an existing virtual drive or create a new virtual drive to use as the snapshot repository which will hold the snapshot related information For this virtual drive The snapshot repository should only be used for snapshot data Snapshot Repository Status Available Capacity Total capacity Optimal 136 210 GB 136 219 GB 136 210 GB 136 219 GB Optimal 1 000 MB 271 375 GB Specify the amount of capacity to allocate from the snapshot repository Be ca eful to allocate sufficient capacity because you cannot change it later without losing snapshot data Tips for allocating capacity When allocating capadty consider the expected percentage of data that will change between snapshots times the number of snapshots retained up to You may want to leave some available capacity on the snapshot repository For a Future snapshot view The capacity For writes zo a view must come From available capacity on the snaashot repository Select Capacity 204339 Approximately 1 of data may change for each of 8 snapshots Figure 218 Enable M
186. and password security will be enabled on the controller You can change the security settings on the controller and you have the option to change the security key identifier security key and password If you have previously removed any secured drives you still need to supply the old security key to import them There are three procedures you can perform to change the security settings on the controller m Change the security key identifier m Change the security key m Change a password See Section 4 7 Selecting SafeStore Encryption Services Security Options for the procedures used to change security options in WebBIOS or Section 11 5 LSI SafeStore Encryption Services for the procedures used to change security options in MegaRAID Storage Manager You have the option to edit the security key identifier If you plan to change the security key it is highly recommended that you change the security key identifier Otherwise you will not be able to differentiate between the security keys You can select whether you want to keep the current security key identifier or enter a new one To change the security key identifier enter a new security key identifier You can choose to keep the current security key or enter a new one To change the security key you can either enter the new security key or accept the security key that the controller suggests You have the option to add a password or change the existing one To change the password
187. aneDs bl Enb1lSpinDownUnConfigDrvs SpinDownTime DefaultSnap shot Space DefaultViewSpace AutoSnapshotSpace CopyBac k U Dsbl LoadBalanceMode seFDEOnlyEncrypt UseDiskActivityForLocate Default LdPSPolicy DisableLdPsInterval DisableLdPsTime SpinUpEncDrvCn SpinUpEncDelay aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Displays selected adapter properties The possible settings are DefaultLdPSPolicy Default LD power savings policy DisableLdPsInterval LD power savings are disabled for yy hours beginning at disableLdPSTime DisableLdPsTime LD power savings shall be disabled at xx minutes from 12 00 am SpinUpEncDrvCnt Maximum number of drives within an enclosure to spin up at one time SpinUpEncDelay Number of seconds to delay among spinup groups within an enclosure Page 219 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Dimmer Switch Related Options MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 5 22 2 Sets the Properties on the Use the command in the following table to set the Properties on the selected Adapter Selected Adapter Table 124 Sets the Properties on the selected Adapter Convention MegaCLI AdpSetProp CacheFlushInterval val RebuildRate val val CCRate val PatrolReadRate val BgiRate ReconRate val SpinupDriveCount val SpinupDelay val CoercionMode val ClusterEnable val PredFailPollInterval val BatWarnDsbl
188. ange SNMPDCONF etc snmp snmpd conf entry to SNMPDCONF etc snmpd conf 3 Run LSI SNMP rpm This section explains how to install and configure SAS SNMP Agent for the Solaris operating system This package requires that you have Solaris System Management Agent installed on the Solaris machine To install SNMP for Solaris perform the following procedure 1 Unzip the LSI SAS SNMP Agent package 2 Run the install script by executing the following command install sh NOTE The installation will exit if there are any existing versions of storelib and sassnmp installed on the Solaris machine Uninstall the existing version by using the following commands pkgrm storelib to uninstall storelib library pkgrm sassnmp to uninstall LSI SAS SNMP Agent After you install the LSI SAS SNMP Agent package the MIB file LSI AdaptersSAS mibis installed under etc 1si_mrdsnmp sas directory The following commands are used to start stop restart and check the status of the Solaris System Managment Agent net snmpd daemon m Start svcadm enable svc application management sma default m Stop svcadm disable svc application management sma default m Restart svcadm restart svc application management sma default m Status svcs svc application management sma default NOTE Online indicates that the SMA is started Disabled indicates that the SMA is stopped LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Mega
189. any existing data on Virtual Drive 3 YD_3 it will be lost re you sure you want to enable snapshots on Virtual Drive 2 Figure 221 Confirm Enable Snapshots 4 If the answer is Yes select the Confirm check box When you select the Confirm check box the Yes button gets enabled The snapshots get enabled on the VD This VD becomes a snapshot repository Use it only for storing snapshot related data If you click No the snapshots will not be enabled on the selected VD CAUTION After you enable the snapshots on this VD you cannot change the allocated percentage of capacity or the snapshot repository without first disabling the snapshots and losing any snapshot data You can view the snapshot base details of the virtual base drive Follow these steps to view the details of the snapshot of the virtual base drive 1 2 Select the Logical tab on the main menu from the MegaRAID Storage Manager screen Click a base virtual drive in the left frame Page 339 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software Recovery Advanced Software MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 11 2 18 Manage Snapshots Page 340 After you click the base virtual drive the base virtual drive information appears in the right frame of the Properties tab under Snapshot Base Details marked pink in the following figure MegRAD Storage Manage GX Reap Gh iy Tok nb EAE 1 t LSI gt iors rets wa Cren gt Genera Qomt wta
190. appear in the right panel All virtual drive properties are defined in Chapter C Glossary Figure 191 shows the Properties panel for a virtual drive Page 308 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 9 Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices Monitoring Enclosures LSI mine arate PA tos az wanan om oe 2 Da D boed Tee Figure 191 Virtual Drive Properties The RAID level stripe size and access policy of the virtual drive are set when it is configured NOTE You can change the read policy write policy and other virtual drive properties See Section 8 6 Changing Virtual Drive Properties for the procedure you can use to change these properties If the drives in the virtual drive are in an enclosure you can identify them by making their LEDs blink To do this follow these steps 1 Click the virtual drive icon in the left panel 2 Click Go To gt Virtual Drive gt Start Locating Virtual Drive or right click a virtual drive and select Start Locating Virtual Drive from the menu The LEDs on the drives in the virtual drive start blinking except for hot spare drives 3 To stop the LEDs from blinking click Go To gt Virtual Drive gt Stop Locating Virtual Drive 9 7 Monitoring Enclosures When MegaRAID Storage Manager software is running you can see the status of all enclosures connected to the server by selecting th
191. apshot Base details and any existing snapshots 4 Click the oldest snapshot in the time line 5 Click the Delete Snapshot button This deletes the oldest snapshot MegaRAID CacheCade improves application performance by expanding the MegaRAID read caching capacity The CacheCade feature uses high performing CacheCade software as a secondary tier of cache to provide faster reads and to maximize transactional I O performance Using CacheCade software as controller cache allows for very large data sets to be present in cache delivering up to a performance improvement that is 50 times greater than regular cache in read intensive applications such as online transaction processing OLTP and file and Web server workloads The solution is designed to accelerate the I O performance of HDD based drive groups while only requiring a small investment in CacheCade software technology To support full throughput for multiple direct attached CacheCade software this feature reduces O processing overhead in the 2108 chip based MegaRAID controllers CacheCade offers performance equivalent to flash based controllers and better performance for RAID 5 and RAID 6 when compared to Fusion I O Perform the following steps to use the CacheCade advanced software 1 Click a RAID controller icon in the left frame 2 Click Controller gt Create CacheCade on the menu bar as shown in Figure 231 Page 349 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software CacheCa
192. apter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Battery Backup Unit Related Properties Use the command in the following table to display complete information about the status of the BBU such as temperature and voltage for the selected controller s Table 54 Display BBU Status Information Convention MegaCli AdpBbuCmd GetBbuStatus aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Displays complete information about the BBU status such as the temperature and voltage The information displays in the following formats BBU Status for Adapter xx Battery Type XXXXXX string Voltage xx mV Current xx mA Temperature xx C Firmware Status xx Battery state xx Gas Gauge Status Fully Discharged Yes No Fully Charged Yes No Discharging Yes No Initialized Yes No Remaining Time Alarm Yes No Remaining Capacity Alarm Yes No Discharge Terminated Yes No Over Temperature Yes No Charging Terminated Yes No Over Charged Yes No Additional status information displays differently for iBBU and BBU For iBBU Relative State of Charge xx Charger System State xx Charger System Ctrl xx Charging Current xx mA Absolute State of Charge xx Max Error xx For BBU Relative State of Charge xx Charger Status xx Remaining Capacity xx mAh Full Charge Capacity mAh isSOHGood Yes No LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 189 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Battery Backup Unit Related Properties 5 11 3
193. aracter e g gt Be sure to record this information You may be prompted to enter the security key if you perform certain operations If you forgot the security key you could lose access to your data Are you sure you want to enable the drive security yes No Figure 253 Enable Drive Security Security Key LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 365 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software LSI SafeStore Encryption Services MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Page 366 6 Optional Select the Pause for password at boot time check box If you choose this option you have to enter the password whenever you boot the server 7 Optional Select the Enforce strong password security check box If you choose this option make sure the password is between eight and thirty two characters and contain at least one number one lowercase letter one uppercase letter and one non alphanumeric character e g lt gt The space character is not permitted The password is case sensitive 8 Optional Enter a password in the Password field and then enter the same password in the Confirm field as shown in Figure 254 Warning messages appear if there is a mismatch between the characters entered in the Password field and the Confirm field or if there is an invalid character entered CAUTION Be sure to record the password If you lose the password you could lose access to your data Figure 254 shows
194. ario are described further in this section Perform the following steps to configure EKM mode is supported and EKMS is present 1 Select the Physical View tab in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window and click a controller icon 2 Choose any one of the following options to arrive at the Drive Security Choose Mode wizard m Select Go To gt Controller gt Enable Drive Security in the main navigation bar in the top portion of the MSM screen m Right click the controller icon and click Enable Drive Security menu The Drive Security Choose Mode wizard appears as shown in the following figure Page 355 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software Page 356 LSI SafeStore Encryption Services MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Drive Security Choose Mode Controller lt name gt Enabling security will allow you to created secured virtual drives Choose the security key management mode External key management EKM This mode provides key management support using an Extemal Key Management Server EKMS It automates the life cycle of keys and unlocking of dives This mode is especially preferred in deployments that involves a large number of servers O Local key management LKM This mode provides key management using keys within the controller itself it Goes not require any external entity LKM is preferred in deployments that involve fewer systems Ce Ca Figure 238 Drive Security Choose Mode 3 Sel
195. at can appear in the event log A 1 Error Levels A 2 Event Messages LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID Storage Manager software monitors the activity and performance of all controllers in the workstation and the devices attached to them When an event occurs such as the start of an initialization an event message appears in the log at the bottom of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window Each message that appears in the event log has an error level that indicates the severity of the event as shown in Table 134 Table 134 Event Error Levels Error Level Meaning Information Informational message No user action is necessary Warning Some component might be close to a failure point Critical A component has failed but the system has not lost data Fatal A component has failed and data loss has occurred or will occur Table 135 lists all of the MegaRAID Storage Manager event messages The event message descriptions include placeholders for specific values that are determined when the event is generated For example in message No 1 in the Event Messages table s is replaced by the firmware version which is read from the firmware when the event is generated Table 135 Event Messages Number Type Event Text 0x0000 Information MegaRAID firmware initialization started PCI ID 04x 04x 04x 04x 0x0001 Information MegaRAID firmware version s 0x0002 Fatal Unabl
196. at the same time The controller rebuilds one failed drive and then the other failed drive NOTE Integrated MegaRAID IMR displays new drives as JBOD Just a Bunch of Disks For MegaRAID unless the inserted drive contains valid DDF metadata new drives display as JBOD for MegaRAID Entry level controllers such as the SAS 9240 4i 8i Rebuilds start only on unconfigured good drives so you have to change the new drive state from JBOD to unconfigured good to start a rebuild When you select Manual Configuration and click Next the drive Group Definition screen appears You use this screen to select drives to create drive groups 1 Hold lt Ctrl gt while selecting at least three ready drives in the Drives panel on the left 2 Click Add To Array to move the drives to a proposed drive group configuration in the Drive Groups panel on the right as shown in Figure 41 3 If you need to undo the changes click Reclaim 4 Choose whether to use drive encryption The drop down menu in the Encryption field lists the options r HDD 67 843 GB Slot 1 SAS HDD 67 843 GB On Slot 2 SAS HDD 67 843 GB On Slot 3 SAS HDD 136 218 GB On Slot 4 SAS HDD 136 218 GB On HBP Slot S SAS HDD 136 218 GB Un Ne Figure 41 WebBIOS Drive Group Definition Screen 5 After you finish selecting drives for the drive group click Accept DG for each 6 Click Next Page 81 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Creating a Sto
197. ata and to store the additional data in cache memory anticipating that the data will be needed soon This speeds up reads for sequential data but there is little improvement when accessing random data Page 98 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Creating a Storage Configuration Write Policy Specify the write policy for this virtual drive WBack In Writeback mode the controller sends a data transfer completion signal to the host when the controller cache has received all of the data in a transaction This setting is recommended in Standard mode WThru In Writethrough mode the controller sends a data transfer completion signal to the host when the drive subsystem has received all of the data ina transaction This is the default Bad BBU Select this mode if you want the controller to use Writeback mode but the controller has no BBU or the BBU is bad If you do not choose this option the controller firmware automatically switches to Writethrough mode if it detects a bad or missing BBU CAUTION LSI allows Writeback mode to be used with or without a battery LSI recommends that you use either a battery to protect the controller cache or an uninterruptible power supply UPS to protect the entire system If you do not use a battery or a UPS and there is a power failure you risk losing the data in the controller cache 10 Policy The IO Po
198. ata into smaller blocks and then stripes the blocks of data to each RAID 5 disk set RAID 5 breaks up data into smaller blocks calculates parity by performing an exclusive or on the blocks and then writes the blocks of data and parity to each drive in the drive group The size of each block is determined by the stripe size parameter which is set during the creation of the RAID set RAID level 50 can support up to eight spans and tolerate up to eight drive failures though less than total drive capacity is available Though multiple drive failures can be tolerated only one drive failure can be tolerated in each RAID 5 level drive group Table 13 provides an overview of RAID 50 Table 13 RAID 50 Overview Uses Appropriate when used with data that requires high reliability high request rates high data transfer and medium to large capacity Strong Points Provides high data throughput data redundancy and very good performance Weak Points Requires 2 to 8 times as many parity drives as RAID 5 Drives Eight spans of RAID 5 drive groups containing 3 32 drives each limited by the maximum number of devices supported by the controller LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 2 Introduction to RAID RAID Levels lt A lt Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 1 2 Segment 3 Segment4 Segment 3 4 RAID 50 Segment 6 Segment 5 6 Segment 5 l
199. ath is available to a drive All drives with a redundant path display this information The firmware supports online replacement of enclosure modules The Consistency Check operation verifies correctness of the data in virtual drives that use RAID levels 1 5 6 10 50 and 60 RAID 0 does not provide data redundancy For example in a system with parity checking consistency means computing the data on one drive and comparing the results to the contents of the parity drive NOTE It is recommended that you perform a consistency check at least once a month The copyback feature allows you to copy data from a source drive of a virtual drive to a destination drive that is not a part of the virtual drive Copyback is often used to create or restore a specific physical configuration for a drive group for example a specific arrangement of drive group members on the device I O buses Copyback can be run automatically or manually Typically when a drive fails or is expected to fail the data is rebuilt on a hot spare The failed drive is replaced with a new disk Then the data is copied from the hot spare to the new drive and the hot spare reverts from a rebuild drive to its original hot spare status The copyback operation runs as a background activity and the virtual drive is still available online to the host Page 23 Chapter 2 Introduction to RAID Components and Features 2 4 6 Page 24 Background Initialization MegaRAID SAS So
200. atic rebuilds will occur in redundant virtual drives LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 4 12 3 2 Importing Foreign Configurations from Integrated RAID to MegaRAID 4 12 3 3 Troubleshooting Information LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Managing Configurations NOTE Start a consistency check immediately after the rebuild is complete to ensure data integrity for the virtual drives See Section 4 12 1 Running a Consistency Check for more information about checking data consistency m Scenario 2 If some of the drives in a configuration are removed and re inserted the controller considers the drives to have foreign configurations Import or clear the foreign configuration If you select Import automatic rebuilds will occur in redundant virtual drives NOTE Start a consistency check immediately after the rebuild is complete to ensure data integrity for the virtual drives See Section 4 12 1 Running a Consistency Check for more information about checking data consistency m Scenario 3 If all of the drives in a virtual drive are removed but at different times and re inserted the controller considers the drives to have foreign configurations Import or clear the foreign configuration If you select Import all drives that were pulled before the virtual drive became offline will be imported and then automatically reb
201. ation Status Optimal State Normal Capacity Used View Details View Nane 1 Date Of View Creat 0 28 2009 11 1 Status Optimal Access Policy Read Write TargetId 5 Capacity Allocated 100 062 MB Figure97 Snapshot and View Details 4 10 4 Creating Concurrent Snapshots If you have created multiple Snapshot Base virtual drives you can create snapshots on all of them at one time concurrent snapshots Each snapshot has the same name and timestamp Follow these steps to create concurrent snapshots 1 Click Controller Properties on the WebBIOS main screen The first Controller Properties screen displays There are three Controller Properties screen 2 Click Next to on the first two Controller Properties screens to access the third Controller Properties screen as shown in Figure 98 MegaRAID BIOS Config Utility Controller Properties Stop CC On Error i Schedule CC Maintain PD Fail StopO0nError History n GES BIOS J Enabled yi Disk Activity Manage JBOD Figure 98 Third Controller Properties Screen LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 145 Chapter 4 WebBIOS Configuration Utility 4 10 5 Settings Selecting the Snapshot Page 146 Using MegaRAID Recovery MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 3 Click Create in the Snapshot field The Snapshot Base Properties screen appears as shown in Figure 99 MegaRAID BIOS Config Utility Create Snapshots isf Select the base vi
202. ation Confidential September 2010 Serial Number SubVendorID SubDeviceID PortCount HostInterface Firmware Version FH Package Version Firmware Tine Hot Spare Spin Down Drive Standby Time Figure 115 Controller Information Power Save Mode for Config Drives 2 Click Next The Controller Properties screen appears as shown in the following figure Drive Security Capable Drive Security Enabled Drive Security Method NURAMSize i Henory Size Min Strip Size Max Strip Size Virtual Drive Count MegaRAID Recovery Unconfig Good Spin Doun Power Save Mode for Config Drives Chapter 4 WebBIOS Configuration Utility WebBIOS Dimmer Switch Page 165 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility WebBIOS Dimmer Switch MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide MegaRAID BIOS Config Utility Controller Properties Bal re Battery Backup None Set Factory Defaults fv 7 _ Cluster Mode Alarm Control Rebuild Rate i Patrol Read Rate BGI Rate Cache Flush Interval CC Rate Spinup Drive Count Reconstruction Rate Spinup Delay NCO Figure 116 Controller Properties 3 Click Next The Controller Properties screen with the Manage Powersave option appears in the following figure Page 166 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility WebBIOS Dimmer Switch Sched If Maintain PD Fail 7 StopOnErrox Histo
203. ations that require complete data redundancy Uses data striping and parity data across three or more drives distributed parity to provide high data throughput and data redundancy especially for applications that require random access Uses data striping and parity data across three or more drives distributed parity to provide high data throughput and data redundancy especially for applications that require random access RAID 6 can survive the failure of two drives A combination of RAID 0 and RAID 1 that uses data striping across two mirrored drive groups It provides high data throughput and complete data redundancy A combination of RAID 0 and RAID 5 that uses data striping across two drive groups with parity data It provides high data throughput and complete data redundancy A combination of RAID 0 and RAID 6 that uses data striping across two drive groups with parity data It provides high data throughput and complete data redundancy RAID 60 can survive the failure of two drives in each RAID set in the spanned drive group A virtual drive property indicating the RAID level of the virtual drive LSI SAS RAID controllers support RAID levels 0 1 5 6 10 50 and 60 A drive property indicating the actual full capacity of the drive before any coercion mode is applied to reduce the capacity Page 395 Appendix C Glossary read policy rebuild rebuild rate reclaim virtual drive reconstruction rate redundancy redundant c
204. atus No Leave background initialization enabled This means that a new configuration can be initialized in the background while you use WebBIOS to do other configuration tasks This is the default Yes Select Yes if you do not want to allow background initializations for configurations on this controller NOTE New RAID 5 virtual drives require at least five drives for a background initialization to start LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 79 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Creating a Storage Configuration MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Select Size Specify the size of the virtual drive in megabytes Normally this would be the full size for RAID 5 shown in the Configuration panel on the right You can specify a smaller size if you want to create other virtual drives on the same drive group 8 Click Accept to accept the changes to the virtual drive definition 9 If you need to undo the changes click Reclaim 10 Click Next after you finish defining the virtual drives The Configuration Preview screen appears as shown in Figure 40 Riega RAID BIOS Co Wig Utility Config Wizar lt S HDD 07 043 GB On Slot 1 SAS HDD 67 643 GB On Slot 2 SAS HDD 67 843 GB On Slot 3 SAS HDD 136 218 GB Un Slot 4 SAS HDD 136 218 GB Un Slot 5 SAS HDD 136 218 GB Un Slot 7 SAS HDD 418 656 GB U Figure 40 RAID 5 Configuration Preview 11 Check the information in the configu
205. automatic rebuild on the new JBOD drive you have to change the drive state from JBOD to Unconfigured Good Rebuilds start only on Unconfigured Good drives After you set the drive state to Unconfigured Good the drive state information always remains on the drive and you can use the drive for configuration See Section 4 12 3 3 Troubleshooting Information for more information about DDF and metadata See Section 10 5 Making a Drive Offline or Missing for the procedure to change a drive to the Unconfigured Good drive state CAUTION Be sure to back up the data that is on the virtual drive before you delete it Be sure that the operating system is not installed on this virtual drive You can delete virtual drives to rearrange the storage space To delete a virtual drive follow these steps 1 Back up all user data that is on the virtual drive you want to delete 2 On the MegaRAID Storage Manager main menu screen select the Logical tab and click the icon of the virtual drive you want to delete 3 Select Go To gt Virtual Drive gt Delete Virtual Drive 4 When the warning messages appear click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the virtual drive NOTE You are asked twice if you want to delete a virtual disk to avoid deleting the virtual disk by mistake Page 293 Chapter 8 Configuration Deleting a Virtual Drive MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Page 294 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software
206. ave mode Figure 165 Power Save Mode SSD Drives You can change the Read Policy Write Policy and other virtual drive properties at any time after a virtual drive is created Follow these steps to change the virtual drive properties 1 Select a virtual drive icon in the Physical tab or the Logical tab in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window 2 Select Go To gt Virtual Drive gt Set Virtual Drive Properties from the menu bar as shown in Figure 166 Page 283 Chapter 8 Configuration Changing Virtual Drive Properties MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide MegaRAID Storage Manager 6 90 0100 Manage GoTo Log Tools Help ile Controller gt 2 Drive Group gt Physical Drive gt Hea Rename Virtual Drive BBL b Delete Virtual Drive et Virtual Drive Properties Enable MegaRAID Recover gt Dashboard Physical Logica 2 Defines virtual disk ope Start Locating Virtual Drive 3 Eoo SAS 92 Stop Locating Virtual Drive Drive Group 0 R Start Initialization Ef Virtual Drives i virtual Drive 1 RB_Source 136 amp Drives General RAID Level i Figure 166 Set Virtual Drive Properties Menu The Set Virtual Drive Properties dialog box displays as shown in Figure 8 6 Set irtual Drive Properties LSI Description Defines virtual disk operation parameters Name RBSource Read Policy NoRead Ahead
207. battery power consumption Table 59 Place Battery in Low Power Storage Mode Convention MegaCli AdpBbuCmd BbuMfgSleep aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Places the battery in Low Power Storage mode The battery automatically exits this state after 5 seconds Page 191 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Options for Displaying Logs Kept at the Firmware MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Level 5 11 8 Set BBU Properties Use the command in the following table to set the BBU properties on the selected controller s after reading from the file Table 60 Set BBU Properties Convention MegaCli AdpBbuCmd SetBbuProperties f lt fileName gt aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Sets the BBU properties on the selected controller s after reading from the file The information displays in the following formats autoLearnPeriod 1800Sec nextLearnTime 12345678Sec Seconds past 1 1 2000 learnDelaylnterval 24hours Not greater than 7 days autoLearnMode 0 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 2 WarnViaEvent NOTE You can change only two of these parameters learnDelaylnterval and autoLearnMode NOTE If the battery type is IBBU08 then in autoLearnmode the WarnViaEvent is not supported 5 12 Options for Displaying Use the commands in this section to select the display settings for the event log and Logs Kept at the Firmware Level the BBU terminal log which are kept at the firmware level 5 12 1 Event Log Management Use the command in the followi
208. below physical destruction of the device There are three major reasons for using instant secure erase If there is aneed to repurpose the hard drive for a different application You might need to move the drive to another server to expand storage elsewhere but the drive is in use The data on the drive might contain sensitive data including customer information that if lost or divulged could cause an embarrassing disclosure of a security hole You can use the instant secure erase feature to effectively erase the data so the drive can be moved to another server or area without concern that old data could be found If there is a need to replace drives If the amount of data has outgrown the storage system and there is no room to expand capacity by adding drives you might choose to purchase upgrade drives If the older drives support encryption you can erase the data instantly so the new drives can be used If there is a need to return a disk for warranty activity If the drive is beginning to show SMART predictive failure alerts you might want to return the drive for replacement If so the drive needs to be effectively erased if there is sensitive data Occasionally a drive is in such bad condition that standard erasure applications do not work If the drive still allows any access it might be possible to destroy the encryption key Page 51 Chapter 3 SafeStore Disk Encryption Instant Secure Erase MegaRAID SAS Software User Gui
209. bout Virtual Drives and Drives 0 cece eee ete cence eee e ene teen en eenenenes 202 5 14 10 Display the Number of Virtual Drives 0 cece cece cence ne eee ne ne ete n ene n ene n cnet neeneenenenes 202 5 14 11 Clear the LDBBM Table Entries 0 cece ccc nee n ene e nee ene eee ene Een ene ene Ene eee Eee 203 5 14 12 Display the List of Virtual Drives with Preserved Cache 0 cece cece cece eee cece e teen ene e nent e eee eenenee 203 5 14 13 Discard the Preserved Cache of a Virtual Drive sS 0 ccc ccc ccc ccc cece cece eee e eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneuees 203 5 14 14 Expand a Virtual Drives ccc cacsasccnatde dived ad asagada dead caaloaeae Ob dic bale ade decider sents Gene NEE 203 Page 6 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Table of Contents 5 15 Drive Related Options syn2scs sccraneenerase s e NEETER RERA E bani ehleeind babena sue eae ednsmeneganeseaewede a 204 5 15 1 Display Drive Information cvexns eere EEEE neue Tae as vacua be Ne Daa aucuedtOn E E aes keane yen 204 5 15 2 Set the Drive State to Online ss rsss si sic seca eeanadae sided bea esau re eus n CSEE EEEE NEE 204 5 15 3 Set the Drive State to OFMING 4ccciis pease dened annaa at a mee aed E Chile A E ba n i 204 5 15 4 Change the Drive State to Unconfigured Good cece cece cece nee nen e net ene ence een eee en eee e en enee 205 5 15 5 Change the Drive State srrrs
210. box appears 3 Select the virtual drive s to initialize CAUTION Initialization erases all data on the virtual drive Make sure to back up any data you want to keep before you initialize Make sure the operating system is not installed on the virtual drive you are initializing 4 Select the Fast Initialization check box if you want to use this option If you leave the box unchecked MegaRAID Storage Manager software will run a Full Initialization on the virtual drive For more information see Section 8 1 1 Selecting Virtual Drive Settings 5 Click Start to begin the initialization You can monitor the progress of the initialization See Section 9 9 Monitoring Rebuilds and Other Processes for more information 10 1 1 Running a Group Initialization Initialization prepares the storage medium for use You can run an initialization on multiple drives at one time Follow these steps to run a group consistency check 1 Click Manage gt lnitialize The Group Consistency Check appears as shown in Figure 198 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 313 Chapter 10 Maintaining and Managing Storage Configurations Running a Consistency MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Check 10 2 Check Page 314 Running a Consistency LSI oy LSI MegaRAID SAS 9260 6i Bus 2 Dev 0 Select Virtual Disks IV Virtual Drive 0 YD_0 544 875 GB Optimal Initialization Type a J Fast Initializatio
211. build the contents of the drive automatically 2 4 16 Drive States A drive state is a property indicating the status of the drive The drive states are described in Table 4 Table 4 Drive States State Description Online A drive that can be accessed by the RAID controller and is part of the virtual drive Unconfigured A drive that is functioning normally but is not configured as a part of a Good virtual drive or as a hot spare Hot Spare A drive that is powered up and ready for use as a spare in case an online drive fails Failed A drive that was originally configured as Online or Hot Spare but on which the firmware detects an unrecoverable error Rebuild A drive to which data is being written to restore full redundancy for a virtual drive Unconfigured Bad A drive on which the firmware detects an unrecoverable error the drive was Unconfigured Good or the drive could not be initialized Missing A drive that was Online but which has been removed from its location Offline A drive that is part of a virtual drive but which has invalid data as far as the RAID configuration is concerned When a virtual drive with cached data goes offline the cache for the virtual drive is discarded Because the virtual drive is offline the cache cannot be saved Page 30 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 2 4 17 Virtual Drive States 2 4 18 Beep Codes 2
212. c cece eee eee e ence n eee ene n ene ene e ene eneeeeenee 248 Chapter 7 MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus 02 cece cece e ete een e nee eee eee e nee n eee e ene e eee eeee 249 7 1 Starting MegaRAID Storage Manager Software 0 cece cee cece nent eee e nnn ene eden ence een eens ne eeneenenes 249 7 2 MegaRAID Storage Manager Main Menu cece cence cee eee e rece nee en eee ence een ence n eee eect nese ene eeeee net eneenens 252 7 2 1 Dashboard PhysicalView Logical View 0 cece cece eee eee nent nn ee enn eee een e eee en een ene tees 252 7 2 2 Properties Graphical View Tabs cece cece ee cee ee eee a EE teen tent A n eee tent tee tenet ees 258 7 23 Event Log Panel sicexccacindacietentuissreateateae dada bacadnasnes os aihede RE ETE dag et see aadidegmeasadsineaieaqans 258 LZA MENU BAN io eena E gears presen sisi diye A EE raat cece ASEE EA TE EE EEE AEAEE NS 259 Chapter 8 Configuration 3 2 5 5 4605 60 r rerne e n SEEE G4 lacie ge OEE O E E E EEE REE E EEE EEA EER AA NEN 261 8 1 Creating a New Storage Configuration 0 cece cece direret dtt En sne EEEn ened cence ened E N e ai 261 8 1 1 Selecting Virtual Drive Settings ccc cece cece cen e ene ne ene nen E E E E DES 261 8 1 2 Optimum Controller settings for CacheCade 0 cece ccc ec nce eee teen nent e eden eens teen ene eneneeenes 263 8 1 3 Optimum Controller settings for FastPath 0 00 00 cece cece c
213. canning for New Drives MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 10 3 10 4 Page 318 Scanning for New Drives Rebuilding a Drive You can use the Scan for Foreign Configuration option to find drives with foreign configurations A foreign configuration is a RAID configuration that already exists on a replacement set of physical disks that you install in a computer system In addition if one or more drives are removed from a configuration by a cable pull or drive removal for example the configuration on those drives is considered a foreign configuration by the RAID controller Drives that are foreign are listed on the physical drives list with a special symbol in MegaRAID Storage Manager The utility allows you to import the existing configuration to the RAID controller or clear the configuration so you can create a new configuration using these drives You can preview the foreign configuration before you decide whether to import it MegaRAID Storage Manager software normally detects newly installed drives and displays icons for them in the MegaRAID Storage Manager window If for some reason MegaRAID Storage Manager software does not detect a new drive or drives you can use the Scan for Foreign Configuration command to find it Follow these steps to scan for a foreign configuration Select a controller icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window 2 Select Go To gt Controller gt Scan for Foreign Configuration If MegaRAI
214. capacity gt lt status gt lt Id gt Enclosure lt id gt Slot lt n gt lt type gt lt capacity gt lt status gt lt Id gt Enclosure lt id gt Slot lt n gt lt type gt lt capacity gt lt status gt lt Id gt Security Key Figure 250 Unlock Foreign Drives m The locked drives field display the drives that are locked with the LKM mode m The Security Key displays the LKM security key for the VD After you enter the security key in the Security key field the system tries to unlock each of the locked foreign drives using the security key If at least one drive is unlocked then the Import preview screen appears If no drives are unlocked the Incorrect security Key dialog appears When VD is secured with EKM mode and if that VD is in Foreign state and if you switch to LKM mode and if you want to import to the foreign configuration then the dialog box appears as shown in the following figure Switch to EKM Mode e One or more foreign drives are secured using extemal key management J EKM mode In order to import the drives you must switch to extemal key management EKM mode m Figure 251 Switch to EKM Mode Page 363 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software LSI SafeStore Encryption Services MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 11 5 9 Enabling Drive Security using This section describes how to enable change and disable the drive security and how LKM to import a foreign con
215. cates its data to the second drive The size of each block is determined by the stripe size parameter which is set during the creation of the RAID set The RAID 1 virtual drives must have the same stripe size Spanning is used because one virtual drive is defined across more than one drive group Virtual drives defined across multiple RAID 1 level drive groups are referred to as RAID level 10 1 0 Data is striped across drive groups to increase performance by enabling access to multiple drive groups simultaneously Each spanned RAID 10 virtual drive can tolerate multiple drive failures as long as each failure is in a separate drive group If there are drive failures less than total drive capacity is available Configure RAID 10 by spanning two contiguous RAID 1 virtual drives up to the maximum number of supported devices for the controller RAID 10 supports a maximum of eight spans with a maximum of 32 drives per span You must use an even number of drives in each RAID 10 virtual drive in the span NOTE Other factors such as the type of controller can restrict the number of drives supported by RAID 10 virtual drives Table 12 provides an overview of RAID 10 Table 12 RAID 10 Overview Uses Appropriate when used with data storage that needs 100 percent redundancy of mirrored drive groups and that also needs the enhanced I O performance of RAID 0 striped drive groups RAID 10 works well for medium sized databases or any enviro
216. ce Alarm Physical Drive gt Start Patrol Read Virtual Drive gt Set Patrol Read Properties BBU gt Enable 55D Guard Scan Foreign Configuration Dashboard Physical Logica Load Configuration UB WIN 36455JFT3X5 pees a amp LSI MegaRAID SAS 92 Clear Configuration g Drive Group 0 Re Set Consistency Check Properties eral Save Configuration Virtual Drive s Schedule Consistency Check 3 peo Set Adjustable Task Rates cE Name Drives 1P Enclosure Preserved Cache al No i Drive Group 1 R Power Settings Ta cn dor ID Gg Virtual Drive s Enable Drive Security virtual Dri 5 Drives Update Controller Firmware Vendor ID Enclosure Bobcat 16 Slot 1 SAS 1 gt Enclosure Bobcat 16 Slot 2 SAS 1 Enclosure Bobcat 16 Slot 3 S45 1 UCN EN Figure 189 Start Patrol Read Menu The Patrol Read Set properties screen displays as shown in Figure 190 Page 306 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 9 Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices Running a Patrol Read Patrol Read Set properties n Lsis Select Patrol Read mode Maximum number of Physical drives allowed for Patrol Read concurrently 18 Include the Virtual drives for whose physical drives Patrol Read should be performed Available Virtual
217. ced Software MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Activate MegaRAID Advanced Sofware Confirmation x ve Are you sure you want to close this wizard Figure 206 Confirmation Dialog Box 11 2 6 Activating an Unlimited Key When you activate an unlimited key over a trial key a message The existing trial key will Over a Trial Key be deactivated and all the advanced software associated with it will be disabled appears as shown in the following figure Activate MegaRAID Advanced Software Summary x LSI gt lt Drive Security Disabled Enabled y Figure 207 Activating an Unlimited Key over a Trial Key NOTE Except the yellow shading the other shading of the text is provided for easy understanding in the relevant screens 11 2 6 1 Activating a Trial When you activate a trial software a message This trial software expires in 30 days Software appears as shown in the following figure Page 326 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software Recovery Advanced Software Activate MegaRAID Advanced Software Summary LSI Review the summary and go back if you need to make corrections The existing trial key will be deactivated and all the advanced software associated with it will be disabled Cache Cade MegaRAID Recovery Power Save Drive Security Figure 208 Activating a Trial Software 11 2 6 2 Activating the
218. change failed on s from s to s 0x0171 Warning s is not available 0x0172 Information s is available 0x0173 Information s is used for CacheCade TM with capacity 0x lx logical blocks 0x0174 Information s is using CacheCade TM s 0x0175 Information s is no longer using CacheCade TM s 0x0176 Critical Snapshot deleted due to resource constraints for s in snapshot repository s 0x0177 Warning Auto Snapshot failed for s in snapshot repository s 0x0178 Warning Controller reset on board expander 0x0179 Warning CacheCade TM s capacity changed and is now 0x lx logical blocks 0x017a Warning Battery cannot initiate transparent learn cycles 0x017b Information Premium feature s key was applied for s 0x017c Information Snapshot schedule properties changed on s 0x017d Information Snapshot scheduled action is due on s 0x017e Information Performance Metrics collection command 0x lx 0x017f Information Premium feature s key was transferred s 0x0180 Information Premium feature serial number s 0x0181 Warning Premium feature serial number mismatched Key vault serial num s 0x0182 Warning Battery cannot support data retention for more than d hours Please replace the battery 0x0183 Information s power policy changed to s from s 0x0184 Warning s cannot transition to max power savings 0x0185 Information Host driver is loaded and operational 0x0186 Information s mirror broken LSI Corporation Con
219. ck configurations using EKM Yet another important feature of EKM is that you can use it without human intervention to perform operations like drive migration and controller replacement MegaRAID accomplishes the task of obtaining keys by interacting with the EKM agent The EKM agent talks to the EKM server EKMS through a network and gets the security key for the controller Keys are retrieved or created to perform the following tasks Create secure VDs Insert drives to replace failed drives in a secure configuration Re key the system based on EKMS policies or user request Gain access to a secured configuration during boot Unlock and import secured drives during migration Perform the following configurations to enable the drive security to create secure VD using the EKM mode with the support of EKM servers EKM mode is supported by MSM and EKMS is present EKM mode is supported by MSM and EKMS is not present Change the current security settings or switch between the modes Change the security settings when the user is in EKM and wants to switch to LKM Import Foreign Drives When you choose EKM for drive security and decide to configure EKM mode is supported and EKMS is present the application responds to different behaviors depending on the scenarios at that particular time The first scenario occurs when EKM is enabled and the second scenario occurs when EKM is enabled and EKMS is present The details of this scen
220. click a controller icon 3 Select Go To gt Controller gt Manage MegaRAID Advanced Software Options wizard Secure MegaRAID Advanced Software Confirmation The following advanced software are not secured in the key vault Please secure to avoid loosing them If you have any unused activation keys make sure you activate all of them first All non activated Activation Keys will stop working after this operation Advanced Software MegaRAID Recovery Power Save Drive Security Do you want to secure these advanced software keys now C Confirm Figure 211 Securing Advanced MegaRAID Software 4 Select the Confirm check box if you want to secure the advanced software After you select the check box the Yes button gets enabled This implies that the advanced software is secured in the keyvault If the advanced software is not secured the Secure MegaRAID Advanced Software Confirmation dialog box appears as shown in Figure 206 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 11 2 7 Configuring Keyvault Re hosting process LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software Recovery Advanced Software Rehosting is a process of transferring the advanced software features from one controller to another To implement the rehosting process you must configure the Configure Key Vault button in the Manage MegaRAID Software Options wizard as sho
221. consider a stripe that contains 64 KB of drive space and has 16 KB of data residing on each drive in the stripe In this case the stripe size is 64 KB and the strip size is 16 KB You can set the strip size to 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 and 1024 KB A larger strip size produces higher read performance If your computer regularly performs random read requests choose a smaller strip size The default is 64 KB Access Policy Select the type of data access that is allowed for this virtual drive RW Allow read write access This is the default Read Only Allow read only access Blocked Do not allow access Read Policy Specify the read policy for this virtual drive Normal This option disables the read ahead capability This is the default Ahead This option enables read ahead capability which allows the controller to read sequentially ahead of requested data and to store the additional data in cache memory anticipating that the data will be needed soon This speeds up reads for sequential data but there is little improvement when accessing random data Page 70 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Creating a Storage Configuration Write Policy Specify the write policy for this virtual drive WBack In Writeback mode the controller sends a data transfer completion signal to the host when the controller cache has received all of the data in
222. controller drive group physical drive virtual drive or battery backup unit in the main menu screen The menu options vary depending on the type of device selected in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager main menu The options also vary depending on the current state of the selected device For example if you select an offline drive the Make Drive Online option appears in the Physical Drive menu Configuration options are also available This is where you access the Configuration Wizard that you use to perform configuration drive groups and virtual drives To access the Wizard select the controller in the left panel and then select Go To gt Controller gt Create Virtual Drive The Log menu includes options for saving and clearing the message log For more information about the Log menu see Appendix A Events and Messages On the Tools menu you can select Tools gt Configure Alerts to access the Configure Alerts screen which you can use to set the alert delivery rules event severity levels exceptions and e mail settings For more information see Section 9 2 Configuring Alert Notifications On the Help menu you can select Help gt Contents to view the MegaRAID Storage Manager online help file You can select Help gt About MegaRAID Storage Manager to view version information for the MegaRAID Storage Manager software NOTE When you use the MegaRAID Storage Manager online help you might see a warning message that Internet Ex
223. controller support security feature this option enables FDE Ctrl based encryption on virtual disk Default Automatic None MaximumWithCaching MaximumWithoutCaching If the controller supports power savings on virtual disk these options specify the possible levels of power savings that can be applied on a virtual disk 5 22 5 Displays creating a RAID Level Use the command in the following table to create a RAID level 10 50 60 spanned configuration Table 127 Creates a RAID Level 10 50 60 spanned Configuration Convention MegaSCU CfgSpanAdd r10 Array0O E0 S0 E1 S1 Arrayl1 E0 S0 E1 S1 ArrayX E0 S0 E1 S1 WT WB NORA RA ADRA Direct Cached CachedBadBBU NoCachedBadBBU strpszM szXXX szYYY AfterLdX Force FDE CtrlBased Default Automatic None MaximumWithCaching MaximumWithoutCaching aN MegaSCU CfgSpanAdd r50 Array0O E0 S0 E1 S1 E2 S2 Arrayl E0 S0 E1 S1 E2 S2 ArrayX E0 S0 E1 S1 E2 S2 WT WB NORA RA ADRA Direct Cached CachedBadBBU NoCachedBadBBU strpszM szXXX szYYY AfterLdX Force FDE CtrlBased Default Automatic None MaximumWithCaching MaximumWithoutCaching aN LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 221 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Dimmer Switch Related Options MegaRAID SAS Sof
224. corrupt data or a snapshot that contains the deleted data depending on the situation After you create a snapshot you can reboot and roll back to a snapshot to restore data Follow these steps to create a snapshot 1 Enable MegaRAID Recovery See Section 4 10 2 Enabling the Recovery Advanced Software for the procedure used to enable MegaRAID Recovery in WebBlOS 2 Click on the virtual drive in the Logical View on the main screen to go to the operations for the virtual drive The Virtual Drive screen appears as shown in Figure 94 Page 141 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Using MegaRAID Recovery MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Page 142 MegaRAID BIOS Config Utility Virtual Drive 8 sis en NOe ays Properties RAID Level 1 Status Optimal Strip Size 64 KB Capacity 232 375 GB Secured No Policies Bed amend Mskcache achange ae Default Write Write Through Current Write Write Through Operations Delete Locate oc AdyvOpers Disable MegaRAID Recovery Manage Snapshots Figure 94 Snapshot Base Virtual Drive Operations 3 Click Manage Snapshots in the Operations panel The Virtual Drive Properties screen appears as shown in Figure 95 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Using MegaRAID Recovery MegaRAID BIOS Config Uti
225. creen 3 Select an array with free space from the drop down list and click Select Array The selected array moves to the right frame under the heading Selected Array 4 Click Next The Create CachCade Disk screen appears as shown in Figure 62 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 107 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Creating a CacheCade Configuration MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Figure 62 CacheCade Disk Screen 5 Click Next to accept the drive group 6 If you need to undo the changes click Reclaim The Config Wizard Preview screen appears as shown in Figure 63 Page 108 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 4 WebBIOS Configuration Utility Creating a CacheCade Configuration J we Slot 3 SATA SSD 29 281 GB Uncon HD1000 25 Connector Port 4 7 Figure 63 CacheCade Configuration Preview 7 Click Accept if the configuration is OK Otherwise or click Back to return to the previous screens and change the configuration 8 If you accept the configuration click Yes at the prompt to save the configuration The WebBIOS main menu screen appears as shown in Figure 64 It shows the CacheCade virtual drive Page 109 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Selecting SafeStore Encryption Services Security MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Options i Backplane Slot l SA
226. ctory Defaults EY l S MA R T Polling 30 seconds Cluster Mode flarn Control f Rebuild Rate Patrol Read Rate EN BGI Rate Cache Flush Interval a ICC Rate Spinup Drive Count aa Reconstruction Rate Spinup Delay E te Rees ten Figure 86 Physical Drive Screen The drive properties are view only and are self explanatory Note that the properties include the state of the drive Operations you can perform are listed at the bottom of the screen After you select an operation click Go to start the operation The operations vary depending on the drive state If the drive state is Online the following operations appear Select MakeDriveOffline if you want to force the drive offline NOTE If you force offline a good drive that is part of aredundant drive group with a hot spare the drive will rebuild to the hot spare drive The drive you forced offline will go into the Unconfigured Bad state Access the BIOS utility to set the drive to the Unconfigured Good state Select Locate to make the LED flash on the drive This works only if the drive is installed in a drive enclosure If the drive state is Unconfigured Good four additional operations appear on this screen Select Make Global HSP to make a global hot spare available to all of the virtual drives Select Make Dedicated HSP to make a hot spare dedicated to a specific virtual drive Page 132 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Softwar
227. cured when you click the Configure Key Vault button in the Advanced Software Options wizard in Figure 16 the Secure MegaRAID Advanced Software Options dialog box appears as shown in the following figure following re hosting pro If you have a ze a lt eys ake s 1 ac vate all of then first All C ac yatio will s king after this operation A tware Options MegaRAID Recovery MegaRAID FastPath MegaRAID SafeStore Do you want to secure these Advanced Software Options now Figure 26 Securing MegaRAID Advanced Software Confirming rehosting process involves the process of transferring or rehosting the advanced software features from one controller to another When you need to transfer the features from controller 1 to controller 2 and in controller 2 NVRAM if there are some features which needs to be transferred to Key Vault the Confirm Re hosting Process screen appears as shown in Figure 27 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Managing Software Licensing Perform the following steps to confirm the rehosting process 1 Click the Configure Key Vault button in the Advanced Software Options wizard in Figure 16 The Confirm Rehosting Process wizard appears as shown in the following figure Figure 27 Confirm Rehosting Process 2 Select the check box next to the message I acknowledge that I have completed the re hosting process in the L
228. cy Check Follow these steps to set the properties for a consistency check 1 Click the Physical tab or Logical tab and select the controller 2 Click Go To gt Controller gt Set Consistency Check Properties Figure 195 shows the consistency check properties menu item MegaRAID Storage Manager 6 90 0100 Manage GoTo Log Tools Help e Disable Alarm Drive Group Silence Alarm Physical Drive gt Virtual Drive gt Start Patrol Read Set Patrol Read Properties BBU gt Enable SSD Guard Scan Foreign Configuration Dashboard Physical Logics Load Configuration Save Configuration B WIN J6A5S5JFT3X5 SE ALSI MegaRAID SA5 9 Backplane 252 Bobcat 16 Conr Slot 0 5A5 Slot 1 5A5 Slot 2 SAS Slot 3 SAS A Slot 4 SAS i Slot 8 SSD Slot 9 SAS Slot 10 S45 136 985 GB Online Slot 11 545 136 733 GB Online Clear Configuration ck Properties Schedule Consistency Check Set Adjustable Task Rates Preserved Gache Power Settings Enable Drive Security Update Controller Firmware Device ID Figure 195 Set Consistency Check Properties Option The Set Consistency Check Properties dialog box appears as shown in Figure 196 Set Consistency Check Properties Ea Re LSis Description Specify how the consistency check operation should behave when an error is encountered
229. d use the drop down selector to allocate capacity for writes to the view Click OK The capacity is allocated for writes to the view If the view details of the snapshot are available at that particular time for the VD these details appear under the view details in the Manage snapshots wizard as shown in Figure 227 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software Recovery Advanced Software Manage Snapshots fa LSI K Virtual Drive 0 271 375 GB Optimal Next snapshot June 1 12 004M Edit Schedule Snapshots Status Capacity used Optimal Delete Snapshot Create Snapshot view Details View name view Time of creation 2010 05 26 11 38 AM Status Optimal Target ID 65 OS disk name Figure 227 View Details 11 2 23 No View Details for Snapshot When there is no view for the snapshot the following message appears in the View details area as shown in Figure 228 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 345 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software Recovery Advanced Software 11 2 24 No Snapshot Schedule Page 346 Manage Snapshots Virtual Drive 0 271 375 GB Optimal Next snapshot June 1 12 008M Edit schedule Snapshots MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Creation time Status 37 13 2010 05 26 11 37 AM Optimal lt Delete Snapshot Create Snapshot Capaci
230. d Tool Controller Property Related Options MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Table 41 Set Controller Properties Convention MegaCli AdpSetProp CacheFlushInterval val RebuildRate val PatrolReadRate val BgiRate val CCRate val ReconRate val SpinupDriveCount val SpinupDelay val CoercionMode val ClusterEnable val PredFailPollInterval val BatWarnDsbl val EccBucketSize val EccBucketLeakRate val AbortCCOnError val AlarmEnbl AlarmDsbl AlarmSilence SMARTCpyBkEnbl val AutoDetectBackPlaneDsbl CopyBackDsbl LoadBalanceMode NCQEnb1l CQDsbl SSDSMARTCpyBkEnbl val MaintainPdFailHistoryEnbl val EnblSpinDownUnConfigDrvs val AutoEnhancedImportEnbl AutoEnhancedImportDsbl UseFDEOnlyEncrypt val PrCorrectUncfgdAreas val aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Sets the properties on the selected controller s The possible settings are CacheF lushInterval Cache flush interval in seconds Values 0 to 255 RebuildRate Rebuild rate Values 0 to 100 PatrolReadRate Patrol read rate Values 0 to 100 BgiRate Background initilization rate Values 0 to 100 CCRate Consistency check rate Values 0 to 100 ReconRate Reconstruction rate Values 0 to 100 SpinupDriveCount Max number of drives to spin up at one time Values 0 to 255 SpinupDelay Number of seconds to delay among spinup groups Values 0 to 255 Coercion
231. d drive s select the check box before Do not convert JBOD drives to unconfigured good drives then the MSM application skips changing any selected JBOD to unconfigured good drive 11 Click Next The Create Virtual drive Screen appears as shown in Figure 144 You can also convert JBOD to Unconfigured Good by clicking the Controller gt Make UnConfigured Good option from the main MSM window The Make Configured Good dialog box appears as shown in the following figure LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 8 3 Adding Hot Spare Drives LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 8 Configuration Adding Hot Spare Drives Make Unconfigured Good uT LSis To convert JBOD drives to Unconfigured good Please choose the drives From the table below Maximum allowed unconfiqured good drives on a controller is 16 Eligible JBOD drives For conversion 16 JBOD Drives Enclosure Slot 0 545 HDD 136 219 GB JBOD Enclosure Slot 1 S45 HDD 33 656 GB JBOD Enclosure Slot 2 SATA HDD 148 531 GB JBOD Cancel Figure 154 Make Configured Good 12 Select the JBOD drives to be configured as Unconfigured Good 13 Click OK The selected JBOD drives are configured as Unconfigured Good Hot spares are drives that are available to automatically replace failed drives in a RAID 1 RAID 5 RAID 6 RAID 10 RAID 50 or RAID 60 virtual drive Dedicated hot spares can b
232. dBBU NoCachedBadBBU Specifies Specifies whether to use write cache when the BBU is bad SzZXXXXXXXxX Specifies the capacity for the virtual drive where XXXX is a decimal number of MB However the actual capacity of the virtual drive can be smaller because the driver requires the number of blocks from the drives in each virtual drive to be aligned to the stripe size If multiple size options are specified CT configures the virtual drives in the order of the options entered in the command line The configuration of a particular virtual drive will fail if the remaining capacity of the drive group is too small to configure the virtual drive with the specified capacity This option can also be used to create a configuration on the free space available in the drive group strpszM Specifies the stripe size where the stripe size values are 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 or 1024 KB Hsp E5 S5 Creates hot spares when you create the configuration The new hot spares will be dedicated to the virtual drive used in creating the configuration This option does not allow you to create global hot spares To create global hot spares you must use the PdHsp command with proper subcommands You can also use this option to create a configuration on the free space available in the virtual drive You can specify which free slot should be used by specifying the AfterLdx This command is optional By default the application uses the first fre
233. data storage capacity Table 8 provides an overview of RAID 1 Figure 8 provides a graphic example of a RAID 1 drive group Table 8 RAID 1 Overview Uses Use RAID 1 for small databases or any other environment that requires fault tolerance but small capacity LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 33 Chapter 2 Introduction to RAID RAID Levels 2 5 5 RAID 5 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Table 8 RAID 1 Overview Strong Points Provides complete data redundancy RAID 1 is ideal for any application that requires fault tolerance and minimal capacity Weak Points Requires twice as many drives Performance is impaired during drive rebuilds Drives 2 through 32 must be an even number of drives lt N SD A ZA LP LIP SP LIP SP SP I 1 I I I I I I IS t1 Segment Segment2 Il Segment3 1 Segment 4 cee Duplicate i Segment 2 Duplicate It Ennis Duplicate l SEREEN Duplicate l l I Segment 5 I segment6 Segment6 Segment 7 Segment 8 1 Segment 5 Duplicate i g Duplicate i Segment 7 Duplicate i Segment 8 Duplicate 1 I l i H n Wee ak a a ey Be J pe a eS ee Se jo ae I RAID1 RAID1 RAID1 RAID1 Figure 8 RAID 1 Drive Group RAID 5 includes disk striping at the block level and parity Parity is the data s property of Page 34 being odd or even and parity checking is used to detect errors in the data In RAID 5 the parit
234. date Controller Firmware 2 Click Browse to locate the romupdate file as shown in Figure 199 Page 319 Chapter 10 Maintaining and Managing Storage Configurations Upgrading the Firmware MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Page 320 Update Controller Firmware Ee LSI K gt Description Updates controller firmware with a specified firmware image File Browse Figure 199 Locate the Controller Firmware File 3 After you locate the file click OK MegaRAID Storage Manager software displays the version of the existing firmware and the version of the new firmware file 4 When you are prompted to indicate whether you want to upgrade the firmware click Yes The controller is updated with the new firmware code contained in the romfile 5 Reboot the system after the new firmware is flashed The new firmware does not take effect until reboot LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 11 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software MegaRAID Advanced Software Using MegaRAID Advanced Software This chapter describes the MegaRAID advanced software offered by MegaRAID Storage Manager MSM for certain MegaRAID SAS 6Gb s RAID controllers and explains how to use these features 11 1 MegaRAID Advanced Software 11 2 Recovery Advanced Software 11 2 1 MegaRAID Software Licensing 11 2 2 Managing MegaRAID Advanced Software LSI Cor
235. de Page 52 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 4 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Overview WebBIOS Configuration Utility This chapter describes the WebBIOS Configuration Utility CU which enables you to create and manage RAID configurations on LSI SAS controllers 4 1 Overview 4 2 Starting the WebBIOS CU LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 The WebBIOS CU unlike the MegaRAID Storage Manager software resides in the SAS controller BIOS and operates independently of the operating system You can use the WebBIOS CU to do the following tasks Create drive groups and virtual drives for storage configurations Display controller drive virtual drive and battery backup unit BBU properties and change parameters Delete virtual drives Migrate a storage configuration to a different RAID level Detect configuration mismatches Import a foreign configuration Scan devices connected to the controller Initialize virtual drives Check configurations for data consistency Create a CacheCade configuration The WebBIOS CU provides a configuration wizard to guide you through the configuration of virtual drives and drive groups Follow these steps to start the WebBIOS CU and access the main screen 1 When the host computer is booting hold down the lt Ctrl gt key and press the lt H gt key when the following text appears on the screen Cop
236. de Advanced Software MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide MegaRAID Storage Manager 6 96 0000 Manage GoTo Log Tools Help Controller Drive Group Physical Drive gt Virtual Drive gt Create Virtual Drive Create CacheCade Enable Alarm Start Patrol Read BBU Set Patrol Read Properties Disable SSD Guard Dashboard Physical Logica Scan Foreign Configuration Ug WIN Y1G6TUT70C2 Load Configuration eem Save Configuration Sj ig Drive Group 0 R4 Clear Configuration S ka Virtual Drivets Set Consistency Check Properties amp Spot Schedule Consistency Check e Name E amp A Drives iag Enclosure Set Adjustable Task Rates I No Drive Group 1 R Preserved Cache rr Virtual Drive s Power Se lor ID oo Virtual Dri Drives Enable Drive Security endor ID Enclosure Create Snapshots gt Enclosure ee Update Controller Firmware a K Enclosure evice Port Count Figure 231 Create CacheCade Menu Option The Wizard screen appears 3 Click on unconfigured CacheCade software drives in the left frame to select the drives for the CacheCade drive group as shown in Figure 232 Create CacheCade Drive group Select unconfigured 55D drives Enclosure Bobcat CacheCade Drive groups LSI MegaRAID SAS 9280 4i4e Bus 2 Dev 0 fas Lsis ICacheCade Drive Group0 Create Gac
237. dicating the length of the interleaved data segments that the RAID controller writes across multiple drives not including parity drives For example consider a stripe that contains 64 KB of drive space and has 16 KB of data residing on each drive in the stripe In this case the stripe size is 64 KB and the strip size is 16 KB The user can select the stripe size LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide striping subvendor ID uncorrectable error count LSI Corporation Confidential vendor ID vendor info virtual drive virtual drive state write back write policy write through September 2010 Appendix C Glossary A technique used to write data across all drives in a virtual drive Each stripe consists of consecutive virtual drive data addresses that are mapped in fixed size units to each drive in the virtual drive using a sequential pattern For example if the virtual drive includes five drives the stripe writes data to drives one through five without repeating any of the drives The amount of space consumed by a stripe is the same on each drive Striping by itself does not provide data redundancy Striping in combination with parity does provide data redundancy A controller property that lists additional vendor ID information about the controller A controller property that lists the number of uncorrectable errors detected on drives connected to the controller If the error cou
238. donline Use the command in the following table to mark the configured drive as missing for the selected controller s Table 95 Display Drives in Missing Status Convention MegaCli PDGetMissing aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Displays the drive s in missing status The format is No Row Column SizeExpected MB 0 x y ZZZZZZZZZ Where x is the index to the drive groups y is the index to the drive in that drive group and zzzzzz is the minimum capacity of the drive that can be used as a replacement Page 207 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Drive Related Options MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 5 15 11 Replace the Configured Drives and Start an Automatic Rebuild 5 15 12 Prepare the Unconfigured Drive for Removal 5 15 13 Display Total Number of Drives 5 15 14 Display List of Physical Devices Page 208 Use the command in the following table to replace configured drive s and start an automatic rebuild of the drive for the selected controller s Table 96 Replace Configured Drive s and Start Automatic Rebuild Convention MegaCli PDReplaceMissing PhysDrv E0 S0 E1 S1 ArrayX RowY aN Description Replaces the configured drives that are identified as missing and then starts an automatic rebuild Physdrv E0 S0 Specifies the physical drive enclosure and the slots for the drives Use the command in the following table to prepare the unconfigured drive s for remov
239. dressing the needs for both internal and external solutions The SAS controllers support the ANSI Serial Attached SCSI standard version 1 1 In addition the controller supports the SATA II protocol defined by the Serial ATA specification version 1 0a Supporting both the SAS and SATA II interfaces the SAS controller is a versatile controller that provides the backbone of both server environments and high end workstation environments Each port on the SAS RAID controller supports SAS devices SATA II devices or CacheCade SSD Caching software devices using the following protocols m SAS Serial SCSI Protocol SSP which enables communication with other SAS devices SATA II which enables communication with other SATA II devices Serial Management Protocol SMP which communicates topology management information directly with an attached SAS expander device Serial Tunneling Protocol STP which enables communication with a SATA II device through an attached expander SAS is a serial point to point enterprise level device interface that leverages the proven SCSI protocol set SAS is a convergence of the advantages of SATA Il SCSI and Fibre Channel and is the future mainstay of the enterprise and high end workstation storage markets SAS offers a higher bandwidth per pin than parallel SCSI and it improves the signal and data integrity The SAS interface uses the proven SCSI command set to ensure reliable data transfers while prov
240. drive group configuration in the Drive Groups panel on the right as shown in Figure 38 3 If you need to undo the changes click Reclaim Choose whether to use drive encryption 1ege RAID BII IS Ce LEE U tilit y Config Hizard Drive Croup De fir ition Drive Groups PE TE EE EE E i Slot 5 SAS HDD 136 218 GB Un Figure 38 WebBIOS Drive Group Definition Screen 5 After you finish selecting drives for the drive group click Accept DG 6 Click Next The Virtual Drive Definition screen appears as shown in Figure 39 You use this screen to select the RAID level strip size read policy and other attributes for the new virtual drives LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 77 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Creating a Storage Configuration MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide MegaRAID BIOS Config Utility Config Wizard Virtual Drive Definition Isok Figure 39 WebBIOS Virtual Drive Definition Screen 7 Change the virtual drive options from the defaults listed on the screen as needed Here are brief explanations of the virtual drive options RAID Level The drop down menu lists the possible RAID levels for the virtual drive Select RAID 5 Strip Size The strip size is the portion of a stripe that resides on a single drive in the drive group The stripe consists of the data segments that the RAID controller writes across multiple drives not including parity drives For example consid
241. drives Included Virtual drives Virtual Drive Add gt Virtual Drive 1 RB_Source 136 469 GB Optimal m gt Ug Virtual Drive 2 RFV_Source 272 937 GB Optimal Add all gt gt 9 Virtual Drive 3 Rep_VD 136 469 GB Optimal wy Virtual Drive 4 CacheCade 15 000 GB Optimal Remo sscb 5 S5CD_S 29 281 GB Optimal Virtual Drive 0 PathThru 146 406 GB Optimal m le Bete ane p Patrol Read Interval Select Weekly f J Run Patrol Read non stop p Patrol Read Schedule Virtual Drive JV Perform Patrol Read when I press OK Start Patrol Read on Month Date Year ime March v 20 7 amn gt jos x care Figure 190 Patrol Read Configuration 3 Select a mode for a patrol read The options are Automatic Patrol read runs automatically at the time interval you specify on this screen Manual Patrol read runs only when you manually start it by selecting Start Patrol Read from the controller Options panel Disabled Patrol read does not run Specify a maximum count of drives to include in the patrol read The count must be from 1 to 255 Click virtual drives in the list under the heading Virtual Drives to include in the patrol read and click Add gt or click Add All gt gt to include all of the virtual drives Optional Change the frequency at which the patrol read will run The default frequency is weekly 168 hours which is suitable for most config
242. drives and SATA drives on the CacheCade SSD Caching software devices You can choose whether to allow a virtual drive to consist of both CacheCade SSD Caching software devices and HDDs For a virtual drive that consists of CacheCade SSD Caching software only you can choose whether to allow SAS CacheCade SSD Caching software drives and SATA CacheCade SSD Caching software drives in that virtual drive For virtual drives that have both CacheCade SSD Caching software and HDDs you can choose whether to mix SAS and SATA HDD drives with SAS and SATA CacheCade SSD Caching software devices in various combinations Table 1 lists the valid drive mix configurations you can use when you create virtual drives and allow HDD and CacheCade SSD Caching software mixing The valid drive mix configurations are based on manufacturer settings Table 1 Valid Drive Mix Configurations Valid Drive Mix Configurations 1 SAS HDD with SAS SDD SAS only configuration 2 SATA HDD with SATA CacheCade SSD Caching software SATA only configuration 3 SAS HDD with a mix of SAS and SATA CacheCade SSD Caching software a SATA HDD cannot be added 4 SATA HDD with a mix of SAS and SATA CacheCade SSD Caching software a SAS HDD cannot be added 5 SAS CacheCade SSD Caching software with a mix of SAS and SATA HDD a SATA CacheCade SSD Caching software cannot be added 6 SATA CacheCade SSD Caching software with a mix of SAS and SATA HDD
243. e 10 Policy The IO Policy applies to reads on a specific virtual drive It does not affect the read ahead cache Direct In Direct I O mode reads are not buffered in cache memory Data is transferred to the cache and the host concurrently If the same data block is read again it comes from cache memory This is the default Cached In Cached I O mode all reads are buffered in cache memory Drive Policy Specify the drive cache policy Enable Enable the drive cache Disable Disable the drive cache This drive policy is the default NoChange Leave the current drive cache policy as is This is the default Disable BGI Specify the background initialization status No Leave background initialization enabled This means that a new configuration can be initialized in the background while you use WebBIOS to do other configuration tasks This is the default Yes Select Yes if you do not want to allow background initializations for configurations on this controller Select Size Specify the size of the virtual drive in megabytes Normally this would be the full size for RAID 60 shown in the Configuration panel on the right You can specify a smaller size if you want to create other virtual drives on the same drive group LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 4 6 Creating a CacheCade Configuration LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 4 WebBIOS Configu
244. e performance the cache can temporarily store data in accordance with its write back policies A property that indicates the amount of storage space on a drive or virtual drive A drive property indicating the capacity to which a drive has been coerced forced to make it compatible with other drives that are nominally the same capacity For example a 4 GB drive from one manufacturer might be 4 196 MB and a 4 GB from another manufacturer might be 4 128 MB These drives could be coerced to a usable capacity of 4 088 MB each for use in a drive group in a storage configuration A controller property indicating the capacity to which drives of nominally identical capacity are coerced forced to make them usable in a storage configuration Page 391 Appendix C Glossary Page 392 consistency check consistency check rate controller copyback current write policy default write policy device ID device port count drive cache policy drive group drive state MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide An operation that verifies that all stripes in a virtual drive with a redundant RAID level are consistent and that automatically fixes any errors For RAID 1 drive groups this operation verifies correct mirrored data for each stripe The rate at which consistency check operations are run on a computer system A chip that controls the transfer of data between the microprocessor and memory or between the microprocessor and a peripheral dev
245. e used to replace failed drives in a selected drive group only Global hot spares are available to any virtual drive on a specific controller To add a dedicated or global hot spare drive follow these steps 1 Select the Physical tab in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager main menu and click the icon of an unused drive For each drive the screen displays the port number enclosure number slot number drive state drive capacity and drive manufacturer Select Go To gt Physical Drive gt Assign G lobal Hot Spare or Go To gt Physical Drive gt Assign D edicated Hot Spare If you selected Assign De dicated Hotspare select a drive group from the list that appears The hot spare is dedicated to the drive group that you select If you selected Assign G lobal Hotspare skip this step and go to the next step The hot spare is available to any virtual drive on a specific controller Click Go to create the hot spare The drive state for the drive changes to dedicated or global hot spare depending on your selection Page 275 Chapter 8 Configuration Changing Adjustable Task Rates 8 4 Changing Adjustable Task Rates Page 276 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Follow these steps if you need to change the adjustable rates for rebuilds and other system tasks that run in the background NOTE LSI recommends that you leave the adjustable task rates at their default settings to achieve the best system performance If y
246. e y LN L0 1 2 aN a0 1 2 aALL Deletes the snapshot and the associated view if Force or Y is specified SnapshotTime yyyymmdd hh mm ss Optional If used this action deletes the snapshot with the time stamp that is specified in command line if it is the oldest PIT force lf specified this action deletes the snapshot even if it has the view associated with it y If specified this action deletes the snapshot even if it has the view associated with it LN N specifies the source LD number for the command L0 1 2 Specifies the command is for LDs 0 1 and 2 You can select more than one LD Page 215 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Recovery Snapshot Related Options MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 5 20 6 Create a View Use the command in the following table to create a view A view contains the content from the Point in Time PiT when the snapshot was made Table 116 Create a View Convention MegaCli Snapshot CreateView SnapshotTime yyyymmdd hh mm ss viewName NameString RW RO Blocked szXXX Lx aN a0 1 2 aALL n appNameP Description Creates the view on a particular snapshot SnapshotTime yyyymmdd hh mm ss Creates the view on the snapshot with the time stamp yyyymmdd hh mm ss viewName NameSt ring Optional Specifies the name of the view RW RO Blocked Optional Specifies the access policy of the view szXXX Optional Specifies the size of t
247. e 211 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Flashing the Firmware MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 5 16 2 Display Enclosure Status Use the command in the following table to display the status of the enclosure for selected controller s Table 105 Display Enclosure Status Convention MegaCli EncStatus aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Displays the status of the enclosure for the selected controller s 5 17 Flashing the Firmware The options in this section describe the functionality of the existing flash application The firmware flash options do not require input from the user 5 17 1 Flash the Firmware with the Use the command in the following table to flash the firmware with the ROM file ROM File specified at the command line for the selected controller s Table 106 Flash Firmware with ROM File Convention MegaCli AdpFwFlash f filename NoSigChk NoVerChk aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Flashes the firmware with the ROM file specified at the command line The NoSigChk option forces the application to flash the firmware even if the check word on the file does not match the required check word for the controller This option flashes the firmware only if the existing firmware version on the controller is lower than the version on the ROM image If you specify NoVerChk also the application flashes the controller firmware without checking the version of the firmware image The version check applies on
248. e Alerts Delivery Methods heading select one of the severity levels Click Edit The Alert Notification Delivery Methods dialog box appears as shown in Figure 181 Edit Severity Fatal Alert Delivery Methods Figure 181 Alert Notification Delivery Methods Dialog Box 4 Select the desired alert delivery methods for alert notifications at the event severity level 5 Click OK to set the delivery methods used for the severity level that you selected 9 2 2 Changing Alert Delivery You can change the alert delivery options for an event without changing the severity Methods for Individual Events level 1 On the Alerts Notification Configuration screen click the Alerts Setting tab The the Alerts Setting portion of the screen appears as shown in Figure 180 2 Click Change Individual Events The Change Individual Events dialog box appears as shown in Figure 182 The dialog box shows the events by their ID number description and severity level Page 298 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 9 2 3 Changing the Severity Level for Individual Events LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 9 Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices Change Individual Events xi LSI u gt Events Severity SC VD capacity changed YD 000 Controller reset on board expander Warning YD is available VD Warnin
249. e EEE O EEEE E T E E EELER 170 4 13 2 Power Save Settings Advanced sssssssesseeresserrserserresrsrreosrrerereresrrrresrrereoerrrseererser 171 4 13 3 Power Save While Creating Virtual Drives 0 cece cece ccc teen eben eee bene eee n een e teen etn ennes 172 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool 0 cece ccc nnn n tenn nen Ene EE nn ede Ee eee Eee eben eet en een eee 173 5 el PrOdUCUOVEIVIEW ccc guneen ensign dau EAEE ENE Nee a doe E FUND E EEE A ceaareem angus weee aaa 173 5 2 Novell NetWare SCO Solaris FreeBSD and DOS Operating System Support cece cece cece eee eee ene ene e een enenes 174 5 3 Command Line Abbreviations and Conventions cece cece eee ee een eee n enn eee enn e eens en een bene cane eae 175 5 3 1 Abbreviations Used in the Command Line 0 cece c nec eecneeee ne eee e nee e etn eee e teen cent tent canteens 175 53 2 CONVENTIONS c s 0 ssacrn co eae ea Mawar E TET eet ened DUE EE TENE CMa Ohe Tene MNS p REE TO Re NaS 175 54 Pre boot MegaGLl ic ccdibh tka en r e AE es rhe neee Geka a eeoa nate E ET aes A eee Rea RMN E EREA 176 5 5 CacheCade SSD Caching Related Options 0 ce cece ccc ene n enn ene n ence etn e dene teens teen tee ee een enee 177 5 5 1 Create a Solid State Drive Cache Drive to Use as Secondary Cache cece eee e cence cence eee teen eeeeenenes 178 5 5 2 Delete a Solid State Drive Cache Drive cee cece cee ete ere e etree een
250. e Physical tab in the left panel If an enclosure is operating normally the icon looks like this ag If the enclosure is not functioning normally for example if a fan has failed a small yellow or red circle appears to the right of the icon 9 8 Monitoring Battery When MegaRAID Storage Manager is running you can monitor the status of all of the Backup Units BBUs connected to controllers in the server If a BBU is operating normally the icon a looks like this If it has failed a red dot appears next to the icon To show the properties for a BBU perform the following steps 1 On the main menu screen click the Physical tab to open the physical view LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 309 Chapter 9 Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices Monitoring Rebuilds and Other MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Processes 9 8 1 Battery Learn Cycle 9 8 1 1 Setting Learn Cycle Properties 9 8 1 2 Starting a Learn Cycle Manually 9 9 Monitoring Rebuilds and Other Processes Page 310 2 Select the BBU icon in the left panel The BBU properties appear in the right panel The BBU properties include the following The number of times the BBU has been recharged Cycle Count The full capacity of the BBU plus the percentage of its current state of charge and the estimated time until it will be depleted The current BBU temperature voltage current and remaining capacity m Ifthe battery is charging t
251. e Security Settings EKM When you select the Change Security Settings in the Change Security wizard as shown in Figure 246 two options are offered to you If you select the first option Change current security settings you can traverse to the EKM mode If you select the second option Switch to Local Key Management LKM mode you can switch over to LKM mode Perform the following steps to configure the Change Security Settings wizard 1 Select the Physical View tab in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window and click a controller icon 2 Choose any one of the following options to enable the Change Security Settings wizard m Select Go To gt Controller gt Change Security Settings in the main navigation bar present in the top portion of the MSM screen m Right click the controller icon and click Change Security Settings The Change Security Settings wizard appears as shown in the following figure Change Security Settings p LSI Controller lt name gt Drive security is currently enabled Change the drive security settings on this controller or switch between key management Current drive security mode External key management EKM Change current security settings OK awd j O Switch to Local key management LKM mode Figure 246 Change Security Settings When you select the Change current security settings option a different EKM key for the controller is generat
252. e Security using LKM You can import the foreign drives in the LKM or EKM mode Depending on the mode selected and the secured drives the following scenarios occur Page 361 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software 11 5 6 LKM Importing Foreign Drives to 11 5 7 EKM Importing Foreign Drives to Page 362 LSI SafeStore Encryption Services MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Import Foreign Drives LKM mode EKM Secured Locked Drives are present Import Foreign Drives EKM mode LKM secured locked drives are present Import Foreign Drives EKM mode EKM secured locked drives are present Perform the following steps to configure the Scan Foreign Configuration wizard 1 Select the Physical View tab in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window and click a controller icon 2 Choose any one of the following options to enable the Scan Foreign Configuration wizard m Right click the controller node in the device tree in the left frame of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window and select Scan Foreign Configuration Select Go To gt Controller gt Scan Foreign Configuration in the main navigation bar present in the top portion of the MSM screen If a Foreign Configuration is detected the Foreign Configuration Detected screen appears If you choose Import and click OK the Unlock Foreign drives wizard appears as shown in Figure 250 When the VD is secured with the EKM mode and if
253. e Size 2 4 8 3 Strip Size 2 4 9 Disk Mirroring LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 2 Introduction to RAID Components and Features Patrol read involves the review of your system for possible drive errors that could lead to drive failure and then action to correct errors The goal is to protect data integrity by detecting drive failure before the failure can damage data The corrective actions depend on the drive group configuration and the type of errors Patrol read starts only when the controller is idle for a defined period of time and no other background tasks are active though it can continue to run during heavy I O processes You can use the MegaRAID Command Tool or the MegaRAID Storage Manager to select the patrol read options which you can use to set automatic or manual operation or disable patrol read See Section 5 8 Controller Property Related Options or Section 9 5 Running a Patrol Read Disk striping allows you to write data across multiple drives instead of just one drive Disk striping involves partitioning each drive storage space into stripes that can vary in size from 8KB to 1024 KB These stripes are interleaved in a repeated sequential manner The combined storage space is composed of stripes from each drive It is recommended that you keep stripe sizes the same across RAID drive groups For example in a four disk system using only disk striping used in RAID level 0 segment 1 is writt
254. e User Guide Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Viewing and Changing Device Properties WebBIOS displays the global hot spare as Global and the dedicated hot spare as Ded The icon for the dedicated hot spare displays under its associated virtual drive The drive number drive state drive capacity and drive manufacturer display Select Enclosure Affinity so if there are drive failures present on a split backplane configuration then the hot spare will be used first on the backplane side that it resides in Select Prepare for Removal to prepare the drive for removal from the enclosure The Prepare for Removal feature is different from spinning a drive down into powersave mode because it also involves flagging the drive as ready to remove Therefore if you choose to prepare a drive for removal Ready to Remove displays in the device tree for that drive instead of Powersave 4 8 4 Viewing and Changing Battery If your SAS controller has a battery backup unit BBU you can view information about Backup Unit Information it and change some settings To do this follow these steps 1 Click Controller Properties on the WebBIOS CU main menu screen The first Controller Information screen appears as shown in Figure 87 PieqgaRAID BIOS Config Utility Controller Properties Stop CC On Error o yl Schedule CC Maintain PD Fail StopOnError History ae Controller BIOS Disk Activity Manage Poversave Figure 87 First Cont
255. e array size dontExpandArray Expand a virtual drive within the array even when there is room to expand the array For example you have created a 5 GB RAID 1 virtual drive with two 30 Gbyte drives The array size is 30 GB and the virtual drive size is 5 GB If you replace the two 30 GB drives with two 60 GB drives the array size is still 30 GB because of previous configuration You have two options 1 Expand the virtual drive within the array Use the dontExpandArra option to expand the virtual drive up to 30 GB 2 Expand the virtual drive beyond the existing array size Use the pN option to expand the virtual drive beyond 30 GB and up to 60 GB the size of the replacement drives Page 203 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Drive Related Options MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 5 15 Drive Related Options You can use the commands in this section to select settings for the drives and perform ANN actions on therm 5 15 1 Display Drive Information Use the command in the following table to display information about the drives on the selected controller s Table 86 Display Drive Information Convention MegaCli PDInfo PhysDrv E0 S0 E1 S1 aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Provides information about the drives connected to the enclosure and controller slot This includes information such as the enclosure number slot number device ID sequence number drive type capacity if a drive foreig
256. e controller Re provisioning disables the security system of a device For a controller it involves destroying the security key For SED drives when the drive lock key is deleted the drive is unlocked and any user data on the drive is securely deleted 5 7 4 Create a Security Key Use the command in the following table to create a security key Table 31 Create a Security Key Convention MegaCli CreateSecurityKey SecurityKey sssssssssss Passphrase sssssssssss KeyID kkkkkkkkkkk aN Description Creates a security key based on a user provided string The controller uses the security key to lock and unlock access to the secure user data This key is encrypted into the security key blob and stored on the controller If the security key is unavailable user data is irretrievably lost You must take all precautions to never lose the security key CreateSecurityKey Creates the security key SecurityKey sssssssssss Enters the new security key The security key is case sensitive It must be between eight and thirty two characters and contain at least one number one lowercase letter one uppercase letter and one non alphanumeric character e g lt gt The space character is not permitted Passphrase sssssssssss Enters the new passphrase The pass phrase is case sensitive It must be between eight and thirty two characters and contain at least one number one lowercase letter one uppercase letter and one non alphanumeric cha
257. e following options to complete the rehosting process Click the Configure Key Vault button from the Manage MegaRAID Advanced Software Options wizard Select Go To gt Controller gt Manage MegaRAID Advanced Software Options wizard The Re hosting process Complete wizard appears as shown in the following figure Page 330 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 11 2 9 Deactivate Trial Software LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software Recovery Advanced Software x Re Hosting Process Complete LSI eye To transfer Advanced Software Options from one controller to another controller you need to complete the re hosting process Only then you will be able to secure the Advanced Software Options in the key vault This wizard helps you to configure the key vault by tranferring the Advanced Software Options From one controller to another controller and securing them in the keyvault Please Furnish the below details in the LSI Advanced Software License Management Portal in order to complete the re hosting process IF you have already completed the process then select the checkbox below and proceed with next LSI Advanced Software License Management Portal Former Serial Number New Serial Number SR91S500071 Safe ID 7NPW W2FHSBNB 1 NNGI9SRCVC3HKC7LBEPPHCCSHIZ C I acknowledge that I have completed the re hosting
258. e group RAID 50 is appropriate when used with data that requires high reliability high request rates high data transfer and medium to large capacity When you select Manual Configuration and click Next the Drive Group Definition screen appears You use this screen to select drives to create drive group 1 Hold lt Ctrl gt while selecting at least three ready drives in the Drives panel on the left LSI Corporation Confidential l September 2010 Page 95 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Creating a Storage Configuration MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide N Click Add To Array to move the drives to a proposed drive group configuration in the Drive Groups panel on the right w If you need to undo the changes click Reclaim Click Accept DG to create a RAID 5 drive group A An icon for a second drive group displays in the right panel pa Click on the icon for the second drive group to select it a Hold lt Ctrl gt while selecting at least three more ready drives in the Drives panel to create a second drive group a Click Add To Array to move the drives to a proposed drive group configuration in the Drive Groups panel on the right as shown in Figure 52 8 If you need to undo the changes click Reclaim 9 Choose whether to use drive encryption S Config Utility Config Hizard Drive Croup Definition ID 67 843 GB HDD 67 843 GB Slot 2 SAS HDD 67 643 GB On Slot 3 SAS HDD 136 216 GB
259. e new virtual drive and then completes the initialization in the background A slow initialization is not complete until the entire virtual drive has been initialized with zeroes It is seldom necessary to use this option because the virtual drive was already initialized when you created it LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 4 8 3 Viewing Drive Properties LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Viewing and Changing Device Properties CAUTION Before you run an initialization back up any data on the virtual drive that you want to save All data on the virtual drive is lost when you initialize the drive Select CC to run a consistency check on this virtual drive For more information see Section 4 12 1 Running a Consistency Check This option is not available for RAID O virtual drives Select AdvOpers to access screens to remove drives migrate RAID levels that is change the virtual drive configuration by adding a drive and changing the RAID level and use MegaRAID Recovery See Section 4 12 8 Migrating the RAID Level of a Virtual Drive for information about adding a drive to a virtual drive or migrating its RAID level See Section 4 10 Using MegaRAID Recovery for the MegaRAID Recovery procedure Select Enable MegaRAID Recovery to use MegaRAID Recovery also known as Snapshot Recovery offers a simplified way to recover data and
260. e of controller can limit the number of drives 8 Choose whether to use drive encryption 9 Click Accept DG to create a RAID 0 drive group Page 85 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Creating a Storage Configuration MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide gt Config Utility Config Hiza Drive Group Definition 843 ot r B 2 Slot 1 SAS HDD 67 843 GB Slot 2 SAS HDD 67 843 GB On Slot 3 SAS HDD 136 218 GB On Figure 44 WebBIOS Drive Group Definition Screen 10 Repeat step 4 through step 6 until you have selected all the drives you want for the drive groups 11 After you finish selecting drives for the drive groups select each drive group and then click Accept DG for each selection 12 Click Next The Span Definition screen appears as shown in Figure 45 This screen shows the drive group holes that you can select to add to a span Page 86 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Creating a Storage Configuration finition Array Hith Free Spi Figure 45 WebBIOS Span Definition Screen 13 Under the heading Array With Free Space hold lt Ctrl gt while you select a drive group and then click Add to SPAN The drive group you select appears in the right frame under the heading Span 14 Hold lt Ctrl gt while you select a second drive group and then click Add to SPAN 15 Repeat the previous two s
261. e or drives PDInstantSecureErase Use the Instant Secure Erase feature to erase data on a drive or drives PhysDrv E0 S0 Specifies the drive s that you want to perform the Instant Secure Erase on Force Specifies that the MegaCLl utility does not ask you for confirmation before it performs this command you might lose data using this option with some commands NOTE NOTE Previously s zXXX expressed capacity in MB but now you can enter the capacity in your choice of units For example to create a virtual drive of 10 GB enter the size as sz10GB If you do not enter a unit by default it is considered as MB Use the command in the following table to secure data on a virtual drive Table 29 Secure Data on a Virtual Drive Convention MegaCli LDMakeSecur Lx L0 1 2 Lall aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Secures data on a specified virtual drive or drives Page 179 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool SafeStore Security Options MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 5 7 3 Destroy the Security Key Use the command in the following table to destroy the security key Table 30 Destroy the Security Key Convention MegaCli DestroySecurityKey Force aN Description Destroys the security key The controller uses the security key to lock and unlock access to the secure user data This key is encrypted into the security key blob and stored on th
262. e server is running in a degraded state for example because a drive used in a virtual drive has failed If the circle is red the storage configuration in the server has failed NOTE To access servers on a different subnet type in the box at the bottom of the screen the IP address of a server in the desired subnet where the MegaRAID Storage Manager software is running and click Update If you check the Connect to remote server at IP address box you can also access a standalone remote installation of MegaRAID Storage Manager software if it has a network connection NOTE For the VMWare CIMOM the server button does not denote the health of the server The button is always green regardless of the health of the system NOTE The VMWare server does not show the system health and the operating system labels It shows only the Hostname and the IP address of the server NOTE When connecting to a VMWare server on a different subnet one or more Frameworks have to be running in the subnet in order to connect to the CIMOM 2 Double click the icon of the server that you want to access The Server Login window appears as shown in Figure 133 Page 250 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 7 MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus Starting MegaRAID Storage Manager Software Enter User Name amp Password Ma LSISK Server 135 24 228 176 Use your Operating System s login userna
263. e slot available in the virtual drive This option is valid only if the virtual drive is already used for configuration September 2010 Page 195 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Configuration Related Options MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 5 13 3 Add RAID 10 50 or 60 Use the command in the following table to add a RAID 10 RAID 50 or RAID 60 Configuration configuration to the existing configuration on the selected controller Table 65 Add RAID 10 50 For RAID levels 0 1 5 or 6 see Section 5 13 2 Add RAID 0 1 5 or 6 Configuration or 60 Configuration Convention MegaCli CfgSpanAdd R10 R50 R60 ArrayO E0 S0 E1 S1 Array1 E0 S0 E1 S1 WT WB NORA RA ADRA Direct Cached CachedBadBBU NoCachedBadBBU szXXXXXXXX szYYYYYYYY strpszM afterLdX Force FDE CtrlBased aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Creates a RAID level 10 50 or 60 spanned configuration from the specified drive groups Even if no configuration is present you must use this option to write the configuration to the controller Note that RAID 10 supports up to eight spans with a maximum of 32 drives in each span There are factors such as the type of controller that limit the number of drives you can use RAID 10 requires an even number of drives as data from one drive is mirrored to the other drive in each RAID 1 drive group You can have an even or odd number of spans
264. e threshold 0x00a4 Information Enclosure SES discovered on s 0x00a5 Information Enclosure SAFTE discovered on s 0x00a6 Critical Enclosure s communication lost 0x00a7 Information Enclosure s communication restored 0x00a8 Critical Enclosure s fan d failed 0x00a9 Information Enclosure s fan d inserted 0x00aa Critical Enclosure s fan d removed 0x00ab Critical Enclosure s power supply d failed Ox00ac Information Enclosure s power supply d inserted Ox00ad Critical Enclosure s power supply d removed Ox00ae Critical Enclosure s SIM d failed Ox00af Information Enclosure s SIM d inserted 0x00b0 Critical Enclosure s SIM d removed 0x00b1 Warning Enclosure s temperature sensor d below warning threshold 0x00b2 Critical Enclosure s temperature sensor d below error threshold 0x00b3 Warning Enclosure s temperature sensor d above warning threshold 0x00b4 Critical Enclosure s temperature sensor d above error threshold 0x00b5 Critical Enclosure s shutdown 0x00b6 Warning Enclosure s not supported too many enclosures connected to port 0x00b7 Critical Enclosure s firmware mismatch 0x00b8 Warning Enclosure s sensor d bad 0x00b9 Critical Enclosure s phy d bad 0x00ba Critical Enclosure s is unstable 0x00bb Critical Enclosure s hardware error 0x00bc Critical Enclosure s not responding LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide LSI Corporation Conf
265. e to recover cache data from TBBU 0x0003 Information Cache data recovered from TBBU successfully 0x0004 Information Configuration cleared 0x0005 Warning Cluster down communication with peer lost 0x0006 Information Virtual drive s ownership changed from 02x to 02x 0x0007 Information Alarm disabled by user Page 373 Appendix A Events and Messages Page 374 Event Messages MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Table 135 Event Messages Continued Number Type Event Text 0x0008 Information Alarm enabled by user 0x0009 Information Background initialization rate changed to d 0x000a Fatal Controller cache discarded due to memory battery problems 0x000b Fatal Unable to recover cache data due to configuration mismatch 0x000c Information Cache data recovered successfully 0x000d Fatal Controller cache discarded due to firmware version incompatibility 0x000e Information Consistency Check rate changed to d Ox000f Fatal Fatal firmware error s 0x0010 Information Factory defaults restored 0x0011 Information Flash downloaded image corrupt 0x0012 Critical Flash erase error 0x0013 Critical Flash timeout during erase 0x0014 Critical Flash error 0x0015 Information Flashing image s 0x0016 Information Flash of new firmware image s complete 0x0017 Critical Flash programming error 0x0018 Critical Flash timeout during programming 0
266. ead is not offset by the performance gains in handling simultaneous processes RAID 6 costs more because of the extra capacity required by using two parity blocks per stripe Drives A minimum of 8 Figure 14 shows a RAID 6 data layout The second set of parity drives are denoted by Q The P drives follow the RAID 5 parity scheme LSLS SSP RAID 60 Segment 1 Segment 2 Parity Q1 Q2 Parity P1 P2 Segment 3 Segment 4 Parity Q3 Q4 Parity P3 P4 j Segment 8 Parity Q3 Q4 Parity P3 P4 Segment 7 Segment 6 Parity Q5 Q6 Parity P5 P6 Segment 5 Parity Q11 Q12 Parity P11 P12 Segment 11 Segment 12 k Parity Q9 Q10 Parity P9 P10 Segment 9 Segment 10 q Parity P15 P16 Segment 15 Segment 16 Parity Q15 Q16 Jy Parity P13 P14 Segment 13 Segment 14 Parity Q13 Q14 n M I aa i eB eB eB EB ES RAID 6 RAID 6 RAID 0 Note Parity is distributed across all drives in the drive group Figure 14 RAID 60 Level Virtual Drive The most important factors in RAID drive group configuration are Virtual drive availability fault tolerance Virtual drive performance Virtual drive capacity LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 2 Introduction to RAID RAID Configuration Strategies You cannot configure a virtual drive that optimizes all three factors but it is easy to choose a virtual drive configuration that maximizes one factor at the expense
267. eae ae bes 105 4 7 Selecting SafeStore Encryption Services Security Options 06 e cece cece nected ene nent eee eee n eee teen eee eeneee 110 4 7 1 Enabling the Security Key Identifier Security Key and Password cece eee c cece e eect eee teen eee e en eaeeeees 110 4 7 2 Enabling Drive Security Using EKM 0 cece cece ence cece nee aa e nee een e eee e eee en da 115 4 7 3 Changing the Security Key Identifier Security Key and Pass Phrase cece eee c eee e eee teen eee eeeeeeneees 116 4 7 4 Change Security from EKM to LKM 20 cece ccc ccc eee nee nen eee e een eens n sense nent ee eeeeneneeneneees 117 4 7 5 Changing Security from LKM to EKM 00 eee cece ce nen nen enn net n ene e eens teense ESEE EEEE 122 4 7 6 Disabling the Drive Security Settings 0 cece cece ene ene ne nen een ene een ete e eee teen en neneneees 123 4 8 Viewing and Changing Device Properties 0 0 c cece ccc cece eee cence enn n ene ee enn ene e eben eens ee ee ene eneneeenee 125 4 8 1 Viewing Controller Properties 0 0 4 0 ccsssy saeaca vee e aaa NEEE AAEE EE EE ER E Rawle wea eas 125 4 8 2 Viewing Virtual Drive Properties Policies and Operations 0 cece eee e een e ene n ene teen een eneeneneees 130 4 8 3 Viewing Drive Properties ccciciacd dene smnemendesane eda mesendw neh vialensnes aNnenea wea A ENEE guins EEES 131 4 8 4 Viewing and Changing Battery Backup Unit Information
268. eans that it is also important for the system to be available during the repair of the problem A hot spare is an unused drive that in case of a disk failure in a redundant RAID drive group can be used to rebuild the data and re establish redundancy After the hot spare is automatically moved into the RAID drive group the data is automatically rebuilt on the hot spare drive The RAID drive group continues to handle requests while the rebuild occurs Auto rebuild allows a failed drive to be replaced and the data automatically rebuilt by hot swapping the drive in the same drive bay The RAID drive group continues to handle requests while the rebuild occurs The firmware provides support for detecting and using multiple paths from the RAID controllers to the SAS devices that are in enclosures Devices connected to enclosures have multiple paths to them With redundant paths to the same port of a device if one path fails another path can be used to communicate between the controller and the device Using multiple paths with load balancing instead of a single path can increase reliability through redundancy LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 2 4 4 Consistency Check 2 4 5 Copyback LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 2 Introduction to RAID Components and Features Applications show the enclosures and the drives connected to the enclosures The firmware dynamic
269. eate a Drive Group from All of the Unconfigured Drives Convention MegaCli CfgLDAdd RX E0 S0 E1 S1 WT WB NORA RA ADRA Direct Cached CachedBadBBU NoCachedBadBBU szXXX szYYY strpszM Hsp E0 S0 AfterLdxX Force FDE CtrlBased Description Creates one RAID drive group out of all of the unconfigured good drives and a hot spare if desired This is for RAID levels 0 1 5 or 6 All free drives are used to create a new drive group and if desired one hot spare drive Rx E0 S0 Specifies the RAID level and the drive enclosure slot numbers used to construct a drive group WT Write through WB Write back Selects write policy NORA No read ahead RA Read ahead ADRA Adaptive read ahead Selects read policy Direct Cached Selects cache policy CachedBadBBU NoCachedBadBBU Specifies whether to use write cache when the BBU is bad Hsp Specifies drive to make the hot spare with Force Specifies that drive coercion is used to make the capacity of the drives compatible Drive coercion is a tool for forcing drives of varying capacities to the same capacity so they can be used in a drive group NOTE Previously s zXXX expressed capacity in MB but now you can enter the capacity in your choice of units For example to create a virtual drive of 10 GB enter the size as sz10GB If you do not enter a unit by default it is considered as MB Page 194 LS
270. ebBIOS Configuration Utility Creating a Storage Configuration e mme INS YO PT VOLE tRegaRAID BIOS Config Utility nfis Drive Group Definition 4 210 Pe gt H 1 0 Dy Slot 1 SAS HDD 67 843 GB On Slot 2 SAS HDD 67 843 GB On Slot 4 SAS HDD 136 218 GB Un s Slot 5 SAS HDD 135 218 GB Un Figure 32 WebBIOS Drive Group Definition Screen 5 After you finish selecting drives for the drive group click Accept DG 6 Click Next The Virtual Drive Definition screen appears as shown in Figure 33 This screen lists the possible RAID levels for the drive group Use this screen to select the RAID level strip size read policy and other attributes for the new virtual drives LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 69 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Creating a Storage Configuration MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide ea Write Back with BBU fj Figure 33 WebBIOS Virtual Drive Definition Screen 7 Change the virtual drive options from the defaults listed on the screen as needed Here are brief explanations of the virtual drive options RAID Level The drop down menu lists the possible RAID levels for the virtual drive Select RAID 0 Strip Size The strip size is the portion of a stripe that resides on a single drive in the drive group The stripe consists of the data segments that the RAID controller writes across multiple drives not including parity drives For example
271. ebBIOS and reboot the system NOTE If the operating system is corrupted and cannot boot go to Section 4 10 7 Restoring a Virtual Drive by Rolling Back to a Snapshot in the WebBIOS Configuration Utility LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 11 2 27 Restoring from a View 11 2 28 Deleting a Snapshot 11 3 CacheCade Advanced Software 11 3 1 Using the CacheCade Advanced Software LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software CacheCade Advanced Software After you discover that a file record or file system is missing or deleted you can restoring the data from a view You can mount any PiT to create an instant view of the data at a previous point in time Then you can restore the data in MSM and drag and drop the lost data and or files back into the source data virtual drive volume Follow these steps to restore a file from view 1 Mount a view of the file content from each PiT until you find the missing file 2 Drag and drop the missing file from Snapshot view back into the online storage volume that was the source of the Snapshot NOTE You can delete only the oldest snapshot Follow these steps to delete a snapshot 1 Select the Logical tab on the main menu screen for the Logical view 2 Click the Snapshot Base virtual drive in the left frame 3 Click the Snapshots tab in the right frame This screen shows the Sn
272. ece cece eee eee nee e nee b eee e en ee ene eneeneenes 263 Page 8 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Table of Contents 8 1 4 Creating a Virtual Drive Using Simple Configuration 0 cece cece cece eee nen e nee e ene e cnet neeneenes 263 8 1 5 Creating a Virtual Drive Using Advanced Configuration 6 cece cee cece cece ene ene e eens ee en ene eneeneenes 268 8 2 Converting JBOD Drives to Unconfigured Good 0 cece enen eee eee dene enn e eect bebe nent ene te en eeneenes 273 8 2 1 Converting JBOD to Unconfigured Good from the MSM Window 0 cce cece eee eect eee ene e ene eneenennes 274 8 3 Adding HotSpare Drives ics scence eons eb soa ate ce aaa gut vacant EEOSE RAAE EAA Seitedae caau ceed Shamed E ARER 275 8 4 Changing Adjustable Task Rates 20 00 0 ccc cece cence renee nnn nn nnn eee ene nee Ene ne dee nen een e a REE 276 8 5 Changing POWER Settings srecan t niena EEEE E E EERE ae pe neeiea aie nae EEE REE E aan E EA 277 8 5 1 Enhanced Dimmer Switch Power Settings ssssssssesssssseresrssnrerrsnrererrrrerrrrrorrereorrrrsrerrrser 279 8 5 2 Power Save Settings Advanced sssssssssssereserrerrsererrsorrerrorereererreorrereoreereorrrrseerrrser 281 8 5 3 Automatically Spin Up Drives 05 56 2668 ir a E EE E EE EEEE ERTES PEA NANE EOE au E ET EAR EEA 282 8 54 Power Save Mod sss orocney resno KEETE E E EAEE AEE adhe ERTU E AENEA EEE 282 8 5 5 P
273. ece cece nee renee eee e ee een eden cnet eens eee n eben teen ene 187 5 9 1 Set Patrol Read Options 42 ca ccceuk anea ehekaaanmegetaae s4 dias noe QlEMO EES Monae Gdewnde E AAA 187 5 9 2 Set Patrol Read Delay Interval 0 cece cece cece staa EENEI EEREN ened ene teen eens dnb nett eee Eaa 187 5 10 BIOS Related Properties icindietdavecsomcledeteunechdnnhlontheideiamiens oataapeddedewaddamane neon sddohaloleneieinaaaeges 187 5 10 1 Set or Display Bootable Virtual Drive ID 21 0 cece cence ene tenn ene eee n eee e eens been een eeeenenee 187 5 10 2 Select BIOS Status Options si cs2 cis erenn genes n EEA EN AVE Sana ae MOEN eee eae s eee von nee 188 5 11 Battery Backup Unit Related Properties cc cece ccc e ccc e ee e eee e nee n ene e een n ene teen eee e eben eee e ee en ene 188 5 1 1 1 Display BBU INFOrMALION 4 sss seian eninin aranin e ode ated Akl E ENE EE E DA EE E eed Neen baaea wanes 188 5 11 2 Display BBU Status Information 0 cece ccc cere EEE EEEE TENTARE EEN ai 189 5 11 3 Display BBU Capacity srera naeio bdnc dated a badaneldddiwsadineabeuet A a 190 5 11 4 Display BBU Design Parameters 00 cece cece cence enn enn e nee e ened etn ete e ened e stent ee eeeenenee 190 5 11 5 Display Current BBU Properties 2 1 0 0 0 cece cece cence EE nee ete ene deen ete e ened net eee ene AA 191 5 11 6 Start BBW Learning Cycle sapeste bees chewed ceied sae eens aw da HA Lene Ee ease dae eae bee ws S
274. ect External Key management EKM 4 Click OK After you click OK two scenarios occur based on the availability of EKMS m Scenario 1 EKM is enabled When EKM is enabled you can see the confirmation message as shown in the following figure The message displayed makes sure that the security is enabled on the controller using EKMS Confirm External Key Management EKM Mode Enabled x i Controller lt name gt Drive security is enabled on this controller using External Key Management EKM mode em Figure 239 Confirm External Key Management Mode Enabled NOTE On the right side frame of the controller properties in Drive Security Properties you can see EKM supported is Yes LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 11 5 3 Change Security Settings LKM LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software LSI SafeStore Encryption Services Scenario 2 EKM is selected and EKMS is not present When EKM is selected and EKMS is not present you have to restart the system When you restart the system the system restart message appears as shown in the following figure System Restart Required stop all the I Os and other operations before you restart your system Please restart the system for the changes to take effect Make sure to Figure 240 System Restart When the system restarts the boot agent
275. ection for the boot volume You can use the Recovery feature to take a snapshot of a volume and to restore a volume or file Snapshot functionality allows you to capture data changes to the volume and if data is deleted accidentally or maliciously you can restore the data from the view or roll back to a snapshot at a previous point in time PiT MegaRAID Recovery supports up to eight snapshots of PiTs for each volume Each Recovery PiT volume snapshot is typically a fraction of the original volume size because it tracks only the changes that are made to a volume after the PiT is created Disk space for PiTs is reserved in the Snapshot Repository virtual drive and the PiT is expanded in small increments as new data is written to the volume Multiple PiTs of each volume can be retained online enabling frequent snapshots to be stored ina space efficient manner LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 137 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Using MegaRAID Recovery MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 4 10 1 Recovery Scenarios 4 10 2 Enabling the Recovery Advanced Software Page 138 CAUTION Do not select the virtual drive containing the operating system OS as the Snapshot Repository Updates to the operating system or operating system crashes could destroy data on that virtual drive There are three primary scenarios in which to use the Recovery feature 1 Restore the missing or deleted files restore from view
276. ed Page 360 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 11 5 5 Importing Foreign Drives LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software LSI SafeStore Encryption Services Based on the application s response two scenarios occur Scenario 1 when EKM server is present Scenario 2 when EKM server is not present m Scenario 1 EKM server is present If the EKM server is present a confirmation message indicating that the drive security is enabled on the controller as shown in Figure 247 is displayed Confirm External Key Management EKM Mode Enabled x Controller lt name gt e J Drive security is enabled on this controller using External Key Management EKM mode Figure 247 EKMS server is present m Scenario 2 EKM server is not present If the EKM server is not present restart your system and during re boot the boot agent generates the security keys When you restart the system the system restart message appears as shown in the following figure System Restart Required Piease restart the system for the changes to take effect Make sure to stop all the I Os and other operations before you restart your system Figure 248 System Restart NOTE If you select the Switch to Local key Management LKM mode in the Change Security settings wizard in Figure 246 you can view the details of LKM in Enabling Driv
277. ed Confirmation A 3 Do you want to save the changes you have made to power save settings Figure 160 Power Save Settings If you do not specify the Power Save settings in the Manage Power Save Settings screen as shown in Figure 159 the following dialog box appears Power Save Settings Confirmation The system will not have power savings for any of the drives Are you sure you want to proceed Figure 161 Power Save Settings Not Saved 8 5 2 Power Save Settings You can schedule the drive active time by selecting the Start time and End time in the Advanced Power Save Settings Advanced screen Perform the following steps to schedule the drive active time 1 Click the Advanced button in the Manage Power Save Settings screen as shown in Figure 159 2 The Power Save Settings Advanced screen is displayed in the following figure Power Save Settings Advanced x LSI3S y gt Ensures that the Configured drives will be in active state within the specified period Schedule drive active time Start time 12 00 am End time 12 00 am Figure 162 Power Save Settings Advanced LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 281 Chapter 8 Configuration Changing Power Settings 8 5 3 Automatically Spin up Drives 8 5 4 Power Save Mode Page 282 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 3 Select the Start time and End time using the drop down selector from the Schedule drive active
278. ed a new drive security key the Authenticate Drive Security Settings screen appears as shown in Figure 77 Page 120 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 4 WebBIOS Configuration Utility Selecting SafeStore Encryption Services Security Options HegaRAID BIOS Config Utility Authenticate Drive Security Settings keno Current 3 Figure 77 Authenticate Drive Security Settings Screen 15 Enter the current security key and click OK The text box for the security key can hold up to 32 characters The key must be at least eight characters After you enter the correct security key the Confirm screen appears as shown in Figure 78 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 121 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Selecting SafeStore Encryption Services Security MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Options onfirm Page Figure 78 Confirm Screen 16 Click Yes to confirm that you want to change the drive security settings If the current security key is not needed WebBIOS saves the changes to the security settings and returns you to the main menu If the current security key is needed the Authenicate Drive Security Settings screen appears 4 7 5 Changing Security from LKM to Perform the following steps if you want to change security from LKM to EKM EKM 1 Select Drive Security from the WebBIOS main page 2 Select Change Drive security The Change Security
279. ed from the operating system media before you install the MSM 6 4 2 Installing MegaRAID Storage Follow these steps if you need to install MegaRAID Storage Manager software ona Manager Software on Microsoft system running Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Microsoft Windows XP Microsoft Windows Windows Vista or Microsoft Windows 7 1 Insert the MegaRAID Storage Manager software installation CD in the CD ROM drive If necessary find and double click the setup exe file to start the installation program 2 When the Welcome screen appears click Next If MegaRAID Storage Manager software is already installed on this system then an upgraded installation occurs 3 Read the screen text and select Modify Repair or Remove When the next screen appears read and accept the user license and click Next The Customer Information screen appears as shown in Figure 126 ie MegaRAID Storage Manager 2 13 00 InstallShield Wizard Customer Information Please enter your information User Name Organization IESG Allow availability of this application For All users O Only for current user Lsi Figure 126 Customer Information Screen 5 Enter your user name and organization name In the bottom part of the screen select an installation option If you select All users any user with administrative privileges can use this version of MegaRAID Storage Manager software to view or change storage configurations
280. ee drives Access Policy Select the type of data access that is allowed for this virtual drive RW Allow read write access This is the default Read Only Allow read only access Page 82 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Creating a Storage Configuration Blocked Do not allow access Read Policy Specify the read policy for this virtual drive Normal This disables the read ahead capability This is the default Ahead This enables read ahead capability which allows the controller to read sequentially ahead of requested data and to store the additional data in cache memory anticipating that the data will be needed soon This speeds up reads for sequential data but there is little improvement when accessing random data Write Policy Specify the write policy for this virtual drive WBack In Writeback mode the controller sends a data transfer completion signal to the host when the controller cache has received all of the data ina transaction This setting is recommended in Standard mode WThru In Writethrough mode the controller sends a data transfer completion signal to the host when the drive subsystem has received all of the data ina transaction This is the default Bad BBU Select this mode if you want the controller to use Writeback mode but the controller has no BBU or the BBU is bad If you do not choose this option the control
281. een displays 5 Click the Confirm check box and click Yes to confirm that you want to set the virtual drive properties LSI SafeStore Encryption Services offer the ability to encrypt data on the drives and use the drive based key management to provide data security This solution provides data protection in the event of theft or loss of physical drives If you remove a self encrypting drive from its storage system or the server in which it resides the data on that drive is encrypted and becomes useless to anyone who attempts to access it without the appropriate security authorization This section describes how to enable change and disable the drive security and how to import a foreign configuration using the SafeStore Encryption Services advanced software The SafeStore Encryption Services advanced software provides drive security to create secure virtual drives by using the External Key Management EKM and the Local Key Management LKM LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 11 5 1 Enabling Drive Security using EKM 11 5 2 Supporting EKM mode LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software LSI SafeStore Encryption Services m Enabling Drive Security using EKM m Enabling Drive Security using LKM EKM is used for key management when large number of systems are deployed You can automate and manage the life cycle of keys and unlo
282. een from any other WebBIOS CU screen E Click this icon to return to the previous screen that you were viewing Click this icon to exit the WebBIOS CU program Click this icon to turn off the sound on the onboard controller alarm Click this icon to display information about the WebBIOS CU version browser version and HTML interface engine EEE Here is a description of the options listed on the left of the main WebBIOS CU screen the hotkey shortcut for each option is shown in parentheses next to the option name Advanced Software Options Alt a Select this option to enable the advanced features in the controller For more information see section Section 4 4 1 Managing MegaRAID Advanced Software Options Controller Selection Alt c Select this option to view the Controller Selection screen where you can select a different SAS controller You can then view information about the controller and the devices connected to it or create a new configuration on the controller Controller Properties Alt p Select this option to view the properties of the currently selected SAS controller For more information see Section 4 8 1 Viewing Controller Properties Drive Security Alt r Select this option to encrypt data on the drives and use disk based key management for the data security solution This solution protects your data in case of theft or loss of physical drives For more information
283. eens and change the configuration 13 If you accept the configuration click Yes at the prompt to save the configuration The WebBIOS main menu appears RAID 5 uses drive striping at the block level and parity In RAID 5 the parity information is written to all drives It is best suited for networks that perform a lot of small input output I O transactions simultaneously RAID 5 provides data redundancy high read rates and good performance in most environments It also provides redundancy with lowest loss of capacity RAID 5 provides high data throughput RAID 5 is useful for transaction processing applications because each drive can read and write independently If a drive fails the RAID controller uses the parity drive to recreate all missing information You can use RAID 5 for office automation and online customer service that require fault tolerance In addition RAID 5 is good for any application that has high read request rates but low write request rates When you select Manual Configuration and click Next the Drive Group Definition screen appears You use this screen to select drives to create drive groups 1 Hold lt Ctrl gt while you select at least three ready drives in the Physical Drives panel on the left LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Creating a Storage Configuration 2 Click Add To Array to move the drives to a proposed
284. egaRAID Recovery Wizard Displaying the selected Virtual Drive LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software Recovery Advanced Software 2 In the Select Capacity field use the drop down selector to select the appropriate capacity to use for changes to the base VD 3 Click Next The Enable MegaRAID Recovery wizard Create Snapshot Schedule wizard appears as shown in Figure 219 This wizard lets you to schedule the snapshots 11 2 15 Scheduling Snapshots You can select an existing snapshot schedule or create a new snapshot schedule for the VD Follow these steps to schedule snapshots 1 Select any one of the options shown in the Enable MegaRAID Recovery Create Snapshot Schedule wizard in Figure 219 to schedule snapshots using the radio button Enable MegaRAID Recovery Select an existing snapshot schedule or create a new one Schedule Frequency Next Snapshot Scheduled Yirtual Drives June 1 12 00AM Virtual Drive 0 YD_0 27 Optimal Create new schedule Frequency Every day s Time Do not schedule any automatic snapshots Figure 219 Enable MegaRAID Recovery Create Snapshot Schedule m Add virtual drive to the existing schedule This option allows you to add a VD to a pre existing schedule already defined in the system The Schedule field displays the schedule details of the VD The Freq
285. em has a different frequency of read and write activity If you know the data access requirements you can more successfully determine a strategy for optimizing the disk subsystem capacity availability and performance Servers that support video on demand typically read the data often but write data infrequently Both the read and write operations tend to be long Data stored on a general purpose file server involves relatively short read and write operations with relatively small files Your configuration planning for the SAS RAID controller depends in part on the number of drives that you want to use in a RAID drive group The number of drives in a drive group determines the RAID levels that can be supported Only one RAID level can be assigned to each virtual drive Important factors to consider when creating RAID drive groups include availability performance and capacity Define the major purpose of the drive group by answering questions related to these factors such as the following which are followed by suggested RAID levels for each situation m Will this drive group increase the system storage capacity for general purpose file and print servers Use RAID 5 6 10 50 or 60 Does this drive group support any software system that must be available 24 hours per day Use RAID 1 5 6 10 50 or 60 m Will the information stored in this drive group contain large audio or video files that must be available on demand Use RAID 0
286. en to disk 1 segment 2 is written to disk 2 and so on Disk striping enhances performance because multiple drives are accessed simultaneously but disk striping does not provide data redundancy Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3 Segment 4 Segment 5 Segment 6 Segment 7 Segment 8 Segment 9 Segment 10 Segment 11 Segment 12 Figure 3 Example of Disk Striping RAID 0 Stripe width is the number of drives involved in a drive group where striping is implemented For example a four disk drive group with disk striping has a stripe width of four The stripe size is the length of the interleaved data segments that the RAID controller writes across multiple drives not including parity drives For example consider a stripe that contains 64 KB of disk space and has 16 KB of data residing on each disk in the stripe In this case the stripe size is 64 KB and the strip size is 16 KB The strip size is the portion of a stripe that resides ona single drive With mirroring used in RAID 1 and RAID 10 data written to one drive is simultaneously written to another drive The primary advantage of disk mirroring is that it provides 100 percent data redundancy Because the contents of the disk are completely written to a second disk data is not lost if one disk fails In addition both drives contain the same data at all times so either disk can act as the operational disk If one disk fails the contents of the other disk can be used to run the system and rec
287. enables FDE controller based encryption on virtual disk Page 210 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 5 15 17 Set the Mapping Mode of the Drives to the Selected Controller s 5 15 18 Perform the Copyback Operation on the Selected Drive 5 16 Enclosure Related Options 5 16 1 Display Enclosure Information LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Enclosure Related Options Use the command in the following table to set the mapping mode of the physical devices connected to the selected controller s Table 102 Set the Mapping Mode of the Drive to the Selected Controller Convention MegaCli DirectPdMapping Enbl Dsbl Dsply aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Sets the mapping mode of the drives connected to the specified controller s Enb1 Enables the direct physical drive mapping mode Dsb1 Disables the direct physical drive mapping mode Dsply Displays the current state of the direct physical drive mapping Use the command in the following table to the perform the Copyback Operation on the selected Drive The copyback feature allows you to copy data from a source drive of a virtual drive to a destination drive that is not a part of the virtual drive Copyback is often used to create or restore a specific physical configuration for a drive group for example a specific arrangement of drive group members on
288. ency check if you think the data might be corrupted You can delete any virtual drive on the controller if you want to reuse that space for a new virtual drive The WebBIOS CU provides a list of configurable drive groups where there is a space to configure If multiple virtual drives are defined ona single drive group you can delete a virtual drive without deleting the whole drive group CAUTION Back up any data that you want to keep before you delete the virtual drive To delete a virtual drive follow these steps 1 Access the Virtual Drive screen by clicking on a virtual drive icon in the right panel on the WebBIOS CU main screen The Virtual Drive screen appears 2 Select Delete in the bottom panel under the heading Operations and click Go 3 When the message appears confirm that you want to delete the virtual drive A foreign configuration is a storage configuration that already exists on a replacement set of drives that you install in a computer system In addition if one or more drives are removed from a configuration by a cable pull or drive removal for example the configuration on those drives is considered a foreign configuration by the RAID controller The BIOS CU allows you to import the foreign configuration to the RAID controller or to clear the configuration so you can create a new configuration using these drives NOTE When you create a new configuration the WebBIOS CU shows only the unconfigured drives Dr
289. end Good Posee Erdre SPORICSAS LH Sot B SAS 68 GB Urcantgred Gaod Pomersave Ercnge SENS 26 St 99 SAS 68 WA GB Uncortigues Good Ferse Exdoase SAUERS 30 Sot 51 SAS LETT Uncartigred Good Pomerat Endoage SMOBOTSAS 26 Sot 12 SAS 68 366 GE Uncarhiguret Good Persant Figure 137 MSM Logical View 7 2 1 4 Controller Properties In the physical view and the logical view you can view the chip temperature and controller temperature under controller properties for the controller PERC 7 5 as displayed in the following figure LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 255 Chapter 7 MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus Main Menu Page 256 MegaRAID Storage Manager MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide MegaRAID Storage Manager amp 15 0000 Mrope GoTo log Took Heb 30E 0O F De 4 AS 425 187 B BOO PA Sot 5 SAS 409 187 Gs BOD P Sow 6 SAS 429 187 BOD PP Bot 7 SAS 429 187 BOO 3 YOD 21 Comecon 00 Cp Sot 0 SAS 136 733 Orire SE Sot 4 SAS 279 997 B Urconfigared Good T Sot 5 SAS 279 97 B Oire Gp Dot 6 SAS 279 297 GE Urconige ed Good Qe Sot 7 SAS 779 997 B Orire Figure 138 Chip and Controller Temperature The temperature for the physical drive is displayed in the following figure el bi be gt 820 Wene ederetrater Ful Access w Cetori Parac toges WANS ete RAD OH SAS 66 S SIDE DOLIO Mas LDev C 2 LS repPAn SAS 150 5 Ma
290. ent command line option for all possible functions of the MegaCLI Configuration Utility If you enter this option at the command line no message displays on the screen A second CLI utility known as Pre boot MegaCLl PCL is available You can enter this utility during bootup PCLI gives you an alternative way to access the CLI utility To access PCLI while the host computer is booting hold down the lt Ctrl gt key and press the lt Y gt key when the following text appears on the screen Copyright LSI Logic Corporation Press lt Ctrl gt lt Y gt for Preboot CLI The following commands that are in the regular MegaCLlI utility are not available in PCLI AdpSetVerify AdpCcSched AdpDiag AdpBatTest option ProgDsply LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 5 5 CacheCade SSD Caching Related Options LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool CacheCade SSD Caching Related Options CfgSave CfgRestore AdpBbuCmd AdpFacDefSet AdpFwFlash AdpGetConnectorMode AdpSetConnectorMode DirectPdMapping ShowEnclList ShowVpd EnclLocate PdFwDownload SetFacDefault PDCpyBk AdpFwDump Snapshot Enbl Setprop Dsbl TakeSnapshot DeleteSnapshot CreateView DeleteView Info Cl ean GetViewInfo AdpSetProp DefaultSnapshotSpace DefaultViewSpace AutoSnapshotSpace Use the commands in this section to create CacheCade SSD Caching drives and delete them
291. er Lall Specifies the command is for all virtual drives E0 S0 E1 S1 Specifies when one or more physical devices need s to be specified in the pes command line Each E S pair specifies one physical device where E means device ID of the enclosure in which a drive resides and S means the slot number of the enclosure In the case of a physical device directly connected to the SAS port on the controller with no enclosure involved the format of S can be used where S means the port number on the controller For devices attached through the backplane the firmware provides an enclosure device ID and MegaCLl expects the user input in the format of E S In the following sections only the format E S is used in the command descriptions although both formats are valid Indicates that the parameter is optional except when it is used to specify physical devices For example WT means the write policy WriteThrough is optional If you enter WT at the command line the application will use WriteThrough write policy for the virtual drive Otherwise it uses the default value for the parameter fo Indicates that the parameters are grouped and that they must be given at the same time Force Specifies that the MegaCLl utility does not ask you for confirmation before it performs this command You might lose data using this option with some commands You can specify the Sil
292. er a stripe that contains 64 KB of drive space and has 16 KB of data residing on each drive in the stripe In this case the stripe size is 64 KB and the strip size is 16 KB You can set the strip size to 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 and 1024 KB A larger strip size produces higher read performance If your computer regularly performs random read requests choose a smaller strip size The default is 64 KB Access Policy Select the type of data access that is allowed for this virtual drive RW Allow read write access This is the default Read Only Allow read only access Blocked Do not allow access Read Policy Specify the read policy for this virtual drive Normal This disables the read ahead capability This is the default Page 78 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 4 WebBIOS Configuration Utility Creating a Storage Configuration Ahead This enables read ahead capability which allows the controller to read sequentially ahead of requested data and to store the additional data in cache memory anticipating that the data will be needed soon This speeds up reads for sequential data but there is little improvement when accessing random data Write Policy Specify the write policy for this virtual drive WBack In Writeback mode the controller sends a data transfer completion signal to the host when the controller cache has received all of the dataina transaction This
293. eractive mode execute the command install sh from the installation disk To install the product in a non interactive or silent mode use the command install sh options ru popup from the installation disk The installation options are Complete installation m Client Component Only StandAlone The ru popup command will remove popup from installation list You also can run non interactive installation using the RunRPM sh command The installer offers three types of setup options Complete This installs all the features of the product Page 233 Chapter 6 MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation Installing MegaRAID MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Storage Manager 6 4 5 MSM on RHEL6 0 x64 Operating System Prerequisites for Installing 6 4 6 Linux Error Messages 6 4 7 Kernel Upgrade Page 234 Client Components Only The storelib feature of the product are not installed in this type of installation As a result the resident system can only administer and configure all of the servers in the subnet but it cannot serve as a server m StandAlone Only the networking feature is not installed in this case so the resident system is not a part of the network This means the system cannot browse any other MSM servers in the subnet and the MSM servers cannot will recognize it as a server This installation helps you select any of the setup types but if you run RunRPM sh it insta
294. erface osc ceescancca cece eee na cp hdbe eden so ua ed AbenEs caap sae pebiendaecm ade ease ead apa eee sens S 14 1 3 Serial ATA Features 5555 6 58 cadens ddanclene ching nh pacmtad EAA E A ddan ga memes adam same cane pqiagmuune aimee AAA 14 1 4 Solid State Drive Features ssi cca sen dunsse wee cheer deene canted eg E EENES EEEE EEEE ETEK EE EEE E 15 14 1 Solid State DriveGuard scsi bee ern besa ne ee edd E a E eatblnmee Rouen E en Wed abudeeeeey ae eae 15 1 5 Dimmer Switch Feat re s sisaisiscecsee ca how ny araeeinun annia EEA EEEE sts NO EARE ea haw dg alecw baled wile war EEEE EEEE 16 M6 UERI 2 O SUD POM a5 cas ncacumciets sia shame sabe ease tenants Bay A E Minden mae EE ts bane UA Wend Soeeeeunmamat ETE 16 1 7 Configuration Scenario Ss fi 5 icc 5 dhe sd ac act erator Lasdandeeeae ee sane nie s ddan guudia onan edad A AA memerenes 16 1 7 1 Valid Drive Mix Configurations with HDDs and CacheCade SSD Caching software csc cece eee e ene eee ee 18 1 8 Technical SUPPOFrt 5 5 5 iit beaded ae Re E Ss Lhaadd ide iediealendeht AA oabisgash suaaeeebl dino aewennldage seme cate 18 Chapter 2 Introduction to RAID 03 oicc6c6cb tis cee een iSt an ninsa t ENE AAEE pe naa aaah enwEs then ENNA AE gna Coda NEE eum 21 2A RAID Deseriptloninss tas iana E ages eal calnaae anand bad sate a A aap AE ENTA ap a eiue Walia oes cues EEES AO 21 2 ZIRAID Benefit 23s gunn be ears a a dnek EA e a E adharinne aide dlavelene g MOR ne auras R E EERE E 21 2 3 RAID
295. erform the cleanup memory that was allocated to the offline base virtual drives will be available to the Snapshot Repository virtual drive Follow these steps to clean up a Snapshot Repository 1 Access the Virtual Drive screen by clicking on a Snapshot Repository virtual drive icon in the right panel on the WebBIOS CU main screen The Virtual Drive screen appears as shown in Figure 106 Page 152 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Using MegaRAID Recovery nfig Utility Virtual Drive 1 Capacity 67 343 GB Policies Access FF Heat piskCache uacmanae R o Disable BOI Sl Default Write Write Through Current Write Write Through Figure 106 Virtual Drive Screen 2 Click the AdvOpers radio button and then click Go The Advanced Operations screen appears as shown in Figure 107 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 153 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Viewing System Event Information MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 4 11 Viewing System Event Information Page 154 Figure 107 Advanced Operations Screen 3 Click Cleanup Snapshot Repository 4 Click Go This action cleans up the Snapshot Repository The SAS controller firmware monitors the activity and performance of all storage configurations and devices in the system When an event occurs such as the creation of a new virtual d
296. erserre 213 5 20 1 Enable the Snapshot Feature 2 0 0 0 cece cece cece eee rene E E EE EEA eens n eet e EAE 214 5 20 2 Disable the Snapshot Feature cece cece cece cere ee nee ene ANTE EENE eee ENEAN ETES a 214 5 20 3 Take Snapshot Of VOIUME 21 6 cece cece cee nnn nen e tenn ene EEE DEDEDE EEE EEE E EE EEE E EE EEE E EE EEE EEE EE EES 214 5 20 4 Set the Snapshot Properties cies scaciessaiiersndaeagapdaned cadeecnadeyiareg dee tedidea nee deeeaeaeaadasageweadndewe 215 5 20 5 Deletea Snapshot i22sssnvvea Sau staeanveeldan pa a a a Geiee Uoeae A ehbine A 215 520 6 Create a VIEW ic ciecaicade see Leach eestetee ad saeWe Rete de add outa tevin iegue abet aso duane ee A aE 216 520 7 Delete a View pomeras espere cians duane ov enemnmedinns wewannauue snslelauiaedinneeipea ewe phe eh aateanedmume Meeecmdees 216 5 20 8 Rollback to an Old Snapshot cece cece EREN EE nen denen ener E een ERREN V 216 5 20 9 Display Snapshot and View Information 0 0 cece cece cnn ented eee nent ened b bee e tenn een enee 217 5 20 10 Clean the Recoverable Free Space on the Drives in a Virtual Drive 0 cece eee ence e nen eee teen een enee 217 5 20 11 Display the Information for a Specific View 0 cece cece cece nee nent n eee n ene e eden eee e ene e een enee 217 5 20 12 Enabling the Snapshot Scheduler 0 ccc cece cece ene eee ne eee tenn deen ete e eee e eee b eet en ee een enee 217 5 20 13 Displays the Read and Wri
297. es 17 H Choose how many virtual drives you want to create Capacity 408 656 GB Q Select the capacity for the virtual drive s Each virtual drive have the same capacity Cancel Back r Help Figure 144 Create Virtual Drive Screen 4 Ifyou want to allow different types of drives in a configuration click the check box Use the drive type mixing NOTE For best results do not use drive type mixing 5 Select the RAID level desired for the virtual drive When you use simple configuration the RAID controller supports RAID levels 1 5 and 6 In addition it supports independent drives configured as RAID 0 The screen text gives a brief description of the RAID level that you select The RAID levels that you can choose depend on the number of drives available To learn more about RAID levels see Chapter 2 Introduction to RAID 6 Click the Assign a hot spare check box if you want to assign a dedicated hot spare to the new virtual drive If an unconfigured good drive is available that drive is assigned as a hot spare Hot spares are drives that are available to replace failed drives automatically in a redundant virtual drive RAID 1 RAID 5 or RAID 6 7 Click the Use drive security check box if you want to set a drive security method The LSI SafeStore Data Security Service encrypts data and provides disk based key management for your data security solution This solution protects the data in the event of theft or loss o
298. es to have foreign configurations Import or clear the foreign configuration If you select Import automatic rebuilds will occur in redundant virtual drives NOTE Start a consistency check immediately after the rebuild is complete to ensure data integrity for the virtual drives See Section 10 2 Running a Consistency Check for more information about checking data consistency m Scenario 3 If all of the drives in a virtual drive are removed but at different times and re inserted the controller considers the drives to have foreign configurations Page 371 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software LSI SafeStore Encryption Services MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Import or clear the foreign configuration If you select Import all drives that were pulled before the virtual drive became offline will be imported and then automatically rebuilt Automatic rebuilds will occur in redundant virtual drives m Scenario 4 If the drives in a non redundant virtual drive are removed the controller considers the drives to have foreign configurations Import or clear the foreign configuration No rebuilds will occur after the import operation because there is no redundant data to rebuild the drives Page 372 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Appendix A Appendix A Events and Messages Error Levels Events and Messages This appendix lists the MegaRAID Storage Manager events th
299. ess RV Read Ramen yj Dishcache maana oe ce Default Write rite Through Current Write Urite Through Figure 102 Virtual Drive Screen 2 Click Snapshot Properties The Snapshot Repository Properties screen appears as shown in Figure 103 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 149 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Using MegaRAID Recovery MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide operties Repository Number of Holes Total Capacity Capacity Used Capacity Left Drive Cleanup Not Po Associated Base VDs 1 10t Base 0 6 Figure 103 Snapshot Repository Properties 3 Click OK to return to the Virtual Drive screen 4 10 7 Restoring a Virtual Drive by You can roll back to a previous Point in Time snapshot to recover an entire volume This Rolling Back to a Snapshot action is often used where there are malicious files that cannot be traced Reboot the system and then roll back to a snapshot that does not have the malicious or corrupt files Follow these steps to roll back the volume version to an earlier version 1 After you determine there are malicious or corrupt files start the WebBIOS configuration utility 2 Access the Virtual Drive screen by clicking on a virtual drive icon in the right panel on the WebBIOS CU main screen The Virtual Drive screen appears as shown in Figure 104 Page 150 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide L
300. est aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Starts the battery test This command requires that you turn off the power to the system and then turn on the power and reboot the system The commands in this section are used to perform actions with the Recovery advanced software also known as Snapshot LSIP200038104 The Recovery feature uses Snapshot technology to offer a simplified way to recover lost data and provides protection for any volume including the boot volume You can use Recovery to take snapshots of a volume at designated point in time and restore the volume or files from those points in case data is deleted whether accidentally or maliciously MegaRAID Recovery supports up to eight snapshots of PiTs for each volume Page 213 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool 5 20 1 Enable the Snapshot Feature 5 20 2 Disable the Snapshot Feature 5 20 3 Take Snapshot of Volume Page 214 Recovery Snapshot Related Options MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Use the command in the following table to enable the snapshot feature on a selected virtual drive Table 111 Enable the Snapshot Feature Convention MegaCli Snapshot Enbl szXXX SnapshotRepositoryLD N AutoSnapshot AutoDeleteOldestSnapshot Lx aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Enables the snapshot on the source virtual drive for the corresponding snapshot target virtual drive szXXX Specifies the size in MB on for the virtual drive where XXX is a decimal
301. etailed date options b Optional Check the Run consistency check continuously check box Select the month day and year on which to start the consistency check d Select the time of day to start the consistency check Page 316 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 10 2 3 Running a Group Consistency Check LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 10 Maintaining and Managing Storage Configurations Running a Consistency Check 4 Click Ok You can monitor the progress of the consistency check See Section 9 9 Monitoring Rebuilds and Other Processes for more information You can run a consistency check on multiple drives at one time Follow these steps to run a group consistency check 1 Click Manage gt Check Consistency The Group Consistency Check appears as shown in Figure 198 LSI ey elect Virtual Disks JT Virtual Drive 0 YD_0 544 875 GB Optimal Virtual Drive 2 272 437 GB Optimal Select All Deselect All Start Cancel Figure 198 Group Consistency Check Dialog Box 2 Check the virtual drives to run the consistency check on or click Select All to select all of the virtual drives 3 Click Start You can monitor the progress of the group consistency check See Section 9 9 Monitoring Rebuilds and Other Processes for more information Page 317 Chapter 10 Maintaining and Managing Storage Configurations S
302. eted or a key is pressed Page 200 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Virtual Drive Related Options 5 14 6 Schedule a Consistency Check Use the command in the following table to schedule a consistency check CC on the virtual drives for the selected controller s There are options to set the mode change the CC start time set the delay time and display of the CC info Table 77 Schedule Consistency Check Convention MegaCli AdpCcSched Dsbl Info ModeConc ModeSeq ExcludeLD LN L0 1 2 SetStartTime yyyymmdd hh SetDelay val aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Schedules check consistency on the virtual drive of the selected adapter Dsb1 Disables a scheduled CC for the given adapter s Info Gets information about a scheduled CC for the given adapter s odeConc The scheduled CC on all of the virtual drives runs concurrently for the given adapter s odeSeq The scheduled CC on all of the virtual drives runs sequentially for the given adapter s ExcludeLa Specify the virtual drive numbers not included in the scheduled CC The new list will overwrite the existing list stored on the controller This is optional StartTime Sets the next start time The date is in the format of yyyymmdd in decimal digits and followed by a decimal number for the hour between 0 23 inclusively This is optional SetDe
303. etting 4 Enter the time delay in minutes before the unconfigured drives spin down automatically After the specified time the drives spin down automatically 5 Click OK Your power settings are saved In the Physical tab of the main menu screen the nodes for the unconfigured good drives that are spun down appear with Powersave after their status 8 5 1 Enhanced Dimmer Switch This section helps you change the power save settings using the Dimmer Switch Power Settings Enhancement using the Power Save mode 1 Select a controller icon in the Physical tab or the Logical tab in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window 2 Select Go To gt Controller gt Manage Power Settings from the menu bar The Manage Power Save Settings screen appears as displayed in the following figure LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 279 Chapter 8 Configuration Page 280 Changing Power Settings MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Manage Power Save Settings i xj LSI lt i eye Power save Dimmer Switch technology that conserves energy by spinning down idle drives The controller will automatically spin up those drives from power save mode whenever necessary Specify the power save settings below IV Hot spare Drives JV Configured Drives Drive standby time ao ming me Ensure that if the drives are idle for the specified time then the drives will go to power save mode Select power save
304. f drives Refer to Section 11 5 LSI SafeStore Encryption Services for more information about the SafeStore feature Page 266 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 8 Configuration Creating a New Storage Configuration 8 Use the drop down menu in the Virtual drives field to choose how many virtual drives you want to create 9 Select the capacity of the virtual drive s Each virtual drive has the same capacity 10 Click Next The Create Virtual Drive Summary window appears as shown in Figure 145 This window shows the selections you made for simple configuration Create Virtual Drive Summary LSI Review the summary and go back if you need to make corrections The virtual drive s will be created when you click Finist Summary IRID level RAID O Number of virtual drives 1 Capacity of each virtual drive 60 000 GB Drive security method No encryption Number of drives used 1 lt Cancel Back Finish H Figure 145 Create Virtual Drive Summary Window 11 Click Back to return to the previous screen to change any selections or click Finish to accept and complete the configuration The new virtual drive is created after you click Finish After the configuration is completed a dialog box notifies you that the virtual drives were created successfully NOTE If you create a large configuration using
305. f the virtual disk may be smaller because the driver requires the number of blocks from the physical drives in each virtual disk to be aligned to the stripe size If multiple size options are specified CT will configure the virtual disks in the order of the options entered in the command line The configuration of a particular virtual disk will fail if the remaining size of the array is too small to configure the virtual disk with the specified size This option can also be used to create a configuration on the free space available in the array strpszM Specifies the strip size where the strip size values are 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 or 1024 Mega Bytes Hsp E5 S5 Creates hot spares when you create the configuration The new hot spares will be dedicated to the virtual disk used in creating the configuration This option does not allow you to create global hot spares To create global hot spares you must use the PdHsp command with proper subcommands User can also use this option to create a configuration on the free space available in the virtual disk AfterLdX This command is optional By default the application uses the first free slot available in the virtual disk This option is valid only if the virtual disk is already used for configuration Force This option will force the creation of virtual disk in situations where the application finds that it is convenient to create the virtual disk only with user s consent FDE CtrlBased If
306. f the file from Snapshot view back into the online storage volume that was the source of the Snapshot 2 If there is a corrupt volume or operating system roll back the volume to a previous state with the following steps a Restart the system and press Ctrl H during POST Power on Self Test Page 332 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 11 2 12 Enabling the Recovery Advanced Software LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software Recovery Advanced Software b Inthe WebBIOS screen select the corrupted virtual drive and on the next screen that appears select the option Adv Opers c Select Rollback and designate the most recent PiT from the drop down list d Click Go and then exit WebBIOS The system reboots e Begin debug verification procedures on the volume You can follow these same steps to roll back to previous PiTs 3 Reduce the risk of extended downtime during application updates upgrades in the IT center with the following steps a When the application is offline take a snapshot of the application volume b Install each patch individually and test for any new defects that might have been introduced c Take a snapshot after you test each patch and determine that it is clean If a defect is introduced roll back to the previous installation and bypass the installation of the defective patch NOTE If the volume is
307. f this change 4 Change any virtual drive settings if desired See Section 8 1 1 Selecting Virtual Drive Settings for more information about the virtual drive settings 5 Click Create Virtual Drive The new virtual drive appears under the drive group The options Update Virtual Drive and Remove Virtual Drive are available Update Virtual Drive allows you to change the virtual drive settings and Remove Virtual Drive allows you to delete the virtual drive 6 Click Next The Create Virtual Drive Summary window appears as shown in Figure 152 This window shows the selections you made for advanced configuration Page 272 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 8 2 Converting JBOD Drives to Unconfigured Good LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 8 Configuration Converting JBOD Drives to Unconfigured Good Create irtual Drive Summary Ee LSI lt x ey Review the summary and go back if you need to make corrections The virtual drive s will be created when you click Finish Summary Drive GroupO Drive group name RAID level RAID 50 Number of drives per span 3 Number of spans 2 Drive security method No Encryption Hot spare No Total capacity 544 875 GB Free capacity 0 Bytes Virtual drive 1 name vD_O Capacity 544 875 GB Cancel Back Fish Help Figure 152 Create Virtual Drive Summary Window 7 Click Back to return to the p
308. ffers a simplified way to recover data and provides automatic protection for the boot volume You can use the Recovery feature to take a snapshot of a volume and to restore a volume or file Snapshot functionality allows you to capture data changes to the volume and if data is deleted accidentally or maliciously you can restore the data from the view or roll back to a snapshot at a previous point in time PiT MegaRAID Recovery supports up to eight snapshots of PiTs for each volume Each Recovery PiT volume snapshot is typically a fraction of the original volume size because it tracks only the changes that are made to a volume after the PiT is created Disk space for PiTs is reserved in the Snapshot Repository virtual drive and the PiT is expanded in small increments as new data is written to the volume Multiple PiTs of each volume can be retained online enabling frequent snapshots to be stored in a space efficient manner 11 2 11 Recovery Scenarios There are three primary scenarios in which to use the Recovery feature 1 Restore the missing or deleted files restore from view with the following steps a Discover which file is missing or corrupted b Review the Snapshot views of the file content also known as mounting af snapshot from each PiT until you find an earlier version of the missing or corrupted file A mounted view appears as another drive letter in the Windows Explorer screen c Drag and drop the earlier version o
309. fidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Appendix A Events and Messages Table 135 Event Messages Continued Event Messages Number Type Event Text 0x0187 Information s mirror joined 0x0188 Warning s link d failure in wide port 0x0189 Information s link d restored in wide port Page 385 Appendix A Events and Messages Event Messages MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Page 386 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Appendix B Appendix B MegaCLI Error Messages Error Messages and Descriptions MegaCLlI Error Messages This appendix lists the MegaCLlI error messages The MegaCLI Configuration Utility is a command line interface application you can use to manage MegaRAID SAS RAID controllers See Chapter 5 for more information about the MegaCLl utility and commands B 1 Error Messages and Each message that appears in the event log has an error level that indicates the severity Descriptions of the event as shown in Table 136 Table 136 Error Messages and Descriptions Number Event Text 0x00 Command completed successfully 0x01 Invalid command 0x02 DCMD opcode is invalid 0x03 Input parameters are invalid 0x04 Invalid sequence number 0x05 Abort isn t possible for the requested command 0x06 Application host code not found
310. figuration Method screen appears as shown in the following figure Page 66 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 4 5 2 Using Automatic Configuration Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Creating a Storage Configuration LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Figure 31 WebBIOS Configuration Method Screen 6 On this screen select a configuration mode Manual Configuration Allows you to control all attributes of the new storage configuration as you create drive groups and virtual drives and set their parameters Automatic Configuration Automatically creates an optimal RAID configuration If you select Automatic Configuration you can choose whether to create a redundant RAID drive group or a non redundant RAID 0 drive group Select one of the following options in the Redundancy field Redundancy when possible No redundancy If you select Automatic Configuration you can choose whether to use a drive security method Select one of the following options in the Drive Security Method field No Encryption Drive Encryption 7 Click Next to continue If you select the Automatic Configuration option continue with Section 4 5 2 Using Automatic Configuration If you select Manual Configuration continue with Section 4 5 3 Using Manual Configuration Follow these instructions to create a configuration with automatic configuration either with or without
311. figuration Utility Managing Configurations 3 Select AdvOpers under the Operations heading The Advanced Operations screen appears as shown in Figure 114 ed Uperations Figure 114 Advanced Operations Screen 4 Select either Change RAID Level or Change RAID Level and Add Drive If you select Change RAID Level change the RAID level from the drop down menu If you select Change RAID Level and Add Drive change the RAID level from the drop down menu and then select one or more drives to add from the list of drives The available RAID levels are limited based on the current RAID level of the virtual drive plus the number of drives available 5 Click Go 6 When the message appears confirm that you want to migrate the RAID level of the virtual drive A reconstruction operation begins on the virtual drive You must wait until the reconstruction is completed before you perform any other tasks in the WebBIOS CU When you insert a new drive on a MegaRAID system if the inserted drive does not contain valid DDF metadata the drive displays as JBOD for MegaRAID Entry level controllers such as the SAS 9240 4i 8i If the drive does contain valid DDF metadata its drive state is Unconfigured Good Page 163 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility WebBIOS Dimmer Switch MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 4 13 Page 164 WebBIOS Dimmer Switch A new drive in JBOD drive state is exposed to the host operating system as a
312. figuration using the SafeStore Encryption Services advanced software To enable security on the drives you need to perform the following actions to set drive security m Enter a security key identifier A security key identifier appears whenever you have to enter a security key If you have more than one security key the identifier helps you determine which security key to enter m Enter a security key After you create a security key you have the option to create secure virtual drives using the key You have to use the security key to perform certain operations You can improve security by entering a password To provide additional security you can require the password whenever anyone boots the server Perform the following steps to enable drive security 1 Select the Physical View tab in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window and click a controller icon 2 Select Go To gt Controller gt Change Drive Security gt Enable The Enable Drive Security screen appears as shown in the following figure Enable Drive Security Enter Security Key Details Controller LSI MegaRAID SAS 9260 8i Bus 2 Dey 0 Enabling drive security on this controller will have the option to create secure virtual drives using a security key Security Key Identifier Security key identifier Specify a security key identifier The controller has provided a default identifier for you You may use this string or enter your own identifier
313. ftware The CacheCade drive icon appears next to the RAID controller in the left frame as shown in Figure 236 MegaRAID Storage Manager 6 50 1000 18 x Manage GoTo Log Tools Help LSI3 LSI MegaRAID SAS 9260 83 Bus 6 Dev 0 E Drive Group 0 RAID 0 Host Name 147 145 189 139 Rj Virtual Drives G Virtual Drive 0 vD_0 29 000 GB Optime IP Address 147 145 189 139 D Drives Backplane 252 Slot 1 SATA 74 530G Operating System Windows Server 2008 XP Backplane 252 Slot 2 SATA 74 530 G 5 Total Free Capacity 119 000 GB B capacity 119 000 GB E E Super Sized Cache Drive Group 1 ssco 1 SSCD_1 29 281 GB Optimal B Drives QP Backplane 252 Slot 0 SSD SATA 29 E Global Hot Spares Backplane 252 Slot 4 SATA 74 530 GB G E Unconfigured Drives Backplane 252 Slot 5 SATA 74 530 GB U OS Version 6 0 OS Architecture x86 Error Level Date Time Description 649 Information 2010 01 06 11 07 18 Controller ID 0 Power state change on PD 24 Previous Transition Current On laj 648 Information Controller ID 0 Power state change on PD 4 Previous Powersave Current Transition 647 Dinformaton 2010 01 06 11 07 15 Controller ID 0 VD is available VD 1 646 __ Information 2010 01 06 11 07 15 Controller ID 0 Created VO 1 645 Information Controller ID 0 VD is now OPTIMAL VD 644 Information Controller 1D 0
314. ftware User Guide Copyback is also initiated when the first Self Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology SMART error occurs on a drive that is part of a virtual drive The destination drive is a hot spare that qualifies as a rebuild drive The drive with the SMART error is marked as failed only after the successful completion of the copyback This avoids putting the drive group in degraded status NOTE During a copyback operation if the drive group involved in the copyback is deleted because of a virtual drive deletion the destination drive reverts to an Unconfigured Good state or hot spare state Order of Precedence In the following scenarios rebuild takes precedence over the copyback operation m If acopyback operation is already taking place to a hot spare drive and any virtual drive on the controller degrades the copyback operation aborts and a rebuild starts The rebuild changes the virtual drive to the optimal state m The rebuild operation takes precedence over the copyback operation when the conditions exist to start both operations For example Where the hot spare is not configured or unavailable in the system There are two drives both members of virtual drives with one drive exceeding the SMART error threshold and the other failed If you adda hot spare assume a global hot spare during a copyback operation the copyback is aborted and the rebuild operation starts on the hot spare Backgro
315. g Auto Snspshot Failed for Warning Snspshot deleted due to resource constraints on Critical m VD is no longer being cached in SSC VD Information VD is being cached in SSC VD Information VD is used for 55C VD Information aval Information VD is not avail Warring Warring an unexpected internal error restored For YD Information eriscal siniprmation Snapshot view Full on Critical Snapshot View 80 full on Warning Snapshot repository full on Critical Snapshot repository 80 Full on Warning 4 chev Snapshot rollback progress on Point In Time on Snapshot rollback completed For Point In Time on 1 ormation Snapshot rollback internally aborted For Point In Time on Fatal Snapshot rollback started for Point In Time on Information JV MSM Log IV System Log Alert Delivery Methods J Email I Popup Cancel Restore defaults Figure 182 Change Individual Events Dialog Box 3 Click an event in the list to select it Configuring Alert Notifications The current alert delivery methods appear for the selected event under the Alert Delivery Methods heading Select the desired alert delivery methods for the event 5 Press ESC to return to the Alerts Notification Configuration screen Click OK This saves all of the changes made to the event To change the event severity leve
316. g MegaRAID Storage Manager Software on Microsoft Windows cece cece cence eee teen een ennes 229 6 4 3 Installing MegaRAID Storage Manager for SPARC 0 cece eee cece nee nee ence een e eee e nent nent en eeeeanee 232 6 4 4 Installing MegaRAID Storage Manager Software for LINUX 6 cece c eet net ene tenet nent en ete en een tenes 233 6 4 5 Prerequisites for Installing MSM on RHEL6 0 x64 Operating System ccc cee cece cnet e ence een e eee ne teenies 234 6 4 6 Linux Error MESSAGES 5 i dbssacwiciare cle woe suartaleiecal ale auastue siogiauecardracelarawietieraiaiecal alate uma ETER ora area EE aa 234 647 Kernel Upgrades isis ccc hada vives heeded Ae esa eae hdd E aaa ned eS lcs es 234 6 4 3 MSM Customization s raramena Aoa aa EETA E E E A de ENE E AR AEA AS AE a ni 235 6 5 MegaRAID Storage Manager Support and Installation on VMWare sssssssssessrssrrsrrrrererrrrrrrrrerrrrrrerrererrrrer 235 6 5 1 Installing MegaRAID Storage Manager for VMWare Classic cece cece eee e eee nee ence een e ee ete enone ennes 235 6 5 2 Uninstalling MegaRAID Storage Manager for VMWare 0 cee cece cece nen eee nee e eens eee n ene eneeneenes 236 6 5 3 MegaRAID Storage Manager Support on the VMWare ESXi Operating System cece eee e eee teen eeeeeees 236 OSA LiM ONS eaea ee o ne AEAEE AE E E EA EAEE E Aracayara Siege nate AAEN eae 238 6 6 Installing and Configuring a CIM Provider
317. g Snapshot Properties Select any one of the options shown in Figure 220 to edit the snapshots Automatically delete the oldest snapshot This option automatically deletes the oldest snap shot present in the system Page 338 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 11 2 17 Snapshot Base Details LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software Recovery Advanced Software Stop taking snapshots This option prevents the application from taking the snapshots Take a snapshot on every reboot recommended for boot virtual drives To use this option select the check box next to the Take a snapshot on every reboot recommended for boot virtual drives field This option provides you a snapshot taken on boot after each successful shutdown You can use this snapshot of the boot VD to restore the operating system on the VD if it becomes corrupted Click Finish A Confirm Enable Snapshots dialog box appears This dialog box prompts you to make sure whether you want to enable snapshots on VD or not Confirm Enable Snapshots Once you enable snapshots on this virtual drive you cannot change the allocated capacity or the snapshot repository without first disabling snapshots and losing any snapshot data Virtual Drive 3 D_3 will become a snapshot repository Tt should now only be used for storing snapshot related data If there is
318. g virtual drives using the Power Virtual Drives save Mode drop down selector Figure 125 Power Save policy While Creating Virtual Drives The power save mode can be Max Max without cache Auto None and Controller defined Page 172 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 5 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Product Overview MegaRAID Command Tool The MegaRAID Command Tool CT is a command line interface CLI application for SAS You can use this utility to configure monitor and maintain MegaRAID SAS RAID controllers and the devices connected to them 5 1 Product Overview LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 NOTE The CT supports only MegaRAID controllers that support SAS and SATA II It does not support other types of MegaRAID controllers such as U320 SATA I or IDE NOTE The IA 64 release for Windows is similar to the 32 bit release so you can follow the 32 bit instructions 32 bit applications that were validated on an x64 system such as the Intel Market system can use the 32 bit instructions also The MegaCLI Configuration Utility is a command line interface application you can use to manage MegaRAID SAS RAID controllers You can use MegaCLI Configuration Utility to perform the following tasks Configure MegaRAID SAS RAID controllers and attached devices Display information about virtual drives and drives for the controller and
319. gaRAID Storage Manager cannot send an e mail message to the e mail address an error message appears 9 2 11 Removing E mail Addresses of Use the E mail tab portion of the Alerts Notification Configuration screen to remove Recipients of Alert Notifications e mail addresses of the recipients of alert notifications 1 Click the E mail tab on the Event Notification Configuration screen The E mail section of the screen appears as shown in Figure 186 2 Click an e mail address in the Recipient e mail addresses field The Remove button which was grayed out is now active 3 Click Remove LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 303 Chapter 9 Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices Monitoring Controllers MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide The e mail address is deleted from the list 9 3 Monitoring Controllers When MegaRAID Storage Manager software is running you can see the status of all TT Controllers in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window If the controller is operating normally the controller icon looks like this If the controller has failed a small red circle appears to the right of the icon See Section 7 2 1 Dashboard PhysicalView Logical View for a complete list of device icons To display complete controller information click a controller icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window The controller properties display in the right panel as shown in Figure 187 IE
320. ge Manager to create new storage configurations on Configuration systems with LSI SAS controllers You can create the following types of configurations Simple configuration specifies a limited number of settings and has the system select drives for you This option is the easiest way to create a virtual drive Advanced configuration lets you choose additional settings and customize virtual drive creation This option provides greater flexibility when creating virtual drives for your specific requirements This section describes the virtual drive parameters and explain how to create simple and advanced storage configurations 8 1 1 Selecting Virtual Drive Settings This section describes the virtual drive settings that you can select when you use the advanced configuration procedure to create virtual drives You should change these parameters only if you have a specific reason for doing so It is usually best to leave them at their default settings Initialization state Initialization prepares the storage medium for use Specify the initialization status Nolnitialization the default The new configuration is not initialized and the existing data on the drives is not overwritten Fast Initialization The firmware quickly writes zeroes to the first and last 8 MB regions of the new virtual drive and then completes the initialization in the background This allows you to start writing data to the virtual drive immediately
321. ge gt Show Progress If the drive cannot be rebuilt an error message appears Continue with the next step Shut down the system disconnect the power cord and open the computer case Replace the failed drive with a new drive of equal capacity Close the computer case reconnect the power cord and restart the computer OY Oe Restart the MegaRAID Storage Manager software LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 10 5 Making a Drive Offline or Missing 10 6 Upgrading the Firmware LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 10 Maintaining and Managing Storage Configurations Making a Drive Offline or Missing When the new drive spins up the drive icon changes back to normal status and the rebuild process begins automatically You can monitor the progress of the rebuild in the Group Show Progress window by selecting Manage gt Show Progress If a drive is currently part of a redundant configuration and you want to use it in another configuration you can use MegaRAID Storage Manager commands to remove the drive from the first configuration and change the drive state to Unconfigured Good CAUTION After you perform this procedure all data on that drive is lost To remove the drive from the configuration without harming the data on the virtual drive follow these steps 1 In the MegaRAID Storage Manager main menu click Go To gt Physical Drive gt Make Drive O ffline The
322. ger CMPI standardizes Manageability Instrumentation which allows you to write and build instrumentation once and run it in different CIM environments on one platform The following are some of the differences in the MSM utility when you manage a VMWare server The following limitations apply to the system information exposed through the application Only the IP address and the Host name display The operating system type and the operating system architecture do not appear There is no support for the controller health information Authentication support MSMallows CIMOM server authentication with the user ID and the password for VMware Access to VMWare ESXi hosts is controlled based on the user privileges Only root users can have Full Access while the non root users can have only View Only access Multiple root users can simultaneously login using Full Access mode to access the VMWare ESXi server Event Logging The event logging feature for MSM Client connected to a VMware ESXi system behaves as follows There is no support for retrieving initial logs the events that occurred before a client logs in Only those events that occur after a client logs in appear in the event logger dialog System log does not display The Save log feature is not supported however the Save Log as Text is still supported The View Log option allows you to view the logs
323. gh the use of a second parity block in each stripe Use RAID 60 for data that requires a very high level of protection from loss In the case of a failure of one drive or two drives in a RAID set in a virtual drive the RAID controller uses the parity blocks to recreate all of the missing information If two drives in a RAID 6 set in a RAID 60 virtual drive fail two drive rebuilds are required one for each drive These rebuilds can occur at the same time Use for office automation and online customer service that requires fault tolerance Use for any application that has high read request rates but low write request rates Strong Points Provides data redundancy high read rates and good performance in most environments Each RAID 6 set can survive the loss of two drives or the loss of a drive while another drive is being rebuilt Provides the highest level of protection against drive failures of all of the RAID levels Read performance is similar to that of RAID 50 though random reads in RAID 60 might be slightly faster because data is spread across at least one more disk in each RAID 6 set Weak Points Not well suited to tasks requiring lot of writes A RAID 60 virtual drive has to generate two sets of parity data for each write operation which results in a significant decrease in performance during writes Drive performance is reduced during a drive rebuild Environments with few processes do not perform as well because the RAID overh
324. gh write policy ADRA Adaptive Read Ahead read policy RA Read Ahead read policy NORA Normal Read policy No read ahead DIO Direct I O cache policy clo Cached I O cache policy There are some options for which you can specify multiple values You can enter commands for a single controller aN multiple controllers a0 1 2 or work on all present controllers aALL This is denoted as aN a0 1 2 aALLin this document and specifies that you can enter commands for one controller multiple controllers or all controllers NOTE All options in the MegaRAID Command Tool are position dependent unless otherwise specified The following table describes the conventions used in the options Table 24 Conventions Convention Description Specifies or meaning you can choose between options aN N specifies the controller number for the command a 0 1 2 Specifies the command is for controllers 0 1 and 2 You can select two or more controllers in this manner aALL Specifies the command is for all controllers LX x specifies the virtual drive number for the command Page 175 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool 5 4 Page 176 Pre boot MegaCLl Pre boot MegaCLI MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Table 24 Conventions Continued Convention Description L0 1 2 Specifies the command is for virtual drives 0 1 and 2 You can select two or more virtual drives in this mann
325. gical View screen Events Alt e Select this option to view system events in the Event Information screen For more information see Section 4 11 Viewing System Event Information Exit Alt x Select this option to exit the WebBIOS CU and continue with system boot The MegaRAID advanced software offers the software license key feature to enable the advanced options in WebBIOS The license key also known as the Activation key is used to transfer the advanced features from one controller to another by configuring the Key vault You have to configure the Advanced Software Options menu present in the WebBIOS main screen to use the advanced features present in the controller Perform the following steps to configure the Advanced Software Options wizard to enable the advanced options using the activation key Click Advanced Software Options menu on the WebBIOS main screen The Advanced Software Options wizard appears as shown in the following figure LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Managing Software Licensing Figure 16 Manage MegaRAID Advanced Software Options Wizard NOTE When you click the Advanced Software Options menu in the main WebBlOS screen if rehosting is not required the Manage MegaRAID Advanced Software Options screen as shown in Figure 16 appears otherwise if the user decides to opt the rehosting process the Section 4 4 8 Co
326. gure 66 and click OK the following dialog box appears Page 115 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Selecting SafeStore Encryption Services Security MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Options Please restart the e the change to take affect Make sure to stop all the operations before you reboot your systen Figure 71 System Restart 4 7 3 Changing the Security Key If you selected disk based encryption when you made the RAID configuration the drive Identifier Security Key and Pass Phrase security will be enabled Perform the following steps to change the encryption settings for the security key identifier security key and pass phrase 1 Click Drive Security on the main WebBIOS screen The Change Drive Security screen appears as shown in Figure Figure 72 Change Drive Security Settings Screen7 Page 116 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 4 WebBIOS Configuration Utility Selecting SafeStore Encryption Services Security Options 2 To change the drive security settings select Change drive security settings and click Accept 4 7 4 Change Security from EKM to The Change Security Settings Introduction screen appears as shown in Figure 73 LKM Figure 73 Change Security Settings Introduction 3 Select Change current security s ettings and click OK the system restart message appears as shown in Figure 71 4 Select Switch to Local Key m
327. h as overwriting or degaussing Page 47 Chapter 3 SafeStore Disk Encryption Terminology 3 3 Terminology Table 19 Terminology used in FDE Option Authenticated Mode MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Table 19 describes the terminology related to the SafeStore encryption feature Description The RAID configuration is keyed to a user password The password must be provided on system boot to authenticate the user and facilitate unlocking the configuration for user access to the encrypted data Blob A blob is created by encrypting a key s using another key There are two types of blob in the system encryption key blob and security key blob Key backup You need to provide the controller with a lock key if the controller is replaced or if you choose to migrate secure virtual disks To do this you must back up the security key Password An optional authenticated mode is supported in which you must provide a password on each boot to make sure the system boots only if the user is authenticated Firmware uses the user password to encrypt the security key in the security key blob stored on the controller Re provisioning Re provisioning disables the security system of a device For a controller it involves destroying the security key For SafeStore encrypted drives when the drive lock key is deleted the drive is unlocked and any user data on the drive is securely deleted This does not apply to controller encrypted d
328. h memory not available try command again later 0x21 Error writing MFC data to SEEPROM 0x22 Required HW is missing i e Alarm or BBU 0x23 Item not found 0x24 LD drives are not within an enclosure 0x25 PD CLEAR operation is in progress 0x26 Unable to use SATA SAS drive to replace SAS SATA 0x27 Patrol Read is disabled 0x28 Given row index is invalid 0x2d SCSI command done but non GOOD status was received see mf hdr extStatus for SCSI_STATUS Ox2e IO request for MFI_CMD_OP_PD_SCSI failed see extStatus for DM error Ox2f 0x30 Matches SCSI RESERVATION_CONFLICT One or more of the flush operations failed 0x31 FW real time currently not set 0x32 Command issues while FW in wrong state i e GET RECON when op not active 0x33 LD is not OFFLINE IO not possible 0x34 Peer controller rejected request possibly due to resource conflict 0x35 Unable to inform peer of communication changes retry might be appropriate 0x36 LD reservation already in progress 0x37 12C errors were detected 0x38 PCI errors occurred during XOR DMA operation 0x39 Ox3a Diagnostics failed see event log for details Unable to process command as boot messages are pending 0x3b 0x3d Returned in case if foreign configurations are incomplete Returned in case if a command is tried on unsupported hardware
329. he enclosure device ID See Section 5 16 1 Display Enclosure Information for more enclosure information Page 209 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Drive Related Options MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 5 15 16 Configure All Free Drives into a Use the command in the following table to download firmware to the physical devices RAID 0 1 5 or 6 Configuration for a connected to the selected controller s Specific Controller Table 101 Configure All Free Drives into a RAID 0 1 5 or 6 Configuration for a Specific Controller Convention MegaCli CfgAllFreeDrv rX SATAOnly SpanCount XXX WT WB NORA RA ADRA Direct Cached CachedBadBBU NoCachedBadBBU strpszM HspCount XX HspType Dedicated EnclAffinity nonRevertible FDE CtrlBased aN Description Adds all of the unconfigured physical drives to a RAID level 0 1 5 or 6 configuration on a specified controller Even if no configuration is present you have the option to write the configuration to the controller Rx E0 S0 Specifies the RAID level and the physical drive enclosure slot numbers to construct a disk group WT Write through WB Write back Selects the write policy NORA No read ahead RA Read ahead ADRA Adaptive read ahead Selects the read policy Cached Direct Selects the cache policy CachedBadBBU NoCachedBadBBU Specifies whether to use write cache when the BBU is bad szXX
330. he estimated time until it is fully charged Learn Cycle is a battery calibration operation performed by the controller periodically to determine the condition of the battery You can start battery learn cycles manually or automatically To choose automatic battery learn cycles enable automatic learn cycles To choose manual battery learn cycles disable automatic learn cycles If you enable automatic learn cycles you can delay the start of the learn cycles for up to 168 hours 7 days If you disable automatic learn cycles you can start the learn cycles manually and you can choose to receive a reminder to start a manual learn cycle To set the learn cycle properties perform the following steps Click the Physical tab to open the physical view Select the BBU icon in the left panel Click the Go To gt BBU gt Set Learn Cycle Properties The BBU operations screen appears 4 On the BBU operations screen click Enable automatic learn cycles and click Go You can delay the start of the next learn cycle by up to 7 days 168 hours using the Delay next learn cycle field 5 To disable automatic learn cycles click Disable automatic learn cycles and then click Go You can start the learn cycles manually In addition you can check the box next to the field Remind me when to start a learn cycle to receive a reminder to start a manual learn cycle To start the learn cycle properties manually perform the following steps 1 Click the Physic
331. he local server NOTE The last two rows indicate VMWare Hosts The following are the limitations of this installation and configuration There is no active event notification for example by popup or e mail There is no status information for the controller Events are collected as long as MSM runs on the Client MSM responds more slowly For more details on these limitations see Section 6 5 4 2 Differences in MSM for VMware ESXi Management of VMWare ESX 3i is possible only through a Common Information Model CIM provider It is not possible to install anything on the VMWare ESX3i system so management is performed through MSM installed on a remote machine Linux Windows VMWare ESX 3i comes with the Small Footprint CIM Broker CFCB CIM Object Manager or CIMOM A CIMOM manages communication between providers which interact with the hardware and a CIM client where the administrator manages the system LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 6 5 4 2 Differences in MSM for VMware ESXi LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 6 MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation MegaRAID Storage Man ager Support and Installation on VMWare SFCB supports Common Manageablity Programming Interface CMPI style providers CMPI defines a common standard used to interface Manageability Instrumentation providers instrumentation to Management Brokers CIM Object Mana
332. he view in MB where XXX is a decimal number Lx x specifies the source LD number for the command 5 20 7 Delete a View Use the command in the following table to a view Table 117 Delete a View Convention MegaCli Snapshot DeleteView SnapshotTime yyyymmdd hh mm ss Lx aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Deletes the view SnapshotTime yyyymmdd hh mm ss Optional If specified this action deletes the view on the snapshot with the time stamp yyyymmdd hh mm ss Lx x specifies the source LD number for the command 5 20 8 Rollback to an Old Snapshot Use the command in the following table to roll the virtual drive back to an older snapshot Table 118 Rollback to an Old Snapshot Convention MegaCli Snapshot Rollback SnapshotTime yyyymmdd hh mm ss Force Y Lx aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Rolls back the virtual drive to an old snapshot SnapshotTime yyyymmdd hh mm ss Specifies the snapshot with the time stamp yyyymmdd hh mm ss to which it has to roll back F orce If specified this action overrides the warning message and causes a rollback to an older snapshot Y If specified this action overrides the warning message and causes a rollback to an older snapshot Lx x specifies the source LD number for the command Page 216 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 5 20 9 Display Snapshot and View Information 5 20 10 Clean the
333. heGeade Drive Group Cancel Help Figure 232 CacheCade Wizard Screen After you select the unconfigured drives the Add gt button is available 4 Click Add gt to move the selected drives to the drive group in the right frame as shown in Figure 233 Page 350 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software CacheCade Advanced Software Create CacheCade Drive group xi LSI ey gt Select unconfigured 55D drives CacheCade Drive groups Capacity LSI MegaRAID SAS 9280 4i4e Bus 2 Dev 0 bCacheCade Drive Group Enclosure Bobcat 38 Slot 16 SSD Create CacheCade Drive Group Cancel Let J Help Figure 233 CacheCade Drive Group Screen After you move the selected drives the Create CacheCade Drive Group button is available Click Create CacheCade Drive Group Click Next Use the next screen that appears to select parameters for the cache disk Enter a name for the CacheCade virtual drive in the CacheCade VD name field and click Create Depending on the number of drives you might have the option to set the capacity of the CacheCade drive The CacheCade drive group icon appears in the menu screen as shown in Figure 234 Page 351 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software CacheCade Advanced Software MegaRAID SAS Software Use
334. hown in Figure 174 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 289 Chapter 8 Configuration Changing a Virtual Drive Configuration MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide L S j gt Description Replaces the physical drive and copies the data to the selected component Select Replacement Enclosure Bobcat 16 Slot 15 S45 136 985 GB Figure 174 Drive Replacement Window 4 Select areplacement drive A confirmation message appears 5 Click Yes This replaces a drive and copies the data to the selected component 8 7 5 Migrating the RAID Level of a As the amount of data and the number of drives in your system increase you can use Virtual Drive RAID level migration to change a virtual drive from one RAID level to another You do not have to power down or reboot the system when you make this change When you migrate a virtual drive to another RAID level you can keep the same number of drives or you can add drives In some cases you have to add a certain number of drives to migrate the virtual drive from one RAID level to another The screen indicates the minimum number of drives you are required to add if so CAUTION Be sure to back up the data on the virtual drive before you change the RAID level Follow these steps to change the RAID level of the virtual drive with the Modify Drive Group Wizard Click the Logical tab in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window Select a drive group in the
335. hown in Figure 230 Page 347 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software Recovery Advanced Software MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 11 2 26 Restoring by Rolling Back toa Snapshot Page 348 Create View fi Lsis Specify the capacity to allocate for writes to the view The capacity for writes comes from available capacity on the snapshot repository Snapshot Repository 1 View name BSN AB s re view Write capacity g 230 661 lt GB 230 661 GB available Figure 230 Create View Screen 5 6 Enter the name of the view in the Enter View name field Enter the capacity in the Available Capacity field to set aside in the snapshot This is a percentage of the Repository virtual drive capacity Click OK This creates the view of the Point in Time snapshot of the volume You can roll back to a previous Point in Time snapshot to recover an entire volume This action is often used where there are malicious files that cannot be traced Reboot the system and then roll back to that snapshot Follow these steps to roll back the volume version to an earlier version 1 Nu fF wWN After you determine there are malicious or corrupt files start the WebBIOS configuration utility by pressing Ctrl H during POST Click the Snapshot Base virtual drive in the right frame Select Adv Opers at the bottom of the screen Select Rollback and then designate a snapshot PiT from the drop down list Click Go Exit W
336. iate Indicates that the changes take place immediately NORA No read ahead RA Read ahead ADRA Adaptive read ahead Selects read policy Cached Di rect Selects cache policy CachedBadBBU NoCachedBadBBU Specifies whether to use write cache when the BBU is bad RW RO Blocked Selects access policy EnDskCache Enables drive cache DisDskCache Disables drive cache Use the command in the following table to display cache and access parameters for the virtual drive s on the selected controller s Table 74 Display Virtual Drive Cache and Access Parameters Convention MegaCli LDGetProp Cache Access Name DskCache Lx L0 1 2 Lall aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Displays the cache and access policies of the virtual drive s Cache Cached Direct Displays cache policy WT Write through WB Write back Selects write policy NORA No read ahead RA Read ahead ADRA Adaptive read ahead Selects read policy Access RW RO Blocked Displays access policy DskCache Displays drive cache policy Page 199 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Virtual Drive Related Options MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 5 14 4 Manage Virtual Drives Use the command in the following table to manage initialization of the virtual drive s Initialization on the selected controller s Table 75 Manage Virtual Drive Initialization Convention Meg
337. ice such as a drive RAID controllers perform RAID functions such as striping and mirroring to provide data protection MegaRAID Storage Manager software runs on LSI SAS controllers The procedure used to copy data from a source drive of a virtual drive to a destination drive that is not a part of the virtual drive The copyback operation is often used to create or restore a specific physical configuration for a drive group for example a specific arrangement of drive group members on the device I O buses The copyback operation can be run automatically or manually Typically a drive fails or is expected to fail and the data is rebuilt on a hot spare The failed drive is replaced with a new drive Then the data is copied from the hot spare to the new drive and the hot spare reverts from a rebuild drive to its original hot spare status The copyback operation runs as a background activity and the virtual drive is still available online to the host A virtual drive property that indicates whether the virtual drive currently supports Write Back mode or Write Through mode m In Write Back mode the controller sends a data transfer completion signal to the host when the controller cache has received all of the data in a transaction m In Write Through mode the controller sends a data transfer completion signal to the host when the drive subsystem has received all of the data in a transaction A virtual drive property indicating whether the defau
338. idential September 2010 Appendix A Events and Messages Event Messages Table 135 Event Messages Continued Number Type Event Text 0x00bd Information SAS SATA mixing not supported in enclosure Drive s disabled Ox00be Information Enclosure SES hotplug on s was detected but is not supported Ox00bf Information Clustering enabled 0x00c0 Information Clustering disabled 0x00c1 Information Drive too small to be used for auto rebuild on s 0x00c2 Information BBU enabled changing WT virtual drives to WB 0x00c3 Warning BBU disabled changing WB virtual drives to WT 0x00c4 Warning Bad block table on drive s is 80 full 0x00c5 Fatal Bad block table on drive s is full unable to log block lx 0x00c6 Information Consistency Check Aborted due to ownership loss on s 0x00c7 Information Background Initialization BGI Aborted Due to Ownership Loss on s 0x00c8 Critical Battery charger problems detected SOH Bad 0x00c9 Warning Single bit ECC error ECAR x ELOG x s warning threshold exceeded 0x00ca Critical Single bit ECC error ECAR x ELOG x s critical threshold exceeded Ox00cb Critical Single bit ECC error ECAR x ELOG x s further reporting disabled 0x00cc Critical Enclosure s Power supply d switched off 0x00cd Information Enclosure s Power supply d switched on 0x00ce Critical Enclosure s Power supply d cable rem
339. ides a graphic example of a RAID 00 drive group Table 11 RAID 00 Overview Uses Provides high data throughput especially for large files Any environment that does not require fault tolerance Strong Points Provides increased data throughput for large files No capacity loss penalty for parity Weak Points Does not provide fault tolerance or high bandwidth All data lost if any drive fails Drives 2 through 256 Page 36 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 2 5 8 RAID 10 RAID 00 ee HHH HSH a a i as a ey Se Chapter 2 Introduction to RAID RAID Levels jee egg ee Me HK Pp ee ee ee ee ee SSP ODDO G i a my fs LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 I N Segment 1 Segment2 i Segment3 Segment 4 Segment5 Segment 6 i Segment7 Segment 8 Segment9 Segment 10 1 Segment 11 Segment 12 Segment 13 Segment 14 Segment 15 Segment 16 Segment 17 Segment 18 Segment 19 Segment 20 Segment 21 Segment 22 Segment23 Segment 24 po poe N A a ee a G ee n Pie E EE E r E N EENE E ey See E EE E RAID 0 n RAID 0 RAID 0 i RAID 0 f RAID 0 Figure 11 RAID 00 Drive Group Example with Two Drives RAID 10 is a combination of RAID 0 and RAID 1 and consists of stripes across mirrored drives RAID 10 breaks up data into smaller blocks and then mirrors the blocks of data to each RAID 1 drive group The first RAID 1 drive in each drive group then dupli
340. iding the connectivity and flexibility of point to point serial data transfers The serial transmission of SCSI commands eliminates clock skew challenges The SAS interface provides improved performance simplified cabling smaller connectors lower pin count and lower power requirements when compared to parallel SCSI SAS controllers leverage a common electrical and physical connection interface that is compatible with Serial ATA technology The SAS and SATA II protocols use a thin 7 wire connector instead of the 68 wire SCSI cable or 26 wire ATA cable The SAS SATA II connector and cable are easier to manipulate allow connections to smaller devices and do not inhibit airflow The point to point SATA II architecture eliminates inherent difficulties created by the legacy ATA master slave architecture while maintaining compatibility with existing ATA firmware The SATA bus is a high speed internal bus that provides a low pin count LPC low voltage level bus for device connections between a host controller and a SATA device The following list describes the SATA II features of the RAID controllers Supports SATA II data transfers of 3Gb s Supports STP data transfers of 3Gb s LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 1 4 1 4 1 Solid State Drive Features Solid State Drive Guard LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 1 Overview Solid State Drive Features Provides
341. ies Page 126 Figure 82 Utility Con Serial Number SubVendorID subDevicelD PortCount 1terface ware Version FW Package Version Firmware Time WebBIOS Version Drive Count Unconfig Good SpinDown MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide er Information SI MegaRAID SAS 9280 8e FRU Drive Security Capable Drive Security Enabled Drive Security Method NU Size Memory Size Mir lax Stripe Size Virtual Drive Count HotSpare Spin Down Spin Down Time First Controller Properties Screen The information on this screen is read only and cannot be modified directly Most of this information is self explanatory The screen lists the number of virtual drives that are already defined on this controller and the number of drives connected to the controller 2 Click Next to view the second Controller Properties screen as shown in Figure 83 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Viewing and Changing Device Properties MegaRAID BIOS Config Utility Controller Properties B Gil i Properties Battery Backup None Set Factory Defaults no Cluster Mode Disabled Rebuild Rate BGI Rate CC Rate Reconstruction Rate Coercion Hode S M A R T Polling Alarm Control Patrol Read Rate Cache Flush Interval Spinup Drive Count Spinup Delay Spin Down Delay Time Figure 83 Second Controller Properties Screen 3 Click Next to v
342. ies the process of creating drive groups and virtual drives The Wizard allows you to easily create new storage configurations and modify the configurations You can create the following types of configurations Simple configuration specifies a limited number of settings and has the system select drives for you This option is the easiest way to create a virtual drive Advanced configuration lets you choose additional settings and customize virtual drive creation This option provides greater flexibility when creating virtual drives for your specific requirements In addition the Modify Drive Group Wizard enables you to increase the capacity of a virtual drive and to change the RAID level of a drive group NOTE The Modify Drive Group Wizard was previously known as the Reconstruction Wizard MegaRAID Storage Manager software displays the status of controllers virtual drives and drives on the workstation or server that you are monitoring System errors and events are recorded in an event log file and are displayed on the screen Special device icons appear on the screen to notify you of drive failures and other events that require immediate attention You can use MegaRAID Storage Manager software to perform system maintenance tasks such as running patrol read operations updating firmware and running consistency checks on drive groups that support redundancy The hardware requirements for MegaRAID Storage Manager software are as foll
343. iew the third Controller Properties screen as shown in Figure 84 Stop CC On Error Maintain PD Fail History Controller BIOS Manage JBOD Schedule CC StopOnError Disk Activity Figure 84 Third Controller Properties Screen LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 127 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Viewing and Changing Device Properties MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Table 21 describes the entries options listed on the second and third Controller Properties screen LSI recommends that you leave these options at their default settings to achieve the best performance unless you have a specific reason for changing them Table 21 Controller Properties Menu Options Option Battery Backup Description This entry indicates whether the selected controller has a BBU If present you can click Present to view information about the BBU For more information see Section 4 8 4 Viewing and Changing Battery Backup Unit Information Set Factory Defaults Use this option to load the default MegaRAID WebBIOS CU settings The default is No Cluster Mode Use this option to enable or disable Cluster mode The default is Disabled A cluster is a grouping of independent servers that can access the same data storage and provide services to a common set of clients When Cluster mode is disabled the system operates in Standard mode Rebuild Rate BGI Rate CC Rate Use this opti
344. ify the background initialization status No Leave background initialization enabled This means that a new configuration can be initialized in the background while you use WebBIOS to do other configuration tasks This is the default Yes Select Yes if you do not want to allow background initializations for configurations on this controller Select Size Specify the size of the virtual drive in megabytes Normally this would be the full size for RAID 0 shown in the Configuration panel on the right You can specify a smaller size if you want to create other virtual drives on the same drive group 8 Click Accept to accept the changes to the virtual drive definition 9 If you need to undo the changes click Reclaim 10 Click Next after you finish defining the virtual drives The Configuration Preview screen appears as shown in Figure 34 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 71 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Creating a Storage Configuration MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 4 5 3 2 Using Manual Configuration RAID 1 Page 72 BIOS Config Utility Ce mfig Wiz i sa P Slot 9 SAS Oey 136 218 GB Un is a Figure 34 RAID 0 Configuration Preview 11 Check the information in the configuration preview 12 If the virtual drive configuration is acceptable click Accept to save the configuration Otherwise click Back to return to the previous screens and change the configuration 13 If yo
345. igh request rates and high data transfer It provides high data throughput data redundancy and very good performance Spanning increases the capacity of the virtual drive and improves performance by doubling the number of spindles The system performance improves as the number of spans increases The maximum number of spans is eight As the storage space in the spans is filled the system stripes data over fewer and fewer spans and RAID performance degrades to that of a RAID 1 or RAID 5 drive group 60 RAID 60 works best when used with data that requires high reliability high request rates and high data transfer It provides high data throughput data redundancy and very good performance Spanning increases the capacity of the virtual drive and improves performance by doubling the number of spindles The system performance improves as the number of spans increases The maximum number of spans is eight As the storage space in the spans is filled the system stripes data over fewer and fewer spans and RAID performance degrades to that of a RAID 1 or RAID 6 drive group RAID 60 is not well suited to tasks requiring a lot of writes A RAID 60 virtual drive has to generate two sets of parity data for each write operation which results in a significant decrease in performance during writes Drive performance is reduced during a drive rebuild Environments with few processes do not perform as well because the RAID overhead is not offset by the performa
346. igure 55 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 99 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Creating a Storage Configuration MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 4 5 3 8 Using Manual Configuration RAID 60 Page 100 P regaRAID BIOS Config Utility Config Hizard Preview Slot 4 SAS HDD 136 218 GB On Lge Slot 5 SAS HDD 136 218 GB On LBP Slot 6 SAS HDD 418 656 GB U Figure 55 RAID 50 Configuration Preview 19 Check the information in the configuration preview 20 If the virtual drive configuration is acceptable click Accept to save the configuration Otherwise click Back to return to the previous screens and change the configuration 21 If you accept the configuration click Yes at the prompt to save the configuration The WebBIOS main menu appears RAID 60 provides the features of both RAID 0 and RAID 6 and includes both parity and drive striping across multiple drive groups RAID 6 supports two independent parity blocks per stripe A RAID 60 virtual drive can survive the loss of two drives in each of the RAID 6 sets without losing data RAID 60 is best implemented on two RAID 6 drive groups with data striped across both drive groups Use RAID 60 for data that requires a very high level of protection from loss RAID 60 can support up to eight spans and tolerate up to 16 drive failures though less than total drive capacity is available Two drive failures can be tolerated in each RAID 6
347. igured drives create new drive group and press Next The Create Virtual Drive screen appears as shown in Figure 144 If there are different types of drives attached to the controller such as HDD SDD SAS and SATA there is an option to allow drive type mixing LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 265 Chapter 8 Configuration Creating a New Storage Configuration MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Create irtual Drive Drive group and irtual drive settings fy Lsis Use the suggested virtual drive settings or change them if needed Br The application has detected HDD SSD 545 SATA non FDE mixed drives in the controller Use the check box for drive type mixing if you need For best result drive type mixing are not recommended Pick a RAID level to specify the amount of Fault tolerance and performance for the virtual drive s RAID level RAID oF Suitable For high performance with zero data redundancy Choose this option only For non critical data F Assign a hot spare a Hot spare will be assigned depending upon the availability of eligible hot spare candidate drives A hot snare drive will takeover for a drive if a Failure happens ensuring your data will remain intact T Use drive security N Drive security method will be assigned depending upon the controller settings The drive security will s make the virtual drive secure by applying encryption logic to the data in the drive Virtual driv
348. ileNam aN Description Saves the configuration for the selected controller s to the given filename Page 196 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Configuration Related Options 5 13 6 Restore the Configuration Data Use the command in the following table to read the configuration from the file and from File load it on the selected controller s You can restore the read write properties and RAID configuration using hot spares Table 68 Restore Configuration Data from File Convention MegaCli CfgRestor f FileNam aN Description Reads the configuration from the file and loads it on the controller MegaCLl can store or restore all read and write controller properties all read and write properties for virtual drives and the RAID configuration including hot spares Note the following MegaCLlI does not validate the setup when restoring the RAID configuration The CfgSave option stores the configuration data and controller properties in the file Configuration data has only the device ID and sequence number information of the drives used in the configuration The Cf gRestore option will fail if the same device IDs of the drives are not present 5 13 7 Manage Foreign Configuration Use the command in the following table to manage configurations from other Information controllers called foreign configurations for the selected controller
349. import a locked configuration You can import unsecured or unlocked configurations when security is disabled A foreign configuration is a RAID configuration that already exists on a replacement set of drives that you install in a computer system WebBIOS Configuration Utility and MSM allows you to import the existing configuration to the RAID controller or clear the configuration so you can create a new one See Section 4 8 Viewing and Changing Device Properties for the procedure used to import a foreign configuration in WebBIOS or Section 11 5 12 Importing or Clearing a Foreign Configuration for the procedure in MegaRAID Storage Manager To import a foreign configuration you must first enable security to allow importation of locked foreign drives If the drives are locked and the controller security is disabled you cannot import the foreign drives Only unlocked drives can be imported when security is disabled After you enable the security you can import the locked drives To import the locked drives you must provide the security key used to secure them Verify whether any drives are left to import as the locked drives can use different security keys If there are any drives left repeat the import process for the remaining drives After all of the drives are imported there is no configuration to import Instant Secure Erase is a feature used to erase data from encrypted drives After the initial investment for an encrypted disk there is
350. in which you can use the SAS RAID controllers Low end internal SATA II configurations In this configuration use the RAID controller as a high end SATA II compatible controller that connects up to eight disks either directly or through a port expander This configuration is mostly for low end or entry servers Enclosure management is provided through out of band I C bus Side bands of both types of internal SAS connectors support the SFF 8485 SGPIO interface Midrange internal SAS configurations This configuration is like the internal SATA Il configurations but with high end disks This configuration is more suitable for low range to midrange servers High end external SAS SATA II configurations This configuration is for both internal connectivity and external connectivity using SATA II drives SAS drives or both External enclosure management is supported through in band SCSI enclosed storage The configuration must support STP and SMP LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 1 Overview Configuration Scenarios Figure 1 shows a direct connect configuration The Inter IC I2C interface communicates with peripherals The external memory bus provides a 32 bit memory bus parity checking and chip select signals for pipelined synchronous burst static random access memory PSBRAM nonvolatile static random access memory NVSRAM a
351. ings select Disable drive security and click Accept The Confirm Disable Drive Security screen appears as shown in Figure 81 Page 124 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Viewing and Changing Device Properties wegaRAID BIOS Config Utility Confirm Page Figure 81 Confirm Disable Drive Security Settings 3 On the Confirm Disable Security Settings screen click Yes to confirm that you want to disable the drive security settings WebBIOS returns you to the MSM main menu 4 8 Viewing and Changing This section explains how you can use the WebBIOS CU to view and change the Device Properties properties for controllers virtual drives drives and BBUs 4 8 1 Viewing Controller Properties WebBlOS displays information for one LSI SAS controller at a time If your computer system has multiple LSI SAS controllers you can view information for a different controller by clicking Controller Selection on the main screen When the Controller Selection screen appears select the controller you want from the list Follow these steps to view the properties of the currently selected controller 1 Click Controller Properties on the main WebBIOS screen There are three Controller Properties screens Figure 82 shows the first screen LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 125 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Viewing and Changing Device Propert
352. installed in complete mode The ESXi server should now appear in the list of the found hosts You can now log in with the root account name and password of the ESXi Host Host Overview Figure 131 lists the host ESXi server and other servers LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 237 Chapter 6 MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation MegaRAID Storage Man MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide ager Support and Installation on VMWare 6 5 4 Limitations 6 5 4 1 VMWare ESX 3i Management through CIM and CMPI Page 238 2 MepallAll Storage Manager 7 90 Host View Som Det ate The pago spiss ad the carvers that mere Gecowsed Choose a server and click on Logn to start managing That career You wd be gronapted for entecng host pedertais whale bagging r tee Configure Post to configure the hosts Ghat you wart to wew IP Addresai t 5 24 228 108 Cecover Met Semcte servers ton Operating Syon BANDA 10 TAREA WFA widows Serve 1006 Pep ee 100 coe Lrs Pepe Lele 117 DALLI se WI CLARISINGD wrdon Serve D008 WIN ETE Qt wrd Sese JU to i wrd 2000 dep Dasto Sro bea Predni edt wrs OD kkoo icy wrn 2 Pep eS Pe UB T p os Dep 1 ied an Ii Sewes lang Ducovw camgimec Figure 131 Host ESXi Server Name You can click Configure Host if you want to select the display preferences for the server You can choose to display only the local server systems from a list or display all of the systems in the network of t
353. ion Utility Creating a Storage Configuration MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Page 84 NOTE New RAID 6 virtual drives require at least seven drives for a background initialization to start Select Size Specify the size of the virtual drive in megabytes Normally this would be the full size for RAID 6 shown in the Configuration panel on the right You can specify a smaller size if you want to create other virtual drives on the same drive group 2 Click Accept to accept the changes to the virtual drive definition If you need to undo the changes click Reclaim 4 Click Next after you finish defining the virtual drives The Configuration Preview screen appears as shown in Figure 43 i Slot 4 SAS HDD 136 218 GB On Slot 5 SAS HDD 196 218 GB Un fi Slot 6 SAS HDD 418 656 GB U Figure 43 RAID 6 Configuration Preview 5 6 Check the information in the configuration preview If the virtual drive configuration is acceptable click Accept to save the configuration Otherwise click Back to return to the previous screens and change the configuration If you accept the configuration click Yes at the prompt to save the configuration The WebBIOS main menu appears LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 4 5 3 5 Using Manual Configuration RAID 00 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Creating a Sto
354. irtual Drive Related Options 5 13 8 Delete Specified Virtual Drive s 5 13 9 Display the Free Space 5 14 Virtual Drive Related Options 5 14 1 Display Virtual Drive Information Page 198 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Use the command in the following table to delete one multiple or all virtual drives on the selected controller s Table 70 Delete Specified Virtual Drives Convention Description MegaCli CfgLDDel Lx L0 1 2 Lall aN a0 1 2 aALL Deletes the specified virtual drive s on the selected controller s You can delete one virtual drive multiple virtual drives or all of the selected virtual drives on selected controller s Use the command in the following table to display the free space that is available to use for configuration on the selected controller s Table 71 Display Free Space Convention MegaCli CfgFreeSpaceInfo aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Displays all of the free space available for configuration on the selected controller s The information displayed includes the number of drive groups the number of spans in each drive group the number of free space slots in each drive group the start block and the size in both blocks and megabytes of each free space slot You can use the commands in this section to select settings for the virtual drives and perform actions on them Use the command in the following table to display virtual drive informati
355. irtual drive that has redundant data on drives in the drive group that can be used to rebuild a failed drive The redundant data can be parity data striped across multiple drives in a drive group or it can be a complete mirrored copy of the data stored ona second drive A redundant configuration protects the data in case a drive fails in the configuration When you use the Replace Member procedure after data is copied from a hot spare to a new drive the hot spare reverts from a rebuild drive to its original hot spare status A drive property that indicates the revision level of the drive s firmware Acronym for Serial Attached SCSI SAS is a serial point to point enterprise level device interface that leverages the Small Computer System Interface SCSI protocol set The SAS interface provides improved performance simplified cabling smaller connectors lower pin count and lower power requirements when compared to parallel SCSI Acronym for Serial Advanced Technology Attachment A physical storage interface standard SATA is a serial link that provides point to point connections between devices The thinner serial cables allow for better airflow within the system and permit smaller chassis designs A drive property indicating the type of the device such as drive A controller property indicating the manufacturer assigned serial number The portion of a stripe that resides on a single drive in the drive group A virtual drive property in
356. iseni eden as saewoovawetaea A canbe EA EEEE AE by sae eda e EN Paaee EAE 205 5 15 6 Manage a Drive Initialization 2 0 0 2 0 cece cece ne ne eee nen e nnn e bennett een n ene e tenn enone 206 5 15 7 Rebuild a Drive sssi aranera rins iE EKE degen EATE SGC Nae Sad tone aene ERENER 206 5 15 8 Locate the Drive s and Activate LED 1 0 0 ccc cece eee e cece cence ene e ee eeneeeeeueeeetenseeeeeunes 207 5 15 9 Mark the Configured Drive as Missing 0 0c cece cnet e nen e eee ented bebe e eee e nent nee 207 5 15 10 Display the Drives in Missing Status 0 cece cece cece nen e een eden ete n eee t bebe e tent e een enee 207 5 15 11 Replace the Configured Drives and Start an Automatic Rebuild 0 cece ccc ence cnet eee eee e ee enenes 208 5 15 12 Prepare the Unconfigured Drive for Removal 06 cece cee eect eeee nee enn ene teen bebe e teen een enee 208 5 15 13 Display Total Number of Drives 0 cece cee cece eee ee nen teen e ened eee tenet TENA eee e een i 208 5 15 14 Display List of Physical Devices 0 cece cece cece ene eee nnn eee debe teen ete e dns n eee ent e een enee 208 5 15 15 Download Firmware to the Physical Devices cece eee c eee tence ened eee teen ee eee eben t en eeeenenee 209 5 15 16 Configure All Free Drives into a RAID 0 1 5 or 6 Configuration for a Specific Controller 0e cece ee eee 210 5 15 17 Set the Mapping Mode of the Drives to the Selected Controlle
357. isplays the latest number of events if any exist The event data will be writtent to the file in reverse order Clear Clears the event log for the selected controller s GetCCIncon Displays the events relating to inconsistent data found during a consistency check Page 192 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 5 12 2 Set BBU Terminal Logging Table 62 Set BBU Terminal Logging Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Configuration Related Options NOTE AdpEventLogInfo does not support the file option in PCLI Use the command in the following table to set the BBU terminal logging for the selected controller s Convention MegaCli FwTtermLog Bbuoff BbuoffTemp Bbuon BbuGet aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Sets BBU terminal logging options The following are the settings you can select on a single controller multiple controllers or all controllers Bbuof f While storing the TTY log in DRAM BBU is not used for buffering In the case of power loss this log will be lost BbuoffTemp TTY BBU buffering will be set to OFF only for this boot Bbuon While storing the TTY log in DRAM BBU is used for buffering Log will be preserved even in the case of power loss BbuGet This gives the current BBU state i e if BBU is ON or OFF for TTY history 5 13 Configuration Related Options 5 13 1 Create a RAID Drive Group from All U
358. it ECC errors currently in the bucket WBSupport Enables support for the WriteBack option as the Write Policy Dsb1SpinDownUnConfigDrvs Disable spindown of unconfigured drives See Table 41 for explanations of the other options NOTE The tty log can be saved at the controller level 5 8 7 Set Factory Defaults Use the command in the following table to set the factory defaults on the selected controller s Table 43 Set Factory Defaults Convention MegaCli AdpFacDefSet aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Sets the factory defaults on the selected controller s 5 8 8 Set SAS Address Use the command in the following table to set the SAS address on the selected controller s Table 44 Set SAS Address on Controller Convention MegaCli AdpSetSASA str 0 64 aN Description Sets the controllers SAS address This string must be a 64 digit hexadecimal number 5 8 9 Set Time and Date on Use the command in the following table to set the time and date on the selected Controller controller s Table 45 Set Time and Date on Controller Convention MegaCli AdpSetTime yyyymmdd HH mm ss aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Sets the time and date on the controller This command uses a 24 hour format For example 7 p m displays as 19 00 00 The order of date and time is reversible LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 185 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool 5 8 10 Display Time and Date on Co
359. ive Group Wizard options 1 Click the Logical tab in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager main menu screen 2 Select a drive group in the left panel of the window 3 Select Go To gt Drive Group gt Modify Drive Group on the menu bar or right click the virtual drive icon to access the Modify Drive Group Wizard A warning appears about rebooting virtual drives containing boot partitions that are undergoing RAID level migration or capacity expansion operations Back up your data before you proceed MegaRAID Storage Manager 6 90 0100 xi Please note that rebooting virtual drives containing boot partitions that are A undergoing RAID level migration or capacity expansion operations may lead to undesirable boot process behavior It is advised that these operations complete in their entirety before the system is restarted It is advisable to backup your data before you proceed Figure 168 Reboot Warning Message 4 Select Confirm and click Yes Page 285 Chapter 8 Configuration Changing a Virtual Drive Configuration 8 7 2 Adding a Drive or Drives toa Configuration Page 286 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide A warning to back up your data appears as shown in Figure 169 MegaRAID Storage Manager 6 90 0100 xi A It is advisable to backup data before this operation Are you ready Figure 169 Warning to Back up Data 5 Select Confirm and click Yes The Modify Drive Group Wizard screen appears as sh
360. ives that have existing configurations including foreign configurations will not appear To use drives with existing configurations you must first clear the configuration on those drives LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Managing Configurations If WebBIOS CU detects a foreign configuration the Foreign Configuration screen appears as shown in Figure 109 Figure 109 Foreign Configuration Import Screen Follow these steps to import or clear a foreign configuration 1 Click the drop down list to show the configurations The GUID Global Unique Identifier entries on the drop down list are OEM names and will vary from one installation to another Select a configuration or All Configurations Perform one of the following steps a Click Preview to preview the foreign configuration s The Foreign Configuration Preview screen appears as shown in Figure 110 b Click Clear to clear the foreign configuration s and reuse the drives for another virtual drive If you click Cancel it cancels the importation or preview of the foreign configuration LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 157 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Managing Configurations MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 4 12 3 1 Foreign Configurations in Cable Pull and Drive Removal Scenarios Page 158 MegaRAID BIOS Config Utility Foreign Configuration
361. ize values are 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 or 1024 Mega Bytes Hsp E5 S5 Creates hot spares when you create the configuration The new hot spares will be dedicated to the virtual disk used in creating the configuration This option does not allow you to create global hot spares To create global hot spares you must use the PdHsp command with proper subcommands User can also use this option to create a configuration on the free space available in the virtual disk AfterLdX This command is optional By default the application uses the first free slot available in the virtual disk This option is valid only if the virtual disk is already used for configuration FDE CtrlBased If controller support security feature this option enables FDE Ctrl based encryption on virtual disk Default Automatic None MaximumWithCaching MaximumWithoutCaching If the controller supports power savings on virtual disk these options specify the possible levels of power savings that can be applied on a virtual disk LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 223 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Miscellaneous Options MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 5 22 7 Displays the cache and access Use the command in the following table to display the cache and access policies of the policies virtual disks Table 129 Displays the Cache and Access policies of the Virtual Disks Convention MegaSCU LDGetProp Cache Access
362. k a drive icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window The drive properties appear in the right panel as shown in Figure 188 MegaRAID Storage Manager 6 90 0100 BEES Manage GoTo Log Tools Help e son O B f LSI3 Welcome Administrator Loa OFF _ Dashboard Physical Logical Gg WIN J6A55JFT3X5 LSI MegaRAID SAS 9260 8 Bus 2 Dev 0 I Backplane 252 E P Bobcat 16 Connector Port 0 3 Slot 0 SAS 136 985 GB Online k Properties General Power Status On Usable Capacity 136 469 GB Revision Level 0105 Raw Capacity 136 985 GB Media Error Count o Slot 3 SAS 136 Online Slot 4 SAS 136 985 GB Online Slot 8 SSD SATA 29 802 GB Online Slot 9 SAS 136 985 GB Online Slot 10 SAS 136 985 GB Online Slot 11 SAS 136 733 GB Online Slot 12 SAS 136 733 GB Online Slot 13 SAS 136 985 GB Online Slot 14 SAS 136 985 GB Online Wp F Slot 15 SAS 136 985 GB Global Hat Spe Slot 16 SSD SATA 29 802 GB Online Slot 18 55D SATA 29 802 GB Online Slot 19 SSD SATA 29 802 GB Unconfigure Slot 20 SSD SATA 29 802 GB Unconfigure Slot 21 55D SATA 29 802 GB Unconfigure Certified No Pred Fail Count 0 Product ID MBB2147RC Enclosure Properties vendor ID FUJITSU Enclosure ID 16 Device ID 10 Enclosure Model Bobcat Status Online Enclosure Location Internal Drive Speed 3 0 Gbps Connector P
363. k to return to the previous screens and change the configuration 24 If you accept the configuration click Yes at the prompt to save the configuration The WebBIOS main menu appears RAID 10 a combination of RAID 1 and RAID 0 has mirrored drives It breaks up data into smaller blocks then stripes the blocks of data to each RAID 1 drive group Each RAID 1 drive group then duplicates its data to its other drive The size of each block is determined by the stripe size parameter which is 64 KB RAID 10 can sustain one drive failure in each drive group while maintaining data integrity RAID 10 provides both high data transfer rates and complete data redundancy It works best for data storage that must have 100 percent redundancy of RAID 1 mirrored drive groups and that also needs the enhanced I O performance of RAID 0 striped drive groups it works well for medium sized databases or any environment that requires a higher degree of fault tolerance and moderate to medium capacity When you select Manual Configuration and click Next the Drive Group Definition screen appears You use the Drive Group Definition screen to select drives to create drive groups LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Creating a Storage Configuration Hold lt Ctrl gt while selecting two ready drives in the Drives panel on the left 2 Click Add To Array to move the drives t
364. l MSM If MSM is already installed restart MSM framework Page 248 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 7 MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus Starting MegaRAID Storage Manager Software Chapter 7 MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus This chapter explains how to start MegaRAID Storage Manager software and describes the MegaRAID Storage Manager window and menus 7 1 Starting MegaRAID Follow these steps to start MegaRAID Storage Manager software and view the main Storage Manager Software window 1 Start the program using the method required for your operating system environment To start MegaRAID Storage Manager software on a Microsoft Windows system select Start gt Programs gt MegaRAID Storage Manager gt StartupUI or double click the MegaRAID Storage Manager shortcut on the desktop NOTE Ifa warning appears stating that Windows Firewall has blocked some features of the program click Unblock to allow MegaRAID Storage Manager software to start The Windows Firewall sometimes blocks the operation of programs that use Java To start MegaRAID Storage Manager software on a Red Hat Linux system select Applications gt System Tools gt MegaRAID Storage Manager StartupUI To start MegaRAID Storage Manager software on a SUSE Linux SLES system select Start gt System gt More Programs gt MegaRAID Storage Manager When the program starts the Select
365. l for a specific event perform the following steps NOTE See Table 133 for details about the severity levels 1 On the Alerts Notification Configuration screen click the Alerts Setting tab The Alerts Setting portion of the screen appears 2 Click Change Individual Events The Change Individual Events dialog box appears as shown in Figure 182 The dialog box shows the events by their ID number description and severity level Page 299 Chapter 9 Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices Configuring Alert Notifications MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 3 Click an event in the list to select it The current alert delivery methods appear for the selected event 4 Click the Severity cell for the event The Event Severity drop down menu appears for that event as shown in Figure 183 Change Individual Events Ea LISiix u Events Description SSC YD capacity changed YD 376 Controller reset on board expander 375 Auto Snspshot Failed for 374 Snspshot deleted due to resource constraints on 373 VD is no longer being cached in S5C VD WE 372 VD is being cached in SSC VD 371 WDis used for SSC VD 370 WDis available VD Information 369 VD is not available YD warning Severity Figure 183 Change Individual Events Severity Level Menu 5 Select a different severity level for the event from the menu 6 Press ESC to return to the Alerts Notification
366. lay Sets the execution delay between executions for the given adapter s This is optional Values The value is the length of delay in hours A value of 0 means continuous execution 5 14 7 Manage a Background Use the command in the following table to enable disable or suspend background Initialization initialization BGI as well as display initialization progress on the selected controller s Table 78 Manage Background Initialization Convention MegaCli LDBI Enbl Dsbl GetSetting ShowProg ProgDsply Lx L0O 1 2 Lall aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Manages background initialization options The following are the background initialization settings you can select on a single controller multiple controllers or all controllers Enbl Dsb1 Enables or disables the background initialization on the selected controller s ProgDsply Displays an ongoing background initialization in a loop This function completes only when all background initialization processes complete or you press a key to exit ShowP rog Displays the current progress value GetSetting Displays current background initialization setting Enabled or Disabled LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 201 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Virtual Drive Related Options 5 14 8 Performa Virtual Drive Reconstruction 5 14 9 Display Information about Virtual Drives and Drives 5 14 10 Display the Number of
367. ler firmware automatically switches to Writethrough mode if it detects a bad or missing BBU CAUTION LSI allows Writeback mode to be used with or without a battery LSI recommends that you use either a battery to protect the controller cache or a UPS to protect the entire system If you do not use a battery or a UPS and there is a power failure you risk losing the data in the controller cache 10 Policy The IO Policy applies to reads on a specific virtual drive It does not affect the read ahead cache Direct In Direct I O mode reads are not buffered in cache memory Data is transferred to the cache and the host concurrently If the same data block is read again it comes from cache memory This is the default Cached In Cached I O mode all reads are buffered in cache memory Drive Policy Specify the drive cache policy Enable Enable the drive cache Disable Disable the drive cache NoChange Leave the current drive cache policy as is This drive policy is the default Disable BGI Specify the background initialization status No Leave background initialization enabled This means that a new configuration can be initialized in the background while you use WebBIOS to do other configuration tasks This is the default Yes Select Yes if you do not want to allow background initializations for configurations on this controller LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 83 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configurat
368. licy applies to reads on a specific virtual drive It does not affect the read ahead cache Direct In Direct I O mode reads are not buffered in cache memory Data is transferred to the cache and the host concurrently If the same data block is read again it comes from cache memory This is the default Cached In Cached I O mode all reads are buffered in cache memory Drive Policy Specify the drive cache policy Enable Enable the drive cache Disable Disable the drive cache This drive policy is the default NoChange Leave the current drive cache policy as is This is the default Disable BGI Specify the background initialization status No Leave background initialization enabled This means that a new configuration can be initialized in the background while you use WebBIOS to do other configuration tasks This is the default Yes Select Yes if you do not want to allow background initializations for configurations on this controller Select Size Specify the size of the virtual drive in megabytes Normally this would be the full size for RAID 50 shown in the Configuration Panel on the right You can specify a smaller size if you want to create other virtual drives on the same drive group 17 Click Accept to accept the changes to the virtual drive definition or click Reclaim to undo the changess 18 Click Next after you finish defining the virtual drives The Configuration Preview screen appears as shown in F
369. lity Virtual Drive Properties Virtual Drive Snapshot OnReboot Disa Auto Delete Of Oldest Snapshot Snapshot State Operational Associated Snapshot Repository Snapshot Repository 2 Capacity Left Snapshot Nane A Currently no snapshots are created on this VD Figure 95 Properties Snapshot This creates a snapshot that appears as a link in the Snapshot Timeline 5 Click on the link of a specific snapshot The snapshot details appear 4 Enter a snapshot name in the Enter snapshot name textbox and click Create Click Advanced The Snapshot Settings screen appears as shown in Figure 101 7 Click Create View The Create View screen appears as shown in Figure 96 Page 143 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Using MegaRAID Recovery MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide MegaRAID BIOS Config Utility Create View usr createdon 1 1 vide the ther ot data x 663 266 GB available Ea gA Hrite Capacity Figure 96 Create View Screen 8 Enter a view name in the Enter View Name field specify the capacity of the view in the Write Capacity field and click OK This creates the view After you create a view you can view details about both the snapshot and the view on a single page as shown in Figure 97 Page 144 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Using MegaRAID Recovery Snapshot Nane Date Of Cre
370. ll unable to log block lx on s at lx 0x010f Fatal Uncorrectable medium error logged for s at lx on s at lx 0x0110 Information VD medium error corrected on s at lx 0x0111 Warning Bad block table on PD s is 100 full 0x0112 Warning VD bad block table on PD s is 100 full 0x0113 Fatal Controller needs replacement IOP is faulty 0x0114 Information CopyBack started on PD s from PD s 0x0115 Information CopyBack aborted on PD s and src is PD s 0x0116 Information CopyBack complete on PD s from PD s 0x0117 Progress CopyBack progress on PD s is s 0x0118 Information CopyBack resumed on PD s from s 0x0119 Information CopyBack automatically started on PD s from s Ox011a Critical CopyBack failed on PD s due to source s error 0x011b Warning Early Power off warning was unsuccessful 0x011c Information BBU FRU is s 0x011d Information s FRU is s 0x011e Information Controller hardware revision ID s 0x011f Warning Foreign import shall result in a backward incompatible upgrade of configuration metadata 0x0120 Information Redundant path restored for PD s 0x0121 Warning Redundant path broken for PD s 0x0122 Information Redundant enclosure EMM s inserted for EMM s Page 381 Appendix A Events and Messages Page 382 Event Messages MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Table 135 Event Messages Continued
371. lling and Configur ing an SNMP Agent RPM makes the necessary modification needed in the snmpd conf file to run the agent NOTE Before installation check whether there is any pass command that starts with 1 3 6 1 4 1 3582 OID in snmpd conf If so delete all of the old pass commands that start with 1 3 6 1 4 1 3582 OID This situation could occur if an earlier version of LSI SNMP Agent was installed in the system The snmpd conf file structure should be the same as 1si_mrdsnmpd conf For reference a sample conf file 1si_mrdsnmpd conf is in the etc Isi_mrdsnmp directory To run an SNMP query from a remote machine add the IP address of that machine in the snmpd conf file as in this example com2sec snmpclient 172 28 lt 136 112 public Here the IP address of the remote machine is 172 28 136 112 To receive an SNMP trap to a particular machine add the IP address of that machine in the com2sec section of the snmpd conf file For example to get a trap in 10 0 0 144 add the following to snmpd conf sec name source community com2sec snmpclient 10 0 0 144 public Torun stop the snmpd daemon enter the following command etc init d snmpd start stop To start stop the SAS SNMP Agent daemon before issuing a SNMP query enter the following command etc init d lsi_mrdsnmpd start stop You can check the status of the SAS SNMP Agent daemon by checked by issuing the following command etc init d lsi_
372. lls the complete feature Before installing MSM on RHEL6 0 x64 system install the following rpms Without these files RPM s MSM may not be install properly or may not work as expected 1 libstdc so 6 gt libstdc xx yy i686 2 libXext so 6 gt libXext 1 1 2 e16 i686 rpm 3 libXtst so 6 gt libXtst 1 0 99 2 3 el6 i686 rpm These rpms are available as a part of RHEL6 OS DVD These RPM s may need additional dependent RPM s as well and also all the dependent RPM s must be installed on the target system The following messages can appear while you are installing MegaRAID Storage Manager software on a Linux system More than one copy of MegaRAID Storage Manager software has been installed This message indicates that the user has installed more than one copy of MegaRAID Storage Manager software This can be done by using the rpm force command to install the rpm file directly which is not recommended instead of using the install shfile In such cases the user must uninstall all of the rpmfiles manually before installing MegaRAID Storage Manager software with the procedure listed previously m The version is already installed This message indicates that the version of MegaRAID Storage Manager software you are trying to install is already installed on the system The installed version is newer This message indicates that a version of MegaRAID Storage Manager software is already installed on the system and it is a newer
373. lt write policy is Write Through or Write Back In Write Back mode the controller sends a data transfer completion signal to the host when the controller cache has received all of the data in a transaction In Write Through mode the controller sends a data transfer completion signal to the host when the drive subsystem has received all of the data in a transaction A controller or drive property indicating the manufacturer assigned device ID A controller property indicating the number of ports on the controller A virtual drive property indicating whether the virtual drive cache is enabled disabled or unchanged from its previous setting A group of drives attached to a RAID controller on which one or more virtual drives can be created All virtual drives in the drive group use all of the drives in the drive group A drive property indicating the status of the drive A drive can be in one of the following states m Unconfigured Good A drive accessible to the RAID controller but not configured as a part of a virtual drive or as a hot spare Hot Spare A drive that is configured as a hot spare m Online A drive that can be accessed by the RAID controller and will be part of the virtual drive m Rebuild A drive to which data is being written to restore full redundancy for a virtual drive m Failed A drive that was originally configured as Online or Hot Spare but on which the firmware detects an unrecoverable error LSI Corporatio
374. ly to the firmware APP ROM version This command also supports the Mode 0 flash functionality For Mode 0 flash the controller number is not valid There are two possible methods Select which controller to flash after the controllers are detected e Flash the firmware on all present controllers XML output data is generated by this option 5 17 2 Flash the Firmware in Mode 0 Use the command in the following table to flash the firmware in Mode 0 with the ROM with the ROM File file specified at the command line for the selected controller s This option is for DOS Page 212 only Table 107 Flash Firmware in Mode 0 with ROM File Convention MegaCli AdpMOFlash f filename Description Flashes the firmware in Mode 0 with the ROM file listed on the command line This option supports the Mode 0 flash functionality For Mode 0 flash the controller number is not valid The method to handle this is to flash the firmware on all present controllers which are compatible with the image LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 5 18 SAS Topology 5 19 Diagnostic Related Options 5 19 1 Start Controller Diagnostics 5 19 2 Start Battery Test 5 20 Recovery Snapshot Related Options LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool SAS Topology The commands in this section are used to display SAS topology Use the command in
375. m with drives prior to host access This enhances overall system performance because error recovery during a normal I O operation might not be necessary The user defined rate at which patrol read operations are run on a computer system A drive property indicating the vendor assigned model number of the drive A controller property indicating the manufacturing name of the controller A group of multiple independent drives that provide high performance by increasing the number of drives used for saving and accessing data A RAID drive group improves input output I O performance and data availability The group of drives appears to the host system as a single storage unit or as multiple virtual drives Data throughput improves because several drives can be accessed simultaneously RAID configurations also improve data storage availability and fault tolerance Redundant RAID levels RAID levels 1 5 6 10 50 and 60 provide data protection Uses data striping on two or more drives to provide high data throughput especially for large files in an environment that requires no data redundancy Uses data striping on two or more drives in a spanned drive group to provide high data throughput especially for large files in an environment that requires no data redundancy Uses data mirroring on pairs of drives so that data written to one drive is simultaneously written to the other drive RAID 1 works well for small databases or other small applic
376. me and password to login the MSM server User Name Password Login Mode Ful Access Figure 133 Server Login Window 3 Enter your user name and password The question mark icon opens a dialog box that explains what you need for full access to the server and for view only access to the server NOTE When connected to VMWare system the Server Login screen shows only one label for access Full Access Multiple users can have full access to the VMWare server 4 Select an access mode from the drop down menu for Login Mode and click Login Select Full Access if you need to both view and change the current configuration Select View Only if you need to only view and monitor the current configuration NOTE If the computer is networked this is the login to the computer itself not the network login 5 Enter the root administrator user name and password to use Full Access mode NOTE In Linux users belonging to the root group can log in You do not have to be the user root If your user name and password are correct for the Login mode you have chosen the MegaRAID Storage Manager main menu appears LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 251 Chapter 7 MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus MegaRAID Storage Manager MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Main Menu 7 2 MegaRAID Storage Manager Main Menu 7 2 1 Dashboard PhysicalView Logic al View 7 2 1 1 Page 252
377. me of creation 2010 05 26 11 38 AM Status Optimal Target ID 65 gs dsk name 1 Figure 223 Manage Snapshots You can edit the snapshot schedule using the Edit Schedule button pause the snapshot schedule using the Pause button and delete the snapshot schedule using the Delete button The Snapshot field displays the snapshot details m The Name column displays the name of the snapshot The Status column displays the status of the snapshot m The Capacity Used column displays the capacity consumed by the snapshot You can create the snapshot using the Create Snapshot button and delete the snapshot using the Delete Snapshot button In the View Details field you can create a view using the Create View button and edit the settings for automatic snapshots using the Advanced button Page 341 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software 11 2 19 Editing Schedule Recovery Advanced Software 11 2 20 Advanced Settings Page 342 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide You can edit the schedule using the Edit Schedule screen You can change the frequency of the snapshot the day in which the snapshot needs to be taken and the time during which the snapshot needs to be taken 1 Click the Edit Schedule button in the Manage Snapshots wizard in Figure 223 if you want to edit the snapshot schedule The Edit Schedule screen appears as shown in Figure 224 Edit Schedule Frequency TEA v Every 4 E week s Da
378. ment Portal check box 4 Click Next The Configure key Vault Secure Advanced Software options wizard appears as shown in the following figure Page 329 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software Recovery Advanced Software MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Configure Key Vault Secure Advanced Software Options The Following Advanced Software Options will be secured as part of the re hosting process If you have any unused Activation Keys make sure you activate all of them first All non activated Activation Keys will stop working after this operation Advanced Software Options MegaRAID FastPath MegaRAID Recovery MegaRAID CacheCade MegaRAID SafeStore MegaRAID RAIDS MegaRAID RAIDS Figure 213 Configure Key Vault Secure Advanced Software Options 5 Click Finish the advanced software options are secured in the keyvault NOTE The Next button in the Configure Key Vault wizard See Figure 212 is enabled only if you select the check box NOTE This wizard is conditional and pops up only if the rehosting process is necessary and when both the keyvault and the unsecured keys are present at the same time 11 2 8 Rehosting Complete If you want to transfer the advanced software options from one controller to another use the rehosting process The rehosting process makes sure that these options are secured in the keyvault You have to configure the keyvault to complete the rehosting process Choose any one of th
379. mode Auto This option ensures that the system will decide the best power saving settings for the online drives Advanced OK Cancel Figure 159 Manage Power Save Settings screen 3 Select the Unconfigured Drives check box to let the controller enable the unconfigured drives to enter the Power Save mode Select the Hot spare Drives check box to let the controller enable the Hot spare drives to enter the Power Save mode Select the Configured Drives check box to let the controller enable the Configured drives to enter the Power Save mode Select the Drive standby time Alt d using the drop down selector from the Drive standby time field NOTE The Drive Standby time drop down selector will be enabled only if any of the check boxes above are checked The drive standby time can be 30 mins 1hr 1 30 hrs 2hrs through 24 hrs 7 Select the Power Save mode using the drop down selector from the Select Power Save mode field The mode can be Auto Max or Max without cache NOTE The Select Power Save mode drop down selector is enabled only if the Configured drives check box is selected The Max without cache mode option depends on the firmware settings 8 Click OK The Power Save settings are saved After you click OK the following dialog box appears LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 8 Configuration Changing Power Settings Power Save Settings Sav
380. mrdsnmpd status Issue an SNMP query in this format snmpwalk v1 c public localhost 1 3 6 1 4 1 3582 You can get the SNMP trap from local machine by issuing the following command snmptrapd P F 02 2h 02 2j TRAP w q from A v n NOTE To receive a trap in a local machine with Net SNMP version 5 3 you must modify the snmpt rapd conf file generally located at var net snmp snmptrapd conf Add disableAuthorization yes in snmptrapd conf and then execute sudo snmptrapd P F 02 2h 02 2j TRAPSw q from A v n Page 243 Chapter 6 MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation Installing and Configur MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide ing an SNMP Agent 6 7 3 Installing and Configuring an SNMP Agent on Solaris 6 7 3 1 Prerequisites 6 7 3 2 Installation SNMP on Solaris 6 7 3 3 LSISAS SNMP MIB Location 6 7 3 4 Starting Stopping and Checking the Status of the LSI SAS SNMP Agent Page 244 NOTE Itis assumed that snmpd conf is located at etc snmp for Red Hat and etc for SLES You can change the file location from etc init d 1si_mrdsnmpd file You can install SNMP without the trap functionality To do so set the TRAPIND environment variable to N before running RPM Before you install a new version you must uninstall all previous versions For SLES 10 perform the following steps to run SNMP 1 Copy etc snmp snmpd conf to etc snmpd conf 2 Modify the etc init d snmpd file and ch
381. n 6 cece cnc eee ene n ene rene deen nen e eden ened ee note eens bet aaa 154 4 12 Managing Configurations cciciceiiesaaecsaciyn cian d tate nas te ald aiwabyaae tue Reds aailed nore Late OE EAEE 156 4 12 1 Running a Consistency Check so srr ase ereet eee cece ne ene ene een nen ence beeen ete e been ERAR EEN ENTE 156 412 2 Deleting aVirtual DIVE 42 n ccdcne lig tinkhoerder aa a Maan gnenSbsdiaromaaneeed jaa AAA ELARA 156 4 12 3 Importing or Clearing a Foreign Configuration 0 cece cece cece cnet n ence eden etn e ee ee ene eneeneenes 156 4 12 4 Importing Foreign Configurations 0 cece cece eee eee e een n een n eee ene b eens enn eee eneeeeanes 160 4 12 5 Import Foreign Drives in EKM EKM Secured Locked Drives ee ce cece cece eee ene ene ene e eee ene cane eneees 160 4 12 6 Import Foreign Drives for LKM Secured Locked Drives 0c ccc ce cece eee eee ene n ence ene ee ene enetnennes 161 4 12 7 Import Foreign Drives in LKM EKM Secured Locked Drives sec e eens cence ee ee eee eee n eee e nee an eee ees 161 4 12 8 Migrating the RAID Level of a Virtual Drive 0 cece ccc nce ener tenn eee ene eben enn en ene en een ennes 162 4 12 9 New Drives Attached to a MegaRAID Controller 0 cee cece cence eee e een e ene n teen tenn een tenn een eees 163 413 WebBlOS Dimmer SWitch ssiis snes oe vancanvae ttun rn E EEEE EAE eeu E EN E EE 164 4131 Power SaVe mode isis iciuh
382. n Select All Deselect All Start Cancel Figure 194 Group Initialization Dialog Box 2 Check the virtual drives to run the initialization on or click Select All to select all of the virtual drives 3 Click Start You can monitor the progress of the group initialization See Section 9 9 Monitoring Rebuilds and Other Processes for more information The Consistency Check operation verifies correctness of the data in virtual drives that use RAID levels 1 5 6 10 50 and 60 RAID 0 does not provide data redundancy For example in a system with parity checking consistency means computing the data on one drive and comparing the results to the contents of the parity drive You should run a consistency check on fault tolerant virtual drives periodically You must run the consistency check if you suspect that the virtual drive data might be corrupted Be sure to back up the data before running a consistency check if you think the data might be corrupted To run a consistency check first set the consistency check properties and then schedule the consistency check This section explains how to set the properties schedule the check and run the consistency check LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 10 2 1 Settings Setting the Consistency Check LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 10 Maintaining and Managing Storage Configurations Running a Consisten
383. n state firmware state and inquiry data For SAS devices this includes additional information such as the SAS address of the drive For SAS expanders this includes additional information such as the number of devices connected to the expander Physdrv E0 S0 Specifies the physical drive enclosure and the slots for the drives to provide information about 5 15 2 Set the Drive State to Online Use the command in the following table to set the state of a drive to Online In an online state the drive is working normally and is a part of a configured virtual drive Table 87 Set Drive State to Online Convention MegaCli PDOnline PhysDrv E0 S0 E1 S1 aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Changes the drive state to Online Physdrv E0 S0 Specifies the physical drive enclosure and the slots for the drives 5 15 3 Set the Drive State to Offline Use the command in the following table to set the state of a drive to Offline In the offline state the virtual drive is not available to the RAID controller Table 88 Set Drive State to Offline Convention MegaCli PDOffline PhysDrv E0 S0 E1 S1 aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Changes the drive state to Offline Physdrv E0 S0 Specifies the physical drive enclosure and the slots for the drives Page 204 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 5 15 4 Change the Drive Sta
384. n the drive group Your drives must be organized into virtual drives in a drive group and they must be able to support the RAID level that you select Below are some common RAID functions Creating hot spare drives Configuring drive groups and virtual drives Initializing one or more virtual drives Accessing controllers virtual drives and drives individually Rebuilding failed drives Verifying that the redundancy data in virtual drives using RAID level 1 5 6 10 50 or 60 is correct m Reconstructing virtual drives after changing RAID levels or adding a drive to a drive group Selecting a host controller to work on RAID levels describe a system for ensuring the availability and redundancy of data stored on large disk subsystems See Section 2 5 RAID Levels for detailed information about RAID levels The following subsections describes the components of RAID drive groups and RAID levels Page 21 Chapter 2 Introduction to RAID Components and Features 2 4 1 Drive Group 2 4 2 Virtual Drive 2 4 3 Fault Tolerance 2 4 3 1 Page 22 Multipathing MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide A drive group is a group of physical drives These drives are managed in partitions known as virtual drives A virtual drive is a partition in a drive group that is made up of contiguous data segments on the drives A virtual drive can consist of an entire drive group more than one entire drive group a part of a drive group parts
385. n Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide drive subsystem drive type EKM fast initialization fault tolerance firmware foreign configuration LSI Corporation Confidential formatting hole host interface host port count host system hot spare September 2010 Appendix C Glossary Unconfigured Bad A drive on which the firmware detects an unrecoverable error the drive was Unconfigured Good or the drive could not be initialized Missing A drive that was Online but which has been removed from its location Offline A drive that is part of a virtual drive but which has invalid data as far as the RAID configuration is concerned None A drive with an unsupported flag set An Unconfigured Good or Offline drive that has completed the prepare for removal operation A collection of drives and the hardware that controls them and connects them to one or more controllers The hardware can include an intelligent controller or the drives can attach directly to a system I O bus controller A drive property indicating the characteristics of the drive External Key Management A mode of initialization that quickly writes zeroes to the first and last sectors of the virtual drive This allows you to immediately start writing data to the virtual drive while the initialization is running in the background The capability of the drive subsystem to undergo a single drive failure per drive group with
386. n as displayed in the following figure LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 8 5 5 Power Save Mode SSD Drives 8 6 Changing Virtual Drive Properties LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 8 Configuration Changing Virtual Drive Properties Create Drive Group Drive Group Settings Create the drive group by specifying the RAID level and Drive security method RAID level Ramo x Suitable for high performance with zero data redundancy Choose this option only for non critical data security method Select 5 Drive security will make the virtual drive secure by applying encryption logic to underlying data in the drive Select power save mode A This option ensures that the system wil save maximum power by caching data and avoid spinning up online drives when possible Backplane 252 Slot 7 SAS 136 73 Backplane 252 Slot 6 SATA 931 51 Figure 164 Create Drive Group Drive Group Settings Automatic Spin Up If you select the Max and Max without cache mode in the Select power save mode field in Figure 164 and select one or more SSD drives and click Create Drive Group the following confirmation dialog box appears Power Save Mode Confirmation i You have selected Max or Max without cache as power save mode For 55D drives Max and Max without cache is not applicable Therefore Controller Defined will be selected as power s
387. nagement to provide data security This solution provides data protection in the event of theft or loss of physical drives With self encrypting drives if you remove a drive from its storage system or the server it is housed in the data on that drive is encrypted and useless to anyone who attempts to access without the appropriate security authorization With the SafeStore encryption service data is encrypted by the drives You can designate which data to encrypt at the individual virtual disk VD level Any encryption solution requires management of the encryption keys The security service provides a way to manage these keys Both the WebBIOS Configuration Utility Chapter 4 and MegaRAID Storage Manager Chapter 11 offer procedures that you can use to manage the security settings for the drives Security is a growing market concern and requirement MegaRAID customers are looking for a comprehensive storage encryption solution to protect data You can use the SafeStore encryption service to help protect your data In addition SafeStore local key management removes the administrator from most of the daily tasks of securing data thereby reducing user error and decreasing the risk of data loss Also SafeStore local key management supports instant secure erase of drives that permanently removes data when repurposing or decommissioning drives These services provide a much more secure level of data erasure than other common erasure methods suc
388. nager window displays the system event log entries New event log entries appear during the session Each entry has an ID an error level indicating the severity of the event the timestamp and date and a brief description of the event For more information about the event log see Section 9 1 Monitoring System Events For more information about the event log entries see Appendix A Events and Messages LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 7 2 4 Menu Bar 7 2 4 1 Manage Menu 7 2 4 2 Go To Menu 7 2 4 3 Log Menu 7 2 4 4 Tools Menu 7 2 4 5 Help Menu LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 7 MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus MegaRAID Storage Manager Main Menu Here are brief descriptions of the main selections on the MegaRAID Storage Manager menu bar Specific menu options are described in more detail in Chapter 8 Chapter 9 and Chapter 10 of this manual The Manage menu has a Refresh option for updating the display in the MegaRAID Storage Manager window refresh is seldom required the display normally updates automatically and an Exit option to end your session on MegaRAID Storage Manager The Server menu item shows all the servers that were discovered by a scan In addition you can perform a check consistency initialize multiple virtual groups and show the progress of group operations on virtual drives The Go To menu is available when you select a
389. nce gains in handling simultaneous processes 2 6 3 Maximizing Storage Capacity Storage capacity is an important factor when selecting a RAID level There are several variables to consider Striping alone RAID 0 requires less storage space than mirrored data RAID 1 or distributed parity RAID 5 or RAID 6 RAID 5 which provides redundancy for one drive failure without duplicating the contents of entire drives requires less space then RAID 1 Table 17 explains the effects of the RAID levels on storage capacity Table 17 RAID Levels and Capacity RAID evel Capacity 0 RAID 0 striping involves partitioning each drive storage space into stripes that can vary in size The combined storage space is composed of stripes from each drive RAID 0 provides maximum storage capacity for a given set of drives 1 With RAID 1 mirroring data written to one drive is simultaneously written to another drive which doubles the required data storage capacity This is expensive because each drive in the system must be duplicated 5 RAID 5 provides redundancy for one drive failure without duplicating the contents of entire drives RAID 5 breaks up data into smaller blocks calculates parity by performing an exclusive or on the blocks then writes the blocks of data and parity to each drive in the drive group The size of each block is determined by the stripe size parameter which is set during the creation of the RAID set 6 RAID 6 pr
390. nclosure Rmv Changes the drive state to ready removes the hot spare Physdrv E0 S0 Specifies the physical drive enclosure and the slots for the drives You can get the list of arrays by using the CLI command CfgDsply In the results of the CfgDsply command the number associated with DISK GROUPS is the array number Page 205 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Drive Related Options 5 15 6 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Manage a Drive Initialization Use the command in the following table to manage a drive initialization on the 5 15 7 selected controller s Table 91 Drive Initialization Convention Description MegaCli PDClear Start Stop ShowProg ProgDsply PhysDrv E0 S0 E1 S1 aN a0 1 2 aALL Manages initialization or displays initialization progress on a single controller multiple controllers or all controllers Start Starts initialization on the selected drive s St op Stops an ongoing initialization on the selected drive s ShowP rog Displays the current progress percentage and time remaining for the initialization This option is useful for running the application through scripts ProgDsply Displays the ongoing clear progress The routine continues to display the initialization progress until at least one initialization is completed or a key is pressed Rebuild a Drive Use the command in the following table to start or stop a reb
391. nconfigured Good Drives LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 You can specify the drives by using the Enclosure ID Slot ID for SAS controllers This assumes that all drives are connected to the controller through an enclosure If the drives are not connected to an enclosure it is assumed that they are connected to Enclosure 0 In this case there is no slot so you can use the pdlist command to get the slot equivalent number This applies to all commands that use the Enclosure ID Slot ID format MegaCLl expects the input in S format for directly attached devices In the following options E0 S0 E1 S1 specifies the enclosure ID and slot ID for the drive Use the command in the following table to create one RAID drive group out of all of the unconfigured good drives and a hot spare if desired This is for RAID levels 0 5 6 10 50 or 60 All free drives are used to create a new drive group and if desired one hot spare drive If it is not possible to use all of the free drives the command will abort with a related error level If there are drives of different capacities the largest drive is used to make the hot spare NOTE Firmware supports only 32 drives per drive group If there are more than 32 unconfigured good drives MegaCLI cannot configure any of the drives and the command will abort Page 193 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Configuration Related Options MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Table 63 Cr
392. nd Flash ROM NOTE The external memory bus is 32 bit for the SAS 8704ELP and the SAS 8708ELP and 64 bit for the SAS 8708EM2 the SAS 8880EM2 and the SAS 8888ELP SAS SATA II Device 32 Bit Memory Address Data SAS Bus Flash ROM PCI Express PSBRAM RAID Controller NVSRAM SAS SATA II Device re Interface SAS SATA II Device QI SAS SATA II Device JQ PCI Express Interface Figure 1 Example of an LSI SAS Direct Connect Application Figure 2 shows an example of a SAS RAID controller configured with an LSISASx12 expander that is connected to SAS disks SATA II disks or both PCI Express Interface 8 Peripheral SAS RAID Controller Bus Flash ROM NVSRAM LSISAS1078 72 bit DDR DDR2 C UART PCI Express to SAS ROC with ECC Interface SDRAM E L i SAS SATA LSISASx12 Drives LSISASx12 Expander LL ll SAS SATA II Drives Expander Lj l n L f SAS SATA II f SAS SATA II Drives Drives Figure 2 Example of an LSI SAS RAID Controller Configured with an LSISASx12 Expander Page 17 Chapter 1 Overview Technical Support MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 1 7 1 Valid Drive Mix Configurations You can allow a virtual drive to consist of both CacheCade SSD Caching software and with HDDs and CacheCade SSD HDDs For virtual drives that have both CacheCade SSD Caching software and HDDs Caching software you can choose whether to mix SAS
393. nd remote applications such as MSM Management is performed through MSM installed on a remote machine Linux Windows See Section 6 5 4 1 VMWare ESX 3i Management through CIM and CMPI for more information The Linux installer of MSM works under console with minimal changes Hardware RAID is currently supported in ESX 3 x NOTE There is a known limitation that virtual drives that are created or deleted will not be reflected to the kernel The workaround is to reboot the server or to run esxcfg rescan lt vmhba gt from COS shell The network communication is a key element for a proper setup The communication between the ESXi CIM provider and the LSI management software is an active passive combination which requires a highly reliable network Therefore we recommend that you install the management on a VM within the ESXi Follow these steps to install and configure MSM support on the VMWare ESX operating system 1 Network Configuration of the ESXi Host Assignment of a ESXi hostname Even if it is not relevant for your network you need a FQDN Fully Qualified Domain Name Example local lsi com to be entered using the local ESXi console Configuration of a virtual network environment You can use the already existing Vswitch which has a VMkernel port already attached for the communication Alternatively you can build a new Vswitch without a link to the Host network card LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010
394. neither the release of this document nor any information included in it obligates LSI Corporation to make a commercial release of the product LSI Corporation reserves the right to make changes to the product s or information disclosed herein at any time without notice LSI Corporation does not assume any responsibility or liability arising out of the application or use of any product or service described herein except as expressly agreed to in writing by LSI Corporation nor does the purchase lease or use of a product or service from LSI Corporation convey a license under any patent rights copyrights trademark rights or any other of the intellectual property rights of LSI Corporation or of third parties This document contains proprietary information of LSI Corporation The information contained herein is not to be used by or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of LSI Corporation Corporate Headquarters Email Website Milpitas CA globalsupport lsi com www lsi com 800 372 2447 Document Number 80 00156 01 Rev J Copyright 2010 LSI Corporation All Rights Reserved MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter T Overview 25 500605 bicistieen beeetiaddaeenk oye hea lg ies Aas ea Saw eve ae sae eee ee nds as 13 TEV SAS TECHMOlOGY eors Fs oni aed a WS baleen GUNA SS eee Dew eS h ea dadioe mE EE neem AOS a nde TE eS A ee Heaps nae end eoaaae 13 1 2 Serial attached SCSI Device Int
395. nergy by placing certain unused drives into Power Save mode In Power Save mode the drives use less energy and the fan and the enclosure require less energy to cool and house the drives respectively Also this technology helps avoid application timeouts caused by spin up delays and drive wear caused by excessive spin up down cycles You can use the Power Settings field in MSM to choose whether to allow unconfigured drives or hot spares to enter Power Save mode NOTE The Dimmer Switch technology is enabled by default Page 277 Chapter 8 Configuration Page 278 Changing Power Settings MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide When they are in the Power Save mode unconfigured drives and drives configured as hot spares dedicated or global can be spun down When spun down the drives stay in Power Save mode except for periodic maintenance including Periodic background media scans Patrol Read to find and correct media defects to avoid losing data redundancy hot spare drives only Use of a hot spare to rebuild a degraded drive group hot spare drives only Update of Disk Data Format DDF and other metadata when you make changes to RAID configurations hot spare drives and unconfigured drives NOTE If your controller does not support this option the Power Settings field does not display Follow these steps to change the power save setting 1 Select a controller icon in the Physical tab or the Logical tab in the left panel
396. nfirm Rehosting Process screen appears The Activated Advanced Software Options field consists of Advanced Software Options License and Mode columns m The Advanced Software column displays the list of advanced software features available in the controller m The License column displays the license details for the list of advanced softwares present in the Advanced Software column The license details validates if the software is under trial period or if it can be used without any trial period Unlimited The Mode column displays the current status of the advanced software The current status can be Secured Not secured or Factory installed Both the Safe ID and the Serial Number fields consist of a pre defined value internally generated by the controller 2 Click Activate LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 57 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Managing Software Licensing MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Page 58 The Advanced Software Options Summary wizard appears as shown in Figure 22 Click Configure Key Vault The Confirm Rehosting process wizard appears as shown in Figure 27 The Configure Key Vault button is conditional and appears in two scenarios a Scenario 1 When features have been transferred from NVRAM to keyvault and no rehosting is required the Configure Key Vault button will not be displayed b Scenario 2 When the rehosting process needs to be completed the Configure
397. ng table to manage the event entries in the event log for the selected controller s Table 61 Event Log Management Convention Description MegaCli AdpEventLogInfo GetEventlogInfo GetEvents info warning critical fatal GetSinceShutdown info warning critical fatal GetSinceReboot info warning critical fatal IncludeDeleted info warning critical fatal GetLatest lt number gt info warning critical fatal f lt filename gt Clear aN a0 1 2 aALL GetCCIncon f lt filename gt LX LO 2 5 LALL aN a0 1 2 aALL Manages event log entries The following are the settings you can select on a single controller multiple controllers or all controllers GetEvent logInfo Displays overall event information such as total number of events newest sequence number oldest sequence number shutdown sequence number reboot sequence number and clear sequence number GetEvents Gets event log entry details The information shown consists of total number of entries available at firmware side since the last clear and details of each entries of the error log Start_ent ry specifies the initial event log entry when displaying the log Get SinceShut down Displays all of the events since last controller shutdown Get SinceReboot Displays all of the events since last controller reboot IncludeDeleted Displays all events including deleted events GetLatest D
398. nment that requires a higher degree of fault tolerance and moderate to medium capacity Strong Points Provides both high data transfer rates and complete data redundancy Weak Points Requires twice as many drives as all other RAID levels except RAID 1 Drives 4 The maximum number of drives supported by the controller using an even number of drives in each RAID 10 virtual drive in the span Page 37 Chapter 2 Introduction to RAID RAID Levels 2 5 9 RAID 50 RAID 10 I I I I I I I l L L lt D gt gt Dl lt A Di lt lt SS gt lt A F FAFB GBACFA 4AF SF SF QS Y YS QS i YS SF i S t1 Segment h Segment2 II Segment3 1 Segment 4 egmen Duplicate 1 Segment 2 Duplicate 1 Segment 3 Duplicate I Segment 4 Duplicate li ll iH l Segment 5 lI Segment6 Segment6 I Segment7 Segment 8 1 Segment 5 Duplicate h 8 Duplicate Segment 7 Duplicate 1 Segment 8 Duplicate 1 I a a lel MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide In Figure 12 virtual drive 0 is created by distributing data across four drive groups drive groups 0 through 3 Mi a A A A r s Page 38 RAID 0 Figure 12 RAID 10 Level Virtual Drive RAID 50 provides the features of both RAID 0 and RAID 5 RAID 50 includes both parity and disk striping across multiple drive groups RAID 50 is best implemented on two RAID 5 drive groups with data striped across both drive groups RAID 50 breaks up d
399. ns how to install and configure SAS SNMP Agent for the Windows operating system Perform the following steps to install SNMP Agent 1 Run setup exe from DISK1 2 Use SNMP Manager to retrieve the SAS data it is assumed that you have compiled LSI AdapterSAS mib file already The LSI AdapterSAS mib file is available under SProgramFiles LSI Corporat ion SNMPAgent SAS directory 3 Use a trap utility to get the traps NOTE Before you install the Agent make sure that SNMP Service is already installed in the system If you do not have SNMP Service installed on your system perform the following steps to install SNMP Service for a Windows system LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 6 7 4 3 Configuring SNMP Service on the Server Side 6 8 MegaRAID Storage Manager Support and Installation on Solaris 10 6 8 1 Installing MegaRAID Storage Manager Software for Solaris 10 6 8 2 Uninstalling MegaRAID Storage Manager Software for Solaris 10 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 6 MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation MegaRAID Storage Man ager Support and Installation on Solaris 10 1 Select Add Remove Programs from Control Panel 2 Select Add Remove Windows Components in the left side of the Add Remove Programs window 3 Select Management and Monitoring Tools 4 Click Next and follow any prompts to complete the installation
400. nsfer completion signal to the host when the drive subsystem has received all of the data ina transaction This option eliminates the risk of losing cached data in case of power failure Always Write Back In this mode the controller sends a data transfer completion signal to the host when the controller cache has received all of the data ina transaction Write Back with BBU the default In this mode the controller enables Write Back caching when the battery backup unit BBU is installed and charged It provides a good balance between data protection and performance NOTE The Write Policy depends on the status of the battery backup unit BBU If the BBU is not present is low is failed or is being charged the default Write Policy will switch to Write Through which provides better data protection I O policy The I O policy applies to reads on a specific virtual drive It does not affect the read ahead cache Cached IO In this mode all reads are buffered in cache memory Direct lO the default In this mode reads are not buffered in cache memory Data is transferred to the cache and the host concurrently If the same data block is read again it comes from cache memory Cached IO provides faster processing and Direct IO ensures that the cache and the host contain the same data Access policy Select the type of data access that is allowed for this virtual drive Read Write the default Allow read wri
401. nstruct all missing information In RAID 6 this method is applied to entire drives or stripes across all of the drives in a drive group Using distributed parity RAID 6 offers fault tolerance with limited overhead 00 Does not provide fault tolerance All data in a virtual drive is lost if any drive in that virtual drive fails Disk striping writes data across multiple drives instead of just one drive It involves partitioning each drive storage space into stripes that can vary in size RAID 00 is ideal for applications that require high bandwidth but do not require fault tolerance LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 41 Chapter 2 Introduction to RAID RAID Configuration Strategies MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Table 15 RAID Levels and Fault Tolerance Continued RAID Level Fault Tolerance 10 Provides complete data redundancy using striping across spanned RAID 1 drive groups RAID 10 works well for any environment that requires the 100 percent redundancy offered by mirrored drive groups RAID 10 can sustain a drive failure in each mirrored drive group and maintain drive integrity 50 Provides data redundancy using distributed parity across spanned RAID 5 drive groups RAID 50 includes both parity and disk striping across multiple drives If a drive fails the RAID controller uses the parity data to recreate all missing information RAID 50 can sustain one drive failure per RAID 5 drive group and still
402. nt reaches a certain level a drive will be marked as failed A controller property indicating the vendor assigned ID number of the controller A drive property listing the name of the vendor of the drive A storage unit created by a RAID controller from one or more drives Although a virtual drive can be created from several drives it is seen by the operating system as a single drive Depending on the RAID level used the virtual drive can retain redundant data in case of a drive failure A virtual drive property indicating the condition of the virtual drive Examples include Optimal and Degraded In Write Back Caching mode the controller sends a data transfer completion signal to the host when the controller cache has received all of the data in a drive write transaction Data is written to the drive subsystem in accordance with policies set up by the controller These policies include the amount of dirty clean cache lines the number of cache lines available and elapsed time from the last cache flush See Default Write Policy In Write Through Caching mode the controller sends a data transfer completion signal to the host when the drive subsystem has received all of the data and has completed the write transaction to the drive Page 397 Appendix C Glossary MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Page 398 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 80 00156 01J n LSISSK
403. ntroller 5 8 11 Get Connector Mode 5 8 12 Set Connector Mode Page 186 Controller Property Related Options MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Use the command in the following table to display the time and date on the selected controller s Table 46 Display Time and Date on Controller Convention MegaCli AdpGetTim aN Description Displays the time and date on the controller This command uses a 24 hour format For example 7 p m would display as 19 00 00 Use the command in the following table to display which ports are enabled Internal External 0 1 on the MegaRAID SAS 8888ELP RAID controller NOTE This command is reserved strictly for the SAS 8888ELP RAID controller at this time You must enable specific ports depending on how you intend to use the controller Table 47 Get Connector Mode Convention MegaCli AdpGetConnectorMode ConnectorN Connector0 1 ConnectorAll aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Displays which ports are enabled Internal External 0 1 For example if internal port 0 is active internal ports 0 3 are active If external port 1 is active external ports 4 7 are active Use the command in the following table to set enable the connectors for the MegaRAID SAS 8888ELP RAID connectors that are listed in Section 5 8 11 Get Connector Mode NOTE This command is reserved strictly for the SAS 8888ELP RAID controller at this time You must enable specific ports depending on how y
404. ntrollers sys saiwie stewing died aie pais sd riaa a EN EE bala adh duataleielw a ba AE EEEE EERE Ei 304 9 4 Monitoring Drives serrian AEE E dears er Minnesotan donde Mamba ce aie Redhanlcedangee Suissa peaeae ade yes 305 9 5 Running a Patrol Read s sasises cesta conaciadingsnieedadicng nad sacote wenn age eddeuge awed pedeawaaentayesecweandnan peondeaa ene 306 915 1 Patrol Read Task Rates iis iace cand conway canis ADEE a NEE athe Un AiE E EEEE 308 9 6 Monitoring Virtual Drives 2 cccdeccwsada eo idieds cee caawsnbleee aims dongnderae cago Some oheweed s Qedindenenea gees eebaniaee sedeaete ets 308 9 7 Monitoring Enclosures oy cdoisiseiiwd Jas ca e EEEE Mods Laden EO e E Du aow chee E EEE be ae ee ees 309 9 8 Monitoring Battery Backup Units 2 0 2 0 0 ccc ccc eenn nen enn n denen Een een dene deen etn tense ete eben EEE eS 309 9 8 1 Battery Lea Cycle 5 0 2255 fase vakemedsusaiciinde aes biadalbebes nia pe bad AL asa ie cade hee deal Bes 310 9 9 Monitoring Rebuilds and Other Processes 0 cece cece cence nen ne ee eee ene need eee eden eet ete n eee been eenee 310 Chapter 10 Maintaining and Managing Storage Configurations 0 cece cece nent nec ene nen e ene n eee eenenenes 313 10 1 Initializing a Virtual Drive cate ede csdvs eA os dna eee tei ee ected seals aga oe oad Bebe ee aA ee OG eee ede eieddaga Aes 313 10 1 1 Running a Group Initialization sss0c2sewisecisaddes hon ne cagaehe ao an egies E RENEE EEA EE Owe A R
405. number of MB SnapshotRepositoryLD N Specifies the repository LD number AutoSnapshot Optional parameter if specified enables the AutoSnapshot for the source virtual drive AutoDeleteOldest Snapshot Optional parameter if specified enables the AutoDeletOldestSnapshot for the source virtual drive Lx x specifies the Source LD number on which to enable snapshot Use the command in the following table to enable the snapshot feature on a selected virtual drive Table 112 Disable the Snapshot Feature Convention MegaCli Snapshot Dsbl Lx aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Command disables the snapshot on the source virtual drive Lx x specifies the Source LD number on which to disable snapshot Use the command in the following table to take a snapshot of a volume at designated pointin time Table 113 Take Snapshot of Volume Convention MegaCli Snapshot TakeSnapshot snapshotName name CreateView ViewName view_name RW RO Blocked szXXX LN LO 1 2 aN a0 1 2 aALL n appNameP Description Takes a snapshot of a volume at designated point in time snapshotName name Optional If specified the snapshot is created with the name you enter for it CreateView Optional If specified this creates a view for the snapshot A view contains the content from the Point in Time PiT when the snapshot was made ViewName view_name Optional Specifies the name of the view y
406. o DOS Display relevant messages on the console and or in the log file Display controller data using one command Exit with predefined success or failure exit codes Scan preview and import foreign configurations Set predefined environment variables such as the number of controllers and virtual drives Display firmware event logs Display help for how to use the command line options Enable or disable snapshots for the Recovery advanced software feature Create and delete snapshots and views of a virtual drive Roll back the virtual drive to an older snapshot Display snapshot properties Create a CacheCade SSD Caching virtual drive to use as secondary cache Display battery CacheCade SSD Caching unit properties Display enclosure properties Display and set connector mode on supported controllers The following sections describe the command line options in the MegaCLl Configuration Utility that you can use to perform these functions NOTE The MegaCLl error messages are listed in Appendix B NOTE The MegaCLI Configuration Utility has support for the Intel Itanium 64 bit platform MegaCLl is the only application currently supported on IPF system The MegaCLI Configuration Utility functions under the Novell NetWare SCO OpenServer SCO UnixWare Solaris FreeBSD and DOS operating systems in the same way that it does under the Windows and Linux operating systems All of the commands supported for the Windows and Linux
407. o a proposed two drive drive group configuration in the Drive Groups panel on the right 3 If you need to undo the changes click Reclaim 4 Click Accept DG to create a RAID 1 drive group An icon for the next drive group displays in the right panel 5 Click on the icon for the next drive group to select it 6 Hold lt Ctrl gt while selecting two more ready drives in the Drives panel to create a second RAID 1 drive group with two drives 7 Click Add To Array to move the drives to a second two drive drive group configuration in the Drive Groups panel as shown in Figure 48 8 If you need to undo the changes click Reclaim 9 Choose whether to use drive encryption NOTE RAID 10 supports a maximum of eight spans with a maximum of 32 drives per span Other factors such as the type of controller can limit the number of drives You must use an even number of drives in each RAID 10 drive group in the span Drive Croup Sd 7 D 7 5 D HDD 67 843 GB Slot 2 SAS HDD 67 843 GB On Slot 3 SAS HDD 136 218 GB On B Slot 4 SAS HDD 136 218 GB Un Slot 5 SAS HDD 136 218 GB Un Figure 48 WebBIOS Drive Group Definition Screen 10 Repeat the previous three steps until you have selected all the drives you want for the drive groups 11 After you finish selecting drives for the drive groups select each drive group and click Accept DG for each LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010
408. oard battery backup unit to provide power in case of a power failure A controller property indicating the rate at which the background initialization of virtual drives will be carried out Basic Input Output System The computer BIOS is stored on a flash memory chip The BIOS controls communications between the microprocessor and peripheral devices such as the keyboard and the video controller and miscellaneous functions such as system messages Fast memory that holds recently accessed data Use of cache memory speeds subsequent access to the same data When data is read from or written to main memory a copy is also saved in cache memory with the associated main memory address The cache memory software monitors the addresses of subsequent reads to see if the required data is already stored in cache memory If it is already in cache memory a cache hit it is read from cache memory immediately and the main memory read is aborted or not started If the data is not cached a cache miss it is fetched from main memory and saved in cache memory A controller property that indicates how often the data cache is flushed The process of using a high speed memory buffer to speed up a computer system s overall read write performance The cache can be accessed at a higher speed than a drive subsystem To improve read performance the cache usually contains the most recently accessed data as well as data from adjacent drive sectors To improve writ
409. oftware Options that are enabled on the controller including the ones in trial mode Convention MegaCli ELF Applykey key lt val gt Preview aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Applies the Activation Key either in preview mode or in real mode Convention MegaCli ELF TransferToVault aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Transfers the Activated Advanced Software Options from NVRAM to keyvault Convention MegaCli ELF DeactivateTrialKey aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Deactivates the trial key Convention MegaCli ELF ReHostInfo aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Displays the Re Host information and if Re Hosting is necessary it displays the Controller and KeyVault serial numbers Convention MegaCli ELF ReHostComplete aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Indicates to the controller that Re Host is complete LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 5 7 SafeStore Security Options 5 7 1 Use Instant Secure Erase ona Physical Drive 5 7 2 Secure Data on a Virtual Drive LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool SafeStore Security Options Use the commands in this section to manage the SafeStore Security feature This feature offers the ability to encrypt data on disks and use disk based key management to provide data security With this feature data is encrypted by the drives You can designate which data to encrypt at the individual virtual drive VD level
410. on a remote machine running a Linux or Windows operating system VMWare ESX3i comes with the Small Footprint CIM Broker SFCB CIM Object Manager or CIMOM A CIMOM manages communication between providers which interact with the hardware and a CIM client where the administrator manages the system SFCB supports Common Manageablity Programming Interface CMPI style providers CMPI defines a common standard used to interface Manageability Instrumentation providers instrumentation to Management Brokers CIM Object Manager CMPI standardizes Manageability Instrumentation which allows you to write and build instrumentation once and run it in different CIM environments on one platform The following procedure documents how to install and un install the LSI CIM SAS Storage Provider on a system running on the Linux operating system LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 6 6 2 Installing a CIM SAS Storage Provider on Windows LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 6 MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation Installing and Configur ing a CIM Provider NOTE Uninstall all the previous versions of LsiSASProvider before you install this version You can check all of the installed versions of LsisASProvider by using the command rpm qa grep LsiSASProvider Perform the following step to install a CIM SAS Storage Provider on a Linux system Install the SAS Pro
411. on for the selected controller s Table 72 Display Virtual Drive Information Convention MegaCli LDInfo Lx L0 1 2 Lall aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Displays information about the virtual drive s on the selected controller s This information includes the name RAID level RAID level qualifier capacity in megabytes state stripe size number of drives span depth cache policy access policy and ongoing activity progress if any including initialization background initialization consistency check and reconstruction LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 5 14 2 Change the Virtual Drive Cache and Access Parameters 5 14 3 Display the Virtual Drive Cache and Access Parameters LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Virtual Drive Related Options Use the command in the following table to change the cache policy and access policy for the virtual drive s on the selected controller s Table 73 Change Virtual Drive Cache and Access Parameters Convention Description MegaCli LDSetProp WT WB Immediate RA NORA ADRA Cached Direct CachedBadBBU NoCachedBadBBU RW RO Blocked Name nameString EnDskCache DisDskCache Lx L0O 1 2 Lall aN a0 1 2 aALL Allows you to change the following virtual drive parameters WT Write through WB Write back Selects write policy Immed
412. on to select the rebuild rate for drives connected to the selected controller The default is 30 percent The rebuild rate is the percentage of system resources dedicated to rebuilding a failed drive The higher the number the more system resources devoted to a rebuild Use this option to select the amount of system resources dedicated to background initialization of virtual drives connected to the selected controller The default is 30 percent Use this option to select the amount of system resources dedicated to consistency checks of virtual drives connected to the selected controller The default is 30 percent Reconstruction Rate Use this option to select the amount of system resources dedicated to reconstruction of drives connected to the selected controller The default is 30 percent Controller BIOS Use this option to enable or disable the BIOS for the selected controller The default is Enabled If the boot device is on the selected controller the BIOS must be enabled otherwise the BIOS should be disabled or it might not be possible to use a boot device elsewhere NCQ Native Command Queuing NCQ gives an individual drive the ability to optimize the order in which it executes the read and write commands The default is Enabled Coercion Mode Drive coercion is a tool for forcing drives of varying capacities to the same size so they can be used in a drive group The coercion mode options are None 128MB way
413. onfiguration revertible hot spare revision level SAS SATA SCSI device type serial no strip size stripe size Page 396 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide A controller attribute indicating the current Read Policy mode In Always Read Ahead mode the controller reads sequentially ahead of requested data and stores the additional data in cache memory anticipating that the data will be needed soon This speeds up reads for sequential data but there is little improvement when accessing random data In No Read Ahead mode known as Normal mode in WebBlIOS read ahead capability is disabled The regeneration of all data to a replacement drive in a redundant virtual drive after a drive failure A drive rebuild normally occurs without interrupting normal operations on the affected virtual drive though some degradation of performance of the drive subsystem can occur The percentage of central processing unit CPU resources devoted to rebuilding data onto a new drive after a drive in a storage configuration has failed A method of undoing the configuration of a new virtual drive If you highlight the virtual drive in the Configuration Wizard and click Reclaim the individual drives are removed from the virtual drive configuration The user defined rate at which a drive group modification operation is carried out A property of a storage configuration that prevents data from being lost when one drive fails in the configuration A v
414. onstruct the failed disk Page 25 Chapter 2 Introduction to RAID Components and Features 2 4 10 Parity Page 26 Segment 1 Segment 7 Segment 13 Segment 19 Segment 25 Parity 26 30 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Disk mirroring provides 100 percent redundancy but is expensive because each drive in the system must be duplicated Figure 4 shows an example of disk mirroring Segment 1 Segment 1 Duplicated Segment 2 Segment 2 Duplicated Segment 3 Segment 3 Duplicated Segment 4 Segment 4 Duplicated Figure 4 Example of Disk Mirroring RAID 1 Parity generates a set of redundancy data from two or more parent data sets The redundancy data can be used to reconstruct one of the parent data sets in the event of a drive failure Parity data does not fully duplicate the parent data sets but parity generation can slow the write process In RAID this method is applied to entire drives or stripes across all of the drives in a drive group The types of parity are described in Table 2 Table 2 Types of Parity Parity Type Description Dedicated The parity data on two or more drives is stored on an additional disk Distributed The parity data is distributed across more than one drive in the system RAID 5 combines distributed parity with disk striping If a single drive fails it can be rebuilt from the parity and the data on the remaining drives An example of a RAID 5 drive group is shown in Figure
415. ontain at least one Pokok f number one lower case letter one uppercase letter and one non alphanumeric character e g gt Be sure to record this information You may be prompted to enter the security key if you perform certain operati ccess to your data ri Are you sure you want to enable the drive security Figure 254 Enable Drive Security Password 9 Click Next The Confirm Enable Drive Security screen appears as shown in Figure 255 to show the changes requested to the drive security settings LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 11 5 10 Changing the Drive Security Settings LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software LSI SafeStore Encryption Services CAUTION If you forget the security key you will lose access to your data Be sure to record your security key You might need to enter the security key to perform certain operations Confirm Enable Drive Security gt x 2 Controller MegaRAID SAS 9280 8e Bus 1 Dev 0 Drive security will be enabled on this controller using the specified security key identifier and security key Be sure to record this information You may be prompted to enter the security key if you perform certain operations If you forgot the security key you could lose access to your data Figure 255 Confirm Create Security Key Screen 10 Click the check box I
416. ontroller assigns the hot spare that has a capacity closest to and at least as great as that of the failed drive to take the place of the failed drive The failed drive is removed from the virtual drive and marked ready awaiting removal once the rebuild to a hot spare begins You can make hot spares of the drives that are not ina RAID virtual drive You can use the RAID management software to designate the hot spare to have enclosure affinity meaning that if there are drive failures present on a split backplane configuration the hot spare will be used first on the backplane side that it resides in If the hot spare is designated as having enclosure affinity it will attempt to rebuild any failed drives on the backplane that it resides in before rebuilding any other drives on other backplanes NOTE Ifa rebuild to a hot spare fails for any reason the hot spare drive will be marked as failed If the source drive fails both the source drive and the hot spare drive will be marked as failed There are two types of hot spares Global hot spare Dedicated hot spare A global hot spare drive can be used to replace any failed drive in a redundant drive group as long as its capacity is equal to or larger than the coerced capacity of the failed drive A global hot spare defined on any channel should be available to replace a failed drive on both channels A dedicated hot spare can be used to replace a failed drive only in a selected drive gr
417. operties BBU gt Enable 55D Guard i Scan Foreign Configuration Load Configuration Save Configuration Dashboard Physical Logica lw WIN J6ASSIFT3XS YLSI MegaRAID 5A5 9 Clear Configuration EET Drive Group 0 R Set Consistency Check Properties eral g Virtual Drive s Schedule Consistency Check A g wecuel Ort Set Adjustable Task Rates ek Nese Drives Enclosure ahez al No E amp A Drive Group 1 R Power Settings p Fa vi i or ID igg Virtual Drive s Disable Drive Security Virtual Dri E A Drives Update Controller Firmware Vendor ID gt A Enclosure Bobcat 16 Slot 1 SAS 1 Device ID gt A Enclosure Bobcat 16 Slot 2 SAS 1 Enclosure Bobcat 16 Slot 3 SAS 1 AEA Figure 256 Disable Drive Security Option The Confirm Disable Drive Security screen appears 3 To disable drive security click Yes MSM disables drive security and returns you to the main menu NOTE If you disable drive security you cannot create any new encrypted virtual drives and the data on all encrypted unconfigured drives will be erased Disabling drive security will not affect the security or data of foreign drives 11 5 12 Importing or Clearing a A foreign configuration is a RAID configuration that already exists on a replacement set Foreign Configuration of drives that you install in a computer system You can use MSM to import the foreign configuration to the RAID controller
418. or 00 m Will this drive group contain data from an imaging system Use RAID 0 00 or 10 Page 45 Chapter 2 Introduction to RAID Number of Drives Page 46 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Fill out Table 18 to help you plan the drive group configuration Rank the requirements for your drive group such as storage space and data redundancy in order of importance and then review the suggested RAID levels Table 18 Factors to Consider for Drive Group Configuration Requirement Storage space Rank Suggested RAID Level s RAID 0 RAID 5 RAID 00 Data redundancy RAID 5 RAID 6 RAID 10 RAID 50 RAID 60 Drive performance and throughput RAID 0 RAID 00 RAID 10 Hot spares extra drives required RAID 1 RAID 5 RAID 6 RAID 10 RAID 50 RAID 60 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 3 Chapter 3 SafeStore Disk Encryption Overview SafeStore Disk Encryption This chapter describes the LSI SafeStore Disk Encryption service The SafeStore Disk Encryption service is a collection of features within LSI storage products that supports self encrypting disks SafeStore encryption services supports Local Key Management 3 1 3 2 Overview Purpose and Benefits LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 The SafeStore Disk Encryption service offers the ability to encrypt data on drives and use disk based key ma
419. or to clear the foreign configuration so you can create a new configuration using these drives To import a foreign configuration you must do the following m Enable security to allow importation of locked foreign configurations You can import unsecured or unlocked configurations when security is disabled m Run a scan for foreign configurations If a locked foreign configuration is present and security is enabled enter the security key and unlock the configuration Import the foreign configuration LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 369 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software LSI SafeStore Encryption Services MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide In addition if one or more drives are removed from a configuration by a cable pull or drive removal for example the configuration on those drives is considered a foreign configuration by the RAID controller Verify whether any drives are left to import as the locked drives can use different security keys If there are any drives left repeat the import process for the remaining drives After all the drives are imported there is no configuration to import NOTE When you create a new configuration MSM shows only the unconfigured drives Drives that have existing configurations including foreign configurations will not appear To use drives with existing configurations you must first clear the configuration on those drives Perform the following steps to im
420. orkstations and standalone desktop systems can all be considered host systems A standby drive that can automatically replace a failed drive in a virtual drive and prevent data from being lost A hot spare can be dedicated to a single redundant drive group or it can be part of the global hot spare pool for all drive groups controlled by the controller When a drive fails MegaRAID Storage Manager software automatically uses a hot spare to replace it and then rebuilds the data from the failed drive to the hot spare Hot spares can be used in RAID 1 5 6 10 50 and 60 storage configurations Page 393 Appendix C Glossary Page 394 initialization 10 policy learning cycle load balancing LKM media error count migration mirroring multipathing name non redundant configuration NVRAM NVRAM present NVRAM size offline MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide The process of writing zeros to the data fields of a virtual drive and in fault tolerant RAID levels generating the corresponding parity to put the virtual drive in a Ready state Initialization erases all previous data on the drives Drive groups will work without initializing but they can fail a consistency check because the parity fields have not been generated A virtual drive property indicating whether Cached I O or Direct I O is being used In Cached I O mode all reads are buffered in cache memory In Direct I O mode reads are not buffered in cache memory
421. ort 0 3 Negotiated Link Speed 3 0 Gbps Slot Number 2 SCSI Device Type Disk Drive Security Properties SAS Address 0 0x500000E01E050562 Full Disk Encryption capable No SAS Address 1 0x0 Secured No Temperature 30 C 86 0 F ID Error Level Description Displaying log from server fvstart 3 B E I Administrator C wi 3 MegaRAID Storag 4 System _ 20100316 _MSM_scre X 20100316 M5M_66_ 4 ip 3 29PM Figure 188 Drive Information The information on this panel is self explanatory There are no user selectable properties for physical devices Icons for other storage devices such as CD ROM drives and DAT drives can also appear in the left panel The Power Status property shows On when a drive is soun up and Powersave when a drive is spun down Note that CacheCade software drives and other drives that never spin down still show On If the drives are in a drive enclosure you can identify which drive is represented by each drive LED on the enclosure Follow these steps to locate the drive 1 Click the drive icon in the left panel 2 Click Go To gt Physical Drive gt Start Locating Drive The LED on the drive in the enclosure starts blinking to show its location Page 305 Chapter 9 Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices Running a Patrol Read MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide NOTE LEDs on drives that are global hot spares do not blink 3 To stop the drive LED on
422. ort a foreign configuration you must first enable security to allow importation of locked foreign drives If the drives are locked and the controller security is disabled you cannot import the foreign drives Only unlocked drives can be imported when security is disabled After you enable the security you can import the locked drives To import the locked drives you must provide the security key used to secure them Verify whether any drives are left to import as the locked drives can use different security keys If there are any drives left repeat the import process for the remaining drives After all of the drives are imported there is no configuration to import When you scan a foreign configuration and if any of the foreign EKM secured locked drives are present when EKM is enabled the following wizard is displayed wegaRAID BIOS Config Utility Warning Page Warning ff One or more external key managenent E ecured foreign drives are locked In order to import the d you must restart your systen Until then all the secured virtual drives uill be locked 2 Figure 111 Import Foreign Drives in EKM mode LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 4 12 6 Import Foreign Drives for LKM Secured Locked Drives 4 12 7 Import Foreign Drives in LKM EKM Secured Locked Drives LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Managing Configuration
423. oses 2 drives Degraded 1 second on and 1 second off RAID 6 loses more than 2 drives Offline 3 seconds on and 1 second off A hot spare completes the rebuild N A 1 second on and 3 seconds off process and is brought into a drive group Enclosure management is the intelligent monitoring of the disk subsystem by software and or hardware The disk subsystem can be part of the host computer or can reside in an external disk enclosure Enclosure management helps you stay informed of events in the disk subsystem such as a drive or power supply failure Enclosure management increases the fault tolerance of the disk subsystem The RAID controller supports RAID levels 0 00 1 5 6 10 50 and 60 The supported RAID levels are summarized in the following section In addition it supports independent drives configured as RAID 0 and RAID 00 The following sections describe the RAID levels in detail Page 31 Chapter 2 Introduction to RAID RAID Levels 2 5 1 Summary of RAID Levels 2 5 2 Selecting a RAID Level Page 32 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide RAID 0 uses striping to provide high data throughput especially for large files in an environment that does not require fault tolerance RAID 1 uses mirroring so that data written to one drive is simultaneously written to another drive This is good for small databases or other applications that require small capacity but complete data redundancy RAID 5 uses disk striping and
424. ou created RW RO Blocked Optional Parameter specifies the access policy of the view s zXXX Specifies the size of the view in MB where XXX is a decimal number LN N specifies the source LD number for the command LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 5 20 4 Set the Snapshot Properties 5 20 5 Delete a Snapshot Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Recovery Snapshot Related Options Use the command in the following table to set the snapshot properties Table 114 Set the Snapshot Properties MegaCli Snapshot SetProp AutoSnapshot val AutoDeleteOldestSnapshot val Lx aN a0 1 2 aALL Sets the Snapshot properties such as AutoSnapshot and AutoDeleteOldestSnapshot AutoSnapshot If the value is 0 this command disables the AutoSnapshot feature on source virtual drive If the value is 1 it enables the AutoSnapshot feature on source virtual drive AutoDeleteOldest Snapshot If the value is 0 this command disables the AutoDeleteOldestSnapshot feature on the source virtual drive If the value is 1 it enables the AutoDeleteOldestSnapshot feature on the source virtual drive Lx x specifies the source LD number for the command LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Use the command in the following table to delete a snapshot Table 115 Delete a Snapshot MegaCli Snapshot DeleteSnapshot SnapshotTime yyyymmdd hh mm ss all forc
425. ou intend to use the controller Table 48 Set Connector Mode Convention MegaCli AdpSetConnectorMode Internal External Auto ConnectorN Connector0 1 ConnectorAll aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Sets enables the connectors listed in the GetConnectorMode command For example to enable internal ports 4 7 on controller 0 run the following command MegaCli AdpSetConnectorMod Internal Connector1l a0 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Patrol Read Related Controller Properties 5 9 Patrol Read Related You can use the commands in this section to select the settings for Patrol Read A Patrol Controller Properties Read scans the system for possible drive errors that could lead to drive failure then TO takes action to correct the errors The goal is to protect data integrity by detecting drive failure before the failure can damage data The corrective actions depend on the virtual drive configuration and the type of errors Patrol Read affects performance the more iterations there are the greater the impact 5 9 1 Set Patrol Read Options Use the command in the following table on the selected controller s to set the Patrol Read options Table 49 Set Patrol Read Options Convention MegaCli AdpPR Dsbl EnblAuto EnblMan Start Stop Info SetStartTime yyyymmdd hh maxConcurrentPD aN a0 1 2 aALL
426. ou raise the task rates above the defaults foreground tasks will run more slowly and it might seem that the system is not responding If you lower the task rates below the defaults rebuilds and other background tasks might run very slowly and might not complete within a reasonable time If you decide to change the values record the original default value here so you can restore them later if necessary Rebuild Rate Background Initialization BGI Rate Check Consistency Rate 1 Select a controller icon in the Physical tab or the Logical tab in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window 2 Select Go To gt Controller gt Set Adjustable Task Rates from the menu bar as shown in Figure 155 MegaRAID Storage Manager 6 90 0100 Manage GoTo Log Tools Help e m Drive Group P Create Virtual Drive Create SSCD Physical Drive gt virtual Drive gt BBU gt Dashboard Physical Logica Enable Alarm Start Patrol Read Set Patrol Read Properties Enable SSD Guard Scan Foreign Configuration Load Configuration Save Configuration Clear Configuration lg WIN J6AS55IFT3 5 E Drive Group 0 R E fg Virtual Drive s Virtual Dri Drives Enclosure E Drive Group 1 Ri 89 virtual Drive s Set Consistency Check Properties Schedule Consistency Check m k in m Power Settings E virtual Dri gP Drives Enable Drive Security c i
427. oup One or more drives can be designated as a member of a spare drive pool The most suitable drive from the pool is selected for fail over A dedicated hot spare is used before one from the global hot spare pool LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 2 4 13 Disk Rebuilds LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 2 Introduction to RAID Components and Features Hot spare drives can be located on any RAID channel Standby hot spares not being used in RAID drive group are polled every 60 seconds at a minimum and their status made available in the drive group management software RAID controllers offer the ability to rebuild with a disk that is in a system but not initially set to be a hot spare Observe the following parameters when using hot spares Hot spares are used only in drive groups with redundancy RAID levels 1 5 6 10 50 and 60 Ahot spare connected to a specific RAID controller can be used to rebuild a drive that is connected to the same controller only You must assign the hot spare to one or more drives through the controller BIOS or use drive group management software to place it in the hot spare pool A hot spare must have free space equal to or greater than the drive it replaces For example to replace an 18 GB drive the hot spare must be 18 GB or larger When a drive in a RAID drive group fails you can rebuild the drive by recreating the dat
428. out compromising data integrity and processing capability LSI SAS RAID controllers provides fault tolerance through redundant drive groups in RAID levels 1 5 6 10 50 and 60 They also support hot spare drives and the auto rebuild feature Software stored in read only memory ROM or programmable ROM PROM Firmware is often responsible for the behavior of a system when it is first turned on A typical example would be a monitor program in a system that loads the full operating system from drive or from a network and then passes control to the operating system ARAID configuration that already exists on a replacement set of drives that you install in a computer system MegaRAID Storage Manager software allows you to import the existing configuration to the RAID controller or you can clear the configuration so you can create a new one The process of writing a specific value to all data fields on a drive to map out unreadable or bad sectors Because most drives are formatted when manufactured formatting is usually done only if a drive generates many media errors In MegaRAID Storage Manager a hole is a block of empty space in a drive group that can be used to define a virtual drive A controller property indicating the type of interface used by the computer host system for example PCIX A controller property indicating the number of host data ports currently in use Any computer system on which the controller is installed Mainframes w
429. ove e mail addresses of recipients and to send test messages to recipients that you add To add e mail addresses of recipients of the alert notifications perform the following steps 1 Click the E mail tab on the Event Notification Configuration screen The E mail section of the screen appears as shown in Figure 186 Page 302 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 9 Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices Configuring Alert Notifications Lsis eye Alert Settings Mail Server New recipient email address oo Add Recipient email addresses root localhost Save Backup Load Backup OK Cancel Help Figure 186 E mail Settings 2 Enter the e mail address you want to add in the New recipient email address field 3 Click Add The new e mail address appears in the Recipient email addresses field 9 2 10 Testing E mail Addresses of Use the E mail tab portion of the Alerts Notification Configuration screen to send test Recipients of Alert Notifications messages to the e mail addresses that you added for the recipients of alert notifications 1 Click the E mail tab on the Event Notification Configuration screen The E mail section of the screen appears as shown in Figure 186 Click an e mail address in the Recipient e mail addresses field Click Test Confirm whether the test message was sent to the e mail address If Me
430. oved Ox00cf Information Enclosure s Power supply d cable inserted 0x00d0 Information Enclosure s Fan d returned to normal 0x00d1 Information BBU Retention test was initiated on previous boot 0x00d2 Information BBU Retention test passed 0x00d3 Critical BBU Retention test failed 0x00d4 Information NVRAM Retention test was initiated on previous boot 0x00d5 Information NVRAM Retention test passed 0x00d6 Critical NVRAM Retention test failed 0x00d7 Information s test completed d passes successfully 0x00d8 Critical s test FAILED on d pass Fail data errorOffset x goodData x badData x 0x00d9 Information Self check diagnostics completed 0x00da Information Foreign Configuration detected 0x00db Information Foreign Configuration imported 0x00dc Information Foreign Configuration cleared Ox00dd Warning NVRAM is corrupt reinitializing Page 379 Appendix A Events and Messages Page 380 Event Messages MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Table 135 Event Messages Continued Number Type Event Text Ox00de Warning NVRAM mismatch occurred Ox00df Warning SAS wide port d lost link on PHY d 0x00e0 Information SAS wide port d restored link on PHY d 0x00e1 Warning SAS port d PHY d has exceeded the allowed error rate 0x00e2 Warning Bad block reassigned on s at lx to lx 0x00e3 Information Controller Hot Plug
431. ovides redundancy for two drive failures without duplicating the contents of entire drives However it requires extra capacity because it uses two parity blocks per stripe This makes RAID 60 more expensive to implement 00 RAID 00 striping in a spanned drive group involves partitioning each drive storage space into stripes that can vary in size The combined storage space is composed of stripes from each drive RAID 00 provides maximum storage capacity for a given set of drives LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 43 Chapter 2 Introduction to RAID RAID Availability MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Table 17 RAID Levels and Capacity Continued RAID Level 10 RAID 10 requires twice as many drives as all other RAID levels except RAID 1 RAID 10 works well for medium sized databases or any environment that requires a higher degree of fault tolerance and moderate to medium capacity Disk spanning allows multiple drives to function like one big drive Spanning overcomes lack of disk space and simplifies storage management by combining existing resources or adding relatively inexpensive resources Capacity medium to large capacity 50 RAID 50 requires two to four times as many parity drives as RAID 5 This RAID level works best when used with data that requires 60 more expensive to implement 60 RAID 60 provides redundancy for two drive failures in each RAID set without duplicating the con
432. ower Save Mode SSD Driye Sissi ierta rono E ENERE CETE EEEE EEA E EED 283 8 6 Changing Virtual Drive Properties 0 cece cece nnn nen nnn AETR REEE EEEE EEEE 283 8 7 Changing a Virtual Drive Configuration 6 cece cence ne ne en ene ene nen nde need nen e tne n ene e eben en ee 285 8 7 1 Accessing the Modify Drive Group Wizard 00 cc cece ccc n ene nnn e nen tent eben ene en een ennes 285 8 7 2 Adding a Drive or Drives to a Configuration cc cece ccc cece rene renee eee eden eens nee ete e been ennes 286 8 7 3 Removing a Drive from a Configuration 0 cece cece cece cere eee eee n eee nen eee nent nee been ennes 289 8 7 4 Replacing Drive ccc ccs s sco kae occa Daan ueees ao Seats indeed Meoabiea eta eee WES Ued UN eee Soe eee a Meek aod Ves 289 8 7 5 Migrating the RAID Level of a Virtual Drive 1 0 0 0 ccc ccc ccc cece cere nen n nee e deen ete e nese ene eneenennes 290 8 7 6 New Drives Attached to a MegaRAID Controller 0 cece cece cence ene nen eee n een e eee e eee eneeneeneenes 292 8 8 Deleting aVirtlal Drive wiv saicecucee sein preen dunn seals aeces obeinw gauisaais ue EOR ETA EENE E E EEE a 293 Chapter 9 Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices 0 cece ccc ene ne t ened eee eee eben tenet e tense eeeenee 295 OA MOnItOring System EVENTS sssri rne te aewds EET erode EIEEEI LEN CEE EEEN IS Rabe Ree tete yas ee nes 295 9 2 Configuring Alert Notifications cax5
433. own in Figure 170 Modify Drive Group Select the possible RAID level This wizard allows you to modify the drive group configuration by adding drives to the virtual drive or removing drives From RAID level Current drive group configuration Drive group name Drive Group 4 RAID level RAID 0 Virtual drive state Optimal Enclosure Bobcat 16 Slot 45 36 P Enc Bobcat 16 Sl 45 Enclosure Bobcat 16 Slot sas Online Online Online Select the RAID level you want to migrate GIDE mE Suitable For multi user environments database or file system with small I O size and high proportion of read activity Figure 170 Modify Drive Group Wizard The following sections explain the Modify Drive Group Wizard options CAUTION Be sure to back up the data on the virtual drive before you add a drive to it Follow these steps to add a drive or drives to a configuration with the Modify Drive Group Wizard 1 Click the Logical tab in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window 2 Select a drive group in the left panel of the window LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 8 Configuration Changing a Virtual Drive Configuration 3 Select Go To gt Drive Group gt Modify Drive Group on the menu bar or right click the virtual drive icon to access the Modify Drive Group
434. ows Page 227 Chapter 6 MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation Prerequisites to Running MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide MSM Remote Administration 6 3 Prerequisites to Running MSM Remote Administration 6 4 Installing MegaRAID Storage Manager 6 4 1 Prerequisite for MSM Installation Page 228 m PC compatible computer with an IA 32 32 bit Intel Architecture processor or an EM64T 64 bit processor also compatible with SPARC V9 architecture based systems Minimum 256 MB of system memory 512 MB recommended Drive with at least 400 MB available free space Solaris 10 SPARC occupies minimum of 630MB The supported operating systems for the MegaRAID Storage Manager software are as follows Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Microsoft Windows Server 2008R2 Microsoft Windows XP Microsoft Windows Vista and Microsoft Windows 7 Red Hat Linux 3 0 4 0 and 5 0 Installing MegaRAID Storage Manager Software for Solaris 10 X86 SUSE Linux SLES 9 10 and 11 with latest updates and service packs VMWare ESX 4 0i and ESX 4 1i also known as COSLess it is an embedded version of VMWare that does not have a console to do configuration Solaris SPARC Refer to your server documentation and to the operating system documentation for more information on hardware and operating system requirements MSM requires ports 3071 and 5571 to be open in order to function Follow these step
435. pacity NOTE Having virtual drives of different RAID levels such as RAID 0 and RAID 5 in the same drive groupis not allowed For example ifan existing RAID 5 virtual drive is created out of partial space in an array the next virtual drive in the array has to be R5 only RAID 60 a combination of RAID 0 and RAID 6 uses distributed parity with two independent parity blocks per stripe in each RAID set and disk striping A RAID 60 virtual drive can survive the loss of two drives in each of the RAID 6 sets without losing data It works best with data that requires high reliability high request rates high data transfers and medium to large capacity To ensure the best performance you should select the optimal RAID level when you create a system drive The optimal RAID level for your drive group depends ona number of factors The number of drives in the drive group The capacity of the drives in the drive group The need for data redundancy The disk performance requirements LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 2 Introduction to RAID RAID Levels 2 5 3 RAID 0 RAID 0 provides disk striping across all drives in the RAID drive group RAID 0 does not provide any data redundancy but along with RAID 0 does offer the best performance of any RAID level RAID 0 breaks up data into smaller segments and then stripes the data segments across each drive in the drive group The size of each data
436. papshotRepOSItOy sro treei denne a TEE E TA E AEE A E EAE E ERE EAA 334 11 2 14 Selecting the Virtual Drive sussen NE Geeks eee RER EIA FE N ANEETA EE ee E ET EA 336 11 2 15 Scheduling Snapshots sccsiscdw ces sng ireti isana EEEE AEE EEEE EEEN TES EE ETET TEATER TEERAA 337 11 2 16 Editing Snapshots esrara etiek a a a a aa A a A a a E 338 112 17 Snapshot Base D tails cinic ccessdcsceang inane e AAEE EEA AI E EER EERTE 339 11 2 18 Manage SnapShots onses renen oenn na E a NE uae se EEE EAA EE TEAR EEEE E A 340 11 2 19 Editing Schedule s resist onia naet en i aE EETA TEREE ARAE EER TEA ETETETT 342 11 220 Advanced Settings eiiieaen he e a A a a E a E E a a A A a a 342 11221 Create VieW scarica rea EEEE OEE NE OIE AE N E EE EEEE EG 343 11 2 22 Viewing Snapshot Details 2 0 2 0 ni arin EE EEEE RESER A EEEE E E EE eeees 344 11 2 23 No View Details for Snapshot 0 cece cece CEEE EEEE EEEE T a E 345 1 12 24 No Snapshot Schede rrecn aup EEE EREE EEEE ERA aoe EEEREN AE ONE vA EE E EEE 346 11 225 Creating VIEWS eneret enn n EEA T R AEA RLE EA E EE TEO 347 11 2 26 Restoring by Rolling Back to a Snapshot sssssssuessssssursrrssrrrrssrrerrerrrerrrrrserrrreerrrsseerrrsee 348 11 2 27 Restoring froma VIEW ps riseesme ote caddchddd hace E E eA EE a EAE E A A nes 349 11 2 28 Deleting a Shapshot 6isicacsnteenads s E T EAEE E a a EA E E EO EE AEA A E neon 349 11 3 CacheCade Advanced Software xicccsnserie onun E NE EE E EEE OERE EE E E REE
437. parity data across all drives distributed parity to provide high data throughput especially for small random access RAID 6 uses distributed parity with two independent parity blocks per stripe and disk striping A RAID 6 virtual drive can survive the loss of two drives without losing data A RAID 6 drive group which requires a minimum of three drives is similar to a RAID 5 drive group Blocks of data and parity information are written across all drives The parity information is used to recover the data if one or two drives fail in the drive group A RAID 00 drive group is a spanned drive group that creates a striped set from a series of RAID 0 drive groups RAID 10 a combination of RAID 0 and RAID 1 consists of striped data across mirrored spans A RAID 10 drive group is a spanned drive group that creates a striped set froma series of mirrored drives RAID 10 allows a maximum of eight spans You must use an even number of drives in each RAID virtual drive in the span The RAID 1 virtual drives must have the same stripe size RAID 10 provides high data throughput and complete data redundancy but uses a larger number of spans RAID 50 a combination of RAID 0 and RAID 5 uses distributed parity and disk striping ARAID 50 drive group is a spanned drive group in which data is striped across multiple RAID 5 drive groups RAID 50 works best with data that requires high reliability high request rates high data transfers and medium to large ca
438. pe capacity if a drive serial number drive temperature enclosure position and firmware version of the device For SAS devices this includes additional information such as the SAS address of the device For SAS expanders this includes additional information such as the number of drives connected to the expander LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 5 15 15 Download Firmware to the Physical Devices LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Drive Related Options Use the command in the following table to download firmware to the physical devices connected to the selected controller s Table 100 Download Firmware to the Physical Devices Convention MegaCli PdFwDownload offline SataBridge PhysDrv E0 S0 E1 S1 J Encdevid devId1 devid2 f lt filename gt aN a0 1 2 aAll Description Flashes the firmware with the file specified at the command line Firmware files used to flash a physical device can be of any format The CLI utility assumes that you provide a valid firmware image and it flashes the same The physical device has to do error checking Sat aBridge Allows you to download the SATA Bridge firmware in online mode Physdrv E0 S0 Specifies the physical drive enclosure and the slots for the drives Flashes the firmware to only one PD Encdevid devId1 devId2 Specifies t
439. pears as shown in the following figure 11 2 3 Activation Key Activate MegaRAID Advanced Software Options Choose Method A Lsis To activate MegaRAID Advanced Software Options on your controller you must first obtain a License Authorization Code LAC and Activation Key From the LSI Advanced Software License Management Portal IF you have an Activation Key please enter it below LSI Advanced Software License Management Portal Choose how do you want to activate Advanced Software Options Enter an Activation Key Activation Key ZPT82IBWBK8LQJUJZJBTISADQA6R43JM42AAVSGZ Select an Activation Key file File path Figure 201 Activate MegaRAID Advanced Software Choose Method Perform the following steps to enter the Activation key 1 Click the LSI Advanced Software License Management Portal link to obtain a License Authorization Code LAC and Activation Key 2 Use any one of the following options to enter the activation key a Select the Enter an Activation Key option and enter the activation key in the text box provided below the Activation Key field b Select the Select an Activation Key file and click Browse to get the path of the activation Key file LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 323 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software 11 2 4 Advanced MegaRAID Software Status Summary Recovery Advanced Software MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 3 Click Next 11 2 5
440. ple or advanced appears as shown in Figure 142 E Create irtual Drive Choose mode Ea LSI eye This wizard will help you quickly create virtual drives Choose how to create the virtual drive E le Specify a limited number of settings and have the system pick drives for you This is the easiest way to create a virtual drive C Advanced Choose additional settings and customize virtual drive creation This option provides greater flexibility when creating virtual drives For your specific requirements coe Lie er Figure 142 Virtual Drive Simple Configuration Mode 2 Click Simple and press Next Page 264 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 8 Configuration Creating a New Storage Configuration If there are no unconfigured drives available you have the option to use free capacity of an existing drive group as shown in Figure 143 The Create Virtual drive Summary screen appears as shown in Figure 145 If unconfigured drives are available Figure 144 appears and you can go to step 4 Create irtual Drive Allocate capacity xi LSI K u Where do you want to create the new virtual drive Select a drive group RAID level Free capacity DG 3 Free Capacity Node 0 31 GB Use unconfigured drives create new drive group Cancel Back next Help Figure 143 Using the Free Capacity of an Existing Drive Group 3 Check the option Use Unconf
441. plorer has restricted the file from showing active content If this warning appears click on the active content warning bar and enable the active content NOTE If you are using the Linux operating system you must install Firefox or Mozilla for the MegaRAID Storage Manager online help to display NOTE When connected to the VMWare server only the IP address and the hostname information display The other information such as the operating system name version and architecture do not display Page 259 Chapter 7 MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus MegaRAID Storage Manager MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Main Menu Page 260 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 8 Configuration Creating a New Storage Configuration Chapter 8 Configuration This chapter explains how to use MegaRAID Storage Manager software to create and modify storage configurations on LSI SAS controllers The LSI SAS controllers support RAID 0 RAID 1 RAID 5 RAID 6 RAID 00 RAID 10 RAID 50 and RAID 60 storage configurations The Configuration Wizard allows you to easily create new storage configurations and modify the configurations To learn more about RAID and RAID levels see Chapter 2 Introduction to RAID NOTE You cannot create or modify a storage configuration unless you are logged on to a server with administrator privileges 8 1 Creating a New Storage You can use the MegaRAID Stora
442. poration Confidential September 2010 The MegaRAID advanced software are features that MegaRAID Storage Manager MSM and WebBIOS support on certain MegaRAID SAS 6Gb s RAID controllers The following MegaRAID SAS 6Gb s RAID controllers support advanced software features that offer improved performance data protection and availability m MegaRAID SAS 9260 4i m MegaRAID SAS 9260 8i m MegaRAID SAS 9280 4i4e NOTE Record your controller serial number in a safe location in case you need to contact LSI NOTE Back up your data before you make a change in the system configuration Failure to do so could result in data loss The MegaRAID advanced software include the following features MegaRAID FastPath MegaRAID Recovery MegaRAID CacheCade MegaRAID RAID 6 MegaRAID RAID 5 MegaRAID Software licensing authorizes you to enable the MegaRAID advanced software features present in the MSM application You have to obtain the activation key to enable and use the advanced software features present in the controller You can also implement the rehosting process by configuring the key vault if you want to transfer the advanced features from one controller to another The MegaRAID Advanced Software wizard allows you to use the advanced software features To enable the activation key to use the advanced controller features 1 Select the Physical view or the Logical view tab in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window and click a cont
443. port or clear a configuration 1 Enable drive security to allow importation of locked foreign drives See Section 11 5 9 Enabling Drive Security using LKM for the procedure used to enable drive security 2 After you create a security key right click the controller icon and click Scan for Foreign Configuration If there are locked drives security is enabled the Unlock foreign drives dialog box appears 3 Enter the security key to unlock the configuration The Foreign Configuration Detected screen appears as shown in Figure 257 Foreign Configuration Detected Figure 257 Foreign Configuration Detected Screen 4 Click Import to import the foreign configuration from all of the foreign drives Clear to remove the configuration from all foreign drives or Advanced to preview and import specific foreign configurations 5 Click OK NOTE The operation cannot be reversed after it is started Imported drives display as Online in the MegaRAID Storage Manager menu Page 370 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 11 5 12 1 Foreign Configurations in Cable Pull and Drive Removal Scenarios LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software LSI SafeStore Encryption Services 6 Repeat the import process for any remaining drives Because locked drive can use different security key you must verify whether there are any remaining drives
444. pository field displays the details of the default VDs existing in the system if there are any The Name Displays the name of the VD The Status Displays the status of the VD The Available Capacity Displays the available capacity on the VD The Total Capacity Displays the total capacity of the VD If the default VDs do not exist in the system the Snapshot Repository field columns will be blank The status of the VD can be optimal degraded or partially degraded In the Select Capacity field use the drop down selector to select the appropriate capacity to use for changes to the base VD The capacity depends on how write intensive the application snapshots are The available capacity is the largest free block of capacity on the snapshot repository VD Page 335 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software 11 2 14 Selecting the Virtual Drive Recovery Advanced Software Page 336 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide NOTE Refer to the tips provided for allocating capacity in Figure 217 NOTE If you designate all of the capacity for the Virtual Drive Repository you cannot use the same virtual drive as a repository for other volumes 5 Click Next The Enable MegaRAID Recovery wizard Displaying the selected Virtual Drive appears as shown in Figure 218 This wizard lets you to select the VD to be used as the snapshot repository You can select the VD to use as the snapshot repository
445. procedure Perform the following steps to configure SNMP Service on the server side Select Administrative Tools from Control Panel Select Services from the Administrative Tools window Select SNMP Service in the Services window Open SNMP Service Click the Security tab and make sure that Accept SNMP Packets from any host is selected Voe Ww oa 6 Click the Traps tab and select the list of host IPs to which you want the traps to be sent with the community name This section documents the installation of MegaRAID Storage Manager on the Solaris 10 U5 U6 U7 U8 x86 and x64 operating system Follow these steps to install MegaRAID Storage Manager software on a system running Solaris 10 update 5 1 Copy the MegaRaidStorageManager SOLX86 tar gz file to a temporary folder 2 Untar the MegaRaidStorageManager SOLX86 tar gz file using the following command tar zxvf MegaRaidStorageManager SOLX86 tar gz This step creates a new disk directory Go to the new disk directory and find and read the readme txt file Enter the Bash shell Execute the command install sh present in the disk directory Oo Foe When prompted by the installation scripts select Y to complete the installation Follow these steps to uninstall MegaRAID Storage Manager software on a system running Solaris 10 update 5 1 Execute the Uninstaller sh file located in opt MegaRaidStorageManager directory 2 When prompted by the
446. produces higher read performance If your computer regularly performs random read requests choose a smaller strip size The default is 64 KB Access Policy Select the type of data access that is allowed for this virtual drive RW Allow read write access This is the default Read Only Allow read only access Blocked Do not allow access Read Policy Specify the read policy for this virtual drive Normal This option disables the read ahead capability This is the default Ahead This option enables read ahead capability which allows the controller to read sequentially ahead of requested data and to store the additional data in cache memory anticipating that the data will be needed soon This speeds up reads for sequential data but there is little improvement when accessing random data Page 74 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Creating a Storage Configuration Write Policy Specify the write policy for this virtual drive WBack In Writeback mode the controller sends a data transfer completion signal to the host when the controller cache has received all of the data in a transaction This setting is recommended in Standard mode WThru In Writethrough mode the controller sends a data transfer completion signal to the host when the drive subsystem has received all of the data ina t
447. ption Sets the power saving level on the virtual disk Page 220 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Dimmer Switch Related Options 5 22 4 Displays about Adding a RAID Use the command in the following table to add a RAID level to a specified adapter Level to a Specified Adapter Table 126 Adds a RAID Level to a Specified Adapter Convention MegaSCU CfgLdAdd rX E0 S0 E1 S1 WT WB NORA RA ADRA Direct Cached CachedBadBBU NoCachedBadBBU szXXX szYYY strpszM Hsp E0 S0 AfterLdx Force FDE CtrlBased Default Automatic None MaximumWithCaching MaximumWithoutCaching aN Description CfgLdAdd Adds a RAID level 0 1 5 or 6 to a specified adapter Even if no configuration is present you have the option to write the configuration to the adapter The possible parameters are Rx E0 SO Specifies the RAID level and the physical drive enclosure slot numbers to construct a disk array WT Write through WB Write back Selects write policy NORA No read ahead RA Read ahead ADRA Adaptive read ahead Selects read policy Cached Direct Selects cache policy CachedBadBBU NoCachedBadBBU Specifies whether to use write cache when the BBU is bad SZXXXXXXXX Specifies the size for the virtual disk where XXXX is a decimal number of Mbytes However the actual size o
448. r Guide Create CacheCade irtual Drive xi LSI3 lt u Specify parameters for the new CacheCade Virtual Drive CacheCade Drive groups LSI MegaRAID 5A5 9280 4i4e Bus 2 Dev 0 ICacheCade Drive Group0 Available CacheCade VD name CacheCade_5 Capacity 29 2814 Units cs i Remove BoE E Figure 234 CacheCade Drive Group Icon 8 Click Next The summary screen appears as shown in Figure 235 This screen displays the drive group name the number of drives the total capacity the free capacity the CacheCade virtual drive name and the capacity being used Create CacheCade Summary xi LSI u gt Review the summary and go back if you need to make corrections The CacheCade Virtual Drive s will be created when you click finish Summary CacheCade Drive group name Drive GroupO Number of drives used 1 Total capacity 29 261 GB Free capacity 0 Bytes CacheCade Virtual Drive 1 name CacheCade_5 Capacity 29 281 GB ee es E Figure 235 CacheCade Virtual Drive Summary Screen 9 Click Finish A confirmation message displays after the CacheCade virtual drive is successfully created Page 352 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 11 4 FastPath Advanced Software 11 4 1 Setting FastPath Options LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software FastPath Advanced So
449. r of drives is required New RAID 5 virtual drives must have at least five drives for a background initialization to start New RAID 6 virtual drives must have at least seven drives for a background initialization to start This section contains the procedures for creating RAID drive groups for RAID levels 0 1 5 6 00 10 50 and 60 RAID 0 provides drive striping across all drives in the RAID drive group RAID 0 does not provide any data redundancy but does offer excellent performance RAID 0 is ideal for applications that require high bandwidth but do not require fault tolerance RAID 0 also denotes an independent or single drive NOTE RAID level 0 is not fault tolerant If a drive in a RAID 0 drive group fails the whole virtual drive all drives associated with the virtual drive fails When you select Manual Configuration and click Next the drive group Definition screen appears You use this screen to select drives to create drive groups 1 Hold lt Ctrl gt while selecting two or more ready drives in the Drives panel on the left until you have selected all desired drives for the drive group Click Add To Array to move the drives to a proposed drive group configuration in the Drive Groups panel on the right as shown in Figure 32 If you need to undo the changes click Reclaim 4 Choose whether to use drive encryption LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 4 W
450. r s 0 cece eee cece e cece n ene teen eens errn 211 5 15 18 Perform the Copyback Operation on the Selected Drive 0 cece eee ene e ene e teen ene ee eee ee ences 211 5 16 Enclosuir Related Options 4 ciccitescasaereanaen teasa a eas daa awiee Her awi ene ead na eh cea dead aeaeielenloe tama saulece dees 211 5 16 1 Display Enclosure Information ii c2escaehincdadecdis ead eletauniwes a Ea banceduvebieabaadbedeaube ide clenends 211 5162 Display Enclosure Statusas irese ineno die eaad mod ETEA cular ae ddleus ak EET EEDE EEEa Oeluane oon ER O 212 5 17 Flashing the Firmware 4 hsic5 6 resna aa EE E A E E E A A A E E EE A AAA EE 212 5 17 1 Flash the Firmware with the ROM File uessessssesessessesseerssrserseereerererersrrereeserseeseerseeseeree 212 5 17 2 Flash the Firmware in Mode 0 with the ROM File 0 cece cece eee ene eee eee e ene e een teen cent ea es 212 5 18 SAS TOPOlOGY aicsaamasay as Gce deans bes EAE ATEA bland aaaes Deut Ea bis dee dado ag Glanind gine ewnewlad dig ane r 213 5 19 Diagnostic Relat d Options s icicdecs scence Gakes ngacdde bonkew bb ee ded cents biaacdant nes diesadeebaedbinnkeweawnsadekenboge 213 5 19 1 Start Controller Diagnostics i035 cass sara enna EEE sada AE DENETAN EATA ENIGER EEES 213 5 19 2 Start Battery Test rossresnsi renen eSEE EENEN E EEE E EER E EESE NNR 213 5 20 Recovery Snapshot Related Options usssssnsssssrrrsesrrrrsererssererrerrerreererrsereerrerrereserrerrerr
451. racter e g lt gt The space character is not permitted 5 7 5 Drive Security Key If you want to use the security key using EKMS the EKMS must provide the security key You can create a security key using EKMS or switch from EKM to LKM or from LKM to EKM Table 32 Drive Security Key Convention MegaCli CreateSecurityKey useEKMS aN Description Creates security key using EKMS Convention MegaCli ChangeSecurityKey SecurityKey sssssssssss Passphrase sssssssssss KeyID kkkkkkkkkkk aN Description To change the security from EKMS to LKM Convention MegaCli ChangeSecurityKey useEKMS OldSecurityKey sssssssssss aN Description To change security from LKM to EKM Convention MegaCli ChangeSecurityKey useEKMS aN Description rekeying in EKMS Page 180 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 5 7 6 Change the Security Key 5 7 7 Get the Security Key ID 5 7 8 Set the Security Key ID LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool SafeStore Security Options Use the command in the following table to change they security key to a new security key Table 33 Change the Security Key Convention MegaCli ChangeSecurityKey OldSecurityKey sssssssssss SecurityKey sssssssssss Passphrase sssssssssss KeyID kkkkkkkkkkk aN Description Changes a security key to a new security key ChangeSecurityKey Changes the security ke
452. rage Configuration A RAID 00 drive group is a spanned drive group that creates a striped set from a series of RAID 0 drive groups It breaks up data into smaller blocks and then stripes the blocks of data to RAID 00 drive groups The size of each block is determined by the stripe size parameter which is 64 KB RAID 00 does not provide any data redundancy but does offer excellent performance RAID 00 is ideal for applications that require high bandwidth but do not require fault tolerance When you select Manual Configuration and click Next the Drive Group Definition screen appears You use the Drive Group Definition screen to select drives to create drive groups Hold lt Ctrl gt while you select ready drives in the Drives panel on the left 2 Click Add To Array to move the drives to a proposed drive group configuration in the Drive Groups panel on the right 3 If you need to undo the changes click Reclaim 4 Click Accept DG to create a RAID 0 drive group An icon for the next drive group appears in the right panel 5 Hold lt Ctrl gt while you select more ready drives in the Drives panel to create a second RAID 0 drive group 6 Click Add To Array to move the drives to a second drive group configuration in the Drive Groups panel as shown in Figure 44 7 If you need to undo the changes click Reclaim NOTE RAID 00 supports a maximum of eight spans with a maximum of 32 drives per span Other factors such as the typ
453. rage Configuration MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide The Virtual Drive Definition screen appears as shown in Figure 42 Use this screen to select the RAID level strip size read policy and other attributes for the new virtual drives RiegaRAID BII gt Config Utility Slot 3 SAS HDD 136 218 GB On Slot 4 SAS HDD 136 218 GB Un Slot 5 SAS HDD 136 216 GB Un Figure 42 WebBIOS Virtual Drive Definition Screen 1 Change the virtual drive options from the defaults listed on the screen as needed Here are brief explanations of the virtual drive options RAID Level The drop down menu lists the possible RAID levels for the virtual drive Select RAID 6 Strip Size The strip size is the portion of a stripe that resides on a single drive in the drive group The stripe consists of the data segments that the RAID controller writes across multiple drives not including parity drives For example consider a stripe that contains 64 KB of drive space and has 16 KB of data residing on each drive in the stripe In this case the stripe size is 64 KB and the strip size is 16 KB You can set the strip size to 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 and 1024 KB A larger strip size produces higher read performance If your computer regularly performs random read requests choose a smaller strip size The default is 64 KB NOTE WebBIOS does not not allow you to select 8KB as the stripe size when you create a RAID 6 drive group with thr
454. ransaction This is the default Bad BBU Select this mode if you want the controller to use Writeback mode but the controller has no BBU or the BBU is bad If you do not choose this option the controller firmware automatically switches to Writethrough mode if it detects a bad or missing BBU CAUTION LSI allows Writeback mode to be used with or without a battery LSI recommends that you use either a battery to protect the controller cache or an UPS to protect the entire system If you do not use a battery or a UPS and there is a power failure you risk losing the data in the controller cache 10 Policy The IO Policy applies to reads on a specific virtual drive It does not affect the read ahead cache Direct In Direct I O mode reads are not buffered in cache memory Data is transferred to the cache and the host concurrently If the same data block is read again it comes from cache memory This is the default Cached In Cached I O mode all reads are buffered in cache memory Drive Policy Specify the drive cache policy Enable Enable the drive cache Disable Disable the drive cache NoChange Leave the current drive cache policy as is This drive policy is the default Disable BGI Specify the background initialization status No Leave background initialization enabled This means that a new configuration can be initialized in the background while you use WebBIOS to do other configuration tasks This is the default
455. ration Utility Creating a CacheCade Configuration NOTE WebBIOS does not not allow you to select 8 KB as the stripe size when you create a RAID 60 drive group with six drives 17 Click Accept to accept the changes to the virtual drive definition 18 If you need to undo the changes click Reclaim button 19 Click Next after you finish defining virtual drives The Configuration Preview screen appears as shown in Figure 59 Slot 3 SAS HDD 136 218 GB On i Slot 5 SAS HDD 136 218 GB On s Slot 6 SAS HDD 418 656 GB U Figure 59 RAID 60 Configuration Preview 20 Check the information in the configuration preview 21 If the virtual drive configuration is acceptable click Accept to save the configuration Otherwise or click Back to return to the previous screens and change the configuration 22 If you accept the configuration click Yes at the prompt to save the configuration The WebBIOS main menu appears This section contains the procedures for creating CacheCadeRAID virtual drives for the CacheCade advanced software feature The MegaRAID CacheCade advanced software improves application performance by expanding the MegaRAID read caching capacity The CacheCade feature uses high performing CacheCade software as a secondary tier of cache to provide faster reads and to maximize transactional I O performance Page 105 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Creating a CacheCade Configuration MegaRAID
456. ration preview 12 If the virtual drive configuration is acceptable click Accept to save the configuration Otherwise click Cancel to end the operation and return to the WebBlOS main menu or click Back to return to the previous screens and change the configuration 13 If you accept the configuration click Yes at the prompt to save the configuration The WebBIOS main menu appears 4 5 3 4 Using Manual RAID 6 is similar to RAID 5 drive striping and distributed parity except that instead of Configuration RAID 6 one parity block per stripe there are two With two independent parity blocks RAID 6 can survive the loss of two drives in a virtual drive without losing data Use RAID 6 for data that requires a very high level of protection from loss RAID 6 is best suited for networks that perform a lot of small input output I O transactions simultaneously It provides data redundancy high read rates and good performance in most environments Page 80 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Creating a Storage Configuration In the case of a failure of one drive or two drives in a virtual drive the RAID controller uses the parity blocks to recreate all of the missing information If two drives in a RAID 6 virtual drive fail two drive rebuilds are required one for each drive These rebuilds do not occur
457. re the strip size values are 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 or 1024 Mega Bytes AfterLdX This command is optional By default the application uses the first free slot available in the virtual disk This option is valid only if the virtual disk is already used for configuration Force This option will force the creation of virtual disk in situations where the application finds that it is convenient to create the virtual disk only with user s consent FDE CtrlBased If controller support security feature this option enables FDE Ctrl based encryption on virtual disk Default Automatic None MaximumWithCaching MaximumWithoutCaching If the controller supports power savings on virtual disk these options specify the possible levels of power savings that can be applied on a virtual disk Page 222 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 5 22 6 Displays about Adding the Unconfigured Drive to a Specified Adapter Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Dimmer Switch Related Options Use the command in the following table to add the Unconfigured Drives to a Adapter Table 128 Adds the Unconfigured Physical Drive to RAID Level 0 1 5 6 to a Specified Adapter Convention MegaSCU CfgAllFreeDrv rX SATAOnly SpanCount XXX WT WB NORA RA ADRA Direct Cached CachedBadBBU NoCachedBadBBU strpszM HspCount XX HspType Dedicated EnclAffinity nonRevertible FDE C
458. red during drive rebuilds 5 RAID 5 provides high data throughput especially for large files Use this RAID level for any application that requires high read request rates but low write request rates such as transaction processing applications because each drive can read and write independently Since each drive contains both data and parity numerous writes can take place concurrently In addition robust caching algorithms and hardware based exclusive or assist make RAID 5 performance exceptional in many different environments Parity generation can slow the write process making write performance significantly lower for RAID 5 than for RAID 0 or RAID 1 Drive performance is reduced when a drive is being rebuilt Clustering can also reduce drive performance Environments with few processes do not perform as well because the RAID overhead is not offset by the performance gains in handling simultaneous processes 6 RAID 6 works best when used with data that requires high reliability high request rates and high data transfer It provides high data throughput data redundancy and very good performance However RAID 6 is not well suited to tasks requiring a lot of writes A RAID 6 virtual drive has to generate two sets of parity data for each write operation which results in a significant decrease in performance during writes Drive performance is reduced during a drive rebuild Environments with few processes do not perform as well because the R
459. redundancy Page 67 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Creating a Storage Configuration MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 4 5 3 Using Manual Configuration 4 5 3 1 Using Manual Configuration RAID 0 Page 68 When WebBIOS displays the proposed new configuration review the information on the screen and click Accept to accept it Or click Back to go back and change the configuration RAID 0 If you select Automatic Configuration and No Redundancy WebBIOS creates a RAID 0 configuration RAID 1 If you select Automatic Configuration and Redundancy when possible and only two drives are available WebBIOS creates a RAID 1 configuration RAID 5 If you select Automatic Configuration and Redundancy when possible and three or more drives are available WebBIOS creates a RAID 5 configuration RAID 6 If you select Automatic Configuration and Redundancy when possible and the RAID 6 option is enabled and three or more drives are available WebBIOS creates a RAID 6 configuration 2 Click Yes when you are prompted to save the configuration 3 Click Yes when you are prompted to initialize the new virtual drive s WebBIOS CU begins a background initialization of the virtual drives New RAID 5 virtual drives and new RAID 6 virtual drives require a minimum number of drives for a background initialization to start If there are fewer drives the background initialization will not start The following numbe
460. reen contains three tabs Alert Settings Mail Server and E mail You can use each tab to perform tasks for that topic LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 9 Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices Configuring Alert Notifications Configure Alerts Eg f Lsis ail Server Email You may edit the alert delivery methods for each event severity level All events at that severity level will use the listed alert delivery methods unless you define exceptions by changing individual events Alert Delivery Methods Severity Level Alert Delivery Method Fatal System Log MSM Log Popup Email Critical System Log MSM Log Popup Warning System Log MSM Log i Information System Log MSM Log Edit Change Individual Events Save Backup Load Backup OK Cancel Help Figure 180 Alerts Notification Configuration Screen You can select the Alert Settings tab to perform the following actions Select the methods for the delivery of alerts Change the severity level of events Save an xml backup file of the entire alert configuration Load all of the values from a previously saved backup into the dialog to edit or send to the monitor NOTE When you load a saved backup file all unsaved changes made in the current session are lost You can select the Mail Server tab to perform the following
461. rent drive security mode Local key management LKM Change current security settings O Switch to External key management EKM mode Figure 241 Change Security Settings 3 Select the Change current security settings option in Figure 241 if you want to change the drive security settings on the controller using the LKM mode When you select this option the details of the Change current security settings given in Section 11 5 10 Changing the Drive Security Settings is displayed 4 Select Switch to External key management EKM mode if you want to switch over from LKM mode to EKM mode 5 Click OK After you click OK the authentication drive security key is generated internally by the system After you obtain the authentication drive security key from the EKM mode enter the authentication drive security key in the Authentication Drive Security Key dialog box as shown in the following figure Authenticate Drive Security Key Please provide the current drive security key for authentication Current Security Key Figure 242 Authentication Drive Security Key If you enter a valid authentication key a confirmation message indicating that EKM is enabled is displayed as shown in the following figure LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software LSI SafeStore Encryption Services Confirm External Key Management EKM Mode Enabled
462. revious screen to change any selections or click Finish to accept and complete the configuration After you click Finish the new storage configuration is created and initialized NOTE If you create a large configuration using drives that are in Power Save mode it could take several minutes to spin up the drives A progress bar appears as the drives spin up If any of the selected unconfigured drives fail to spin up a box appears to identify the drive or drives After the configuration is completed a dialog box notifies you that the virtual drives were created successfully If more drive capacity exists the dialog box asks whether you want to create more virtual drives If no more drive capacity exists you are prompted to close the configuration session 8 Select Yes or No to indicate whether you want to create additional virtual drives If you select Yes the system takes you to the Create Virtual Drive screen as shown in Figure 144 If you select No the utility asks whether you want to close the wizard 9 If you selected No in the previous step select Yes or No to indicate whether you want to close the wizard If you select Yes the configuration procedure closes If you select No the dialog box closes and you remain on the same page You can convert JBOD drives to Unconfigured Good using Create Virtual Drive or Make Unconfigured Good drive option with a single configuration Perform the following steps to configure JBOD to
463. ries To enter the filenames follow these steps 1 Open the file msm properties in the lt installation directory MegaRAID Storage Manager gt folder Enter the value for the Logo file against the key CHANNELLOGO Enter the value for the Splash screen file against the key CHANNELSPLASHSCREEN Save the file OF op woos Place these two images in the lt installation directory MegaRAID Storage Manager gt folder 6 Start the application Following are some of the important points m File names for both entries should not have any spaces For example the valid file name would be logo_test_1 png or LogoTest1 png or TEST_SPLASH_FILE jpg The logo image dimensions should not exceed 160 85 width height The splash screen image dimensions should not exceed 390 260 width height After making the changes mentioned above when you log into MSM you will be able to view the changes with the new splash screen and logo in MSM This section documents the installation of MegaRAID Storage Manager on VMWare Classic with console operating system and on the VMWare ESX 3i operating system VMWare does not support any graphics components In order to install MSM on the VMWare operating system execute the script vmware_install sh from the installation disk The installer lets you accept the License agreement operating system and storelib as follows m End user license agreement m Operating system VMware 3 5 or VMware 4 0
464. rive or the removal of a drive an event message is generated and is stored in the controller NVRAM You can use the WebBlOS CU to view these event messages To do this click Events on the main WebBIOS CU screen The Event Information screen appears as shown in Figure 108 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Figure 108 gelau Chapter 4 WebBIOS Configuration Utility Viewing System Event Information MegaRAID BIO fig Utility Event Infornat First Sequence 1 Last Sequence 13213 Event Locale Physical Device BA PAseeeeee eee eee ome Enclosure BBU SAS Start Sequence a of Events Max a 248 at a tine Event Class Event Information Screen The right side of the screen is blank until you select an event to view The First Sequence and Last Sequence fields in the upper left of the screen show you how many event entries are currently stored To view event information follow these steps 1 Select an Event Locale from the menu For example select Enclosure to view events relating to the drive enclosure Select an Event Class Information Warning Critical Fatal or Dead Enter a Start Sequence number between the First Sequence and Last Sequence numbers The higher the number the more recent the event Enter the Number of events of this type that you want to view and click Go The first event in the sequence appears in the right panel
465. rives because deleting the virtual disk destroys the encryption keys and causes a secure erase See Section 3 5 Instant Secure Erase for information about the instant secure erase feature Security Key Un Authenticated Mode A key based on a user provided string The controller uses the security key to lock and unlock access to the secure user data This key is encrypted into the security key blob and stored on the controller If the security key is unavailable user data is irretrievably lost You must take all precautions to never lose the security key This mode allows controller to boot and unlock access to user configuration without user intervention In this mode the security key is encrypted into a security key blob stored on the controller but instead of a user password an internal key specific to the controller is used to create the security key blob Volume Encryption Keys VEK The controller uses the Volume Encryption Keys to encrypt data when a controller encrypted virtual disk is created These keys are not available to the user The firmware FW uses a unique 512 bit key for each virtual disk The VEK for the VDs are stored on the physical disks in a VEK blob 3 4 Workflow 3 4 1 Enable Security You can enable security on the controller After you enable security you have the 3 4 1 1 Create the Security Key Identifier 3 4 1 2 Create the Security Key Page 48 option to create secure virtu
466. roller Properties Screen 2 Click Next to view the second Controller Properties screen The second Controller Properties screen appears as shown in Figure 88 The Battery Backup field at the top left of the screen indicates whether the iBBU is present LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 133 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Viewing and Changing Device Properties MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide MegaRAID BIOS Config Utility Controller Properties Schedule CC Maintain PD Fail StopOnError Enabled History ae Controller BIOS Disk Activity Enabled Snapshot Figure 88 Second Controller Properties Screen 3 Click Present in the Battery Backup field The Battery Module screen appears as shown in Figure 89 This screen contains the following information Battery information Design information Capacity information Auto Learn properties and settings Page 134 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 4 8 4 1 Setting the Learn Delay Interval 4 8 4 2 Setting the Auto Learn Mode LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Viewing and Changing Device Properties aRAID BIOS Config Utility Battery Module melulu Battery Type iBBU Design Info Voltage 3934 mV Current 456 m Temperature 26 deg centigrade Status FRU None gas Gauge Status Discharging Design Capacity 1
467. roller icon Page 321 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software Recovery Advanced Software MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 2 Choose either of the following options a Select Go To gt Controller gt Manage MegaRAID Advanced Software Options b Click Manage MegaRAID Advanced Software Options from the dash board under the feature portlet The Manage MegaRAID Advanced Software Options wizard appears as shown in the following figure Manage MegaRAID Advanced Software Options LSI j MegaRAID Advanced Software Options enable special functionality or features that may not be available in the stand configuration of the controller Benefits of each MegaRAID Advanced Software Opti Activated MegaRAID Advanced Software Options Advanced Software Option License MegaRAID FastPath Unlimited MegaRAID Recovery lUnlimited MegaRAID CacheCade Unlimited MegaRAID SafeStore lUnlimited MegaRAID RAID6 Unlimited You will be prompted to provide the below Safe ID and Serial Number on the LSI Advanced Software License Managen Portal in order to obtain the Activation Key that enables the MegaRAID Advanced Software Options LSI Advanced Software License Management Portal Safe ID FNP WiW2FHSBNBINNGISSRCVC3HKC 7LBEPPHCCSHIZ Serial Number 5R91500071 Tips on activating MegaRAID Advanced Software Options Figure 200 Manage MegaRAID Advanced Software Options The Activated MegaRAID Advanced Software
468. rt the tog pegasus server execute the following command etc init d tog pegasus restart To start LsiSASSever execute the following command etc init d LsiSASd restart The following procedure describes how to install and un install the LSI CIM SAS Storage Provider on a system running on a Windows operating system Perform the following steps to install a CIM SAS Storage Provider on a Windows system Page 241 Chapter 6 MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation Installing and Configur MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide ing an SNMP Agent 6 7 Installing and Configuring an SNMP Agent 6 7 1 Prerequisite for LSI SNMP Agent RPM Installation 6 7 2 Installing and Configuring an SNMP Agent on Linux Page 242 1 GoTo DISK1 2 Run setup exe The installer installs all of the necessary files and the MOF and registers the COM dll The Provider is now ready to use Perform the following steps to uninstall a CIM SAS Storage Provider on a Windows system 1 Go to Control Panel gt Add Remove Program 2 Remove the LSI WMI SAS Provider Package This step removes all of the necessary files uninstalls the MOF and unregisters the COM dll The SAS Provider is no longer on the system A Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP based management application can monitor and manage devices through SNMP extension agents The MegaRAID SNMP subagent reports the information about the RAID controller virtual drives
469. rtual drives fo Enter Snapshot Name Sat Select Base Virtual Drives Figure 99 Create Snapshots Screen 4 Enter a snapshot name in the Enter Snapshot Name field 5 Select the Snapshot Base virtual drives on which you want to create concurrent snapshots 6 Click Create Snapshot This creates a snapshot with same name and the same timestamp on all of the selected Snapshot Base virtual drives You can use the Snapshot Settings screen to perform the following actions m Take a snapshot on reboot This action takes a snapshot of the virtual drive when you reboot after every successful system shutdown This feature is mainly intended to take a snapshot of boot virtual drives to allow the operating system to be restored in case of corruption Enable automatic deletion of a snapshot This action deletes the oldest snapshot automatically and lets you create a new snapshot Follow these steps to enable the snapshot settings 1 Click a virtual drive icon in the right panel on the WebBIOS CU main screen The Virtual Drive screen appears as shown in Figure 100 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Using MegaRAID Recovery MegaRAID BIOS Config Utility Virtual Drive 8 SIs TO oe ae a eye Properties RAID Level 1 Status Optimal Strip Size 64 KB Capacity 232 3
470. ru In Writethrough mode the controller sends a data transfer completion signal to the host when the drive subsystem has received all of the data ina transaction This is the default Bad BBU Select this mode if you want the controller to use Writeback mode but the controller has no BBU or the BBU is bad If you do not choose this option the controller firmware automatically switches to Writethrough mode if it detects a bad or missing BBU CAUTION LSI allows Writeback mode to be used with or without a battery To protect the entire system LSI recommends that you use either a battery to protect the controller cache or a UPS If you do not use a battery or a UPS and there is a power failure you risk losing the data in the controller cache 10 Policy The IO Policy applies to reads on a specific virtual drive The policy does not affect the read ahead cache Direct In Direct I O mode reads are not buffered in cache memory Data is transferred to the cache and the host concurrently If the same data block is read again the block comes from cache memory This setting is the default Cached In Cached I O mode all reads are buffered in cache memory Drive Policy Specify the drive cache policy Enable Enable the drive cache Disable Disable the drive cache NoChange Leave the current drive cache policy as is This setting is the default Disable BGI Specify the background initialization status No Leave background initiali
471. rval You can start battery learning cycles manually or automatically The Auto Learn modes are BBU Auto Learn Firmware tracks the time since the last learning cycle and performs a learn cycle when due Page 135 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Expanding a Virtual Drive MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide BBU Auto Learn Disabled Firmware does not monitor or initiate a learning cycle You can schedule learning cycles manually BBU Auto Learn Warn Firmware warns about a pending learning cycle You can initiate a learning cycle manually After the learning cycle is complete firmware resets the counter and warns you when the next learning cycle time is reached Perform the following steps to choose an auto learn mode a Open the drop down menu in the Auto Learn Mode field b Select an auto learn mode c Click Go to set the auto learn mode NOTE When you replace the iBBU the charge cycle counter is reset automatically 4 9 Expanding a Virtual Drive You can increase the size of a virtual drive to occupy the remaining capacity in a drive cA group In addition you can add drives to the virtual drive in order to increase capacity Follow these steps to expand a virtual drive 1 Access the Virtual Drive screen by clicking a virtual drive icon in the right panel on the WebBlOS CU main screen The Virtual Drive screen appears as shown in Figure 90 negaRAID BIOS Config Utility Controller Information LS
472. ry Controller BIOS F Disk Activity Manage Pi Figure 117 Controller Properties Manage Powersave option 4 Click the Manage Powersave option The Power Save Setting screen appears as shown in the following figure LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 167 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility WebBIOS Dimmer Switch MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Specify the power save setting below if Spin Down E Unconfigured dris mj Hot spare driv Configured dr Figure 118 Power Save Setting 5 Select all the check boxes to go to the following screen Page 168 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility WebBIOS Dimmer Switch Drive standby tine 30 Mins that if i ified time then the Select power save node Auto r side the best power r Max This t t Ll save maximum power by drives when possible x without cache I oY res that the sy rill save maximum power Figure 119 Power Save Setting Check boxes 6 Click Finish The Confirmation message as shown in Figure 121 appears In the Power Save Setting screen Figure 118 if you select all the check boxes except the configured drives then the following screen appears Figure 120 Power Save Setting except Configured Drive 7 Under the Specify the power save setting below field in
473. s When you scan a foreign configuration and if any of the foreign LKM secured locked drives prompt you to enter a security key assuming that the drive security is enabled on the controller the following wizard appears AID BIOS Config Utility Unlock Foreign Figure 112 Import Foreign Drives in EKM or LKM mode The Locked drives field displays the locked physical drives and their corresponding security key identifiers You must enter the drive security key in the Security Key field When you scan a foreign configuration and if you import foreign drives in LKM mode when EKM secured locked drives are present the following wizard appears One or nore foreic rives are locked using external key manag ent EKM In order to import the ves you nust switch to external key managenent EKM mode Figure 113 Import Foreign Drives in LKM mode Page 161 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Managing Configurations MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 4 12 8 Migrating the RAID Level of a Virtual Drive Page 162 As the amount of data and the number of drives in your system increase you can use RAID level migration to change a virtual drive from one RAID level to another You do not have to power down or restart the system When you migrate a virtual drive you can keep the same number of drives or you can add drives You can use the WebBIOS CU to migrate the RAID level of an existing virtual drive NOTE While you
474. s You can scan preview import and clear foreign configurations NOTE The actual status of virtual drives and drives can differ from the information displayed in the Scan option LSI suggests that you run Preview before you import a foreign configuration Table 69 Manage Foreign Configuration Information Convention MegaCli CfgForeign Scan SecurityKey sssssssssss Dsply x SecurityKey sssssssssss Preview x SecurityKey sssssssssss Import x SecurityKey sssssssssss Clear x SecurityKey sssssssssss aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Manages foreign configurations The options for this command are Scan Scans and displays available foreign configurations SecurityKey This is a key based on a user provided string The controller uses the security key to lock and unlock access to the secure user data This key is encrypted into the security key blob and stored on the controller If the security key is unavailable user data is irretrievably lost You must be careful to never lose the security key Preview Provides a preview of the imported foreign configuration The foreign configuration ID FID is optional Dsply Displays the foreign configuration Import Imports the foreign configuration The FID is optional Clear FID Clears the foreign configuration The FID is optional LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 197 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool V
475. s In Figure 6 RAID 1 drive groups are turned into a RAID 10 drive group NOTE Make sure that the spans are in different backplanes so that if one span fails you do not lose the whole drive group l N N al AN I I V1 l z z I ZA I V1 l I V1 I 60 GB 60 GB Li 60 GB i I V1 l Can Be Accessed as I Can Be Accessed as i l One 120 GB Drive i One 120 GB Drive l Re a A ee ees PENG ar ae a ee ee ed ee Figure 6 Example of Disk Spanning Spanning two contiguous RAID 0 virtual drives does not produce a new RAID level or add fault tolerance It does increase the capacity of the virtual drive and improves performance by doubling the number of spindles Table 3 describes how to configure RAID 00 RAID 10 RAID 50 and RAID 60 by spanning The virtual drives must have the same stripe size and the maximum number of spans is eight The full drive capacity is used when you span virtual drives you cannot specify a smaller drive capacity See Chapter 8 Configuration for detailed procedures for configuring drive groups and virtual drives and spanning the drives Table 3 Spanning for RAID 10 RAID 50 and RAID 60 Level Description 00 Configure RAID 00 by spanning two contiguous RAID 0 virtual drives up to the maximum number of supported devices for the controller 10 Configure RAID 10 by spanning two contiguous RAID 1 virtual drives up to the maximum number of supported devices for the controller RAID 10 supports a maximum of
476. s to make sure these ports are open and to configure multicasting 1 Configure the system with a valid Internet Protocol IP address Make sure there is no IP address conflict within the sub network and make sure that ports 3071 and 5571 are open and available for MSM framework communication 2 Disable all security management and the firewall 3 Configure multicasting Make sure Class D multicast IP addresses are registered at least 229 111 112 12 should be registered for MSM to work if they are not registered create a static route using the following command Route add 229 111 112 12 dev ethl 4 Install MSM If MSM is already installed restart MSM framework This section explains how to install or reinstall MegaRAID Storage Manager software on your workstation or server for the supported operating systems Microsoft Windows Red Hat Linux and SUSE Linux The MSM installation script also installs the LSI SNMP agent RPM Red Hat Package Manager The LSI SNMP agent application depends upon the standard SNMP Utils package Make sure that the SNMP Util package is present in the system before you install MSM LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 6 MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation Installing MegaRAID Storage Manager The SNMP Util package includes the RPM s net snmp libs net snmp utils and additional dependent RPM s Make sure that these RPM s are install
477. s Ldr S WIO Coda Pato 3 Q St Q S 167 A Orive Q Wh 2 HS WHINE Orire PSE 4 SHS 08 36 Vreantqgaed Good DY SES SAS 48 16 G rcorhgred Good Power P G Sh 6 BS WHINE orged Good Port P Rt 1 HS Mb B reentigaed Good P G Set A BS Bb G reerkgaed Good Power Q G It BS RINE roxtigeed Good Pome OY S80 SAS SENE B Ureartigaed Good Pome Bs 2 72 etort aint Fol Figure 139 Physical Drive Temperature LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 7 MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus MegaRAID Storage Manager Main Menu The following icons in the left panel represent the controllers drives and other devices Status Oa System E y Controller 1 Backplane T Enclosure pory Port RAID Drive group A g Virtual drive T g Online drive 4 Power save mode Dedicated hot spare ey p a Global hot spare _ Battery backup unit BBU z Tape drive N CD ROM Foreign Drive Me Unconfigured Foreign Drive Unconfigured Drive NOTE MegaRAID Storage Manager shows the icons for tape drive devices however no tape related operations are supported by the utility If these operations are required use a separate backup application A red circle to the right of an icon indicates that the device has failed For example this icon indicates that a drive has failed
478. sesaca cies dx sive te serene EEA EEE wo aE paren eae sae ames ehanaau ced Nd va TE Ree Foe cuaNees 296 9 2 1 Setting Alert Delivery Methods 0 cece cece cece ce nen ene nee eden e edn ene eee nent ete n ete ene t ne nnee 298 9 2 2 Changing Alert Delivery Methods for Individual Events cece cece eee ence ene e eens nee e ene eneeneenes 298 9 2 3 Changing the Severity Level for Individual Events 0 cece eee cece ee eee nee e ete n eee e eee e ene eneenennes 299 9 2 4 Multiple Events Displayed in a Single Pop up Window 6 0c cece eee e cece eee eee e cnet e eens eee e ee eneenennee 300 9 2 5 Entering or Editing the Sender E mail Address and SMTP Server 0c cece cece eee e ene e eee eee eneeeeneeneenes 300 9 2 6 Authenticating a Server ci cscpen iania en aere ORERE OENE nn do adeewe ngs aaah ada EEEE ERT ens 301 9 2 7 Saving Backup Config ratioNS sssecsikriireniae ietan a r E a E AAE 301 9 2 8 Loading Backup Configurations saesson eeni ren AEN a EEEE EET RENEE EEE EE DTE ens 302 9 2 9 Adding E mail Addresses of Recipients of Alert Notifications 0 cc cece eee cece nee e eee teen eee eneeneenes 302 9 2 10 Testing E mail Addresses of Recipients of Alert Notifications 0 0 c cece cece eect eee e eee e eee neneeeeeees 303 9 2 11 Removing E mail Addresses of Recipients of Alert Notifications 0 cece eee ence ence een e eee ne teenies 303 9 3 Monitoring Co
479. siale sa acim Oa 47 3 2 PUNPOSE and Benefits oyilenieassice de daaniceneautn eeah ENEE REEE E ERRA saad EAEE A eh adele een T E ema es 47 3 3 TerminOlOgy ci cugsseranddiarncneadadel gare uecisas dee a canensepedadss wstns Cones dcye ADRE E EO AERIENE EOAR 48 SA WOIKOW borroner ena E N oeeken sauige san E Cen EE deed EE dsm EEO A 48 34 Enable Security seesi iener came deena aT A ween sand deine EE E DEEE E EE EEEE EEA 48 3 42 Change Security cgcecs ionian E OEE AE RE ANE eee maa say MEO Maeda EEEE A 49 34 3 Create Secure Virtual Drives as ssscsi aso nies noi osas EE EENE A EEE EERTSE EEE ENTERT EA 49 3 4 4 Import a Foreign Configuration sssessssssesssreesesrerrssrrrrrerrrsererresereesssrrereseeerrereerreerers 50 3 5 Instant Secure Erassica E a E TETTE E ENEA OEE E EE ETE E A ENAA 50 Chapter 4 WebBIOS Configuration Utility Lounaan nen enunerennnerrsrnrrrorrrrrsrrrrrerrrrrrerrrreerrrrreerrrreerrerrreren 53 AA OVGIVIEW 5 3 ririo EE EAE NE T dal E E E OTE E AE EE EEE E E I ET 53 4 2 Starting the WebBIOS CUsesceniar aeaa E E NAE E E E A PAER E E E AE ENA EER EEA els 53 4 3 WebBIOS CU Main Screen Options sssennessssnerssrrressorrssererrserereererssererrsererrrerrerreererreererrrereerroren 54 4 4 Managing Software Licensing ueser creona iE hte seals cue Suey edealesy E aoa Ea A EEEE EE Pda elon eens 56 4 4 1 Managing MegaRAID Advanced Software Options 0 cece eee cece rene nen eet e nee e teen ene eneeeeeeee 56
480. snapshot at s for s 0x0160 Information View at s is deleted to snapshot at s for s 0x0161 Information Snapshot rollback started on s from snapshot at s 0x0162 Fatal Snapshot rollback on s internally aborted for snapshot at s 0x0163 Information Snapshot rollback on s completed for snapshot at s 0x0164 Information Snapshot rollback progress for snapshot at s on s is s 0x0165 Warning Snapshot space for s in snapshot repository s is 80 full Page 383 Appendix A Events and Messages Page 384 Event Messages MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Table 135 Event Messages Continued Number Type Event Text 0x0166 Critical Snapshot space for s in snapshot repository s is full 0x0167 Warning View at s to snapshot at s is 80 full on snapshot repository s 0x0168 Critical View at s to snapshot at s is full on snapshot repository s 0x0169 Critical Snapshot repository lost for s 0x016a Warning Snaphot repository restored for s 0x016b Critical Snapshot encountered an unexpected internal error Ox lx 0x016c Information Auto Snapshot enabled on s snapshot repository s 0x016d Information Auto Snapshot disabled on s snapshot repository s 0x016e Critical Configuration command could not be committed to disk please retry 0x01 6f Information COD on s updated as it was stale 0x0170 Warning Power state
481. stem If you do not use a battery or a UPS and there is a power failure you risk losing the data in the controller cache 10 Policy The IO Policy applies to reads on a specific virtual drive It does not affect the read ahead cache Direct In Direct I O mode reads are not buffered in cache memory Data is transferred to the cache and the host concurrently If the same data block is read again it comes from cache memory This is the default Cached In Cached I O mode all reads are buffered in cache memory Drive Policy Specify the drive cache policy Enable Enable the drive cache Disable Disable the drive cache NoChange Leave the current drive cache policy as is This drive policy is the default Disable BGI Specify the background initialization status No Leave background initialization enabled This means that a new configuration can be initialized in the background while you use WebBIOS to do other configuration tasks This is the default Yes Select Yes if you do not want to allow background initializations for configurations on this controller Select Size Specify the size of the virtual drive in megabytes Normally this would be the full size for RAID 10 shown in the configuration panel on the right You can specify a smaller size if you want to create other virtual drives on the same drive group LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 4 WebBlO
482. still damaged continue to select from the next most current PiT to the oldest You can enable the Recovery advanced software in MSM When you enable Recovery you create two virtual drives one as a Snapshot Base or a source and the other as a Snapshot Repository The base virtual drive contains the data that is stored in the repository virtual drive Follow these steps to enable MegaRAID Recovery 1 Select the Logical tab on the main menu screen for the Logical view 2 Select and highlight a virtual drive from the list of virtual drives This is the Snapshot Base virtual drive NOTE A Base virtual drive and a Repository virtual drive can be associated with the same drives or a common set of drives or the two virtual drives can be located on two completely separate set of drives Using a separate set of drives for the Base virtual drive and the Repository virtual drives provides a performance advantage over using a common set of drives 3 Select Go To gt Virtual Drive gt Enable MegaRAID Recovery on the menu bar as shown in Figure 216 Page 333 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software Recovery Advanced Software MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 11 2 13 Snapshot Repository Page 334 3 MegaRAID Storage Manager 6 50 1000 Manage GoTo Log Tools Help Controller Drive Group gt Physical Drive gt Teme Rename Virtual Drive Delete Virtual Drive Set Virtual Drive Properties Physical og 1
483. t Server to install only those components required for remote server management To begin installation click on Install on the next screen that appears Select StandAlone if you will use MegaRAID Storage Manager software to create and manage storage configurations on a standalone workstation To begin installation click on Install on the next screen that appears Select Custom if you want to specify individual program features to install If you select Custom a window listing the installation features appears as shown in Figure 129 Select the features you want on this screen LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 231 Chapter 6 MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation Storage Manager 6 4 3 Installing MegaRAID Storage Manager for SPARC Page 232 Installing MegaRAID ie MegaRAID Storage Manager 2 13 00 InstallShield Wizard Custom Setup Select the program features you want installed Click on an icon in the list below to change how a feature is installed Er Client M GUI B 63 z Server SE Feature Description Framework Plugins Monitor tional Utilities E This feature requires OKB on your hard drive It has 1 of 1 amp This feature will be installed on local hard drive 8 This feature and all subfeatures will be installed on local hard drive coe y ier il be installed to run from network C Program Fie is Feat
484. ta changes to the volume and if data is deleted accidentally or maliciously restore the data from the view or roll back to a snapshot at a previous point in time PiT MegaRAID Recovery supports up to eight snapshots of PiTs for each volume Disk Activity Enable this property if you want to locate a particular disk This disk can be identified with a continuous blinking of green activity LED This works only if the disks are installed in a enclosure Manage JBOD Converting the multiple JBOD drives to unconfigured drive at single selection If you make changes to the options on this screen click Submit to register them If you change your mind click Reset to return the options to their default values LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 129 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Viewing and Changing Device Properties MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 4 8 2 Viewing Virtual Drive Properties Policies and Operations Page 130 WebBIOS displays properties policies and operations for virtual drives To view these items for the currently selected virtual drive click on a virtual drive icon in the right panel on the WebBIOS CU main screen The Virtual Drive screen appears as shown in Figure 85 wegaRAID BIOS Config Utility Controller Information LSI MegaRAID SAS 9268 81 Serial Number SV I0 FRU SubVendor ID Jx1LO0C Drive Security Capable SubDevicelD K921 Drive curity Enabled
485. te Configuration File cece ccc cece nen een e eee e eens nent ee eeeenenee 218 5 21 FastPath related OPTIONS ici jcdshe voces siritt EEE EEE ay EE E vim det pce rabece aaoliAG E RE eluant Me odie Scene E one wee 218 5 22 Dimmer Switch Related Options 0 cece cece cen n een Ene Een E REE EEE dene Ene een eden eee tbe Een S 219 5 22 1 Display Selected Adapter Properties 0 cece cece cece ee nee tnt nde eben ene e eens b eee eet e eee enee 219 5 22 2 Sets the Properties on the Selected Adapter 0 cece cece cece ere nen eee e eee ene eet b ene ee eee ee een enee 220 5 22 3 Displays the Power Saving Level on the Virtual Disk 0 cece eee cence eect eee e ene n eee ee ee eenenee 220 5 22 4 Displays about Adding a RAID Level to a Specified Adapter 0 cece cece ete n eee e ene n eee n ee eenenee 221 5 22 5 Displays creating a RAID Level sicsciseace renin nerie dhaccend cee EENE EEA EENE EEEE EEE E vines 221 5 22 6 Displays about Adding the Unconfigured Drive to a Specified Adapter 0 cece cece cece nee e ence nee eees 223 5 22 7 Displays the cache and access policies 2 cece eee eee nee ne nee ene dete ete n tent eben eee ee eeeenenee 224 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 7 Table of Contents MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 5 23 Miscellaneous OPtiONS i5ccacenstad ca eana anemone deans Gamneea eens enamcaa means baalegma ewe sn a E nna neuen we
486. te access This is the default Read Only Allow read only access Blocked Do not allow access Page 262 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 8 1 2 Optimum Controller settings for CacheCade 8 1 3 Optimum Controller settings for FastPath 8 1 4 Creating a Virtual Drive Using Simple Configuration LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 8 Configuration Creating a New Storage Configuration Disk cache policy Select a cache setting for this drive Enabled Enable the disk cache Disabled Disable the disk cache Unchanged the default Leave the current disk cache policy unchanged Write Policy Write Back IO Policy Cached IO Read Policy No Read Ahead Stripe Size 64 KB Write Policy Write Through IO Policy Direct lO Read Policy No Read Ahead Stripe Size 64 KB Simple configuration is the quickest and easiest way to create a new storage configuration When you select simple configuration mode the system creates the best configuration possible using the available drives NOTE You cannot created spanned drives using the simple configuration procedure To create spanned drives use the advanced configuration procedure described in Section 8 1 5 Creating a Virtual Drive Using Advanced Configuration Follow these steps to create a new storage configuration in simple configuration mode 1 Perform either of the following steps a
487. te to Unconfigured Good 5 15 5 Change the Drive State LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Drive Related Options Use the command in the following table to change the state of a drive from Unconfigured Bad to Unconfigured Good Table 89 Change Drive State to Unconfigured Good Convention Description MegaCli PDMakeGood PhysDrv E0 S0 E1 S1 Force aN a0 1 2 aALL Changes the drive state to Unconfigured Good Physdrv E0 S0 Specifies the physical drive enclosure and the slots for the drives Force Force the drive to the Unconfigured Good state Use the command in the following table to change the drive state as it relates to hot Spares and to associate the drive to an enclosure and to a drive group for the selected controller s Table 90 Change Drive State Convention MegaCli PDHSP Set Dedicated ArrayN Array0O 1 EnclAffinity nonRevertible Rmv PhysDrv E0 S0 E1 S1 aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Changes the drive state as it relates to hot spares and associates the drive to an enclosure and virtual drive on a single controller multiple controllers or all controllers Set Changes the drive state to dedicated hot spare for the enclosure Array0 Dedicates the hot spare to a specific drive group number N EnclAffinity Associates the hot spare to a selected e
488. tence teen ene eee cnet entree tent eens 178 5 6 Software License Key ss cgssieisiciacda sama ieser TAE auld aw ss EREE ehatieeaelelsie a eadnld paciemmegial ne deta dlelell ay na ag weeidlewlelse sae 178 5 7 SafeStore Security Options ser reussit nere ine gane be velar she eae es ma sleialedacan de Warmer game e eh aia sea E TENERE onde 179 5 7 1 Use Instant Secure Erase on a Physical Drive 0 cece cece ccc ene ene een e eect eee n eens n eee nee eenenee 179 5 7 2 Secure Data ona Virtual Drive s icc ccdela ete nad ani a kennn ec edenag hae oametnes hanes EEE E A TE aR 179 5 7 3 Destroy the Security Key cires niori reraton is E EAEE da ARAE RENERE EREA eae dilegnd soa ES 180 5 7 A Qreate a Security Key seisrerrerne ti tet tien a ETRS NEEE EOE ENAA EE EEOAE 180 5 79 Drive Security Key nerne iee E A E TERO N E E A A E E E ange eke me dss 180 57 6 Change the Security Key aise sun saleas enwteaenued Sent nE aa ed E ETE Fash ao PORTA E E EEA ERE EEEE 181 5 7 7 Get the Security Key Dorru noni E AAEE EERE EE UIE EEEE RA 181 5 7 8 Set the Security Key lD s rerne reneisse nirea eia a a OA ERENT ERE AAE E A 181 5 7 9 Verify the Security Key si sdasewkennedcis cinie ia deca scave eves sede EEE E A E EE we ERE EE NEERA 182 5 8 Controller Property Related Options cece e cece ene nnn ene n ene En EEE EEE dete Ene een en ene eet een EES 182 5 8 1 Display Controller Properties 0 cc cece cence eee ne nen nen A EEEE EEA EREE E eee
489. tents of entire drives However it requires extra capacity because a RAID 60 virtual drive has to generate two sets of parity data for each write operation This makes RAID 2 7 RAID Availability 2 7 1 RAID Availability Concept 2 7 1 1 Spare Drives Page 44 Data availability without downtime is essential for many types of data processing and storage systems Businesses want to avoid the financial costs and customer frustration associated with failed servers RAID helps you maintain data availability and avoid downtime for the servers that provide that data RAID offers several features such as spare drives and rebuilds that you can use to fix any drive problems while keeping the servers running and data available The following subsections describe these features You can use spare drives to replace failed or defective drives in a drive group A replacement drive must be at least as large as the drive it replaces Spare drives include hot swaps hot spares and cold swaps A hot swap is the manual substitution of a replacement unit in a disk subsystem for a defective one where the substitution can be performed while the subsystem is running performing its normal functions The backplane and enclosure must support hot swap in order for the functionality to work Hot spare drives are drives that power up along with the RAID drives and operate in a standby state If a drive used in a RAID virtual drive fails a hot spare automa
490. teps until you have selected all of the drive groups that you want 16 Click Next The Virtual Drive Definition screen appears as shown in Figure 46 You use this screen to select the RAID level strip size read policy and other attributes for the new virtual drives 17 Hold lt Ctrl gt while you select drive groups in the Configuration panel on the right LSI Corporation Confidential l September 2010 Page 87 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Creating a Storage Configuration MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide RiegaRAID BIOS Config Utility Config Wizard Drive Group Definition Drives rive Groups 1 f z Enclosure 1D1000125 Slot 1 SAS gt Drive Groupi i Enclosure MD1000 25 Slot 2 SAS Enclosure MND1000 25 Slot 3 SAS Figure 46 WebBIOS Virtual Drive Definition Screen 18 Change the virtual drive options from the defaults listed on the screen as needed Here are brief explanations of the virtual drive options RAID Level The drop down menu lists the possible RAID levels for the virtual drive Select RAID 00 Strip Size The strip size is the portion of a stripe that resides on a single drive in the drive group The stripe consists of the data segments that the RAID controller writes across multiple drives not including parity drives For example consider a stripe that contains 64 KB of drive space and has 16 KB of data residing on each drive in the stripe In this case the s
491. tes at shutdown 0x008d Information Battery Present 0x008e Warning Battery Not Present Ox008f Information New Battery Detected 0x0090 Information Battery has been replaced 0x0091 Critical Battery temperature is high 0x0092 Warning Battery voltage low 0x0093 Information Battery started charging 0x0094 Information Battery is discharging 0x0095 Information Battery temperature is normal 0x0096 Fatal Battery has failed and cannot support data retention Please replace the battery 0x0097 Information Battery relearn started 0x0098 Information Battery relearn in progress Page 377 Appendix A Events and Messages Page 378 Event Messages MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Table 135 Event Messages Continued Number Type Event Text 0x0099 Information Battery relearn completed 0x009a Critical Battery relearn timed out 0x009b Information Battery relearn pending Battery is under charge 0x009c Information Battery relearn postponed 0x009d Information Battery relearn will start in 4 days 0x009e Information Battery relearn will start in 2 day 0x009f Information Battery relearn will start in 1 day 0x00a0 Information Battery relearn will start in 5 hours 0x00a1 Information Battery removed 0x00a2 Information Current capacity of the battery is below threshold 0x00a3 Information Current capacity of the battery is abov
492. tes data across multiple drives instead of just one drive It involves partitioning each drive storage space into stripes that can vary in size RAID 0 is ideal for applications that require high bandwidth but do not require fault tolerance 1 Provides complete data redundancy If one drive fails the contents of the other drive in the drive group can be used to run the system and reconstruct the failed drive The primary advantage of disk mirroring is that it provides 100 percent data redundancy Since the contents of the drive are completely written to a second drive no data is lost if one of the drives fails Both drives contain the same data at all times RAID 1 is ideal for any application that requires fault tolerance and minimal capacity 5 Combines distributed parity with disk striping Parity provides redundancy for one drive failure without duplicating the contents of entire drives If a drive fails the RAID controller uses the parity data to reconstruct all missing information In RAID 5 this method is applied to entire drives or stripes across all drives in a drive group Using distributed parity RAID 5 offers fault tolerance with limited overhead 6 Combines distributed parity with disk striping RAID 6 can sustain two drive failures and still maintain data integrity Parity provides redundancy for two drive failures without duplicating the contents of entire drives If a drive fails the RAID controller uses the parity data to reco
493. that you want to change the drive security settings MSM updates the existing configuration on the controller to use the new security settings and returns you to the main menu 11 5 11 Disabling Drive Security NOTE If you disable drive security your existing data is not secure and you cannot create any new secure virtual drives Disabling drive security does not affect the security of data on foreign drives If you removed any drives that were previously secured you still need to enter the password when you import them Otherwise you cannot access the data on those drives NOTE If there are any secure drive groups on the controller you cannot disable drive security A warning screen appears if you attempt to do so To disable drive security you must first delete the virtual drives on all of the secure drive groups Page 368 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software LSI SafeStore Encryption Services Perform the following steps to disable drive security 1 Select the Physical View tab in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager main menu and click a controller icon 2 Select Go To gt Controller gt Disable Drive Security as shown in Figure 256 MegaRAID Storage Manager 6 90 0100 Manage GoTo Log Tools Help e Disable Alarm Drive Group Silence Alarm Physical Drive b Start Patrol Read Virtual Drive gt Set Patrol Read Pr
494. the enclosure from blinking select Go To gt Physical Drive gt Stop Locating Drive The drive properties are defined in the Glossary To display a graphical view of a drive click a drive icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window and click the Graphical View tab In Graphical View the drive s storage capacity is color coded according to the legend shown on the screen configured space is blue available space is white and reserved space is red When you select a virtual drive from the drop down menu the drive space used by that virtual drive is displayed in green 9 5 Running a Patrol Read A patrol read periodically verifies all sectors of drives connected to a controller An dncluding the system reserved area in the RAID configured drives A patrol read can be used for all RAID levels and for all hot spare drives This operation is initiated only when the controller is idle for a defined time period and has no other background activities You can set the patrol read properties and start the patrol read operation or you can start the patrol read without changing the properties To set the patrol read properties and then start a patrol read follow these steps 1 Click a controller icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager main menu 2 Select Go To gt Controller gt Set Patrol Read Properties MegaRAID Storage Manager 6 90 0100 Manage GoTo Log Tools Help e Disable Alarm Drive Group Silen
495. the password entered and confirmed on this screen Enable Drive Security Enter Security Key Details Security Key Identifier Security key identifier Specify a security key identifier The controller has provided a default identifier For you You may MRS260 8i_SV95205666_13329828 use this string or enter your own identifier If you have multiple security keys the identifier will help you determine which security key to enter Security Key The security key will be used to lock each self encrypted drive attached to the controller Security key For maximum security use thirty two varied characters you may optionally choose for the system ii6geCpUFKRWk2ghw49kezDoq96kjbSI tosuggest a strong securty key Confirm Note fiegeCpUFKRwk2ghw49ke2Doq96kjbSI The security key is case sensitive and must be between eight and thirty two characters and contain at least one number one lowercase letter one uppercase letter and one non alphanumeric character e g gt Password JV Pause for password at boot time Optionally you may enter a pass word to provide additional security IF you choose Pause for password at boot time you must enter it whenever you boot your server Enforce strong password security Password Note Pree The password is case sensitive and must be between eight and thirty two characters Confirm If enforce strong password security is selected then password field should c
496. the virtual drive parameters and factory defaults Use the command in the following table to display parameters for the selected controller s Table 37 Controller Parameters Convention MegaCli AdpAllinfo aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Displays information about the controller including cluster state BIOS alarm firmware version BIOS version battery charge counter value rebuild rate bus number device number present RAM memory size serial number of the board and SAS address Use the command in the following table to display the number of controllers supported on the system Table 38 Number of Controllers Supported Convention MegaCli AdpCount Displays the number of controllers supported on the system and returns the number to the operating system Description Use the command in the following table to turn automatic rebuild on or off for the selected controller s If you have configured hot spares and enabled automatic rebuild the RAID controller automatically tries to use them to rebuild failed drives Automatic rebuild also controls whether a rebuild starts when a drive that was part of the drive group is reinserted Table 39 Enable or Disable Automatic Rebuild Convention MegaCli AdpAutoRbld Enbl1 Dsbl Dsply aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Enables or disables automatic rebuild on the selected controller s The Dsply option shows the status of the automatic rebuild state
497. ther path can be used to communicate between the controller and the device Using multiple paths with load balancing instead of a single path can increase reliability through redundancy A virtual drive property indicating the user assigned name of the virtual drive A RAID 0 virtual drive with data striped across two or more drives but without drive mirroring or parity This provides for high data throughput but offers no protection in case of a drive failure Acronym for non volatile random access memory A storage system that does not lose the data stored on it when power is removed NVRAM is used to store firmware and configuration data on the RAID controller A controller property indicating whether an NVRAM is present on the controller A controller property indicating the capacity of the controller s NVRAM A drive is offline when it is part of a virtual drive but its data is not accessible to the virtual drive LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide patrol read patrol read rate product info product name RAID RAID O RAID 00 RAID 1 RAID 5 RAID 6 RAID 10 RAID 50 RAID 60 RAID level raw capacity LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Appendix C Glossary A process that checks the drives in a storage configuration for drive errors that could lead to drive failure and lost data The patrol read operation can find and sometimes fix any potential proble
498. tically takes its place and the data on the failed drive is rebuilt on the hot spare Hot spares can be used for RAID levels 1 5 6 10 50 and 60 NOTE Ifa rebuild to a hot spare fails for any reason the hot spare drive will be marked as failed If the source drive fails both the source drive and the hot spare drive will be marked as failed A cold swap requires that you power down the system before replacing a defective drive in a disk subsystem LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 2 8 2 9 2 9 1 2 7 1 2 Rebuilding Configuration Planning Number of Drives Drive Group Purpose LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 2 Introduction to RAID Configuration Planning If a drive fails in a drive group that is configured as a RAID 1 5 6 10 50 or 60 virtual drive you can recover the lost data by rebuilding the drive If you have configured hot spares the RAID controller automatically tries to use them to rebuild failed drives Manual rebuild is necessary if no hot spares with enough capacity to rebuild the failed drives are available You must insert a drive with enough storage into the subsystem before rebuilding the failed drive Factors to consider when planning a configuration are the number of drives the RAID controller can support the purpose of the drive group and the availability of spare drives Each type of data stored in the disk subsyst
499. tifier Page 364 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software LSI SafeStore Encryption Services 3 Use the default security key identifier or enter a new security key identifier NOTE If you create more than one security key make sure that you change the security key identifier Otherwise you cannot differentiate between the security keys 4 Click Suggest Security Key to have the system create a security key or you can enter a new security key 5 Enter the new security key again to confirm as shown in Figure 253 NOTE If you forget the security key you will lose access to your data Be sure to record your security key information You might need to enter the security key to perform certain operations The security key is case sensitive It must be between 8 and 32 characters and contain at least one number one lowercase letter one uppercase letter and one non alphanumeric character e g lt gt The space character is not permitted NOTE Non US keyboard users must be careful not to enter DBCS characters in the security key field Firmware works with the ASCII character set only Figure 253 shows the security key entered and confirmed on this screen Enable Drive Security Enter Security Key Details Controller LSI MegaRAID SAS 9260 8i Bus 2 Dev 0 Enabling drive security on this controller will have the option to create secure
500. tility Using MegaRAID Recovery The capacity is dependent on how write intensive the application is that you are taking snapshots of The available capacity is the largest free block of capacity on the Snapshot Repository virtual drive NOTE If you use all of the space of the Repository virtual drive there will be insufficient space to create a snapshot and a view CAUTION Copy all of your data to another virtual drive before you select this option If there is any existing data on this virtual drive it will be lost 7 Click Next The snapshot settings screen appears as shown in Figure 101 8 Click Finish A confirmation dialog box appears 9 Confirm that you want to make these selections This virtual drive becomes a snapshot repository Use it only for storing snapshot related data CAUTION After you enable snapshots on this virtual drive you cannot change the allocated percentage of capacity or the snapshot repository without first disabling snapshots and losing any snapshot data You can use WebBIOS to create up to eight snapshots of a volume WebBIOS shows the snapshots in chronological order from the oldest to the newest Each snapshot is a PiT snapshot of the virtual drive that is the Snapshot Base First create the Snapshot Base virtual drive and then create the snapshot After you create the snapshots you can create views of the PiT snapshots You can search the views to find a snapshot that does not contain the
501. time field 4 Click OK The drive active time for the configured drives is scheduled NOTE Select the Do not schedule drive active time check box if you do not want to schedule the drive active time The Dimmer Switch technology also allows the controller to automatically spun up the drives that are in Power Save mode Perform the following steps to arrive at the Manage Power Save Settings screen 1 Right click on Drive group gt Manage Power Settings The Manage Power Save Settings screen appears as shown in the following figure x LS a s gt Power save Dimmer Swatch technology that conserves energy by spinning down ide drives The controler wil automatically spin up those drives from power save mode whenever necessary Select power save mode w This option ensures that the system will save maximum power by caching data and avoid spinning up online drives when possible x _ cont Figure 163 Manage Power Save Settings Automatically Spin up 2 Select the Power Save mode from the drop down selector The values can be Max Max without cache Auto None and controller defined in the same order NOTE The Controller defined option enables the system to inherit the controller Power Save mode for online drives 3 Click OK The Power Save mode is saved The Power Save mode can be set during creation of the VD by using the Select power save mode field in the Create Drive Group Drive Group Settings scree
502. tinue 8 Click Yes to accept and complete the addition of the drives to the drive group 8 7 3 Removing a Drive froma CAUTION Be sure to back up the data on the virtual drive before you remove a drive Configuration from it Follow these steps to remove a drive from a RAID 1 RAID 5 or RAID 6 configuration NOTE This option is not available for RAID 0 configurations 1 Click the Logical tab in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager main menu screen 2 Click a drive icon in the left panel of the screen 3 Select Go To gt Physical Drive gt Make Drive Offline on the menu bar or right click the drive and select Make Drive Offline from the menu A confirmation message appears The message states that this operation cannot be aborted and asks whether you want to continue 4 Click Yes to accept and complete the removal of the drive from the drive group 8 7 4 Replacing a Drive CAUTION Be sure to back up the data on the virtual drive before you replace a drive Follow these steps to add a replacement drive and copy the data from the drive that was removed to the replacement drive 1 Click the Logical tab in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window Select a drive in the left panel of the window 3 Select Go To gt Physical Drive gt Replace Physical Drive on the menu bar or right click the virtual drive icon to access the Modify Drive Group Wizard The screen with the replacement drive appears as s
503. tion You can click an event to display the same information in a window For a list of all events see Appendix A Events and Messages Table 133 Event Severity Levels Severity Level Meaning Information Informational message No user action is necessary Warning Some component might be close to a failure point Critical A component has failed but the system has not lost data Fatal A component has failed and data loss has occurred or will occur Page 295 Chapter 9 Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices 9 2 Configuring Alert Notifications Page 296 Configuring Alert Notifications MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide The Log menu has four options Save Log Saves the current log toa logfile Save Log Text Saves the current log in txt format View Saved Log Enables you to load a local logfile Clear Log Clears the current log information You have the option of saving the log first The Alert Notification Configuration feature allows you to control and configure the alerts that MegaRAID Storage Manager software sends when various system events occur To access this screen select Tools gt Configure Alerts on the main menu screen as shown in Figure 179 MegaRAID Storage Manager 6 90 0100 Manage GoTo Log Tools Help eS G of Doge Alerts Figure 179 Alert Notification Configuration Menu The Alerts Notification Configuration screen appears as shown in Figure 180 The sc
504. to change any selections 7 Click Finish to accept the changes A confirmation message appears The message states that this operation cannot be aborted and asks whether you want to continue 8 Click Yes to accept and complete the migration to the new RAID level The operation begins on the virtual disk To monitor the progress of the RAID level change select Manage gt Show Progress in the menu bar When you insert a new drive on a MegaRAID system if the inserted drive does not contain valid DDF metadata the drive displays as JBOD for MegaRAID Entry level controllers such as the SAS 9240 4i 8i If the drive does contain valid DDF metadata its drive state is Unconfigured Good A new drive in JBOD drive state is exposed to the host operating system as a stand alone drive Drives in JBOD drive state are not part of the RAID configuration because they do not have valid DDF records The operating system can install and run anything on JBOD drives LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 8 8 Deleting a Virtual Drive LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 8 Configuration Deleting a Virtual Drive Automatic rebuilds always occur when the drive slot status changes for example when you insert a drive or remove a drive so that a hot spare can be used However a new drive in JBOD drive state without a valid DDF record does not perform an automatic rebuild To start an
505. to imported NOTE When you create a new configuration MSM shows only the unconfigured drives Drives that have existing configurations including foreign configurations will not appear To use drives with existing configurations you must first clear the configuration on those drives If one or more drives are removed from a configuration by a cable pull or drive removal for example the configuration on those drives is considered a foreign configuration by the RAID controller The following scenarios can occur with cable pulls or drive removals Use the Foreign Configuration Preview screen to import or clear the foreign configuration in each case NOTE If you want to import the foreign configuration in any of the following scenarios you should have all of the drives in the enclosure before you perform the import operation m Scenario 1 If all of the drives in a configuration are removed and re inserted the controller considers the drives to have foreign configurations Import or clear the foreign configuration If you select Import automatic rebuilds will occur in redundant virtual drives NOTE Start a consistency check immediately after the rebuild is complete to ensure data integrity for the virtual drives See Section 10 2 Running a Consistency Check for more information about checking data consistency m Scenario 2 If some of the drives in a configuration are removed and re inserted the controller considers the driv
506. tripe size is 64 KB and the strip size is 16 KB You can set the strip size to 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 and 1024 KB A larger strip size produces higher read performance If your computer regularly performs random read requests choose a smaller strip size The default is 64 KB Access Policy Select the type of data access that is allowed for this virtual drive RW Allow read write access Read Only Allow read only access This type of access is the default Blocked Do not allow access Read Policy Specify the read policy for this virtual drive Normal This option disables the read ahead capability This is the default Page 88 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 4 WebBIOS Configuration Utility Creating a Storage Configuration Ahead This option enables read ahead capability which allows the controller to read sequentially ahead of requested data and to store the additional data in cache memory anticipating that the data will be needed soon This speeds up reads for sequential data but there is little improvement when accessing random data Write Policy Specify the write policy for this virtual drive WBack In Writeback mode the controller sends a data transfer completion signal to the host when the controller cache has received all of the data ina transaction This setting is recommended in Standard mode WTh
507. trlBased Default Automatic None MaximumWithCaching MaximumWithoutCaching aN Description Adds all the unconfigured physical drives to RAID level 0 1 5 or 6 configuration to a specified adapter Even if no configuration is present you have the option to write the configuration to the adapter The possible parameters are Rx E0 SO Specifies the RAID level and the physical drive enclosure slot numbers to construct a disk array WT Write through WB Write back Selects write policy NORA No read ahead RA Read ahead ADRA Adaptive read ahead Selects read policy Cached Direct Selects cache policy CachedBadBBU NoCachedBadBBU J Specifies whether to use write cache when the BBU is bad SZXXXXXXXX Specifies the size for the virtual disk where XXXX is a decimal number of Mbytes However the actual size of the virtual disk may be smaller because the driver requires the number of blocks from the physical drives in each virtual disk to be aligned to the strip size If multiple size options are specified CT will configure the virtual disks in the order of the options entered in the command line The configuration of a particular virtual disk will fail if the remaining size of the array is too small to configure the virtual disk with the specified size This option can also be used to create a configuration on the free space available in the array strpszM Specifies the strip size where the strip s
508. tual Drive 2 698 125 GB Optimal Figure 93 Enable MegaRAID Recovery Screen 4 Select a virtual drive from the list of virtual drives in the Select Snapshot Repository drop down menu This is the Snapshot Repository virtual drive This drive stores the snapshot data Make sure you select a Snapshot Repository virtual drive with enough available capacity The available capacity is the largest free block of capacity on the selected repository NOTE A virtual drive and a Snapshot Repository virtual drive can be associated with the same drives or a common set of drives or the two virtual drives can be located on two completely separate set of drives Using a separate set of drives for the virtual drive and the Snapshot Repository virtual drives provides a performance advantage over using a common set of drives 5 Click the Update Capacity button to determine the available capacity of the selected repository CAUTION Do not select the virtual drive containing the operating system as the Snapshot Repository Updates to the operating system crashes can destroy data on that virtual drive 6 In the Allocated Capacity for snapshots field select the available capacity in the Snapshot Repository to use for changes to the virtual drive LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 4 10 3 Creating Snapshots and Views LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration U
509. tware User Guide Table 127 Creates a RAID Level 10 50 60 spanned Configuration Continued Description CfgSpanAdd Creates a RAID level 10 50 or 60 spanned configuration from the specified arrays Even if no configuration is present you must use this option to write the configuration to the adapter The possible parameters are Rx Spcecifies the RAID Level ArrayX E0 S0 Specifies the Array and the physical drive enclosure slot numbers to construct a disk array WT Write through WB Write back Selects write policy NORA No read ahead RA Read ahead ADRA Adaptive read ahead Selects read policy Cached Direct Selects cache policy CachedBadBBU NoCachedBadBBU Specifies whether to use write cache when the BBU is bad SZXXXXXXXX Specifies the size for the virtual disk where XXXX is a decimal number of Mbytes However the actual size of the virtual disk may be smaller because the driver requires the number of blocks from the physical drives in each virtual disk to be aligned to the stripe size If multiple size options are specified CT will configure the virtual disks in the order of the options entered in the command line The configuration of a particular virtual disk will fail if the remaining size of the array is too small to configure the virtual disk with the specified size This option can also be used to create a configuration on the free space available in the array strpszM Specifies the strip size whe
510. ty Q1 Q4 Segment 6 Segment 7 Segment 8 Parity P5 P8 Parity Q5 Q8 Segment 5 Segment 11 Segment 12 Parity P9 P12 Parity Q9 Q12 Segment 9 Segment 10 Segment 16 Parity P13 P16 Parity Q13 Q16 Segment 13 Segment 14 Segment 15 Parity P17 P20 Parity Q17 Q20 Segment 17 Segment 18 Segment 19 Segment 20 Note Parity is distributed across all drives in the drive group Figure 10 Example of Distributed Parity across Two Blocks in a Stripe RAID 6 2 5 7 RAID 00 A RAID 00 drive group is a spanned drive group that creates a striped set from a series of RAID 0 drive groups RAID 00 does not provide any data redundancy but along with RAID 0 does offer the best performance of any RAID level RAID 00 breaks up data into smaller segments and then stripes the data segments across each drive in the drive groups The size of each data segment is determined by the stripe size RAID 00 offers high bandwidth NOTE RAID level 00 is not fault tolerant If a drive in a RAID 0 drive group fails the whole virtual drive all drives associated with the virtual drive will fail By breaking up a large file into smaller segments the RAID controller can use both SAS drives and SATA drives to read or write the file faster RAID 00 involves no parity calculations to complicate the write operation This makes RAID 00 ideal for applications that require high bandwidth but do not require fault tolerance Table 11 provides an overview of RAID 00 Figure 11 prov
511. ty i Table 80 Display Virtual Drive and Drive Information Convention MegaCli LDPDInfo aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Displays information about the present virtual drive s and drive s on the selected controller s Displays information including the number of virtual drives the RAID level of the virtual drives and drive capacity information which includes raw capacity coerced capacity uncoerced capacity drive temperature enclosure position and the SAS address Use the command in the following table to display the number of virtual drives attached to the controller Table 81 Display Number of Virtual Drives Convention MegaCli LDGetNum aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Displays the number of virtual drives attached to the controller The return value is the number of virtual drives LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 5 14 11 Clear the LDBBM Table Entries 5 14 12 Display the List of Virtual Drives with Preserved Cache 5 14 13 Discard the Preserved Cache of a Virtual Drive s 5 14 14 Expand a Virtual Drive LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Command Tool Virtual Drive Related Options Use the command in the following table to clear the LDBBM table entries Table 82 Clear the LDBBM Table Entries Convention MegaCli LDBBMClr Lx L0O 1 2 Lall aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Clears the LDBBM
512. ty used View Detais There is no view for SNAP_11 37 13 Advancec Close Figure 228 No view present for the snapshot When there are virtual drives with no snapshot schedule the following message appears as shown in Figure 229 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 11 2 25 Creating Views LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software Recovery Advanced Software Manage Snapshot Schedules flax LSI K Schedule Frequency Next Snapshot Scheduled Virtual Drives June 1 12 00AM Virtual Drive 0 271 375 GB Optimal Virtual drives with no snapshot schedule Figure 229 Virtual drives with no snapshot schedule Click Add to Schedule to add a snapshot schedule Click New Schedule to add a new snapshot schedule After you create the snapshots you can create views of the PiT snapshots You can search the views to find a snapshot that does not contain the corrupt data or a snapshot that contains the deleted data depending on the situation Follow these steps to create views of the snapshots Click the Logical view on the main menu screen Click the Snapshot Base virtual drive in the left frame Click the Snapshots tab in the right frame This screen shows the Snapshot Base details and any existing snapshots 4 Click Create View in the right frame The Create View screen appears as s
513. u accept the configuration click Yes at the prompt to save the configuration The WebBIOS main menu appears In RAID 1 the RAID controller duplicates all data from one drive to a second drive RAID 1 provides complete data redundancy but at the cost of doubling the required data storage capacity It is appropriate for small databases or any other environment that requires fault tolerance but small capacity When you select Manual Configuration and click Next the Drive Group Definition screen appears You use this screen to select drives to create drive groups 1 Hold lt Ctrl gt while you select two ready drives in the Drives panel on the left You must select an even number of drives 2 Click Add To Array to move the drives to a proposed drive group configuration in the Drive Groups panel on the right as shown in Figure 35 3 If you need to undo the changes click Reclaim 4 Choose whether to use drive encryption NOTE A RAID 1 virtual drive can contain up to 16 drive groups and 32 drives in a single span Other factors such as the type of controller can limit the number of drives You must use two drives in each RAID 1 drive group in the span LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Creating a Storage Configuration Figure 35 WebBIOS Drive Group Definition Screen 5 After you finish selecting drives for the drive group click Accept
514. uency column Displays the frequency of the daily or weekly snapshot schedule LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 337 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software Recovery Advanced Software MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide The Next Snapshot column Displays the date and time of the next scheduled snapshot The Scheduled Virtual Drives column Represents the details of the default VDs present in the system Create new schedule This option allows you to create a new schedule to the VD Inthe Frequency field use the drop down selector to select the frequency of the snapshot daily or weekly Inthe Time field use the drop down selector to select the time of the scheduled snapshot Donot schedule any automatic snapshots This option prevents you from capturing automatic snapshots from the system 2 Click Next The Enable MegaRAID Recovery Editing Snapshot Properties wizard appears as shown in Figure 220 You can edit the settings for automatic snapshots 11 2 16 Editing Snapshots You can edit the property settings that are already defined for the automatic snapshots using the options as shown in the following figure Enable MegaRAID Recovery Optionally edit the advanced settings for automatic snapshots When at the snapshot limit Stop taking snapshots C Take a snapshot on every reboot recommended for boot virtual drives Figure 220 Enable MegaRAID Recovery Editin
515. uild on a drive and display Page 206 the rebuild progress When a drive in a RAID drive group fails you can rebuild the drive by recreating the data that was stored on the drive before it failed Table 92 Rebuild a Drive Convention MegaCli PDRbld Start Stop ShowProg ProgDsply PhysDrv E0 S0 E1 S1 aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Manages a drive rebuild or displays the rebuild progress on a single controller multiple controllers or all controllers Note that the drive must meet the capacity requirements before it can be rebuilt and it must be part of a drive group Start Starts a rebuild on the selected drive s and displays the rebuild progress optional St op Stops an ongoing rebuild on the selected drive s ShowP rog Displays the current progress percentage and time remaining for the rebuild This option is useful for running the application through scripts ProgDsply Displays the ongoing rebuild progress This routine displays the rebuild progress until at least one initialization is completed or a key is pressed Physdrv E0 S0 Specifies the physical drive enclosure and the slots for the drives LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 5 15 8 Locate the Drive s and Activate LED 5 15 9 Mark the Configured Drive as Missing 5 15 10 Display the Drives in Missing Status LSI Corporation Confidential
516. uilt Automatic rebuilds will occur in redundant virtual drives m Ifthe drives in a non redundant virtual drive are removed the controller considers the drives to have foreign configurations Import or clear the foreign configuration No rebuilds occur after the import operation because there is no redundant data to rebuild the drives with The LSI Integrated RAID solution simplifies the configuration options and provides firmware support in its host controllers LSI offers two types of Integrated RAID IR Integrated Mirroring IM and Integrated Striping IS You can import an IM or IS RAID configuration from an IR system into a MegaRAID system The MegaRAID system treats the IR configuration as a foreign configuration You can import or clear the IR configuration NOTE For more information about Integrated RAID refer to the Integrated RAID for SAS User s Guide You can find this document on the LSI web site at http www si com cm DownloadSearch do An IR virtual drive can have either 64 MB or 512 MB available for metadata at the end of the drive This data is in LSI Data Format LDF MegaRAID virtual drives have 512 MB for metadata at the end of the drive in the Disk Data Format DDF To import an IR virtual drive into MegaRAID the IR virtual drive must have 512 MB inthe metadata which is the same amount of megadata as in a MegaRAID virtual drive If the IR virtual drive has only 64 MB when you attempt to import it into MegaRAI
517. und initialization is a check for media errors on the drives when you create a virtual drive It is an automatic operation that starts five minutes after you create the virtual drive This check ensures that striped data segments are the same on all of the drives in the drive group Background initialization is similar to a consistency check The difference between the two is that a background initialization is forced on new virtual drives and a consistency check is not New RAID 5 virtual drives and new RAID 6 virtual drives require a minimum number of drives for a background initialization to start If there are fewer drives the background initialization does not start The following number of drives are required New RAID 5 virtual drives must have at least five drives for background initialization to start New RAID 6 virtual drives must have at least seven drives for background initialization to start The default and recommended background initialization rate is 30 percent Before you change the rebuild rate you must stop the background initialization or the rate change will not affect the background initialization rate After you stop background initialization and change the rebuild rate the rate change takes effect when you restart background initialization LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 2 4 7 Patrol Read 2 4 8 Disk Striping 2 4 8 1 Stripe Width 2 4 8 2 Strip
518. uninstallation scripts select Y to complete the installation NOTE To shut down MSM Framework service run svcadm disable t MSMF ramework It is advisable to stop Monitor service before stopping MSM Framework service To stop Monitor service run svcadm disable t MSMMonitor Page 247 Chapter 6 MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation Prerequisites to Running MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide MSM Remote Administration NOTE To start the Framework service run svcadm enable MSMFramework To start the monitor service run svcadm enable MSMMonitor NOTE When the service is in maintenance state run svcadm clear MSMFramework and svcadm clear MSMMonitor NOTE To check the status of MSM services execute the command svcs a grep i msm 6 9 Prerequisites to Running MSM requires ports 3071 and 5571 to be open to function Follow these steps to MSM Remote Administration prepare to run MSM Remote Administration 1 Configure the system with valid IP address Make sure there is no IP address conflict with in the sub network Ports such as 3071 and 5571 are open and available for MSM framework communication Disable all security manager and firewall 3 Configure the multicasting Make sure Class D multicast IP addresses are registered at least 229 111 112 12 should be registered for MSM to work if not create a static route using the following command Route add 229 111 112 12 dev eth1 4 Instal
519. urations The other options are hourly daily and monthly NOTE LSI recommends that you leave the patrol read frequency and other patrol read settings at the default values to achieve the best system performance If you decide to change the values record the original default value here so you can restore them later if necessary Patrol Read Frequency Continuous Patrolling Enabled Disabled Patrol Read Task Rate 7 Optional Set Patrol Read to run at a specific time The default is for the patrol read to start when you click OK on this screen To change the default so that the patrol read starts at a specific time follow these steps otherwise skip this step and proceed to the next step Page 307 Chapter 9 Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices Monitoring Virtual Drives MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide a Uncheck the box Perform Patrol Read when I click OK b Select the month year day and time to start patrol read 8 Click OK to enable your patrol read selections NOTE Patrol read does not report on its progress while it is running The patrol read status is reported in the event log only To start a patrol read without changing the patrol read properties follow these steps 1 Click a controller icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager main menu screen 2 Select Go To gt Controller gt Start Patrol Read in the menu bar 3 When prompted click Yes to confirm that you want to start
520. urce drive failure the dedicated hot spare is still dedicated and assigned to the correct drive group and the global hot spare is still global An automatic drive rebuild will not start if you replace a drive during a RAID level migration The rebuild must be started manually after the expansion or migration procedure is complete RAID level migration changes a virtual drive from one RAID level to another Page 29 Chapter 2 Introduction to RAID Components and Features MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 2 4 14 Rebuild Rate The rebuild rate is the percentage of the compute cycles dedicated to rebuilding failed drives A rebuild rate of 100 percent means that the system gives priority to rebuilding the failed drives The rebuild rate can be configured between 0 percent and 100 percent At 0 percent the rebuild is done only if the system is not doing anything else At 100 percent the rebuild has a higher priority than any other system activity Using 0 or 100 percent is not recommended The default rebuild rate is 30 percent 2 4 15 Hot Swap A hot swap is the manual replacement of a defective drive unit while the computer is still running When a new drive has been installed a rebuild occurs automatically if m The newly inserted drive is the same capacity as or larger than the failed drive m Itis placed in the same drive bay as the failed drive it is replacing The RAID controller can be configured to detect the new drives and re
521. ure will be installed to run from network Sq 8 This feature and all subfeatures will be installed to run from the network This feature will be installed when required Help X This feature will not be available Figure 129 Custom Setup Screen 11 Click Next to proceed 12 Click Install to install the program MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 13 When the final Configuration Wizard screen appears click Finish If you select Client installation for a PC used to monitor serve rs and if there are no available servers with a registered framework on the local subnet that is servers with a complete installation of MegaRAID Storage Manager software the server screen will appear as shown in Figure 130 The server screen will not list this screen to manage systems remotely MegaRAID Storage Manager v2 62 00 Sort By Name Servers 7 Update Connect to remote server at IP address 147 14 Figure 130 Server Screen any servers You can use Perform the following steps to install MegaRAID Storage Manager Software for Solaris 10 SPARC LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 6 4 4 Installing MegaRAID Storage Manager Software for Linux LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 6 MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation Installing MegaRAID Storage Manager 1 Copy the MegaRaidStorageManager SOLSPARC 8
522. use that cache as secondary cache CacheCade software have much greater capacity than HDDs Table 25 Create a Solid State Cache Drive to Use as Secondary Cache Convention Description MegaCli CfgCachecadeAdd Physdrv E0 S0 Name LdNamestring aN a0 1 2 aALL This command is used to create CacheCade software that you can use as secondary cache Physdrv E0 S0 Specifies the physical drive enclosure and the slots to use to construct a drive group Name LdNamest ring This is the name given to the CacheCade software cache drive Use the command in the following table to delete a CacheCade software cache drive or multiple CacheCade software cache drives on the selected controller s Table 26 Delete Solid State Cache Drive s Convention MegaCli CfgCachecadeDel LX LO 2 5 LALL aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Deletes the specified CacheCade software cache drive or drives on the selected controller s You can delete multiple CacheCade software cache drives or all of the CacheCade software caches Use the commands in this section to obtain a software license key to enable the advanced features present in the controller Table 27 Software License Key Convention MegaCli ELF GetSafeld a0 Description Displays the Safe ID of the controller Convention MegaCli ELF ControllerFeatures aN a0 1 2 aALL Description Displays the Advanced S
523. ve both CacheCade SSD Caching software and HDDs you can choose whether to mix SAS and SATA HDD drives with SAS and SATA CacheCade SSD Caching software devices in various combinations NOTE Support for SATA SDD drives applies only to those drives that support ATA 8 ACS compliance CacheCade SSD Caching software is known for its reliability and performance CacheCade SSD Caching software Guard a feature that is unique to MegaRAID increases the reliability of CacheCade SSD Caching software by automatically copying data from a drive with potential to fail to a designated hot spare or newly inserted drive Because CacheCade SSD Caching software are very reliable non redundant RAID 0 configurations are much more common than in the past CacheCade SSD Caching software Guard offers added data protection for RAID 0 configurations Page 15 Chapter 1 Overview Dimmer Switch Feature 1 5 1 6 1 7 Page 16 Dimmer Switch Feature UEFI 2 0 Support Configuration Scenarios MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide CacheCade SSD Caching software Guard works by looking for a predictive failure while monitoring the SDD Self Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology S M A R T error log If errors indicate a CacheCade SSD Caching software failure is imminent MegaRAID starts a rebuild to preserve the data on the CacheCade SSD Caching software and sends appropriate warning event notifications Powering and cooling drives
524. ve maximum power by caching data and avoid spinning up online drives when possible A Backplane 252 Slot 7 SAS 136 73 A Backplane 252 Slot 6 SATA 931 51 Figure 149 Span 0 of Drive Group 0 d Click Create Span to create a second span in the drive group e Select unconfigured drives from the list of drives and click Add gt to add them to the second drive group The selected drives appear under Span 1 below Drive Group 0 as shown in Figure 150 Page 270 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 8 Configuration Creating a New Storage Configuration F create Orve Group Drive Grow Settings LSI a Re g P O A N Ea RAIDO Suktable for high performance with zero data redundancy Choose this option only for non critical data method Select Drive security will make the virtual drive secure by applying encryption logic to underlying data in the drive save mode r This option ensures that the system wil save maximum power by caching data and avoid spinning up online drives when possible LSI MegaRAID SAS 92800 Ge Bus 2 Dev 0 spon 1 Baciplane 252 Skt 7 SAS C Backplane 252 Skt 6 SATA P Backplane 252 Slot 7 SAS P Backplane 252 Siot 6 SATA 931 51 ceo oe e _ te Figure 150 Span 0 and Span 1 of Drive Group 0 f Click Create Drive Group to make a drive group with the spans g Click Next to complete this step
525. version than the version you are trying to install Exiting installation This is the message that appears when the installation is complete RPM installation failed This message indicates that the installation failed for some reason Additional message text explains the cause of the failure If you want to upgrade kernel in Linux you have to restart the MSM Framework and Services in the same order by typing the following commands LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 6 4 8 MSM Customization 6 5 MegaRAID Storage Manager Support and Installation on VMWare 6 5 1 Installing MegaRAID Storage Manager for VMWare Classic LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 6 MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation MegaRAID Storage Man ager Support and Installation on VMWare etc init d vivaldiframeworkd restart etc init d mrmonitor restart You can customize your Logo and Splash screen by editing the msm properties file present in the lt installation directory MegaRAID Storage Manager gt folder In the file msm properties there are no values for the following keys a CHANNELLOGO b CHANNELSPLASHSCREEN There are no default values assigned for the keys mentioned above therefore the MSM uses the default LSI Logo and Splash screen To customize the Logo and Splash screen you have to enter the Logo and Splash screen file name against these ent
526. vider using the Red Hat Package Manager RPM by entering the following command rpm ivh The RPM installs all of the necessary files and the Managed Object Format MOF and it registers the libraries The Provider is now ready to use NOTE After you install LSI CIM SAS Provider the MOF file LST_SASRaid mof is available under the etc 1si_cimprov sas pegasus common directory Perform the following step to un install a CIM SAS Storage Provider on a Linux system Remove LSI CIM SAS Provider by entering the command rpm ivh LsiSASProvider lt version gt lt arch gt rpm This removes all of the necessary files uninstalls the MOF and unregisters the libraries The SAS Provider is no longer on the system NOTE tog pegasus binaries such as cimmof cimprovider and wbemexec should be in PATH variable of etc profile and hence should be defined in all environments of the system For Pegasus version 2 5 x perform the following steps 1 After you install the LSI SAS Pegasus provider verify that LibLsiSASProvider so and libLsiSASProvider so larein usr lib Pegasus providers directory If these files are not present copy LibLsiSASProvider so 1from opt tog pegasus providers libto usr lib Pegasus providers and create a symbolic link 1ibLsiSASProvider so to usr lib Pegasus providers libLsiSASProvider so 1at usr bin Pegasus providers 2 Restart Pegasus CIM Server and LsiServer by performing the following steps To sta
527. virtual drives using a security key Security Key Identifier Security key identifier Specify a security key identifier The controller has provided a default identifier for you You may MR9260 8i_SV95205666_13329a28 use this string or enter your own identifier If you have multiple security keys the identifier will help you determine which security key to enter Security Key The security key will be used to lock each self encrypted drive attached to the controller Security key For maximum security use thirty two varied characters you may optionally choose for the system fed39rutpF90259LH6J6U6YXL78hq lt yCT E SUGIRA strong securky KAY Confirm Note fed39rutpF90259LH6I6U6YxL78hq lt yCT The security key is case sensitive and must be between eight and thirty two characters and contain at least one number one lowercase letter one uppercase letter and one non alphanumeric character e g gt Password IV Pause for password at boot time Optionally you may enter a pass word to provide additional security IF you choose Pause for password at boot time you must enter it whenever you boot your server I Enforce strong password security Password Note The password is case sensitive and must be between eight and thirty two characters Confirm If enforce strong password security is selected then password field should contain at least one number one lower case letter one uppercase letter and one non alphanumeric ch
528. wn in Figure 200 Choose any one of the following options to configure the Key vault 1 Click the Configure Key Vault button in the Manage MegaRAID Advanced Software options wizard in Figure 200 2 Select Go To gt Controller gt Manage Premium Feature The Configure Key Vault Confirm Re Hosting Process wizard appears as shown in the following figure Configure Key Vault Confirm Re hosting Process f Lsis To transfer Advanced Software Options from one controller to another controller you need to complete the re hosting process Only then you will be able to secure the Advanced Software Options in the key vault This wizard helps you to configure the key vault by tranferring the Advanced Software Options from one controller to another controller and securing them in the keyvault Please Furnish the below details in the LSI Advanced Software License Management Portal in order to complete the re hosting process If you have already completed the process then select the checkbox below and proceed with next LSI Advanced Software License Management Portal Former Serial Number New Serial Number SR91500071 Safe ID FNPWW2FHSBNBINNGIISRCVCSHKC 7LBEPPHCCSHIZ JI acknowledge that I have completed the re hosting process in the LSI Advanced Software License Management Portal Figure 212 Configure Key Vault 3 Select the I acknowledge that I have completed the re hosting process in the LSI Advanced Software License Manage
529. x0019 Critical Flash chip type unknown 0x001a Critical Flash command set unknown 0x001b Critical Flash verify failure 0x001c Information Flush rate changed to d seconds 0x001d Information Hibernate command received from host 0x001e Information Event log cleared 0x001f Information Event log wrapped 0x0020 Fatal Multi bit ECC error ECAR x ELOG x s 0x0021 Warning Single bit ECC error ECAR x ELOG x s 0x0022 Fatal Not enough controller memory 0x0023 Information Patrol Read complete 0x0024 Information Patrol Read paused 0x0025 Information Patrol Read Rate changed to d 0x0026 Information Patrol Read resumed 0x0027 Information Patrol Read started 0x0028 Information Reconstruction rate changed to d 0x0029 Information Drive group modification rate changed to d 0x002a Information Shutdown command received from host 0x002b Information Test event s 0x002c Information Time established as s Y d seconds since power on LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Appendix A Events and Messages Event Messages Table 135 Event Messages Continued Number Type Event Text 0x002d Information User entered firmware debugger 0x002e Warning Background Initialization aborted on s 0x002f Warning Background Initialization corrected medium error
530. y OldSecurityKey sssssssssss Enters the old security key The security key is case sensitive It must be between eight and thirty two characters and contain at least one number one lowercase letter one uppercase letter and one non alphanumeric character e g lt gt The space character is not permitted SecurityKey sssssssssss Enters the new security key The security key is case sensitive It must be between eight and thirty two characters and contain at least one number one lowercase letter one uppercase letter and one non alphanumeric character e g lt gt The space character is not permitted Passphrase sssssssssss Enters the new passphrase The pass phrase is case sensitive It must be between eight and thirty two characters and contain at least one number one lowercase letter one uppercase letter and one non alphanumeric character e g lt gt The space character is not permitted KeyID kkkkkkkkkkk Enters the security key ID The key ID displays when you have to enter a security key If you have multiple security keys the security key ID helps you determine which security key to enter Use the command in the following table to display the security key ID Table 34 Get the Security Key ID Convention MegaCli GetKeyID PhysDrv E0 S0 aN Description GetKey ID Displays the security key ID Use the command in the following table to set the security key ID T
531. y Tuesday Time 12 00 aM w Virtual drives on this schedule F virtual Drive 0 271 375 GB Optimal Cancel Figure 224 Edit Schedule Inthe Frequency field use the drop down selector to edit the frequency of the snapshot already taken The frequency can be daily or weekly Inthe Day field use the drop down selector to edit the day of the snapshot already taken The days can be from Monday through Sunday m Inthe Time field use the drop down selector to edit the time of the snapshot already taken After you select all of the above fields the virtual drives matching these fields appear in the Virtual drives on this schedule check box 2 Select the Virtual drives on this schedule check box and click OK The virtual drive details are edited You can edit the settings for the automatic snapshots You can automatically delete the oldest snapshot or stop taking snapshots or take a snapshot on every reboot 1 Click Advanced in the Manage Snapshots wizard as shown in Figure 223 The Advanced screen appears as shown in Figure 225 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software Recovery Advanced Software Advanced fi LSIs Optionally edit the advanced settings For automatic snapshots When at the snapshot limit OF Stop taking snapshots C Take a snapshot on every reboot recommended for boot virtual drives Cancel
532. y information is written to all drives RAID 5 is best suited for networks that perform a lot of small input output I O transactions simultaneously RAID 5 addresses the bottleneck issue for random I O operations Because each drive contains both data and parity numerous writes can take place concurrently Table 9 provides an overview of RAID 5 Figure 9 provides a graphic example of aRAID 5 drive group Table9 RAID 5 Overview Uses Provides high data throughput especially for large files Use RAID 5 for transaction processing applications because each drive can read and write independently If a drive fails the RAID controller uses the parity drive to recreate all missing information Use also for office automation and online customer service that requires fault tolerance Use for any application that has high read request rates but low write request rates Strong Points Provides data redundancy high read rates and good performance in most environments Provides redundancy with lowest loss of capacity Weak Points Not well suited to tasks requiring lot of writes Suffers more impact if no cache is used clustering Drive performance will be reduced if a drive is being rebuilt Environments with few processes do not perform as well because the RAID overhead is not offset by the performance gains in handling simultaneous processes Drives 3 through 32 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010
533. y to install MSM To begin installation click on Install on the next screen that appears LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 6 MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation Installing MegaRAID Storage Manager ie MegaRAID Storage Manager v2 13 00 InstallShield Wizard Setup Type Choose the setup type that best suits your needs Please select a setup type This option will only install components required to remotely view and configure servers O Server ta This option will only install components required for remote server management Standalone i This option will only install components required for local server management O Custom B Specify each specific program feature to install Figure 128 Setup Type Screen 10 Select one of the custom setup options The options are fully explained in the screen text Select Client if you are installing MegaRAID Storage Manager software on a PC that will be used to view and configure servers over a network To begin installation click on Install on the next screen that appears In the Client mode of installation MSM installs only client related components such as MSM GUI and monitor configurator Use this mode when you want to manage and monitor servers remotely When you install MSM in Client mode on a laptop or a desktop you can log in to a specific server by providing the IP address Selec
534. you change the security settings from the EKM mode to LKM mode and want to import those foreign configured VDs then the following dialog box appears Information System Needs to be Restarted One or more external key management EKM secured foreign drives are locked In order to import the drives you must restart your system Until then all the secured virtual drives will be locked Figure 249 Importing Foreign Drives EKM to LKM When the VD is secured with the LKM mode and want to switch from LKM to EKM and if the VD is in Foreign state and if you want to import those foreign configuration you must provide the LKM key for each VD LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 11 5 8 Importing Foreign Drives to EKM LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Chapter 11 Using MegaRAID Advanced Software LSI SafeStore Encryption Services Unlock Foreign Drives Lsise One or more foreign drives are secured using Local key management LKM mode In order to import these drives you must provide the security key used to secure them If you want to import only unlocked drives leave the security key felid blank and select continue If the locked drives use different security keys enter one security key and repeat the import process for the remaining locked drives Locked drives Drive Security Key Identifier Enclosure lt id gt Slot lt n gt lt type gt lt
535. you enable Recovery you create two virtual drives one as a Snapshot Base or source and the other as a Snapshot Repository The Snapshot Base virtual drive contains the data that is stored in the repository virtual drive Follow these steps to enable MegaRAID Recovery 1 Click on a virtual drive icon in the right panel on the WebBIOS CU main screen to access the Virtual Drive screen The Virtual Drive screen appears as shown in Figure 92 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Serial Number bVendorID SubbevicelD PortCount i HostInterface Firmuare Version FU Package Version Firnuare Tine WebBIOS Version Drive Count re Spin Doun Drive Standby Time Chapter 4 WebBIOS Configuration Utility Using MegaRAID Recovery LSI Mega RAID SA 8i FRU Drive Security Capable curity Enabled rity Method Max Strip S Virtual Dr ount MegaRAID Recovery Unconfig Good Spin Down Power Save Mode for Config Drives Figure 92 Virtual Drive Screen 2 Click Enable MegaRAID Recovery in the Operations panel of the screen 3 Click Go in the Operations panel of the screen The Enable MegaRAID Recovery screen appears as shown in Figure 93 Page 139 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Using MegaRAID Recovery MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Page 140 MegaRAID BIOS Config Utility Enable NegaRAID Recovery Vir
536. yright LSI Corporation Press lt Ctrl gt lt H gt for WebBIOS The Controller Selection screen appears 2 Ifthe system has multiple SAS controllers select a controller 3 Click Start to continue The main WebBIOS CU screen appears NOTE On systems that do not have the PS2 port you must enable port 60 64 emulation in the System BIOS to emulate USB as PS2 When this option is disabled on this system WebBIOS does not work Page 53 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility WebBIOS CU Main Screen Options MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 4 3 WebBIOS CU Main Screen Options Page 54 Figure 15 shows the screen that appears when you start the WebBIOS CU and select a controller ieqaRAID BIOS Config Utility Virtual Configuration lela Lgy Virtual Drive 0 67 643 GB Optimal L Drives i Enclosure MD1O00 25 Slot 0 SAS HDD 67 643 GB Online Enclosure MD1000 25 Slot 1 SAS HDD 67 843 GB Online Drive Group 1 RAID 1xUnsecured L Virtual Drives Lg Virtual Drive 1 67 543 GB Degraded L Drives PD Missing Enclosure 25 Slot 2 i Enclosure Slot lt 3 HDD 136 218 GB Online L Unconfigured Drives WFOREL closure MDLOOO 25 Slot 2 SAS HDD 67 843 GB i Enclosure MD1000 25 Siot 4 SAS HDD 136 218 GB Unconfi i Enclosure MD1000 25 Siot 5 SAS HDD 136 216 GB Unconfi i Enclosure ND1000 25 Slot 7 SAS HDD 418 656 GB Unconfi B i Enclosure ND1000 25 Slot 8 SA
537. ys the status of the available advanced software prior to entering the activation key The New Status column displays the status of the available advanced software after entering the activation key Page 60 LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Managing Software Licensing 4 4 4 Activating an Unlimited Key When you activate an unlimited key over a trial key the message Review the summary Over a Trial Key and go back if you need to make corrections appears as shown in the following figure Figure 23 Activating an Unlimited Key over a Trial Key 44 5 Activating a Trial Software When you activate a trial software the message This trial software expires in 30 days appears as shown in the following figure Figure 24 Activating a Trial Software LSI Corporation Confidential September 2010 Page 61 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Managing Software Licensing MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 4 4 6 Activating an Unlimited Key 4 4 7 Software 4 4 8 Securing MegaRAID Advanced Confirm Rehosting Process Page 62 When you activate an unlimited key the message Review the summary and go back if you need to make corrections appears as shown in the following figure wegaRAID BIOS Config Utility Manage sed Software Options Summary Figure 25 Activating an Unlimited Key If the advanced software is not se
538. zation enabled This means that a new configuration can be initialized in the background while you use WebBIOS to do other configuration tasks This setting is the default Yes Select Yes if you do not want to allow background initializations for configurations on this controller Select Size Specify the size of the virtual drive in megabytes Normally this would be the full size for RAID 00 shown in the Configuration Panel on the right You can specify a smaller size if you want to create other virtual drives on the same drive group 19 Click Accept to accept the changes to the virtual drive definition 20 If you need to undo the changes click Reclaim 21 After you finish defining the virtual drives click Next Page 89 Chapter 4 WebBlOS Configuration Utility Creating a Storage Configuration MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide 4 5 3 6 Using Manual Configuration RAID 10 Page 90 The Configuration Preview screen appears as shown in Figure 47 PriegaRAID BIOS Config Utility Config Wizard Slot 3 SAS HDD 136 218 GB On i Slot 4 SAS HDD 136 218 GB Un Lae Slot 5 SAS HDD 136 218 GB Un Slot 6 SAS HDD 418 656 GB U Figure 47 RAID 00 Configuration Preview 22 Check the information in the configuration preview 23 If the virtual drive configuration is acceptable click Accept to save the configuration Otherwise click Cancel to end the operation and return to the WebBlOS main menu or click Bac

MegaRAID SAS Software User's Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents